Table of Contents

Introduction 4

Instrument Cluster 14
Warning lights and chimes 14
Gauges 20
Message center 21
Entertainment Systems 49
AM/FM stereo 49
AM/FM stereo with CD/MP3 51
Auxiliary input jack (Line in) 60
USB port 61
Satellite radio information 65
Navigation system 68
SYNC威 68
Climate Controls 69
Manual heating and air conditioning 69
Dual electronic automatic temperature control 72
Navigation system based climate control 77
Rear window defroster 81
Lights 83
Headlamps 83
Turn signal control 86
Bulb replacement 89
Driver Controls 95
Windshield wiper/washer control 95
Steering wheel adjustment 96
Power windows 103
Mirrors 106
Speed control 111
Tailgate 124

2011 F-150 (f12)

Owners Guide, 3rd Printing
USA (fus)
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
 Table of Contents
Locks and Security 137
Keys 137
Locks 145
Anti-theft system 158
Seating and Safety Restraints 162
Seating 162
Safety restraints 178
Airbags 194
Child restraints 209
Tires, Wheels and Loading 232
Tire information 234
Tire inflation 237
Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) 249
Vehicle loading 256
Trailer towing 264
Trailer brake controller-integrated 270
Recreational towing 276
Driving 278
Starting 278
Brakes 284
AdvanceTrac威 286
Transmission operation 299
Reverse sensing system 304
Rear-view camera system 306
Roadside Emergencies 327
Getting roadside assistance 327
Hazard flasher control 328
Fuel pump shut-off 328
Fuses and relays 329
Changing tires 339
Wheel lug nut torque 347
Jump starting 348
Wrecker towing 352
2

2011 F-150 (f12)

Owners Guide, 3rd Printing
USA (fus)
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
 Table of Contents
Customer Assistance 354
Reporting safety defects (U.S. only) 361
Reporting safety defects (Canada only) 361
Cleaning 362

Maintenance and Specifications 373

Engine compartment 375
Engine oil 380
Battery 383
Engine coolant 386
Fuel information 393
Air filter(s) 408
Part numbers 414
Maintenance product specifications and capacities 415
Engine data 419
Accessories 424

Ford Extended Service Plan 427

Scheduled Maintenance 431

Normal scheduled maintenance and log 437
Index 458

All rights reserved. Reproduction by any means, electronic or mechanical

including photocopying, recording or by any information storage and retrieval
system or translation in whole or part is not permitted without written
authorization from Ford Motor Company. Ford may change the contents without
notice and without incurring obligation.
Copyright © 2011 Ford Motor Company
3

2011 F-150 (f12)

Owners Guide, 3rd Printing
USA (fus)
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
 Introduction
CONGRATULATIONS
Congratulations on acquiring your new Ford. Please take the time to get
well acquainted with your vehicle by reading this handbook. The more
you know and understand about your vehicle, the greater the safety and
pleasure you will derive from driving it.
For more information on Ford Motor Company and its products visit the
following website:
• In the United States: www.ford.com
• In Canada: www.ford.ca
• In Australia: www.ford.com.au
• In Mexico: www.ford.com.mx
Additional owner information is given in separate publications.
This Owner’s Guide describes every option and model variant available
and therefore some of the items covered may not apply to your
particular vehicle. Furthermore, due to printing cycles it may describe
options before they are generally available.
Remember to pass on this Owner’s Guide when reselling the vehicle. It is
an integral part of the vehicle.
WARNING: Fuel pump shut-off: In the event of an accident
this feature will automatically cut off the fuel supply to the
engine. It can also be activated through sudden vibration (e.g. collision
when parking). To restart your vehicle, refer to Fuel pump shut-off in
the Roadside Emergencies chapter.

SAFETY AND ENVIRONMENT PROTECTION

Warning symbols in this guide

How can you reduce the risk of personal injury to yourself or others? In
this guide, answers to such questions are contained in comments
highlighted by the warning triangle symbol. These comments should be
read and observed.

2011 F-150 (f12)

Owners Guide, 3rd Printing
USA (fus)
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
 Introduction
Warning symbols on your vehicle
When you see this symbol, it is
imperative that you consult the
relevant section of this guide before
touching or attempting adjustment
of any kind.

Protecting the environment

We must all play our part in
protecting the environment. Correct
vehicle usage and the authorized
disposal of waste, cleaning and
lubrication materials are significant
steps towards this aim. Information in this respect is highlighted in this
guide with the tree symbol.
CALIFORNIA Proposition 65 Warning
WARNING: Engine exhaust, some of its constituents, and
certain vehicle components contain or emit chemicals known to
the State of California to cause cancer and birth defects or other
reproductive harm. In addition, certain fluids contained in vehicles and
certain products of component wear contain or emit chemicals known
to the State of California to cause cancer and birth defects or other
reproductive harm.

PERCHLORATE MATERIAL
Certain components of this vehicle such as airbag modules, seat belt
pretensioners, and button cell batteries may contain Perchlorate Material
– Special handling may apply for service or vehicle end of life disposal.
See www.dtsc.ca.gov/hazardouswaste/perchlorate.
BREAKING-IN YOUR VEHICLE
Your vehicle does not need an extensive break-in. Try not to drive
continuously at the same speed for the first 1,000 miles (1,600 km) of
new vehicle operation. Vary your speed frequently in order to give the
moving parts a chance to break in.
Drive your new vehicle at least 1,000 miles (1,600 km) before towing a
trailer. For more detailed information about towing a trailer, refer to
Trailer towing in the Tires, Wheels and Loading chapter.
5

2011 F-150 (f12)

Owners Guide, 3rd Printing
USA (fus)
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
 Introduction
Do not add friction modifier compounds or special break-in oils since
these additives may prevent piston ring seating. See Engine oil in the
Maintenance and Specifications chapter for more information on oil
usage.
SPECIAL NOTICES
New Vehicle Limited Warranty
For a detailed description of what is covered and what is not covered by
your vehicle’s New Vehicle Limited Warranty, refer to the Warranty
Guide that is provided to you along with your Owner’s Guide.
Special instructions
For your added safety, your vehicle is fitted with sophisticated electronic
controls.
WARNING: Please read the section Airbag Supplemental
Restraint System (SRS) in the Seating and Safety Restraints
chapter. Failure to follow the specific warnings and instructions could
result in personal injury.

WARNING: Front seat mounted rear-facing child or infant seats

should NEVER be placed in front of an active passenger airbag.

Using your vehicle with a snowplow

Do not use this vehicle for snowplowing.
Your vehicle is not equipped with a snowplowing package.
Using your vehicle as an ambulance
Do not use this vehicle as an ambulance.
Your vehicle is not equipped with the Ford Ambulance Preparation
Package.

2011 F-150 (f12)

Owners Guide, 3rd Printing
USA (fus)
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
 Introduction
Notice to owners of pickup trucks and utility type vehicles
WARNING: Utility vehicles have a significantly higher rollover
rate than other types of vehicles.

Before you drive your vehicle, please read this Owner’s Guide carefully.
Your vehicle is not a passenger car. As with other vehicles of this type,
failure to operate this vehicle correctly may result in loss of vehicle
control, vehicle rollover, personal injury or death.
NOTICE TO OWNERS ABOUT HIGH PERFORMANCE TIRES
Note: Your vehicle is equipped with high performance tires. When first
driving the vehicle after it has been parked for a period of time, you may
experience a temporary ride disturbance. This is a characteristic of the
tires and should be no reason for concern. The condition should correct
itself within 5-15 miles (8-25 km) of driving. If the disturbance persists,
have the tires serviced by an authorized dealer.
DATA RECORDING
Service Data Recording
Service data recorders in your vehicle are capable of collecting and
storing diagnostic information about your vehicle. This potentially
includes information about the performance or status of various systems
and modules in the vehicle, such as engine, throttle, steering or brake
systems. In order to properly diagnose and service your vehicle, Ford
Motor Company, Ford of Canada, and service and repair facilities may
access or share among them vehicle diagnostic information received
through a direct connection to your vehicle when diagnosing or servicing
your vehicle. For U.S. only (if equipped), if you choose to use the SYNC威
Vehicle Health Report, you consent that certain diagnostic information
may also be accessed electronically by Ford Motor Company and Ford
authorized service facilities, and that the diagnostic information may be
used for any purpose. See your SYNC威 supplement for more information.

2011 F-150 (f12)

Owners Guide, 3rd Printing
USA (fus)
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
 Introduction
Event Data Recording
This vehicle is equipped with an event data recorder (EDR). The
main purpose of an EDR is to record, in certain crash or near
crash-like situations, such as an airbag deployment or hitting a
road obstacle; this data will assist in understanding how a
vehicle’s systems performed. The EDR is designed to record data
related to vehicle dynamics and safety systems for a short period
of time, typically 30 seconds or less. The EDR in this vehicle is
designed to record such data as:
• How various systems in your vehicle were operating;
• Whether or not the driver and passenger seatbelts were
buckled/fastened;
• How far (if at all) the driver was depressing the accelerator
and/or the brake pedal; and
• How fast the vehicle was travelling; and
• Where the driver was positioning the steering wheel.
This data can help provide a better understanding of the
circumstances in which crashes and injuries occur.
Note: EDR data is recorded by your vehicle only if a non-trivial
crash situation occurs; no data is recorded by the EDR under
normal driving conditions and no personal data or information
(e.g., name, gender, age, and crash location) is recorded (see
limitations regarding 911 Assist and Traffic, directions and
Information privacy below). However, parties, such as law
enforcement, could combine the EDR data with the type of
personally identifying data routinely acquired during a crash
investigation.
To read data recorded by an EDR, special equipment is required,
and access to the vehicle or the EDR is needed. In addition to the
vehicle manufacturer, other parties, such as law enforcement,
that have such special equipment, can read the information if
they have access to the vehicle or the EDR. Ford Motor Company
and Ford of Canada do not access event data recorder
information without obtaining consent, unless pursuant to court
order or where required by law enforcement, other government
authorities or other third parties acting with lawful authority.
Other parties may seek to access the information independently
of Ford Motor Company and Ford of Canada.

2011 F-150 (f12)

Owners Guide, 3rd Printing
USA (fus)
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
 Introduction
Note: Including to the extent that any law pertaining to Event
Data Recorders applies to SYNC威 or its features, please note the
following: Once 911 Assist (if equipped) is enabled (set ON), 911
Assist may, through any paired and connected cell phone, disclose
to emergency services that the vehicle has been in a crash
involving the deployment of an airbag or, in certain vehicles, the
activation of the fuel pump shut-off. Certain versions or updates
to 911 Assist may also be capable of being used to electronically
or verbally provide to 911 operators the vehicle location (such as
latitude and longitude), and/or other details about the vehicle or
crash or personal information about the occupants to assist 911
operators to provide the most appropriate emergency services. If
you do not want to disclose this information, do not activate the
911 Assist feature. See your SYNC威 supplement for more
information.
Additionally, when you connect to Traffic, Directions and
Information (if equipped, U.S. only) the service uses GPS
technology and advanced vehicle sensors to collect the vehicle’s
current location, travel direction, and speed (“vehicle travel
information”) only to help provide you with the directions, traffic
reports, or business searches your request. If you do not want
Ford or its vendors to receive this information, do not activate
the service. Ford Motor Company and the vendors it uses to
provide you with this information do not store your vehicle travel
information. For more information, see Traffic, Directions and
Information, Terms and Conditions. See your SYNC威 supplement
for more information.

2011 F-150 (f12)

Owners Guide, 3rd Printing
USA (fus)
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
 Introduction
CELL PHONE USE
The use of Mobile Communications Equipment has become increasingly
important in the conduct of business and personal affairs. However,
drivers must not compromise their own or others’ safety when using
such equipment. Mobile Communications can enhance personal safety
and security when appropriately used, particularly in emergency
situations. Safety must be paramount when using mobile communications
equipment to avoid negating these benefits.
Mobile Communication Equipment includes, but is not limited to, cellular
phones, pagers, portable email devices, text messaging devices and
portable two-way radios.
WARNING: Driving while distracted can result in loss of vehicle
control, accident and injury. Ford strongly recommends that you
use extreme caution when using any device or feature that may take
your focus off the road. Your primary responsibility is the safe
operation of your vehicle.
We recommend against the use of any handheld device while driving
and that you comply with all applicable laws.

10

2011 F-150 (f12)

Owners Guide, 3rd Printing
USA (fus)
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
 Introduction
EXPORT UNIQUE (NON–UNITED STATES/CANADA) VEHICLE
SPECIFIC INFORMATION
For your particular global region, your vehicle may be equipped with
features and options that are different from the features and options that
are described in this Owner’s Guide. A market unique supplement may
be supplied that complements this book. By referring to the market
unique supplement, if provided, you can properly identify those features,
recommendations and specifications that are unique to your vehicle. This
Owner’s Guide is written primarily for the U.S. and Canadian Markets.
Features or equipment listed as standard may be different on units built
for Export. Refer to this Owner’s Guide for all other required
information and warnings.

11

2011 F-150 (f12)

Owners Guide, 3rd Printing
USA (fus)
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
 Introduction
These are some of the symbols you may see on your vehicle.

Vehicle Symbol Glossary

Safety Alert See Owner’s Guide

Fasten Safety Belt Airbag - Front

Child Seat Lower

Airbag - Side
Anchor

Child Seat Tether

Brake System
Anchor

Anti-Lock Brake System Parking Brake System

Brake Fluid -
Parking Aid System
Non-Petroleum Based

Stability Control System Speed Control

Master Lighting Switch Hazard Warning Flasher

Fog Lamps-Front Fuse Compartment

Fuel Pump Reset Windshield Wash/Wipe

Windshield Rear Window

Defrost/Demist Defrost/Demist

12

2011 F-150 (f12)

Owners Guide, 3rd Printing
USA (fus)
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
 Introduction

Vehicle Symbol Glossary

Power Windows
Power Window Lockout
Front/Rear

Child Safety Door Interior Luggage

Lock/Unlock Compartment Release

Panic Alarm Engine Oil

Engine Coolant
Engine Coolant
Temperature

Do Not Open When Hot Battery

Avoid Smoking, Flames,

Battery Acid
or Sparks

Explosive Gas Fan Warning

MAX
Maintain Correct Fluid
Power Steering Fluid MIN

Level

Service Engine Soon Engine Air Filter

Passenger Compartment
Jack
Air Filter

Low Tire Pressure

Check Fuel Cap
Warning

13

2011 F-150 (f12)

Owners Guide, 3rd Printing
USA (fus)
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
 Instrument Cluster
WARNING LIGHTS AND CHIMES
Base instrument cluster shown in standard measure; metric
similar. Uplevel clusters similar.

Warning lights and gauges can alert you to a vehicle condition that may
become serious enough to cause expensive repairs. A warning light may
illuminate when a problem exists with one of your vehicle’s functions.
Many lights will illuminate when you start your vehicle to make sure the
bulb works. If any light remains on after starting the vehicle, refer to the
respective system warning light for additional information.
Base message center
Note: Some warning lights are
reconfigurable telltale (RTT)
indicator lights and will illuminate in
the message center. These lights
function the same as the other
warning lights.

14

2011 F-150 (f12)

Owners Guide, 3rd Printing
USA (fus)
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
 Instrument Cluster
Uplevel message center
Note: Some warning lights are
reconfigurable telltale (RTT)
indicator lights and will illuminate in
the message center. These lights
function the same as the other
warning lights. The first three
positions will only display one
warning telltale at a time; the last
three positions can cycle between
different warning telltales.

Service engine soon: The service

engine soon indicator light
illuminates when the ignition is first
turned to the on position to check
the bulb and to indicate whether the vehicle is ready for
Inspection/Maintenance (I/M) testing. Normally, the service engine soon
light will stay on until the engine is cranked, then turn itself off if no
malfunctions are present. However, if after 15 seconds the service engine
soon light blinks eight times, it means that the vehicle is not ready for
I/M testing. See the Readiness for Inspection/Maintenance (I/M)
testing in the Maintenance and Specifications chapter.
Solid illumination after the engine is started indicates the on-board
diagnostics system (OBD-II) has detected a malfunction. Refer to
On-board diagnostics (OBD-II) in the Maintenance and Specifications
chapter. If the light is blinking, engine misfire is occurring which could
damage your catalytic converter. Drive in a moderate fashion (avoid
heavy acceleration and deceleration) and have your vehicle serviced
immediately by your authorized dealer.
WARNING: Under engine misfire conditions, excessive exhaust
temperatures could damage the catalytic converter, the fuel
system, interior floor coverings or other vehicle components, possibly
causing a fire.

15

2011 F-150 (f12)

Owners Guide, 3rd Printing
USA (fus)
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
 Instrument Cluster
Powertrain malfunction/Reduced
power/Electronic throttle
control (RTT): Displays when the
engine has defaulted to a
“limp-home” operation or when a transmission problem has been
detected and shifting may be restricted. If the light remains on, have the
system serviced immediately by your authorized dealer.
Check 4X4 (RTT) (if equipped):
Displays with the message CHECK
4X4 when a four-wheel drive fault is
present.
Refer to Message center in this chapter.
Brake system warning light: To
confirm the brake system warning ! P
light is functional, it will
momentarily illuminate when the BRAKE
ignition is turned to the on position
when the engine is not running, or in a position between on and start, or
by applying the parking brake when the ignition is turned to the on
position.
If the brake system warning light does not illuminate at this time, seek
service immediately from your authorized dealer. Illumination after
releasing the parking brake indicates low brake fluid level and the brake
system should be inspected immediately by your authorized dealer.
WARNING: Driving a vehicle with the brake system warning
light on is dangerous. A significant decrease in braking
performance may occur. It will take you longer to stop the vehicle.
Have the vehicle checked by your authorized dealer. Driving extended
distances with the parking brake engaged can cause brake failure and
the risk of personal injury.

Anti-lock brake system: If the

ABS light stays illuminated or
continues to flash, a malfunction has ABS
been detected, have the system
serviced immediately by your
authorized dealer. Normal braking is still functional unless the brake
warning light also is illuminated.
16

2011 F-150 (f12)

Owners Guide, 3rd Printing
USA (fus)
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
 Instrument Cluster
Airbag readiness: If this light fails
to illuminate when the ignition is
turned to on, continues to flash or
remains on, have the system
serviced immediately by your
authorized dealer. A chime will sound if there is a malfunction in the
indicator light.
Safety belt: Reminds you to fasten
your safety belt. A Belt-Minder威
chime will also sound to remind you
to fasten your safety belt. Refer to
the Seating and Safety Restraints
chapter to activate/deactivate the Belt-Minder威 chime feature.
Charging system (RTT):
Illuminates when the battery is not
charging properly. If it stays on
while the engine is running, there
may be a malfunction with the charging system. Contact your authorized
dealer as soon as possible. This indicates a problem with the electrical
system or a related component.
Engine oil pressure (RTT):
Displays when the oil pressure falls
below the normal range. Refer to
Engine oil in the Maintenance
and Specifications chapter.
Door ajar (RTT): Displays when
the ignition is in the on position and
any door is not completely closed.

Engine coolant temperature

(RTT): Illuminates when the engine
coolant temperature is high. Stop
the vehicle as soon as possible, switch off the engine and let cool. Refer
to Engine coolant in the Maintenance and Specifications chapter.
WARNING: Never remove the coolant reservoir cap while the
engine is running or hot.

17

2011 F-150 (f12)

Owners Guide, 3rd Printing
USA (fus)
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
 Instrument Cluster
Low tire pressure warning:
Illuminates when your tire pressure
is low. If the light remains on at
start up or while driving, the tire
pressure should be checked. Refer
to Inflating your tires in the Tires, Wheels and Loading chapter. When
the ignition is first turned to on, the light will illuminate for three
seconds to ensure the bulb is working. If the light does not turn on, have
the system inspected by your authorized dealer. For more information on
this system, refer to Tire pressure monitoring system (TPMS) in the
Tires, Wheels and Loading chapter.
Transmission Tow/Haul Feature
(RTT and static) (if equipped)):
Displays when the Tow/Haul feature
has been activated. Refer to the
Driving chapter for transmission function and operation. If the light
flashes steadily, have the system serviced immediately, damage to the
transmission could occur.
AdvanceTrac威/Traction control
(if equipped): Displays when the
AdvanceTrac威/Traction control is
active. If the light remains on, have
the system serviced immediately, refer to the Driving chapter for more
information.
AdvanceTrac威/Traction control
off light (if equipped): Illuminates
when AdvanceTrac威/Traction control
has been disabled by the driver. OFF
Refer to the Driving chapter for
more information.
4X2 (RTT) (if equipped):
Displays momentarily when
two-wheel drive high is selected. If 4x2
the light fails to display when the
ignition is turned on, or remains on,
have the system serviced immediately by your authorized dealer.

18

2011 F-150 (f12)

Owners Guide, 3rd Printing
USA (fus)
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
 Instrument Cluster
Four-wheel drive low (RTT) (if
equipped): Displays when
4x4
four-wheel drive low is engaged. If LOW
the light fails to display when the
ignition is turned on, or remains on, have the system serviced
immediately by your authorized dealer.
Four-wheel drive high (RTT) (if 4x4
equipped): Displays when
four-wheel drive high is engaged. If HIGH
the light fails to display when the
ignition is turned on, or remains on, have the system serviced
immediately by your authorized dealer.
All-wheel drive (RTT) (if
equipped): Displays when using the
AWD system. AWD

Electronic locking differential

(RTT) (if equipped): Displays
when using the electronic locking
differential.

Speed control (if equipped): The

speed control system indicator light
changes color to indicate what mode
the system is in:
• On (amber light): Illuminates
when the speed control system is turned on. Turns off when the speed
control system is engaged or turned off.
• Engaged (green light): Illuminates when the speed control system is
engaged. Turns off when the speed control system is disengaged.
Turn signal: Illuminates when the
left or right turn signal or the
hazard lights are turned on. If the
indicators stay on or flash faster, check for a burned out bulb.
High beams: Illuminates when the
high beam headlamps are turned on.

19

2011 F-150 (f12)

Owners Guide, 3rd Printing
USA (fus)
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
 Instrument Cluster
Key-in-ignition warning chime: Sounds when the key is left in the
ignition in the off or accessory position and the driver’s door is opened.
Headlamps on warning chime: Sounds when the headlamps or parking
lamps are on, the ignition is off (the key is not in the ignition) and the
driver’s door is opened.
GAUGES
Standard measure base cluster with automatic transmission
shown; metric similar and uplevel clusters similar.

1 2 3 4

6 5

1. Engine oil pressure gauge: Indicates engine oil pressure. The

needle should stay in the normal operating range (between L and H). If
the needle falls below the normal range, stop the vehicle, turn off the
engine and check the engine oil level. Add oil if needed. If the oil level is
correct, have your vehicle checked at your authorized dealer.
2. Engine coolant temperature gauge: Indicates engine coolant
temperature. At normal operating temperature, the needle will be in the
normal range (between H and C). If it enters the red section, the
engine is overheating. Stop the vehicle as soon as safely possible,
switch off the engine and let the engine cool.
20

2011 F-150 (f12)

Owners Guide, 3rd Printing
USA (fus)
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
 Instrument Cluster

WARNING: Never remove the coolant reservoir cap while the

engine is running or hot.

3. Fuel gauge: Indicates approximately how much fuel is left in the fuel
tank (when the ignition is in the on position). The fuel gauge may vary
slightly when the vehicle is in motion or on a grade. The fuel icon and
arrow indicates which side of the vehicle the fuel filler door is located.
Refer to Filling the tank in the Maintenance and Specifications
chapter for more information.
4. Transmission fluid temperature gauge: If the gauge is in the:
Normal area The transmission fluid is within the normal operating
temperature (between H and C).
Yellow area The transmission fluid is higher than normal operating
temperature. This can be caused by special operation conditions (i.e.
snowplowing, towing or off-road use). Refer to Special operating
conditions in the scheduled maintenance information for instructions.
Operating the transmission for extended periods of time with the gauge
in the yellow area may cause internal transmission damage.
Altering the severity of the driving conditions is recommended to lower
the transmission temperature into the normal range.
Red area The transmission fluid is overheating. Stop the vehicle to allow
the temperature to return to normal range.
If the gauge is operating in the yellow or red area, stop the vehicle and
verify the airflow is not restricted such as snow or debris blocking airflow
through the grill. If the gauge continues to show high temperatures, see
your authorized dealer.
5. Speedometer: Indicates the current vehicle speed.
6. Tachometer: Indicates the engine speed in revolutions per minute.
Driving with your tachometer pointer continuously at the top of the scale
may damage the engine.
Odometer and trip odometer: The odometer is displayed on the lower
line in the message center and registers the total accumulated distance
the vehicle has traveled. For trip odometer, refer to Base message
center or Uplevel message center in this chapter.
BASE MESSAGE CENTER
Your vehicle’s message center is capable of monitoring many vehicle
systems and will alert you to potential vehicle problems and various
conditions with an informational message followed by a long indicator
chime.
21

2011 F-150 (f12)

Owners Guide, 3rd Printing
USA (fus)
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
 Instrument Cluster
The message center display is located in the instrument cluster.
Info (information menu)
Press the INFO button repeatedly to
cycle through the following features: SET INFO

CNCL ON
RSM OFF SETUP

INFO RESET RESET

SETUP

TRIP A/B
Registers the distance of individual journeys. Press and release INFO
button until the A or B trip appears in the display (this represents the
trip mode). Press the RESET button to reset.
Refer to UNITS later in this section to switch the display from metric to
English.
MYKEY MILES (km) (if programmed)
For more information, refer to MyKey威 in the Locks and Security
chapter.
MILES (km) TO E
This displays an estimate of approximately how far you can drive with
the fuel remaining in your tank under normal driving conditions.
Remember to turn the ignition off when refueling to allow this feature to
correctly detect the added fuel.
Distance to empty is calculated using a running average fuel economy,
which is based on your recent driving history of 500 miles (800 km).
This value is not the same as the average fuel economy display. The
running average fuel economy is re-initialized to a factory default value if
the battery is disconnected.
AVG MPG (L/100km)
Average fuel economy displays your average fuel economy in miles/gallon
or liters/100 km.

22

2011 F-150 (f12)

Owners Guide, 3rd Printing
USA (fus)
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
 Instrument Cluster
If you calculate your average fuel economy by dividing distance traveled
by gallons of fuel used (liters of fuel used by 100 kilometers traveled),
your figure may be different than displayed for the following reasons:
• Your vehicle was not perfectly level during fill-up
• Differences in the automatic shut-off points on the fuel pumps at
service stations
• Variations in top-off procedure from one fill-up to another
• Rounding of the displayed values to the nearest 0.1 gallon (liter)
To determine your average highway fuel economy, do the following:
1. Drive the vehicle at least 5 miles (8 km) with the speed control
system engaged to display a stabilized average.
2. Record the highway fuel economy for future reference.
It is important to press the RESET button (press and hold RESET for
two seconds in order to reset the function) after setting the speed
control to get accurate highway fuel economy readings.
For more information refer to Essentials of good fuel economy in the
Maintenance and Specifications chapter.
MPG (L/km)
This displays instantaneous fuel economy as a bar graph ranging from ↓
poor economy to ↑ excellent economy.
Your vehicle must be moving to calculate instantaneous fuel economy.
When your vehicle is not moving, this function shows ↓, one or no bars
illuminated. Instantaneous fuel economy cannot be reset.
TIMER
Timer displays the trip elapsed drive time.
To operate, do the following:
1. Press and release RESET in order to start the timer.
2. Press and release RESET to pause the timer.
3. Press and hold RESET until the timer resets.
TBC GAIN (if equipped)
Displays the level of trailer brake gain or if the trailer is not connected.
23

2011 F-150 (f12)

Owners Guide, 3rd Printing
USA (fus)
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
 Instrument Cluster
System check and vehicle feature customization
Press the SETUP button repeatedly
to cycle the message center through SET INFO
the following features:
CNCL ON SETUP
RSM OFF

INFO RESET RESET

SETUP

RESET FOR SYSTEM CHECK

When this message appears, press
the RESET button and the message SET INFO
center will begin to cycle through
the following systems and provide a CNCL ON SETUP
RSM OFF
status of the item if needed.
INFO RESET RESET

SETUP

Note: Some systems show a message only if a condition is present.

1. XXX% OIL LIFE
2. DOOR STATUS
3. BRAKE SYSTEM
4. FUEL LEVEL LOW
5. TBC GAIN = XX.X
NO TRAILER (if equipped and no trailer connected)
6. TBC GAIN = XX.X
OUTPUT = ////// (if equipped and trailer connected)
7. MYKEY DISTANCE (if programmed)
8. MYKEY(S) PROGRAMMED
9. ADMIN KEYS PROGRAMMED

24

2011 F-150 (f12)

Owners Guide, 3rd Printing
USA (fus)
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
 Instrument Cluster
OIL LIFE
This displays the remaining oil life.
An oil change is required whenever indicated by the message center and
according to the recommended maintenance schedule. USE ONLY
RECOMMENDED ENGINE OILS.
To reset the oil monitoring system to 100% after each oil change,
perform the following:
1. Press and release the SETUP button to display “OIL LIFE XXX%
HOLD RESET = NEW”.
2. Press and hold the RESET button for two seconds and release to reset
the oil life to 100%.
Note: To change oil life 100% value (if equipped with this feature) to
another value, proceed to Step 3.
3. Once “OIL LIFE SET TO XXX%” is displayed, release and press the
RESET button to change the Oil Life Start Value. Each release and press
will reduce the value by 10%.
UNITS
Displays the current units in English or Metric.
Press the RESET button to change from English to Metric.
AUTOLAMP (SEC)
This feature keeps your headlights on for up to three minutes after the
ignition is switched off.
Press the RESET button to select the new autolamp delay values of 0,
10, 20, 30, 60, 90, 120 or 180 seconds.
AUTOLOCK
This feature automatically locks all vehicle doors when the vehicle is
shifted into any gear, putting the vehicle in motion.
Press the RESET button to turn autolock on or off.
AUTOUNLOCK
This feature automatically unlocks all vehicle doors when the driver’s
door is opened within 10 minutes of the ignition being turned off.
Press the RESET button to turn autounlock on or off.
COURTESY WIPE
This feature allows for an extra swipe of the wipers after a wipe/wash
cycle.
25

2011 F-150 (f12)

Owners Guide, 3rd Printing
USA (fus)
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
 Instrument Cluster
Press the RESET button to turn it on or off.
EASY ENTRY
This feature automatically moves the driver’s seat backwards for easy
exit/entry from the vehicle.
Press the RESET button to turn the easy entry/exit seat on or off.
REAR PARK AID (if equipped)
This feature sounds a tone to warn the driver of obstacles near the rear
bumper, and functions only when R (Reverse) gear is selected.
Press the RESET button to turn the rear park aid on or off.
TRAILER SWAY (if equipped)
This feature uses the electronic stability control to mitigate trailer sway,
Press the RESET button to turn trailer sway on or off.
CREATE MYKEY / MYKEY SETUP / CLEAR MYKEY
For more information refer to MyKey威 in the Locks and Security
chapter.
RESET FOR REMOTE START (if equipped)
Press RESET to choose:
• Remote start on or off
• Duration: 5, 10, 15 minutes
• Remote start climate on or off
• Remote start quiet on or off
LANGUAGE = ENGLISH / SPANISH / FRENCH
Allows you to choose which language the message center will display in.
Selectable languages are English, Spanish, or French.
Waiting four seconds or pressing the RESET button cycles the message
center through each of the language choices.
Press the RESET button to set the language choice.
System warnings
System warnings alert you to possible problems or malfunctions in your
vehicle’s operating systems.
In the event of a multiple warning situation, the message center will
cycle the display to show all warnings by displaying each one for four
seconds.
26

2011 F-150 (f12)

Owners Guide, 3rd Printing
USA (fus)
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
 Instrument Cluster
The message center will display the last selected feature if there are no
more warning messages.
Types of messages and warnings:
• Some messages will appear briefly to inform you of something you
may need to take action on or be informed of.
• Some messages will appear once and then again when the vehicle is
restarted.
• Some messages will reappear after clearing or being reset if a problem
or condition is still present and needs your attention.
• Some messages can be acknowledged and reset by pressing RESET.
This allows you to use the full message center functionality by clearing
the message.
DRIVER DOOR AJAR — Displayed when the driver door is not
completely closed.
PASSENGER DOOR AJAR — Displayed when the passenger door is
not completely closed.
REAR LEFT DOOR AJAR — Displayed when the rear left door is not
completely closed.
REAR RIGHT DOOR AJAR — Displayed when the rear right door is
not completely closed.
FUEL LEVEL LOW — Displayed as an early reminder of a low fuel
condition.
PARK BRAKE ENGAGED — Displayed when the parking brake is set,
the engine is running and the vehicle is driven more than 3 mph
(5 km/h). If the warning stays on after the parking brake is released,
contact your authorized dealer as soon as possible.
CHECK BRAKE SYSTEM — Displayed when a fault has been detected
by the ABS module.
CHECK CHARGING SYSTEM — Displayed when the electrical system
is not maintaining proper voltage. If you are operating electrical
accessories when the engine is idling at a low speed, turn off as many of
the electrical loads as soon as possible. If the warning stays on or comes
on when the engine is operating at normal speeds, contact your
authorized dealer as soon as possible.

27

2011 F-150 (f12)

Owners Guide, 3rd Printing
USA (fus)
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
 Instrument Cluster
TURN POWER OFF TO SAVE BATT (if equipped) — Displayed
when the battery management system determines that:
• the battery is at a low state of charge or,
• the ignition has been in accessory position or on position with the
engine off for approximately 45 minutes.
Turn the ignition off as soon as possible to protect the battery. This
message will clear once the vehicle has been started and the battery
state of charge has recovered. Turning off unnecessary electrical loads
while driving will allow faster battery state-of-charge recovery. See
Battery management system in the Maintenance and Specifications
chapter for more information.
LOW BATTERY LESS FEATURES (if equipped) — Displayed when
the battery management system detects an extended low-voltage
condition. Various vehicle features will be disabled to help preserve the
battery. Turn off as many of the electrical loads as soon as possible to
improve system voltage. If the system voltage has recovered, the disabled
features will operate again as normal.
CHECK REAR PARK AID (if equipped) — Displayed when the
transmission is in R (Reverse). Refer to Reverse sensing system in the
Driving chapter.
TIRE PRESSURE SENSOR FAULT — Displayed when a tire pressure
sensor is malfunctioning, or your spare tire is in use. For more
information on how the system operates under these conditions, refer to
Understanding Your Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) in the
Tires, Wheels and Loading chapter. If the warning stays on or
continues to come on, contact your authorized dealer as soon as
possible.
LOW TIRE PRESSURE — Displayed when one or more tires on your
vehicle have low tire pressure. Refer to Inflating Your Tires in the
Tires, Wheels and Loading chapter.
CHECK FUEL FILL INLET — Displayed when the fuel fill inlet may
not be properly closed. Refer to Easy Fuel威 “no cap” fuel system in the
Maintenance and Specifications chapter.
SERVICE ADVANCETRAC — Displayed when the AdvanceTrac威
system has detected a condition that requires service. Contact your
authorized dealer as soon as possible.
ADVANCETRAC OFF (if equipped) — Displayed when the
AdvanceTrac威 system has been disabled by the driver.
ADVANCETRAC ON (if equipped) — Displayed when the
AdvanceTrac威 system has been enabled by the driver.
28

2011 F-150 (f12)

Owners Guide, 3rd Printing
USA (fus)
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
 Instrument Cluster
TRACTION CONTROL OFF (if equipped) — Displayed when the
traction control has been disabled by the driver. Refer to the Driving
chapter for more information.
TRACTION CONTROL ON (if equipped) — Displayed when the
traction control has been enabled by the driver. Refer to the Driving
chapter for more information.
CHECK 4X4 (if equipped) — Displayed when a 4X4 system fault is
present. For more information, refer to Four-wheel drive (4WD)
operation in the Driving chapter.
TIRE PRESSURE MONITOR FAULT — Displayed when the tire
pressure monitoring system (TPMS) is malfunctioning. If the warning
stays on or continues to come on, contact your authorized dealer as soon
as possible.
BRAKE FLUID LEVEL LOW — Indicates the brake fluid level is low
and the brake system should be inspected immediately. Refer to Brake
fluid in the Maintenance and Specifications chapter.
OIL CHANGE REQUIRED — Displayed when an oil change is
required.
XX%ENGINE OIL CHANGE SOON—Displayed when an oil change
will soon be required and shows the percentage of oil life left.
TRAILER BRAKE MODULE FAULT (if equipped)— Displayed and
accompanied by a single chime, in response to faults sensed by the TBC.
Refer to Trailer towing in the Tires, Wheels and Loading chapter for
more information.
WIRING FAULT ON TRAILER (if equipped) — Displayed if there
are certain faults in the vehicle wiring and trailer wiring/brake system.
Refer to Trailer towing in the Tires, Wheels and Loading chapter for
more information.
TRAILER SWAY REDUCE SPEED (if equipped) — Displayed when
the trailer sway control has detected trailer sway. For more information,
refer to the Driving chapter for more information.
4X4 SHIFT IN PROGRESS — Displayed when the 4X4 system is
making a shift. For further information, refer to Four-wheel drive
(4WD) operation in the Driving chapter.
FOR 4X4 LOW SLOW TO 3 MPH (if equipped) — Displayed when
4X4 LOW is selected while the vehicle is moving. For more information,
refer to Four-wheel drive (4WD) operation in the Driving chapter.
FOR 4X4 LOW SHIFT TO N (if equipped) — Displayed when 4X4
LOW is selected and the vehicle is stopped. For more information, refer
to Four-wheel drive (4WD) operation in the Driving chapter.
29

2011 F-150 (f12)

Owners Guide, 3rd Printing
USA (fus)
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
 Instrument Cluster
TO EXIT 4X4 LOW SLOW TO 3 MPH (if equipped) — Displayed
when 2WD is selected while the vehicle is operating in 4X4 LOW. For
more information, refer to Four-wheel drive (4WD) operation in the
Driving chapter.
TO EXIT 4X4 LOW SHIFT TO N (if equipped) — Displayed when
2WD is selected while the vehicle has been stopped in 4X4 LOW. For
more information, refer to Four-wheel drive (4WD) operation in the
Driving chapter.
SHIFT DELAYED PULL FORWARD (if equipped) — May display
when shifting to or from 4X4 LOW. For more information, refer to
Four-wheel drive (4WD) operation in the Driving chapter.
TRAIN LEFT FRONT TIRE (if equipped) — Displayed when training
the TPMS system. Refer to TPMS reset procedure in the Tires, Wheels
and Loading chapter for more information.
TRAIN RIGHT FRONT TIRE (if equipped) — Displayed when
training the TPMS system. Refer to TPMS reset procedure in the Tires,
Wheels and Loading chapter for more information.
TRAIN RIGHT REAR TIRE (if equipped) — Displayed when training
the TPMS system. Refer to TPMS reset procedure in the Tires, Wheels
and Loading chapter for more information.
TRAIN LEFT REAR TIRE (if equipped) — Displayed when training
the TPMS system. Refer to TPMS reset procedure in the Tires, Wheels
and Loading chapter for more information.
TIRES NOT TRAINED – REPEAT (if equipped) — Displayed when
an error occurs while training the TPMS system. Refer to TPMS reset
procedure in the Tires, Wheels and Loading chapter for more
information.
TRAINING COMPLETE (if equipped) — Displayed when training of
the TPMS system is complete. Refer to TPMS reset procedure in the
Tires, Wheels and Loading chapter for more information.
MYKEY ACTIVE DRIVE SAFELY — Displayed at startup when
MyKey威 is in use. Refer to MyKey威 in the Locks and Security chapter
for more information.
KEY COULD NOT PROGRAM — Displayed when an attempt is made
to program a spare key using two existing MyKeys. Refer to MyKey威 in
the Locks and Security chapter for more information.
VEHICLE SPEED 80 MPH MAX — Displayed when a MyKey威 is in
use and the Admin has enabled the MyKey speed limit and the vehicle
30

2011 F-150 (f12)

Owners Guide, 3rd Printing
USA (fus)
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
 Instrument Cluster
speed is 80 mph (130 km/h). Refer to MyKey威 in the Locks and
Security chapter for more information.
SPEED LIMITED TO 80 MPH — Displayed when starting the vehicle
and MyKey威 is in use and the MyKey speed limit is on. Refer to MyKey威
in the Locks and Security chapter for more information.
CHECK SPEED DRIVE SAFELY — Displayed when a MyKey威 is in
use and the optional setting is on and the vehicle exceeds a preselected
speed. Refer to MyKey威 in the Locks and Security chapter for more
information.
VEHICLE NEAR TOP SPEED — Displayed when a MyKey威 is in use
and the MyKey speed limit is on and the vehicle speed is approaching
80 mph (130 km/h). Refer to MyKey威 in the Locks and Security
chapter for more information.
TOP SPEED MYKEY SETTING — Displayed when a MyKey威 is in use
and the MyKey speed limit is on and the vehicle speed is 80 mph
(130 km/h). Refer to MyKey威 in the Locks and Security chapter for
more information.
BUCKLE UP TO UNMUTE AUDIO — Displayed when a MyKey威 is in
use and Belt-Minder威 is activated. Refer to MyKey威 in the Locks and
Security chapter for more information.
ADVTRAC ON MYKEY SETTING — Displayed when a MyKey威 is in
use when trying to disable the AdvanceTrac威 system and the optional
setting is on. Refer to MyKey威 in the Locks and Security chapter for
more information.
TO STOP ALARM START VEHICLE — Displayed when the perimeter
alarm system is armed and the vehicle is entered using the key on the
driver’s side door. In order to prevent the perimeter alarm system from
triggering, the ignition must be turned to start or on before the
12 second chime expires. See Perimeter alarm system in the Locks and
security chapter.
SECURITY SYSTEM FAULT — Displayed when the security system
has detected a fault. See your authorized dealer for service.
INTKEY COULD NOT PROGRAM — Displayed when an attempt is
made to program a fifth integrated key to the remote keyless entry
system. For more information on integrated key, refer to the Locks and
Security chapter.
KEY COULD NOT PROGRAM — Displayed when an attempt is made
to program a spare key using two existing MyKeys. Refer to MyKey威 in
the Locks and Security chapter for more information.
31

2011 F-150 (f12)

Owners Guide, 3rd Printing
USA (fus)
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
 Instrument Cluster
SLOW VEHICLE TO XX MPH FOR ELD (if equipped) — Displayed
when the vehicle speed requirement for the electronic locking
differential mode has not been met.
CHECK LOCKING DIFFERENTIAL (if equipped) — Displayed
when an electronic locking differential (ELD) system fault is present. For
more information, refer to Electronic locking differential (ELD) in the
Driving chapter.
HILL DESCENT CONTROL FAULT (if equipped) — Displayed when
a hill descent system fault is present.
HILL CNTRL OFF SYSTEM COOLING (if equipped) — Displayed
when a hill descent system fault is present.
FOR OFF ROAD SLOW TO 5 MPH (if equipped) — Displayed when
the vehicle speed requirement for off-road mode entry has not been met.
OFF ROAD MODE ENABLED (if equipped) — Displayed when
off-road mode becomes active.
EXITING OFF ROAD MODE (if equipped) — Displayed when
off-road mode becomes inactive.
HILL DESCENT CONTROL ACTIVE (if equipped) — Displayed
when hill descent control mode becomes active.
HILL DESCENT CONTROL OFF (if equipped) — Displayed when
hill descent control mode becomes inactive.
FOR HILL CNTRL 20 MPH OR LESS (if equipped) — Displayed
when the vehicle speed requirement for hill control mode entry has not
been met.
DRIVER RESUME CONTROL (if equipped) — Displayed when the
hill control and off-road mode require the driver to resume control.
FOR HILL CNTRL SELECT GEAR (if equipped) — Displayed when
the driver is requested to select a transmission gear to enable operation
of the hill mode and off-road mode.
COAST DOWN MODE (if equipped) — Displayed when vehicle
enters coast down mode.
UPLEVEL MESSAGE CENTER (IF EQUIPPED)
Your vehicle’s message center is capable of monitoring many vehicle
systems and will alert you to potential vehicle problems and various
conditions with informational messages and/or warnings.
The message center is also used to program/configure the different
features of your vehicle.
32

2011 F-150 (f12)

Owners Guide, 3rd Printing
USA (fus)
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
 Instrument Cluster
The message center display is located in the instrument cluster. Use the
steering wheel mounted buttons to navigate through the message center.
Press the up/down buttons to move
up/down through the message
center choices.

Press the left/right buttons to move

left/right through the message
center choices.

Press the OK button to select

highlighted options and confirm
choices/messages.

Main menu
From the main menu screen you can choose the following:
• Gauge Mode
• Trip A/B
• Fuel Economy
• Truck Apps (if equipped)
• Settings
• Information

33

2011 F-150 (f12)

Owners Guide, 3rd Printing
USA (fus)
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
 Instrument Cluster
Scroll up/down to highlight one of the options, then press the right arrow
key or OK to enter into that menu option.
Gauge Mode
Gauge Detail: In this mode, the following options are available in
different graphical formats:
• Trans Temp
• Blank screen
Trip A/B
In this mode, Trip A or B registers the following:
• Trip time — shows the elapsed trip time. This timer will stop when
the vehicle is turned off and will restart when the vehicle is restarted.
• Trip distance — shows the accumulated trip distance.
• Fuel used — shows the amount of fuel used for a given trip.
• Average MPG (L/100km) — shows the average distance traveled per
unit of fuel used for a given trip.
• Odometer — shows the vehicle’s total accumulated distance. This
value cannot be reset.
Press the right arrow key to reach Trip B. Press the left arrow to go back
to Trip A.
Press OK to pause the Trip A or B screen/press again to un-pause.
Press and hold OK to reset the currently displayed trip information.
Fuel Economy
In this mode, fuel economy information is displayed as follows:
• Instant MPG (L/100km) — shows instantaneous fuel usage.
• Miles (kilometers) to empty — shows the approximate distance the
vehicle can travel before running out of fuel.
• Average MPG (L/100km) — shows the average fuel usage based on
time. See Fuel Hist. following to change the time interval. Press and
hold OK to reset this value.

34

2011 F-150 (f12)

Owners Guide, 3rd Printing
USA (fus)
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
 Instrument Cluster
If you calculate your average fuel economy by dividing miles traveled by
gallons of fuel used (liters of fuel used by 100 kilometers traveled), your
figure may be different than displayed for the following reasons:
• Your vehicle was not perfectly level during fill-up.
• Differences in the automatic shut-off points on the fuel pumps at
service stations.
• Variations in top-off procedure from one fill-up to another.
• Rounding of the displayed values to the nearest 0.1 gallon (liter).
To determine your average highway fuel economy, do the following:
1. Drive the vehicle at least 5 miles (8 km) with the speed control
system engaged to display a stabilized average.
2. Record the highway fuel economy for future reference.
It is important to press RESET in order to reset the function after
setting the speed control to get accurate highway fuel economy readings.
For more information refer to Essentials of good fuel economy in the
Maintenance and Specifications chapter.
Fuel Hist.: Press the right arrow key (when in the Fuel Econ. menu) to
reach Fuel Hist. Fuel history shows fuel usage (AVG MPG or L/100km)
as a bar graph based on time. The duration time can be changed as
follows:
Duration– Press the right arrow key (when in the Fuel Hist. menu) to
reach the following duration choices.
• 5 Minutes
• 10 Minutes
• 30 Minutes
• Last 5 Resets
Use the up/down arrows keys to highlight one of the choices; press and
hold OK to set your choice.
The graph is updated each minute with the fuel economy that was
achieved during the prior 5, 10, 30 minutes or last 5 resets of driving.

35

2011 F-150 (f12)

Owners Guide, 3rd Printing
USA (fus)
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
 Instrument Cluster
Truck Apps (if equipped)
In this mode, off-road and trailer towing application options are available.
*Off Road
Pitch and bank angle (in degrees): Displays the pitch angle (front to
rear) and bank angle (side to side) of the road surface.
Steering angle (in degrees): Displays the steering angle of the front
wheels after the vehicle has been driven for a period of time.
Differential lock/unlock: Displays the state (locked or unlocked) of the
electronic locking differential.
Torque flow: Displays the torque flow to the front and rear driveline
and operating mode of the transfer case: 4X2, 4X4 High, 4X4 Low,
AWD.
AdvanceTrac威 sport mode, hill descent control, off-road mode: Displays
which modes are active.
* If equipped—your vehicle may be equipped with some or all of these
options.
When “Press OK for info” is displayed, pressing OK will give you
information on the following options if equipped (Note: Information is
only available when traveling less than 3 mph [5 km/h]):
• 4X4 System
• AdvanceTrac威
• AWD (All-Wheel Drive)
• ELD (Electronic Locking Differential)
• HDC (Hill Descent Control)
• Off-Road Mode
*Trailer: Press the right arrow key (when in the Off-Road menu) to
reach the Trailer menu. The following information is displayed
• Active trailer name or default trailer
• Accumulated trailer distance
• Trailer gain and output
• Trailer disconnected (Disregard this status if your vehicle is not
equipped with a factory installed trailer brake controller. This message
may appear when an aftermarket TBC is used even when the trailer is
connected.)
36

2011 F-150 (f12)

Owners Guide, 3rd Printing
USA (fus)
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
 Instrument Cluster
When “Press OK for options” is displayed, pressing OK will open the
trailer options menus:
Trailer
Change Active When this is highlighted, press the right arrow key
Trailer to change the currently selected trailer. Use the up
and down arrows to select a trailer and press the
OK button to choose the highlighted trailer.
Adding a new trailer– Use the up/down arrows to
highlight “New Trailer” from the Change Active
Trailer menu and press the right arrow key to enter
the New Trailer input screen. Use the up/down
arrow keys to choose alpha, numeric and symbol
characters and then press the right arrow to move
the character space over. Continue adding
characters as needed. Press the left arrow to go
back and change a previously selected character.
When finished with the new trailer name, press OK
to accept the new trailer name.
Connection Press the right arrow button when this is highlighted
Checklist (if to show the trailer connection types: Conventional,
equipped) Fifth Wheel and Gooseneck. Use the up/down
arrows to highlight one of these choices and press
OK to display the connection checklist. Follow the
on-screen instructions to go through the connections
list.
Delete Trailer Press the right arrow button when this is highlighted
to show currently stored trailers. Use the up/down
arrows to highlight the trailer you want to delete
and press OK to delete. Follow the on-screen
prompts to exit or confirm delete.
Information Press the right arrow button when this is highlighted
Screen to display information on the following vehicle
features: Tow Haul mode, Trailer Brake Controller.

37

2011 F-150 (f12)

Owners Guide, 3rd Printing
USA (fus)
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
 Instrument Cluster

Trailer
Rename Trailer Press the right arrow button when this is highlighted
to display saved or default trailers. Use the up/down
buttons to highlight a trailer and press OK to select
it. Use the up/down arrow buttons to change the
characters as needed. When done, press OK to
accept the change.
Reset Trailer Press the right arrow button when this is highlighted
Mileage / to display accumulated distance on a given trailer
Kilometers (if within the list of trailer(s). Use the up/down buttons
equipped) to select a trailer, then press and hold OK to reset
the trailer mileage (kilometers).
* If equipped—your vehicle may be equipped with some or all of these
options.
Settings
In this mode, you can configure different driver setting choices (if
equipped). Press the right arrow key (when in the Settings menu) to
reach the Driver Assist menu:
Driver Assist
Rear Park Aid On/Off
Rear Video Camera Delay On/Off
Camera Visual Park Aid On/Off
Guidelines Fixed/Off
Zoom Levels Off, Level 1–3
(This will only
be shown when
Reverse (R) is
selected.
Trailer Brake Electric or Elect. Over Hydraulic
Mode
Trailer Sway On/Off
Control

38

2011 F-150 (f12)

Owners Guide, 3rd Printing
USA (fus)
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
 Instrument Cluster

Vehicle
Autolamp Delay Off or XXX seconds
DTE Calculation Normal History Used
(distance to
Towing History Used
empty)
Easy Entry/Exit On/Off
Locks Autolock, On/Off
Autounlock On/Off
Unlocking One Stage or Two Stage
Standard: with standard set, pressing the up/down
arrows from a lower level menu will escape to the
main menu.
Menu Control
Memory On: with memory on set, pressing the
up/down arrows will navigate to the previous lower
level menu.
Oil Life Reset Set to XXX% (Press and hold OK to set).
Pwr Running
Auto/Off/Out
Boards
Front Defrost
Rear Defrost
Auto/Off
Driver Seat
Climate Control
Passenger Seat
Remote Start
Heater-A/C Auto/ Last
Setting
Duration 5, 10 or 15 minutes, Off
Quiet Start On/Off
Courtesy Wipe On/Off
Wipers Rain Sensing On/Off
wipers

39

2011 F-150 (f12)

Owners Guide, 3rd Printing
USA (fus)
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
 Instrument Cluster

MyKey
Create MyKey Hold OK to create MyKey
*AdvanceTrac Always on or Selectable
*MAX Speed 80 MPH (120 km/h) or Off
*Speed Warning 45, 55 or 65 MPH (75, 90 or 105 km/h), Off
*Volume Limiter On/Off
*Clear MyKeys Hold OK to Clear MyKeys
*Only displays if MyKey is programmed.
Language
English, Español, Français
Units
Units English or Metric
System Reset
Hold OK to Reset System to Factory Default
Information
In this mode, you can view different vehicle system information and
perform a system check.
When “Press OK for info” is displayed, pressing OK will give you
information on the currently selected/displayed options. Information is
only available when traveling less than 3 mph (5 km/h).
MyKey
Admin Keys (Number of admin keys)
MyKeys (Number of MyKeys programmed)
MyKey Miles (km) (Distance traveled using a programmed MyKey)
System Check
Oil Life
Doors
Brakes
Trailer Brake Gain and Output (when trailer is connected)
Ctrl. No trailer (when no trailer is connected)
Park Aid Check Rear Park Aid
Fuel Level (distance to empty)
40

2011 F-150 (f12)

Owners Guide, 3rd Printing
USA (fus)
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
 Instrument Cluster
Some items will only display during a system check if a problem has
been detected. If an issue exists on one of the monitored systems, the
message center will display the number of warnings that need immediate
attention in red and the number of informational warnings will be listed
in amber. Use the up/down arrow buttons to scroll through the list; press
the right arrow button to display specific information on the highlighted
warning.
Transmission indicator display
The transmission gear indicator displays in the right side of the message
center when using the SelectShift Automatic™ transmission feature. This
display will not be shown in all screen modes. For example: when
programming certain vehicle features or in certain information menus.
System warnings and status messages
System warnings alert you to possible problems or malfunctions in your
vehicle’s operating systems.
In the event of a multiple warning situation, the message center will
cycle the display to show all warnings by displaying each one for four
seconds.
The message center will display the last selected feature if there are no
more warning messages.
Types of messages and warnings:
• Some messages will appear briefly to inform you of something you
may need to take action on or be informed of.
• Some messages will appear once and then again when the vehicle is
restarted.
• Some messages will reappear after clearing or being reset if a problem
or condition is still present and needs your attention.
• Some messages can be acknowledged and reset by pressing OK. This
allows you to use the full message center functionality by clearing the
message.
DOOR AJAR — Displayed when the door is not completely closed.
DRIVER DOOR AJAR — Displayed when the driver door is not
completely closed.
LEFT REAR DOOR AJAR — Displayed when the rear left door is not
completely closed.
PASSENGER DOOR AJAR — Displayed when the passenger door is
not completely closed.
41

2011 F-150 (f12)

Owners Guide, 3rd Printing
USA (fus)
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
 Instrument Cluster
RIGHT REAR DOOR AJAR — Displayed when the rear right door is
not completely closed.
CHECK FUEL FILL INLET — Displayed when the fuel fill inlet may
not be properly closed. Refer to Easy Fuel威 “no cap” fuel system in the
Maintenance and Specifications chapter.
FUEL LEVEL LOW — Displayed as an early reminder of a low fuel
condition.
CHECK CHARGING SYSTEM — Displayed when the electrical system
is not maintaining proper voltage. If you are operating electrical
accessories when the engine is idling at a low speed, turn off as many of
the electrical loads as soon as possible. If the warning stays on or comes
on when the engine is operating at normal speeds, contact your
authorized dealer as soon as possible.
TURN POWER OFF TO SAVE BATTERY (if equipped) — Displayed
when the battery management system determines that:
• the battery is at a low state of charge or,
• the ignition has been in accessory position or on position with the
engine off for approximately 45 minutes.
Turn the ignition off as soon as possible to protect the battery. This
message will clear once the vehicle has been started and the battery
state of charge has recovered. Turning off unnecessary electrical loads
while driving will allow faster battery state-of-charge recovery. See
Battery management system in the Maintenance and Specifications
chapter for more information.
LOW BATTERY FEATURES TEMPORARILY TURNED OFF (if
equipped) — Displayed when the battery management system detects
an extended low-voltage condition. Various vehicle features will be
disabled to help preserve the battery. Turn off as many of the electrical
loads as soon as possible to improve system voltage. If the system
voltage has recovered, the disabled features will operate again as normal.
BRAKE FLUID LEVEL LOW — Indicates the brake fluid level is low
and the brake system should be inspected immediately. Refer to Brake
fluid in the Maintenance and Specifications chapter.
CHECK BRAKE SYSTEM — Displayed when the brake system needs
servicing. If the warning stays on or continues to come on, contact your
authorized dealer as soon as possible.

42

2011 F-150 (f12)

Owners Guide, 3rd Printing
USA (fus)
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
 Instrument Cluster
PARK BRAKE ENGAGED — Displayed when the parking brake is set,
the engine is running and the vehicle is driven more than 3 mph
(5 km/h). If the warning stays on after the parking brake is released,
contact your authorized dealer as soon as possible.
ADVANCETRAC OFF (if equipped) — Displayed when the
AdvanceTrac威 system has been disabled by th e driver.
ADVANCETRAC ON (if equipped) — Displayed when the
AdvanceTrac威 system has been enabled by the driver.
SERVICE ADVANCETRAC (if equipped) — Displayed when the
AdvanceTrac威 system has detected a condition that requires service.
Contact your authorized dealer as soon as possible.
POWER REDUCED TO LOWER ENGINE TEMP — Displayed when
the engine temperature gauge needle moves to H. You may notice
reduced engine power. Refer to Engine coolant in the Maintenance
and Specifications chapter for more information.
ENGINE OIL CHANGE SOON — Displayed when the engine oil life
remaining is 5% to 1%.
OIL CHANGE REQUIRED — Displayed when the oil life left reaches
0%.
LOW TIRE PRESSURE — Displayed when one or more tires on your
vehicle have low tire pressure. Refer to Inflating Your Tires in the
Tires, Wheels and Loading chapter.
TIRE PRESSURE MONITOR FAULT — Displayed when the tire
pressure monitoring system is malfunctioning. If the warning stays on or
continues to come on, have the system inspected by your authorized
dealer.
TIRE PRESSURE SENSOR FAULT — Displayed when a tire pressure
sensor is malfunctioning, or your spare tire is in use. For more
information on how the system operates under these conditions, refer to
Understanding your Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) in the
Tires, Wheels and Loading chapter. If the warning stays on or
continues to come on, contact your authorized dealer as soon as
possible.
TIRES NOT TRAINED - REPEAT — Displayed when an error occurs
while training the TPMS. Refer to TPMS reset procedure in the Tires,
Wheels and Loading chapter for more information.
TRAIN LEFT FRONT TIRE — Displayed when training the TPMS
system. Refer to TPMS reset procedure in the Tires, Wheels and
Loading chapter for more information.
43

2011 F-150 (f12)

Owners Guide, 3rd Printing
USA (fus)
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
 Instrument Cluster
TRAIN LEFT REAR TIRE — Displayed when training the TPMS
system. Refer to TPMS reset procedure in the Tires, Wheels and
Loading chapter for more information.
TRAIN RIGHT FRONT TIRE — Displayed when training the TPMS
system. Refer to TPMS reset procedure in the Tires, Wheels and
Loading chapter for more information.
TRAIN RIGHT REAR TIRE — Displayed when training the TPMS
system. Refer to TPMS reset procedure in the Tires, Wheels and
Loading chapter for more information.
TRAINING COMPLETE — Displayed when training of the TPMS
system is complete. Refer to TPMS reset procedure in the Tires, Wheels
and Loading chapter for more information.
POWER STEERING ASSIST FAULT — The power steering system
has disabled power steering assist due to a system error; service is
required.
SERVICE POWER STEERING — The power steering system has
detected a condition that requires service.
SERVICE POWER STEERING NOW — The power steering system
has detected a condition that requires service immediately.
BUCKLE UP TO UNMUTE AUDIO — Displayed when a MyKey威 is in
use and Belt-Minder威 is activated. Refer to MyKey威 in the Locks and
Security chapter for more information.
TRACTION CONTROL OFF (if equipped) — Displayed when the
traction control has been disabled by the driver. Refer to the Driving
chapter for more information.
TRACTION CONTROL ON (if equipped) — Displayed when the
traction control has been enabled by the driver. Refer to the Driving
chapter for more information.
CHECK 4X4 (if equipped) — Displayed when a 4X4 system fault is
present. For more information, refer to Four-wheel drive (4WD)
operation in the Driving chapter.
4X4 SHIFT IN PROGRESS (if equipped) — Displayed when the 4X4
system is making a shift. For further information, refer to Four-wheel
drive (4WD) operation in the Driving chapter.
FOR 4X4 LOW APPLY BRAKE (if equipped) — Displayed when
trying to select 4X4 LOW. For more information, refer to Four-wheel
drive (4WD) operation in the Driving chapter.
FOR 4X4 LOW SHIFT TO N (if equipped) — Displayed when 4X4
LOW is selected and the vehicle is stopped. For more information, refer
to Four-wheel drive (4WD) operation in the Driving chapter.
44

2011 F-150 (f12)

Owners Guide, 3rd Printing
USA (fus)
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
 Instrument Cluster
FOR 4X4 LOW SLOW TO 3 MPH (if equipped) — Displayed when
4X4 LOW is selected while the vehicle is moving. For more information,
refer to Four-wheel drive (4WD) operation in the Driving chapter.
TO EXIT 4X4 LOW APPLY BRAKE (if equipped) — Displayed when
2WD is selected from 4X4 LOW mode. For more information, refer to
Four-wheel drive (4WD) operation in the Driving chapter.
TO EXIT 4X4 LOW SHIFT TO N (if equipped) — Displayed when
2WD is selected while the vehicle has been stopped in 4X4 LOW. For
more information, refer to Four-wheel drive (4WD) operation in the
Driving chapter.
TO EXIT 4X4 LOW SLOW TO 3 MPH (if equipped) — Displayed
when 2WD is selected while the vehicle is operating in 4X4 LOW. For
more information, refer to Four-wheel drive (4WD) operation in the
Driving chapter.
SHIFT DELAYED PULL FORWARD (if equipped) — May display
when shifting to or from 4X4 LOW. For more information, refer to
Four-wheel drive (4WD) operation in the Driving chapter.
CHECK LOCKING DIFFERENTIAL (if equipped) — Displayed
when an electronic locking differential (ELD) system fault is present. For
more information, refer to Electronic locking differential (ELD) in the
Driving chapter.
CHECK SPEED DRIVE SAFELY — Displayed when a MyKey威 is in
use and the optional setting is on and the vehicle exceeds a preselected
speed. Refer to MyKey威 in the Locks and Security chapter for more
information.
COULD NOT PROGRAM INTEGRATED KEY — Displayed when an
attempt is made to program a fifth integrated key to the remote keyless
entry system. For more information on integrated key, refer to the Locks
and Security chapter.
ESC ALWAYS ON - MYKEY SETTING — Displayed when a MyKey威 is
in use and the ESC cannot be deactivated. Refer to MyKey威 in the Locks
and Security chapter for more information.
MYKEY ACTIVE DRIVE SAFELY — Displayed when a MyKey威 is in
use. Refer to MyKey威 in the Locks and Security chapter for more
information.
MYKEY COULD NOT PROGRAM — Displayed when an attempt is
made to program a spare key using two existing MyKeys. Refer to
MyKey威 in the Locks and Security chapter for more information.
SECURITY SYSTEM FAULT (if equipped) — Displayed when the
security system has detected a fault. See your authorized dealer for
service.
45

2011 F-150 (f12)

Owners Guide, 3rd Printing
USA (fus)
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
 Instrument Cluster
SPEED LIMITED TO 130 KM/H — Displayed when starting the
vehicle and MyKey威 is in use and the MyKey speed limit is on. Refer to
MyKey威 in the Locks and Security chapter for more information.
SPEED LIMITED TO 80 MPH — Displayed when starting the vehicle
and MyKey威 is in use and the MyKey speed limit is on. Refer to MyKey威
in the Locks and Security chapter for more information.
VEHICLE AT TOP SPEED - MYKEY SETTING — Displayed when a
MyKey威 is in use and the MyKey speed limit is on and the vehicle speed
is 80 mph (130 km/h). Refer to MyKey威 in the Locks and Security
chapter for more information.
VEHICLE NEAR TOP SPEED — Displayed when a MyKey威 is in use
and the MyKey speed limit is on and the vehicle speed is approaching
80 mph (130 km/h). Refer to MyKey威 in the Locks and Security
chapter for more information.
CHECK REAR PARK AID (if equipped) — Displayed when the
transmission is in R (Reverse) and the park aid is disabled.
REAR PARK AID OFF (if equipped) — Displayed when the rear park
aid is disabled by the driver.
REAR PARK AID ON (if equipped) — Displayed when the rear park
aid is enabled.
TO STOP ALARM, START VEHICLE (if equipped) — Displayed
when the perimeter alarm system is armed and the vehicle is entered
using the key on the driver’s side door. In order to prevent the perimeter
alarm system from triggering, the ignition must be turned to start or on
before the 12 second chime expires. See Perimeter alarm system in the
Locks and security chapter.
TRAILER BRAKE GAIN: XX.X [OUTPUT] (if equipped) — Displays
the current gain setting for the trailer brake. Refer to Trailer towing in
the Tires, Wheels and Loading chapter for more information.
TRAILER BRAKE GAIN: XX.X NO TRAILER (if equipped) —
Displays the current gain setting for the trailer brake when a trailer is
not connected. Refer to Trailer towing in the Tires, Wheels and
Loading chapter for more information.
TRAILER BRAKE MODULE FAULT (if equipped) — Displayed and
accompanied by a single chime, in response to faults sensed by the TBC.
Refer to Trailer towing in the Tires, Wheels and Loading chapter for
more information.

46

2011 F-150 (f12)

Owners Guide, 3rd Printing
USA (fus)
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
 Instrument Cluster
TRAILER CONNECTED (if equipped) — Displayed when a correct
trailer connection (a trailer with electric trailer brakes) is sensed during
a given ignition cycle. Refer to Trailer towing in the Tires, Wheels and
Loading chapter for more information.
TRAILER DISCONNECTED (if equipped) — Displayed when a
trailer connection becomes disconnected, either intentionally or
unintentionally, and has been sensed during a given ignition cycle.
Disregard this status if your vehicle is not equipped with a factory
installed trailer brake controller. This message may appear when an
aftermarket TBC is used even when the trailer is connected. Refer to
Trailer towing in the Tires, Wheels and Loading chapter for more
information.
TRAILER SWAY REDUCE SPEED (if equipped) — Displayed when
the trailer sway control has detected trailer sway. For more information,
refer to the Driving chapter for more information.
WIRING FAULT ON TRAILER (if equipped) — Displayed if there
are certain faults in the vehicle wiring and trailer wiring/brake system.
Refer to Trailer towing in the Tires, Wheels and Loading chapter for
more information.
FOR OFF ROAD SLOW TO 5 MPH (if equipped)— Displayed when
the vehicle speed requirement for off-road mode entry has not been met.
OFF ROAD MODE ENABLED (if equipped)— Displayed when
off-road mode becomes active.
EXITING OFF ROAD MODE (if equipped)— Displayed when
off-road mode becomes inactive.
HILL DESCENT CONTROL ACTIVE (if equipped)— Displayed
when hill descent control mode becomes active.
HILL DESCENT CONTROL OFF (if equipped)— Displayed when hill
descent control mode becomes inactive.
DRIVER RESUME CONTROL (if equipped)— Displayed when the
hill control and off-road mode require the driver to resume control.
COAST DOWN MODE (if equipped)— Displayed when vehicle enters
coast down mode.
FOR HILL DESCENT REDUCE SPEED (if equipped) — Displayed
when the vehicle speed requirement for off-road mode entry has not
been met.
FOR HILL DESCENT SELECT GEAR (if equipped) — Displayed
when the driver is able to select a transmission gear for hill descent
mode.
47

2011 F-150 (f12)

Owners Guide, 3rd Printing
USA (fus)
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
 Instrument Cluster
HILL DESCENT - DRIVER RESUME CONTROL (if equipped) —
Displayed when hill descent control mode is deactivated and the driver
must resume control.
HILL DESCENT CONTROL FAULT (if equipped) — Displayed when
a hill descent system fault is present.
HILL DESCENT CONTROL OFF SYSTEM COOLING (if equipped)
— Displayed when the hill descent system is cooling due to overuse.
HILL DESCENT CONTROL READY (if equipped) — Displayed
when the hill descent control switch is turned on.
REDUCE ACCELERATOR TO PREVENT WHEEL SLIP (if
equipped) — Displayed when the vehicle senses that torque to the
drive wheels has overcome the available traction.
CAMERA MALFUNCTION (if equipped) — Displayed when the front
camera is not operating properly.

48

2011 F-150 (f12)

Owners Guide, 3rd Printing
USA (fus)
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
 Entertainment Systems
AUDIO SYSTEMS
AM/FM stereo system (if equipped)

WARNING: Driving while distracted can result in loss of vehicle

control, accident and injury. Ford strongly recommends that
drivers use extreme caution when using any device or feature that may
take their focus off the road. Your primary responsibility is the safe
operation of the vehicle. We recommend against the use of any
handheld device while driving, encourage the use of voice-operated
systems when possible and that you become aware of applicable state
and local laws that may affect use of electronic devices while driving.

Accessory delay: Your vehicle is equipped with accessory delay which

allows you to operate the radio and other electrical accessories for up to
ten minutes after the ignition has been turned off or until either front
door is opened.
1. / : Press / to
manually go up or down the radio
frequency. Press and hold for a fast
advance through radio frequencies.
Also use in AUDIO mode to gain access to various settings.
49

2011 F-150 (f12)

Owners Guide, 3rd Printing
USA (fus)
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
 Entertainment Systems
2. AUDIO: Press AUDIO repeatedly
to gain access to the following
settings:

• BAL (Balance): Press AUDIO to reach the balance setting.

Use / / SEEK to adjust the audio between the left (L)
and right (R) speakers.
• FAD (Fade): Press AUDIO to reach the fade feature.
Use / / SEEK to adjust the audio between the front (F)
and back (B) speakers.
• TREB (Treble): Press to adjust the treble setting. Use / /
SEEK to adjust.
• BASS (Bass): Press to adjust the bass setting. Use / /
SEEK to adjust.
3. SEEK: Press SEEK to
access the previous/next strong
station.
4. Memory presets: To set a
station: Select frequency band
AM/FM1/FM2; tune to a station,
press and hold a preset button until sound returns. You can save up to
18 stations, six in AM, six in FM1 and FM2.
5. AM/FM: Press AM/FM to select
AM/FM1/FM2 frequency band.

6. ON/OFF/Volume: Press
VOL-PUSH to turn ON/OFF. Turn
VOL-PUSH to increase/decrease
volume.

50

2011 F-150 (f12)

Owners Guide, 3rd Printing
USA (fus)
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
 Entertainment Systems
7. CLK (Clock): Press CLK to
toggle between displaying the radio
frequency and the clock setting.
Setting the clock: Press and hold
CLK until the hours begin to flash. Press / / SEEK to
manually increase/decrease the hours.
Press CLK again to set the minutes using / / SEEK to
manually increase/decrease the minutes. Allow 10 seconds to pass to
confirm that the time has been set.
Note: If your vehicle is equipped with a navigation system, refer to
Setting the clock in your Navigation supplement.
AM/FM in-dash CD/MP3 satellite compatible sound system

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0

LOAD

• DIRECT TEXT MENU CLOCK #

SCAN CAT/FOLD SEEK SOUND

AM/FM CD
VOL TUNE
OK
SIRIUS AUX

WARNING: Driving while distracted can result in loss of vehicle

control, accident and injury. Ford strongly recommends that
drivers use extreme caution when using any device or feature that may
take their focus off the road. Your primary responsibility is the safe
operation of the vehicle. We recommend against the use of any
handheld device while driving, encourage the use of voice-operated
systems when possible and that you become aware of applicable state
and local laws that may affect use of electronic devices while driving.

51

2011 F-150 (f12)

Owners Guide, 3rd Printing
USA (fus)
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
 Entertainment Systems
Accessory delay: Your vehicle is equipped with accessory delay. With
this feature, the radio and other electrical accessories may be used for
up to ten minutes after the ignition is turned off or until either front
door is opened.
Battery management: When the engine is off, your audio system may
turn off if the battery is at a low state of charge or if the ignition has
been in the accessory position or in the on position for approximately
45 minutes. The display will temporarily show SYS OFF TO SAVE BATT
and the audio system will be turned off. The audio system will return to
normal operation once the vehicle has been started and battery state of
charge allowed to recover. The battery state of charge recovery can be
accelerated by turning off any unnecessary electrical loads while driving.
Refer to the Battery management system section in the Maintenance
and Specifications chapter for more information.
Note: Your vehicle is equipped with
a unique audio system. If your
display shows six small circles in the
display, your audio system is a CD6
system (six disc changer). If not,
your system is a single CD system.
Setting the clock
To set the time, press CLOCK. The display will read SET TIME. Use the
memory preset numbers (0–9) to enter in the desired time–hours and
minutes and press OK. The clock will then begin from that time.
Note: If your vehicle is equipped with a navigation system, refer to
Setting the clock in your Navigation supplement.
AM/FM Radio
/ VOL (Power/Volume): Press
to turn the radio on/off. Turn the
knob to increase/decrease volume.
If the volume is set above a certain
level and the ignition is turned off,
the volume will come back on at a
nominal listening level when the ignition switch is turned back on.
AM/FM: Press repeatedly to select AM/FM1/FM2 frequency band.

52

2011 F-150 (f12)

Owners Guide, 3rd Printing
USA (fus)
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
 Entertainment Systems
TUNE: Turn the knob to go
up/down the frequency band in
individual increments.

DIRECT: Press DIRECT and then manually enter the desired radio
station (i.e. 93.9) using the memory preset numbers (0–9).
SEEK: Press SEEK to access the previous/next strong radio
station.
SCAN: Press for a brief sampling of all strong radio stations.
0–9 (MEMORY PRESETS): When
tuned to any station, press and hold
a preset button until sound returns
and PRESET # SAVED appears in the display. You can save up to 30
stations, 10 in AM, 10 in FM1 and FM2.
Saving presets automatically: Autoset allows you to set the strongest
local radio stations without losing your original manually set preset
stations for AM/FM1/FM2.
To activate the autoset feature: Press MENU repeatedly until AUTO
PRESET ON/OFF appears in the display. Use SEEK to toggle
AUTO PRESET to ON, and either wait five seconds for the search to
initiate or press OK to immediately initiate the search. If you press
another control within those five seconds, the search will not initiate.
The 10 strongest stations will be filled and the station stored in preset 1
will begin playing.
If there are fewer than 10 strong stations, the system will store the last
one in the remaining presets.
RDBS Radio
Available only in FM mode. This feature allows you to search
RDBS-equipped stations for a certain category of music format:
CLASSIC, COUNTRY, JAZZ/RB, ROCK, etc.
To activate: Press MENU repeatedly until RDBS (ON/OFF) appears in
the display. Use SEEK to toggle RDBS ON/OFF. When RDBS is
off, you will not be able to search for RDBS equipped stations or view
the station name or type.
CAT/FOLD (Category/Folder): This feature allows you to select from
various music categories.
53

2011 F-150 (f12)

Owners Guide, 3rd Printing
USA (fus)
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
 Entertainment Systems
To change RDBS categories: Press MENU repeatedly until RDBS
ON/OFF appears in the display. Use SEEK to toggle RDBS
between ON/OFF. Press CAT. PRESS UP OR DOWN TO CHANGE RDBS
CATEGORY will appear in the display.
Press to scroll through all possible categories. When the desired
category appears in the display, press SEEK to find the next
station playing that selection or press SCAN for a brief sampling of all
stations playing that category of music.
CD/MP3 Player
CD: Press to enter CD/MP3 mode. If a disc is already loaded into the
system, CD/MP3 play will begin where it ended last. If no CD is loaded,
NO DISC will appear in the display.
LOAD:
For a single CD system– This control is not operational. To load a CD,
simply insert the disc, label side up, into the CD slot.
For a CD6 system– Press LOAD. When the display reads SELECT
SLOT, choose the desired slot number using memory presets 1–6. When
the display reads LOAD CD #, load the desired disc, label side up. If you
do not choose a slot within five seconds, the system will choose for you.
Once loaded, the first track will begin to play.
To auto load up to six discs– Press and hold LOAD until the display
reads AUTOLOAD #. Load the desired disc, label side up. The system
will prompt you to load discs for the remaining available slots. Insert the
discs, one at a time, label side up, when prompted. Once loaded, the disc
in preset #1 will begin to play.
Press the number preset buttons (1–6) to choose the disc you want to
play.
/ Play/Pause: Press to
play/pause a track when playing a
CD.

(Eject):
For a single CD system– press to eject the CD.
For a CD6 system– press and select the desired CD slot by pressing
the corresponding memory preset number. The display will read
EJECTING #. When the system has ejected the CD, the display will read
54

2011 F-150 (f12)

Owners Guide, 3rd Printing
USA (fus)
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
 Entertainment Systems
REMOVE CD #. Remove the CD. If you do not remove the CD, the
system will reload the disc.
To auto eject all loaded discs– Press and hold . The system will eject
all discs and prompt you when to remove them.
SEEK: Press SEEK to access the previous/next track.
CAT (Category) / FOLD (Folder):
In MP3 mode only– Press CAT/FOLD and then press SEEK to
access the previous/next folder.
SCAN: Press for a brief sampling of all tracks on the current disc or
MP3 folder.
DIRECT:
In CD mode– Press DIRECT. The display will read DIRECT TRACK
MODE SELECT TRACK. Enter the desired track number using the
memory preset buttons (0–9). The system will then begin playing that
track.
In MP3 folder mode– Press DIRECT and the memory preset buttons
(0–9) of the desired folder. The system will advance to that specific
track in the folder selected.
TEXT:
In MP3 mode only– Press TEXT repeatedly to view Album (AL), Folder
(FL), Song (SO) and Artist (AR) in the display, if available.
In TEXT MODE: Sometimes the display requires additional text to be
displayed. When the indicator is active, press TEXT and then
press SEEK to view the additional display text.
COMPRESSION: Press MENU repeatedly until COMPRESSION ON/OFF
appears in the display. Use SEEK to toggle between ON/OFF.
When COMPRESSION is ON, the system will bring the soft and loud CD
passages together for a more consistent listening level.
SHUFFLE: Press MENU repeatedly until SHUFFLE ON/OFF appears in
the display. Use SEEK to toggle between ON/OFF. If you wish to
engage shuffle mode right away, press SEEK to begin random
play. Otherwise, random play will begin when the current track is
finished playing. The system will only shuffle the disc currently playing.
Satellite Radio (if equipped)
Satellite radio is available only with a valid SIRIUS radio
subscription. Check with your authorized dealer for availability.
55

2011 F-150 (f12)

Owners Guide, 3rd Printing
USA (fus)
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
 Entertainment Systems
SIRIUS: Press repeatedly to access satellite radio mode, if equipped.
Press repeatedly to cycle through SAT1, SAT2 and SAT3 modes.
TUNE: Turn to go to the next / previous available SIRIUS satellite
station.
DIRECT: Press DIRECT then enter the desired channel (i.e. 002) using
the memory preset buttons (0–9). If you only enter one digit, press OK
and the system will go to that satellite channel. If you enter three digits,
the system will automatically go to that channel, if available. You may
cancel your entry by pressing DIRECT. If an invalid station number is
entered, INVALID CHANNEL will appear in the display and the system
will continue playing the current station.
SEEK: Press SEEK to seek to the previous/next channel. If a
specific category is selected, (Jazz, Rock, News, etc.),
press SEEK to seek to the previous/next channel in the selected
category. Press and hold SEEK to fast seek through the
previous/next channels.
SCAN: Press SCAN for a brief sampling of all available SIRIUS satellite
channels. If a specific category is selected, (Jazz, Rock, News, etc.) press
SCAN for a brief sampling of all available SIRIUS satellite channels within
the selected category.
MEMORY PRESETS (0–9): There
are 30 available presets, 10 each for
SAT1, SAT2 and SAT3. To save
satellite channels in your memory presets, tune to the desired channel
then press and hold a memory preset number (0–9) until sound returns.
TEXT: Press and release to display the artist and song title. While in
TEXT MODE, press again to scroll through the Artist (AR), Song (SO),
Channel (CH) and Category (CA).
In TEXT MODE: Sometimes the display requires additional text to be
displayed. When the indicator is active, press TEXT and then
press SEEK to view the additional display text.
CAT (Category) / FOLD (Folder): Press to toggle between turning
the most recently selected satellite radio category on or off. The category
icon (CAT) will illuminate in the display when a specific category is
selected (the icon will not illuminate during CATEGORY ALL). If no
category has ever been selected, NO CATEGORY SELECTED will display.
Note: Separate categories can be set for SAT1, SAT2 or SAT3.
Refer to Satellite radio menu for further information on selecting a
satellite radio category.
56

2011 F-150 (f12)

Owners Guide, 3rd Printing
USA (fus)
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
 Entertainment Systems
SATELLITE RADIO MENU: Press MENU when satellite radio mode is
active to access. Press OK to enter into the satellite radio menu.
Press to cycle through the following options:
• CATEGORY- Press OK to enter category mode. Press to scroll
through the list of available SIRIUS channel Categories (Pop, Rock,
News, etc.) Press OK when the desired category appears in the
display. After a category is selected, press SEEK to search for
that specific category of channels only (i.e. ROCK). You may also
select CATEGORY ALL to seek all available SIRIUS categories and
channels. Press OK to close and return to the main menu.
• SONG SEEK MENU- Press OK to enter song seek menu.
Press to scroll through the following options:
a. SAVE THIS SONG: Press OK to save the currently playing song’s
title in the system’s memory. (If you try to save something other than
a song, CANT SAVE will appear in the display.) When the chosen song
is playing on any satellite radio channel, the system will alert you with
an audible prompt. Press OK while SONG ALERT is in the display and
the system will take you to the channel playing the desired song. You
can save up to 20 song titles. If you attempt to save more than 20
titles, the display will read REPLACE SONG? Press OK to access the
saved titles and press to cycle through the saved titles. When
the song title appears in the display that you would like to replace,
press OK. SONG REPLACED will appear in the display.
b. DELETE A SONG: Press OK to delete a song from the system’s
memory. Press to cycle through the saved songs. When the
song appears in the display that you would like to delete, press OK.
The song will appear in the display for confirmation. Press OK again
and the display will read SONG DELETED. If you do not want to
delete the currently listed song, press to select either
RETURN or CANCEL.
c. DELETE ALL SONGS: Press OK to delete all song’s from the
system’s memory. The display will read ARE YOU SURE ? Press OK to
confirm deletion of all saved songs and the display will read ALL
DELETED.

57

2011 F-150 (f12)

Owners Guide, 3rd Printing
USA (fus)
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
 Entertainment Systems
d. DISABLE ALERTS/ENABLE ALERTS: Press OK to
enable/disable the satellite alert status which alerts you when your
selected songs are playing on a satellite radio channel. (The system
default is disabled.) SONG ALERTS ENABLED/DISABLED will appear
in the display. The menu listing will display the opposite state. For
example, if you have chosen to enable the song alerts, the menu
listing will read DISABLE as the alerts are currently on, so your other
option is to turn them off.
• CHANNEL LOCKOUT MENU- Press OK to enter the Channel
Lockout menu. Press the to scroll through the following
options:
a. LOCK/UNLOCK THIS CHANNEL: Press OK when
LOCK/UNLOCK THIS CHANNEL is displayed and the display will read
ENTER PIN. Enter your four-digit PIN number (initial PIN is 1234)
and the system will lock/unlock the channel and CHANNEL LOCKED
or UNLOCKED will be displayed.
Note: you must be tuned to the specific channel you want to
lock/unlock when using this feature.
b. CHANGE PIN: Press OK when CHANGE PIN is displayed. The
display will read ENTER OLD PIN. Enter your current (old) PIN
number and when the system accepts your entry it will display
ENTER NEW PIN. Enter your new four-digit PIN and the system will
save the new PIN and PIN SAVED will display.
c. UNLOCK ALL CHANNELS: Press OK when UNLOCK ALL
CHANNELS is displayed and the display will read ENTER PIN. Enter
your four-digit PIN and the system will unlock all channels and the
display will read CHANNEL UNLOCKED.
d. RESET PIN: Press OK when RESET PIN is displayed. The display
will read ARE YOUR SURE. Press OK again to automatically reset the
PIN number to its initial password setting (1234). PIN RESET TO
DEFAULT PIN will be displayed.
e. RETURN: Press OK when RETURN is displayed and the system
will exit back to the satellite radio menu.
Sound Adjustments
Press SOUND repeatedly to cycle through the following features:
BASS: Press SEEK to adjust the level of bass.
TREBLE: Press SEEK to adjust the level of treble.
BALANCE: Press SEEK to adjust the audio between the left
(L) and right (R) speakers.
58

2011 F-150 (f12)

Owners Guide, 3rd Printing
USA (fus)
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
 Entertainment Systems
FADE: Press SEEK to adjust the audio between the back (B)
and front (F) speakers.
SPEED COMPENSATED VOLUME: With this feature on, radio volume
automatically gets louder with increasing vehicle speed to compensate
for road and wind noise.
The default setting is off.
Use SEEK to adjust between SPEED OFF and levels 1–7:
Increasing the level from 1 (lowest setting) to 7 (highest setting) allows
the radio volume to automatically change slightly with vehicle speed to
compensate for road and wind noise.
Recommended level is 1–3; SPEED OFF turns the feature off and level 7
is the maximum setting.
Extra Features
AUX: Press repeatedly to cycle through LINE IN (auxiliary audio mode),
and SYNC威 (if equipped).
For location and further information on auxiliary audio mode, refer to
Auxiliary input jack later in this chapter.
If your vehicle is equipped with SYNC威, please refer to supplemental
information on SYNC威.
OK: Your vehicle may be equipped
with special phone and media
features which will require you to
confirm commands by pressing OK.
For further information, refer to
supplemental information on
SYNC威.
(Phone): If your vehicle is equipped with SYNC威, press to access
SYNC PHONE features. For further information, please refer to
supplemental information on SYNC威.
If your vehicle is not equipped with SYNC威, the display may read NO
PHONE.
Audio system–Navigation system based (if equipped)
If your vehicle is equipped with the navigation system, it will have an
integrated navigation/audio system. See the Navigation system
supplement for operating instructions on using this audio system.
59

2011 F-150 (f12)

Owners Guide, 3rd Printing
USA (fus)
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
 Entertainment Systems
Auxiliary input jack (Line in — if equipped)
WARNING: Driving while distracted can result in loss of vehicle
control, accident and injury. Ford strongly recommends that
drivers use extreme caution when using any device or feature that may
take their focus off the road. Your primary responsibility is the safe
operation of the vehicle. We recommend against the use of any
handheld device while driving, encourage the use of voice-operated
systems when possible and that you become aware of applicable state
and local laws that may affect use of electronic devices while driving.

The Auxiliary Input Jack provides a

way to connect your portable music
player to the in-vehicle audio
system. This allows the audio from a
portable music player to be played
through the vehicle speakers with
high fidelity. To achieve optimal performance, please observe the
following instructions when attaching your portable music device to the
audio system.
If your vehicle is equipped with a navigation system, refer to Auxiliary
input jack section in the Audio features chapter of your Navigation
system supplement.
Required equipment:
1. Any portable music player designed to be used with headphones
2. An audio extension cable with stereo male 1/8 in. (3.5 mm)
connectors at each end
To play your portable music player using the auxiliary input jack:
1. Begin with the vehicle parked and the radio turned off.
2. Ensure that the battery in your portable music player is new or fully
charged and that the device is turned off.
3. Attach one end of the audio extension cable to the headphone output
of your player and the other end of the audio extension cable to the AIJ
in your vehicle.
4. Turn the radio on, using either a tuned FM station or a CD loaded into
the system. Adjust the volume to a comfortable listening level.
5. Turn the portable music player on and adjust the volume to 1/2 the
volume.
60

2011 F-150 (f12)

Owners Guide, 3rd Printing
USA (fus)
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
 Entertainment Systems
6. Press AUX on the vehicle radio repeatedly until LINE, LINE IN or
SYNC LINE IN appears in the display.
You should hear audio from your portable music player although it may
be low.
7. Adjust the sound on your portable music player until it reaches the
level of the FM station or CD by switching back and forth between the
AUX and FM or CD controls.
Troubleshooting:
1. Do not connect the audio input jack to a line level output. Line level
outputs are intended for connection to a home stereo and are not
compatible with the AIJ. The AIJ will only work correctly with devices
that have a headphone output with a volume control.
2. Do not set the portable music player’s volume level higher than is
necessary to match the volume of the CD or FM radio in your audio
system as this will cause distortion and will reduce sound quality. Many
portable music players have different output levels, so not all players
should be set at the same levels. Some players will sound best at full
volume and others will need to be set at a lower volume.
3. If the music sounds distorted at lower listening levels, turn the
portable music player volume down. If the problems persists, replace or
recharge the batteries in the portable music player.
4. The portable music player must be controlled in the same manner
when it is used with headphones as the AIJ does not provide control
(play, pause, etc.) over the attached portable music player.
5. For safety reasons, connecting or adjusting the settings on your
portable music player should not be attempted while the vehicle is
moving. Also, the portable music player should be stored in a secure
location, such as the center console or the glove box, when the vehicle is
in motion. The audio extension cable must be long enough to allow the
portable music player to be safely stored while the vehicle is in motion.
USB port (if equipped)
WARNING: Driving while distracted can result in loss of vehicle
control, accident and injury. Ford strongly recommends that
drivers use extreme caution when using any device that may take their
focus off the road. Your primary responsibility is the safe operation of
the vehicle. We recommend against the use of any handheld device
while driving, encourage the use of voice-operated systems when
possible and that you become aware of applicable state and local laws
that may affect the use of electronic devices while driving.

61

2011 F-150 (f12)

Owners Guide, 3rd Printing
USA (fus)
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
 Entertainment Systems
Your vehicle may be equipped with a
USB port located on the instrument
panel. This feature allows you to
plug in media playing devices,
memory sticks, and also to charge
devices if they support this feature.
For further information on this feature, refer to Accessing and using
your USB port in the SYNC威 supplement or Navigation System
supplement.

GENERAL AUDIO INFORMATION

Radio frequencies:
AM and FM frequencies are established by the Federal Communications
Commission (FCC) and the Canadian Radio and Telecommunications
Commission (CRTC). Those frequencies are:
AM: 530, 540–1700, 1710 kHz
FM: 87.7, 87.9–107.7, 107.9 MHz
Radio reception factors:
There are three factors that can affect radio reception:
• Distance/strength: The further you travel from an FM station, the
weaker the signal and the weaker the reception.
• Terrain: Hills, mountains, tall buildings, power lines, electric fences,
traffic lights and thunderstorms can interfere with your reception.
• Station overload: When you pass a broadcast tower, a stronger signal
may overtake a weaker one and play while the weak station frequency
is displayed.
CD/CD player care
Do:
• Handle discs by their edges only.
(Never touch the playing
surface).
• Inspect discs before playing.
• Clean only with an approved CD
cleaner.

62

2011 F-150 (f12)

Owners Guide, 3rd Printing
USA (fus)
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
 Entertainment Systems
• Wipe discs from the center out.

Don’t:
• Expose discs to direct sunlight or heat sources for extended periods
of time.
• Clean using a circular motion.
CD units are designed to play commercially pressed 4.75 in
(12 cm) audio compact discs only. Due to technical
incompatibility, certain recordable and re-recordable compact
discs may not function correctly when used in Ford CD players.
Do not use any irregular shaped
CDs or discs with a scratch
protection film attached.

CDs with homemade paper

(adhesive) labels should not be
inserted into the CD player as
the label may peel and cause the
CD to become jammed. It is
recommended that homemade
CDs be identified with
permanent felt tip marker rather
than adhesive labels. Ballpoint pens may damage CDs. Please
contact your authorized dealer for further information.
Audio system warranty and service
Refer to the Warranty Guide/Customer Information Guide for audio
system warranty information. If service is necessary, see your dealer or
qualified technician.

63

2011 F-150 (f12)

Owners Guide, 3rd Printing
USA (fus)
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
 Entertainment Systems
MP3 track and folder structure
Your MP3 system recognizes MP3 individual tracks and folder structure
as follows:
• There are two different modes for MP3 disc playback: MP3 track mode
(system default) and MP3 folder mode. For more information on track
and folder mode, refer to Sample MP3 structure in the following
section.
• MP3 track mode allows the CD to play all tracks in all folders.
• MP3 folder mode limits the playable tracks to the current folder.
• Creating discs with only one level of folders will help with navigation
through the disc files.
Sample MP3 structure
If you are burning your own MP3
discs, it is important to understand
how the system will read the
structures you create. While various 1 .mp3 1
files may be present, (files with .mp3 2
extensions other than mp3), only
files with the .mp3 extension will be
played. Other files will be ignored 2 .mp3 3
by the system. This enables you to
3 .mp3 4
use the same MP3 disc for a variety
of tasks on your work computer, .mp3 5
home computer and your in vehicle
system. 4 .mp3 6
.mp3 7

.doc
.ppt
.xls

In track mode, the system will display and play the structure as if it were
only one level deep (all .mp3 files will be played, regardless of being in a
specific folder). In folder mode, the system will only play the .mp3 files
in the current folder.

64

2011 F-150 (f12)

Owners Guide, 3rd Printing
USA (fus)
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
 Entertainment Systems
Satellite radio information (if equipped)
Satellite radio channels: SIRIUS威 broadcasts a variety of music, news,
sports, weather, traffic and entertainment satellite radio channels. For
more information and a complete list of SIRIUS威 satellite radio channels,
visit www.sirius.com in the United States, www.siriuscanada.ca in
Canada, or call SIRIUS威 at 1–888–539–7474.
Satellite radio reception factors: To receive the satellite signal, your
vehicle has been equipped with a satellite radio antenna located on the
roof of your vehicle. The vehicle roof provides the best location for an
unobstructed, open view of the sky, a requirement of a satellite radio
system. Like AM/FM, there are several factors that can affect satellite
radio reception performance:
• Antenna obstructions: For optimal reception performance, keep the
antenna clear of snow and ice build-up and keep luggage and other
material as far away from the antenna as possible.
• Terrain: Hills, mountains, tall buildings, bridges, tunnels, freeway
overpasses, parking garages, dense tree foliage and thunderstorms can
interfere with your reception.
• Station overload: When you pass a ground based broadcast repeating
tower, a stronger signal may overtake a weaker one and result in an
audio mute.
Unlike AM/FM audible static, you will hear an audio mute when there is
a satellite radio signal interference. Your radio display may display NO
SIGNAL to indicate the interference.
SIRIUS威 satellite radio service: SIRIUS威 satellite radio is a
subscription based satellite radio service that broadcasts music, sports,
news and entertainment programming. A service fee is required in order
to receive SIRIUS威 service. Vehicles that are equipped with a factory
installed SIRIUS威 satellite radio system include hardware and a limited
subscription term, which begins on the date of sale or lease of the
vehicle.
For information on extended subscription terms, the online media player
and other SIRIUS威 features, please contact SIRIUS威 at 1–888–539–7474.
Note: SIRIUS威 reserves the unrestricted right to change, rearrange, add
or delete programming including canceling, moving or adding particular
channels, and its prices, at any time, with or without notice to you. Ford
Motor Company shall not be responsible for any such programming
changes.

65

2011 F-150 (f12)

Owners Guide, 3rd Printing
USA (fus)
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
 Entertainment Systems
Satellite Radio Electronic Serial Number (ESN): This 12-digit
Satellite Serial Number is needed to activate, modify or track your
satellite radio account. You will need this number when communicating
with SIRIUS威. While in satellite radio mode, you can view this number on
the radio display by pressing SIRIUS and the preset 1 control
simultaneously.
Radio Display Condition Action Required
ACQUIRING Radio requires more No action required.
than two seconds to This message should
produce audio for the disappear shortly.
selected channel.
SAT FAULT Internal module or If this message does
system failure not clear within a short
present. period of time, or with
an ignition key cycle,
your receiver may have
a fault. See your
authorized dealer for
service.
INVALID CHNL Channel no longer This previously
available. available channel is no
longer available. Tune
to another channel. If
the channel was one of
your presets, you may
choose another channel
for that preset button.
UNSUBSCRIBED Subscription not Contact SIRIUS威 at
available for this 1–888–539–7474 to
channel. subscribe to the
channel or tune to
another channel.

66

2011 F-150 (f12)

Owners Guide, 3rd Printing
USA (fus)
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
 Entertainment Systems

Radio Display Condition Action Required

NO TEXT Artist information not Artist information not
available. available at this time on
this channel. The
system is working
properly.
NO TEXT Song title information Song title information
not available. not available at this
time on this channel.
The system is working
properly.
NO TEXT Category information Category information
not available. not available at this
time on this channel.
The system is working
properly.
NO SIGNAL Loss of signal from You are in a location
the SIRIUS威 satellite that is blocking the
or SIRIUS威 tower to SIRIUS威 signal (i.e.,
the vehicle antenna. tunnel, under an
overpass, dense foliage,
etc). The system is
working properly. When
you move into an open
area, the signal should
return.
UPDATING Update of channel No action required. The
programming in process may take up to
progress. three minutes.
CALL SIRIUS威 Satellite service has Call SIRIUS威 at
1–888–539–7474 been deactivated by 1–888–539–7474 to
SIRIUS威 satellite re-activate or resolve
radio. subscription issues.

67

2011 F-150 (f12)

Owners Guide, 3rd Printing
USA (fus)
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
 Entertainment Systems
NAVIGATION SYSTEM (IF EQUIPPED)
Your vehicle may be equipped with a navigation system. Refer to the
Navigation System supplement for further information.
Battery management: When the engine is off, your Navigation system
may turn off if the battery is at a low state of charge or if the ignition
has been in the accessory position or in the on position for
approximately 45 minutes. The display will temporarily show BATTERY
SAVER — SYSTEM OFF PLEASE START THE ENGINE and the
Navigation system will be turned off. The Navigation system will return
to normal operation once the vehicle has been started and battery state
of charge allowed to recover. The battery state of charge recovery can be
accelerated by turning off any unnecessary electrical loads while driving.
Refer to the Battery management system section in the Maintenance
and Specifications chapter for more information.
SYNC姞 (IF EQUIPPED)
Your vehicle may be equipped with SYNC威, a hands-free communications
and entertainment system with special phone and media features. For
more information, please refer to the SYNC威 supplement or to the
SYNC威 section in the Navigation System supplement (if equipped).

68

2011 F-150 (f12)

Owners Guide, 3rd Printing
USA (fus)
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
 Climate Controls
SINGLE ZONE CLIMATE CONTROL

1. Defrost: Distributes outside air through the windshield defroster

vents and de-mister vents. Can be used to clear the windshield of fog
and thin ice. The system will automatically provide outside air to reduce
window fogging. Press this button again to return to the previous air flow
selection.
2. A. R Rear defroster (if equipped): Press to activate/deactivate the
rear window defroster. Refer to Rear window defroster later in this
chapter for more information. If your vehicle is equipped with both rear
defroster and heated mirrors, the same button will activate both.
2. B. Heated mirrors (if equipped): Press to activate/deactivate.
This feature will remove ice and snow from the side view mirrors.
3. Multifunction control: Press repeatedly to toggle through the
settings to choose:
• : Distributes air through the windshield defroster vents, de-mister
vents, floor vents and rear seat floor vents (if equipped). The system
will automatically provide outside air to reduce window fogging.
• : Distributes air through the instrument panel vents and center
console vents (if equipped).
• : Distributes air through the instrument panel vents, floor vents,
rear seat floor vents (if equipped), de-mister vents and center console
vents (if equipped).
69

2011 F-150 (f12)

Owners Guide, 3rd Printing
USA (fus)
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
 Climate Controls
• : Distributes air through the floor vents, demister vents and rear
seat floor vents (if equipped).
4. A/C: Press to activate/deactivate air conditioning. Use with
recirculated air to improve cooling performance and efficiency. A/C
engages automatically in MAX A/C, (defrost) and
(floor/defrost).
5. Recirculated air: Press to recirculate the air in the vehicle.
Recirculated air may reduce the amount of time needed to cool down the
interior of the vehicle (when used with A/C) and may also help reduce
undesired odors and dust/debris from reaching the interior of the vehicle.
This button engages automatically when MAX A/C is selected or can be
engaged manually in any airflow mode except (defrost). This
button may turn off automatically in all airflow modes (except MAX A/C)
and when the ignition is cycled (if the A/C indicator light is not
illuminated ) in order to prevent window fogging. Even when this button
is not selected, air may still recirculate in some instances in order to
reduce vehicle warm-up time in cold conditions or to cool down time in
hot conditions. Note: You may notice changes in sound between
recirculated mode and other airflow modes.
6. MAX A/C: Distributes recirculated air through the instrument panel
vents and center console vents (if equipped) to cool the vehicle. This
re-cooling of the interior air is more economical and efficient.
Recirculated air may also help reduce undesirable odors and dust/debris
from entering the vehicle. Press the MAX A/C button again for normal
A/C operation.
7. Temperature control: Controls the temperature of the airflow in the
vehicle.
8. Fan speed adjustment: Controls the volume of air circulated in
the vehicle.
9. Power: Press to activate/deactivate the climate control system.
When the system is off, outside air is prevented from entering the
vehicle.
Operating tips
• To reduce fog build-up on the windshield during humid weather,
select (defrost) or (floor/defrost). Temperature and/or fan
speed can also be increased to improve clearing.
• To reduce humidity build-up inside the vehicle: do not drive with the
system off or with (recirculated air) engaged and A/C off.
70

2011 F-150 (f12)

Owners Guide, 3rd Printing
USA (fus)
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
 Climate Controls
• Do not put objects under the front seats that will interfere with the
airflow to the back seats.
• Remove any snow, ice or leaves from the air intake area at the base of
the windshield.
• To improve the A/C cool down, drive with the windows slightly open
for not more than 2-3 minutes after start up to “air out” the vehicle.
• For maximum cooling performance when using Max A/C or
(recirculated air), all windows and doors should remain closed.
• A small amount of air may be felt from the floor vent regardless of the
air distribution setting that is selected.
If you are driving during extreme high ambient temperatures and idling
for extended periods of time in gear, it is recommended to run the A/C
in the MAX A/C position, adjust the blower fan speed to the lowest
setting and put the vehicle’s transmission into the P (Park) position to
continue to receive cool air from your A/C system.
For maximum cooling performance (MAX A/C):
• Select MAX A/C.
(Panel) and (panel/floor) modes:
• Move the temperature control to the coolest setting.
• Select A/C and (recirculated air). Use recirculated air with A/C to
provide colder airflow.
• Set the fan to the highest speed initially, then adjust to maintain
comfort.
To aid in side window defogging/demisting in cold weather:
1. Select (panel/floor).
2. Select A/C.
3. Adjust the temperature control to maintain comfort.
4. Set the fan speed to the highest setting.
5. Direct the outer instrument panel vents towards the side windows.
To increase airflow to the outer instrument panel vents, close the vents
located in the middle of the instrument panel.
71

2011 F-150 (f12)

Owners Guide, 3rd Printing
USA (fus)
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
 Climate Controls
DUAL ZONE AUTOMATIC TEMPERATURE CONTROL WITH
HEATED SEATS (IF EQUIPPED)

Temperature conversion: To switch between Fahrenheit and Celsius,

refer to Message center in the Instrument Cluster chapter.
1. + Fan speed control: Press to increase the fan speed.
2. Defrost: Distributes outside air through the windshield defroster
vents and de-mister vents. Can be used to clear the windshield of fog
and thin ice. The system will automatically provide outside air to reduce
window fogging. Press this button again to return to the previous air flow
selection. To return to full automatic control, press AUTO.
3. Manual override control: Allows you to manually select where
airflow is directed. To return to full automatic control, press AUTO.
When choosing to control airflow manually, press repeatedly to toggle
through the settings to choose:
• : Distributes air through the windshield defroster vents, de-mister
vents, floor vents and rear seat floor vents. The system will
automatically provide outside air to reduce window fogging.
• : Distributes air through the instrument panel vents.
• : Distributes air through the instrument panel vents, floor vents,
rear seat floor vents and de-mister vents.
• : Distributes air through the floor vents and rear seat floor vents
and demister vents.
72

2011 F-150 (f12)

Owners Guide, 3rd Printing
USA (fus)
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
 Climate Controls
4. A/C: Press to activate/deactivate air conditioning. Use with
recirculated air to improve cooling performance and efficiency. A/C
engages automatically in MAX A/C, (defrost) and
(floor/defrost).
5. AUTO: Press to engage full automatic operation. Select the desired
temperature using the temperature control. The system will
automatically determine fan speed, airflow distribution, A/C on or off,
and outside or recirculated air, to heat or cool the vehicle to reach the
desired temperature.
6. MAX A/C: Distributes recirculated air through the instrument panel
vents to cool the vehicle. This re-cooling of the interior air is more
economical and efficient. Recirculated air may also help reduce
undesirable odors and dust/debris from entering the vehicle. Press the
MAX A/C button again for normal A/C operation.
7. PASS TEMP: Press to activate separate passenger temperature
control and turn the dial to increase/decrease the airflow temperature for
the passenger in the front of the vehicle.
8. Recirculated air: Press to recirculate the air in the vehicle.
Recirculated air may reduce the amount of time needed to cool down the
interior of the vehicle (when used with A/C) and may also help reduce
undesired odors and dust/debris from reaching the interior of the vehicle.
This button engages automatically when MAX A/C is selected or can be
engaged manually in any airflow mode except (defrost). This
button may turn off automatically in all airflow modes (except MAX A/C)
and when the ignition is cycled (if the A/C indicator light is not
illuminated ) in order to prevent window fogging. Even when this button
is not selected, air may still recirculate in some instances in order to
reduce vehicle warm-up time in cold conditions or to cool down time in
hot conditions. Note: You may notice changes in sound between
recirculated mode and other airflow modes.
9. Passenger heated seat control: Press to control the passenger
heated seat. Refer to Heated seats in the Seating and Safety Restraints
chapter for more information.
10. Driver heated seat control: Press to control the driver heated
seat. Refer to Heated seats in the Seating and Safety Restraints
chapter for more information.

73

2011 F-150 (f12)

Owners Guide, 3rd Printing
USA (fus)
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
 Climate Controls
11. Power/Driver temperature: Press to activate/deactivate the
climate control system. When the system is off, outside air is prevented
from entering the vehicle through the vents. Turn to increase/decrease
the air temperature on the driver side of the vehicle. The control also
adjusts the passenger side temperature when PASS TEMP is disengaged.
The recommended initial setting is between 72°F (22°C) and 75°F
(24°C), then adjust for comfort. The driver side temperature setting will
appear in the upper left corner of the display.
12. – Front fan speed control: Press to decrease the fan speed.
13. A.R
Rear defroster (if equipped): Press to activate/deactivate
the rear window defroster. Refer to Rear window defroster later in this
chapter for more information. If your vehicle is equipped with both rear
defroster and heated mirrors, the same button will activate both.
13. B. Heated mirrors (if equipped): Press to activate/deactivate.
This feature will remove ice and snow from the side view mirrors.
DUAL ZONE AUTOMATIC TEMPERATURE CONTROL WITH
HEATED AND COOLED SEATS (IF EQUIPPED)

Temperature conversion: To switch between Fahrenheit and Celsius,

refer to Message center in the Instrument Cluster chapter.
1. + Fan speed control: Press to increase the fan speed.
74

2011 F-150 (f12)

Owners Guide, 3rd Printing
USA (fus)
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
 Climate Controls
2. Defrost: Distributes outside air through the windshield defroster
vents and de-mister vents. Can be used to clear the windshield of fog
and thin ice. The system will automatically provide outside air to reduce
window fogging. Press this button again to return to the previous air flow
selection.
3. Manual override control: Allows you to manually select where
airflow is directed. To return to full automatic control, press AUTO.
When choosing to control airflow manually, press repeatedly to toggle
through the settings to choose:
• : Distributes air through the windshield defroster vents, de-mister
vents, floor vents and rear seat floor vents. The system will
automatically provide outside air to reduce window fogging.
• : Distributes air through the instrument panel vents.
• : Distributes air through the instrument panel vents, floor vents,
rear seat floor vents and de-mister vents.
• : Distributes air through the floor vents and rear seat floor vents.
4. A/C: Press to activate/deactivate air conditioning. Use with
recirculated air to improve cooling performance and efficiency. A/C
engages automatically in MAX A/C, (defrost) and
(floor/defrost).
5. AUTO: Press to engage automatic temperature control. Select the
desired temperature using the temperature control. The system will
automatically determine fan speed, airflow location, A/C on or off, and
outside or recirculated air, to heat or cool the vehicle to reach the
desired temperature.
6. MAX A/C: Distributes recirculated air through the instrument panel
vents to cool the vehicle. This re-cooling of the interior air is more
economical and efficient. Recirculated air may also help reduce
undesirable odors and dust/debris from entering the vehicle. Press the
MAX A/C button again for normal A/C operation.
7. Recirculated air: Press to recirculate the air in the vehicle.
Recirculated air may reduce the amount of time needed to cool down the
interior of the vehicle (when used with A/C) and may also help reduce
undesired odors and dust/debris from reaching the interior of the vehicle.
This button engages automatically when MAX A/C is selected or can be
engaged manually in any airflow mode except (defrost). This
button may turn off automatically in all airflow modes (except MAX A/C)
75

2011 F-150 (f12)

Owners Guide, 3rd Printing
USA (fus)
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
 Climate Controls
and when the ignition is cycled (if the A/C indicator light is not
illuminated ) in order to prevent window fogging. Even when this button
is not selected, air may still recirculate in some instances in order to
reduce vehicle warm-up time in cold conditions or to cool down time in
hot conditions. Note: You may notice changes in sound between
recirculated mode and other airflow modes.
8. Passenger heated seat: Press to control the passenger heated
seat. Refer to Heated and cooled seats in the Seating and Safety
Restraints chapter for more information.
9. PASS TEMP: Press to engage/disengage separate passenger side
temperature control. Turn to increase/decrease the air temperature on
the passenger side of the vehicle. The recommended initial setting is
between 72°F (22°C) and 75°F (24°C), then adjust for comfort. The
passenger side temperature setting will appear in the upper right corner
of the display.
10. Passenger cooled seat: Press to control the passenger cooled
seat. Refer to Heated and cooled seats in the Seating and Safety
Restraints chapter for more information.
11. Driver heated seat: Press to control the driver heated seat.
Refer to Heated and cooled seats in the Seating and Safety Restraints
chapter for more information.
12. Driver cooled seat: Press to control the driver cooled seat.
Refer to Heated and cooled seats in the Seating and Safety Restraints
chapter for more information.
13. Power/Driver temperature: Press to activate/deactivate the
climate control system. When the system is off, outside air is prevented
from entering the vehicle. Turn to increase/decrease the air temperature
on the driver side of the vehicle. The control also adjusts the passenger
side temperature when PASS TEMP is disengaged. The recommended
initial setting is between 72°F (22°C) and 75°F (24°C), then adjust for
comfort. The driver side temperature setting will appear in the upper left
corner of the display.
14. – Fan speed control: Press to decrease the fan speed.
15. A.R
Rear defroster (if equipped): Press to activate/deactivate
the rear window defroster. Refer to Rear window defroster later in this
chapter for more information. If your vehicle is equipped with both rear
defroster and heated mirrors, the same button will activate both.
15. B. Heated mirrors (if equipped): Press to activate/deactivate.
This feature will remove ice and snow from the side view mirrors.
76

2011 F-150 (f12)

Owners Guide, 3rd Printing
USA (fus)
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
 Climate Controls
DUAL ZONE AUTOMATIC TEMPERATURE CONTROL WITH
HEATED AND COOLED SEATS (NAVIGATION BASED–IF
EQUIPPED)

Temperature conversion: To switch between Fahrenheit and Celsius,

refer to Message center in the Instrument Cluster chapter.
1. CLIMATE: Press to control the climate control system through the
touch display screen. See Touchscreen functions later in this section.
2. R Rear defroster (if equipped): Press to activate/deactivate the
rear window defroster. Refer to Rear window defroster later in this
chapter for more information. If your vehicle is equipped with both rear
defroster and heated mirrors, the same button will activate both.
Heated mirrors (if equipped): Press to activate/deactivate.
This feature will remove ice and snow from the side view mirrors.
3. A/C: Press to activate/deactivate air conditioning. Use with
recirculated air to improve cooling performance and efficiency. A/C
engages automatically in MAX A/C, (defrost) and
(floor/defrost).
77

2011 F-150 (f12)

Owners Guide, 3rd Printing
USA (fus)
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
 Climate Controls
4. Passenger temperature: Press to activate separate passenger
temperature control to increase/decrease the air temperature on the
passenger side of the vehicle.
5. Passenger heated seat (if equipped): Press to control the
passenger heated seat. Refer to Heated and cooled seats in the Seating
and Safety Restraints chapter for more information.
6. Passenger cooled seat (if equipped): Press to control the
passenger cooled seat. Refer to Heated and cooled seats in the Seating
and Safety Restraints chapter for more information.
7. Recirculated air: Press to recirculate the air in the vehicle.
Recirculated air may reduce the amount of time needed to cool down the
interior of the vehicle (when used with A/C) and may also help reduce
undesired odors and dust/debris from reaching the interior of the vehicle.
This button engages automatically when MAX A/C is selected or can be
engaged manually in any airflow mode except (defrost). This
button may turn off automatically in all airflow modes (except MAX A/C)
and when the ignition is cycled (if the A/C indicator light is not
illuminated ) in order to prevent window fogging. Even when this button
is not selected, air may still recirculate in some instances in order to
reduce vehicle warm-up time in cold conditions or to cool down time in
hot conditions. Note: You may notice changes in sound between
recirculated mode and other airflow modes.
8. – + Fan speed control: Press to decrease/increase the fan speed.
9. AUTO: Press to engage full automatic operation. Select the desired
temperature using the temperature control. The system will
automatically determine fan speed, airflow location, A/C on or off, and
outside or recirculated air, to heat or cool the vehicle to reach the
desired temperature.
10. Driver temperature: Press to increase/decrease the air temperature
for the driver side of the vehicle. This control also adjusts the passenger
side temperature when dual zone operation is disengaged.
11. Driver cooled seat (if equipped): Press to control the driver
cooled seat. Refer to Heated and cooled seats in the Seating and
Safety Restraints chapter for more information.
12. Driver heated seat (if equipped): Press to control the driver
heated seat. Refer to Heated and cooled seats in the Seating and
Safety Restraints chapter for more information.
13. Power: Press to activate/deactivate the climate control system.
When the system is off, outside air is prevented from entering the
vehicle. The climate status in the touchscreen will also be turned off.
78

2011 F-150 (f12)

Owners Guide, 3rd Printing
USA (fus)
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
 Climate Controls
14. Defrost: Distributes outside air through the windshield
defroster vents and de-mister vents. Can be used to clear the windshield
of fog and thin ice. The system will automatically provide outside air to
reduce window fogging. Press this button again to return to the previous
air flow selection.
TOUCHSCREEN FUNCTIONS

Temperature conversion: To switch between Fahrenheit and Celsius,

refer to Message center in the Instrument Cluster chapter.
Temperature: Press the up and down arrows on the left side of the
screen to increase/decrease the airflow temperature for the driver side of
the vehicle. This control also adjusts the passenger side temperature
when dual zone operation is disengaged. Press the up and down arrows
on the right side of the screen to increase/decrease the airflow
temperature for the passenger side of the vehicle.
• : Distributes air through the instrument panel vents.
• : Distributes air through the instrument panel vents, floor vents,
rear seat floor vents and de-mister vents.
• : Distributes air through the floor vents, rear seat floor vents.
• : Distributes air through the windshield defroster vents, de-mister
vents, floor vents and rear seat floor vents. The system will
automatically provide outside air to reduce window fogging.
To return to full automatic control, press AUTO on the main bezel.
Fan Speed: Press to decrease/increase the fan speed.
Dual: Press to activate/deactivate separate driver and passenger
temperature controls.

79

2011 F-150 (f12)

Owners Guide, 3rd Printing
USA (fus)
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
 Climate Controls
Max A/C: Distributes recirculated air through the instrument panel
vents to cool the vehicle. This re-cooling of the interior air is more
economical and efficient. Recirculated air may also help reduce
undesirable odors from entering the vehicle. Press MAX A/C again for
normal operation.
VOICE COMMANDS IN CLIMATE MODE
Please refer to the Voice commands in climate mode section of the
Navigation supplement for more information on using voice commands
with the climate control system.
Operating tips
• To reduce fog build-up on the windshield during humid weather,
select (defrost). Temperature and/or fan speed can also be
increased to improve clearing.
• To reduce humidity build-up inside the vehicle: do not drive with the
system off or with (recirculated air) engaged.
• Do not put objects under the front seats that will interfere with the
airflow to the back seats.
• Remove any snow, ice or leaves from the air intake area at the base of
the windshield.
• To improve the A/C cool down, drive with the windows slightly open
for not more than 2-3 minutes after start up to “air out” the vehicle.
• For maximum cooling performance when using Max A/C or
(recirculated air), all windows and doors should remain closed.
• A small amount of air may be felt from the floor vent regardless of the
air distribution setting that is selected.
If you are driving during extreme high ambient temperatures and idling
for extended periods of time in gear, it is recommended to run the A/C
in the MAX A/C mode, adjust the blower fan speed to the lowest setting
and put the vehicle’s transmission in P (Park) to continue to receive cool
air from your A/C system.
For maximum cooling performance (MAX A/C):
1. Press MAX A/C. The system will default to single zone operation and
set the temperature to 60°F (16°C). The blower will automatically go to
maximum.
2. A/C, (recirculated air) and (panel) will be selected.
3. Fan speed can be adjusted as desired.
80

2011 F-150 (f12)

Owners Guide, 3rd Printing
USA (fus)
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
 Climate Controls
To aid in side window defogging/demisting in cold weather:
1. Select .
2. Select A/C.
3. Adjust the temperature control to maintain comfort.
4. Set the fan speed to the highest setting.
5. Direct the outer instrument panel vents towards the side windows.
To increase airflow to the outer instrument panel vents, close the vents
located in the middle of the instrument panel.
REAR WINDOW DEFROSTER (IF EQUIPPED) R
The rear defroster control is located on the climate control panel and
works to defrost your rear window from fog and thin ice. If equipped, it
also operates the heated mirror to remove snow and thin ice from the
side mirrors.
Ensure that the ignition on. Press to turn the defroster on/off. The
indicator light will illuminate when activated. For vehicles with a sliding
rear window– the defroster will be disabled when the window is opened.
Do not use razor blades or other sharp objects to clean the inside
of the rear window or to remove decals from the inside of the
rear window. This may cause damage to the heated grid lines and
will not be covered by your warranty.
REMOTE START CLIMATE OPERATION (IF EQUIPPED)
The climate control system will condition the cabin temperature during
remote start based on the outside temperature. Engine idle may increase
to help with adjusting the cabin temperature.
Note: No climate control adjustments will be recognized during remote
start operation and none of the climate function indicators will be
illuminated while the vehicle is in remote start. Once the ignition is
cycled to the on position, the climate control system will return to the
previous settings (last ignition-on cycle) and adjustments can be made
normally. If the previous setting was off, the climate control system will
turn off.
If you previously had any of the following activated: heated seats (if
equipped), cooled seats (if equipped), heated mirrors (if equipped), or
rear defrost, they will not return to their previous settings (on) when the
ignition is turned on and will need to be re-activated if desired.
For more information on remote start climate settings and options, refer
to Message Center in the Instrument Cluster chapter.
81

2011 F-150 (f12)

Owners Guide, 3rd Printing
USA (fus)
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
 Climate Controls
Manual climate control
For hot weather conditions:
• The climate control system will be set to MAX A/C.
For cold weather conditions:
• The climate control system will be set to provide maximum heating
in (floor/defrost) mode.
• Rear defrost/heated mirrors (if equipped) will be activated.
For moderate weather conditions:
• The interior cabin will be heated, cooled or off, based upon the
previous operating state (last ignition-on cycle).
• Rear defrost/heated mirrors (if equipped) will be deactivated.
Automatic climate control
For hot weather conditions:
• The interior cabin will be cooled to 72°F (22°C).
• The cooled seats (if equipped and if the feature is selected to AUTO
in the message center) will be set to high.
For cold weather conditions:
• The interior cabin will be heated to 72°F (22°C).
• The heated seats (if equipped and if the feature is selected to AUTO
in the message center) will be set to high.
• Rear defrost/heated mirrors (if equipped) will be activated.
For moderate weather conditions:
• The interior cabin will be heated, cooled, or off, based upon the
previous operating state (last ignition-on cycle).
• Heated/cooled seats (if equipped) will be deactivated.
• Rear defrost/heated mirrors (if equipped) will be deactivated.

82

2011 F-150 (f12)

Owners Guide, 3rd Printing
USA (fus)
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
 Lights
HEADLAMP CONTROL
Rotate the headlamp control
clockwise to the first position to
turn on the parking lamps.
Rotate clockwise to the second
position to also turn on the
headlamps.

Autolamp control (if equipped)

The autolamp system provides light
sensitive automatic on-off control of
the exterior lights normally
controlled by the headlamp control.
The autolamp system also keeps the
lights on for a predetermined
amount of time after the ignition
switch is turned to off. Using the
message center, you can select a
delay from 0–180 seconds.
• To turn autolamps on, rotate the control to .
• To turn autolamps off, rotate the control to .

Fog lamp control (if equipped)

The headlamp control also operates
the fog lamps. The fog lamps can be
turned on only when the headlamp
control is in the , or
position and the high beams are not
turned on.
Pull headlamp control towards you
to turn fog lamps on. The fog lamp
indicator light will illuminate.

83

2011 F-150 (f12)

Owners Guide, 3rd Printing
USA (fus)
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
 Lights
High beams
Pull the lever fully past the detent
to activate. Pull the lever fully again
to deactivate.

Flash-to-pass
Pull toward you slightly to activate
and release to deactivate.

Daytime running lamps (DRL) (if equipped)

Turns the headlamps on with a reduced output.
In order for the DRLs to function:
• the ignition must be in the on position and
• the headlamp control is in the , parking lamp or autolamp position.

WARNING: Always remember to turn on your headlamps at

dusk or during inclement weather. The Daytime Running Lamp
(DRL) system does not activate the tail lamps and generally may not
provide adequate lighting during these conditions. Failure to activate
your headlamps under these conditions may result in a collision.

84

2011 F-150 (f12)

Owners Guide, 3rd Printing
USA (fus)
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
 Lights
PANEL DIMMER CONTROL
Use to adjust the brightness of the
instrument panel and all applicable
lit components in the vehicle during
headlamp and parking lamp
operation.
• Tap the left or right of the control
to brighten/dim all interior lit
components incrementally, or
• Press and hold at the first
position the left or right of the
control until the desired lighting level is reached.
• Press and hold the right of the control to the full on position to
activate the “dome on” feature. This will turn on the interior courtesy
lights.
• Press and hold the left of the control to turn off the interior courtesy
lights.
AIMING THE HEADLAMPS
The headlamps on your vehicle are properly aimed at the assembly plant.
If your vehicle has been in an accident, the alignment of your headlamps
should be checked by your authorized dealer.
Vertical aim adjustment
1. Park the vehicle directly in front of a wall or screen on a level surface,
approximately 25 feet (7.6 meters) away.
• (1) 8 feet (2.4 meters)
• (2) Center height of lamp to
ground
• (3) 25 feet (7.6 meters)
• (4) Horizontal reference line
2. Measure the height from the
center of your headlamp (indicated
by a 3.0 mm circle on the lens) to
the ground and mark an 8 foot
(2.4 meter) horizontal reference line
on the vertical wall or screen at this height (a piece of masking tape
works well).
85

2011 F-150 (f12)

Owners Guide, 3rd Printing
USA (fus)
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
 Lights
3. Turn on the low beam headlamps to illuminate the wall or screen and
open the hood. Cover one of the headlamps so no light hits the wall.
4. On the wall or screen you will
observe a light pattern with a
distinct horizontal edge towards the
right. If this edge is not at the
horizontal reference line, the beam will need to be adjusted so the edge
is at the same height as the horizontal reference line.
5. Locate the vertical adjuster on
each headlamp, then use a #2
Philips screwdriver to turn the
adjuster either counterclockwise (to
adjust up) or clockwise (to adjust
down) aligning the upper edge of
the light pattern up to the
horizontal line.
6. HORIZONTAL AIM IS NOT
REQUIRED FOR THIS VEHICLE
AND IS NON-ADJUSTABLE.
7. Repeat Steps 3–5 for the other headlamp.
8. Close the hood and turn off the lamps.
TURN SIGNAL CONTROL
The turn signal lever does not mechanically lock in the upward or
downward position when activated. The turn signal control activation and
cancellation is electronic.
• To operate the left turn signal,
push the lever down until it stops
and release.
• To operate the right turn signal,
push the lever up until it stops
and release.
• To manually cancel turn signal operation, push the lever again in
either direction.
Lane change
To indicate a left or right lane change:
• Push the lever up/down to the first stop position and release. The turn
signals will flash three times and stop.
86

2011 F-150 (f12)

Owners Guide, 3rd Printing
USA (fus)
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
 Lights
• Push the lever up/down to the first stop position and hold. The turn
signals will flash for as long as the lever is held in this position.

INTERIOR LAMPS
Front row map lamps (if equipped)
To turn on the map lamps, press the
outer edge of the clear lens. The
front row map lamp lights when:
• any door is opened.
• the instrument panel dimmer
button is pressed until the
courtesy lamp comes on.
• the remote entry controls are
pressed and the ignition is off.

Rear dome lamp (if equipped)

• ON or D : The dome light will
stay on.
• DOOR or middle position: The
dome light will only come on if a
door is opened.
• OFF or : The lamp will not
come on at all.
The rear dome lamp can be turned on or off by sliding the control.
Rear dome/courtesy lamps (if equipped)
The dome lamp lights when:
• any door is opened.
• the instrument panel dimmer
button is pressed until the
courtesy lamp comes on.
• any of the remote entry controls
are pressed and the ignition is
off.
The reading portion, the two outer lights, can only be turned on and off
at the lamp.
87

2011 F-150 (f12)

Owners Guide, 3rd Printing
USA (fus)
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
 Lights
Rear courtesy/reading/cargo lamps (if equipped)
The rear lamps can be turned on
when the panel dimmer control is
rotated until the lamps come on or
when any door is opened.

The lamps can be turned on or off by sliding the control.

• When the control is in the middle position, the lamp will come on
when a door is opened or the unlock button is pressed on the remote
keyless entry.
• If the control is moved to the left position, the lamp will stay on.
• If the control is moved to the right position, the lamp will not come on
at all.
Ambient lighting (if equipped)
Illuminates footwells and cupholders
with a choice of several colors. The
ambient lighting control is located
on the floor console.
• To activate, press and release the
left side of the control to cycle
through the color choices plus
the off state.
• Press the right side of the control to adjust color intensity.
The lights come on whenever the ignition is in either the on or accessory
position and the headlamps or parking lamps are on.
Note: The ambient lights will stay on until the ignition is placed in the
off position and either of the front doors are opened or the accessory
delay timer expires.

88

2011 F-150 (f12)

Owners Guide, 3rd Printing
USA (fus)
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
 Lights
BULB REPLACEMENT
Lamp assembly condensation
Exterior lamps are vented to accommodate normal changes in pressure.
Condensation can be a natural by-product of this design. When moist air
enters the lamp assembly through the vents, there is a possibility that
condensation can occur when the temperature is cold. When normal
condensation occurs, a thin film of mist can form on the interior of the
lens. The thin mist eventually clears and exits through the vents during
normal operation. Clearing time may take as long as 48 hours under dry
weather conditions.
Examples of acceptable condensation are:
• Presence of thin mist (no streaks, drip marks or droplets)
• Fine mist covers less than 50% of the lens
Examples of unacceptable moisture (usually caused by a lamp water
leak) are:
• Water puddle inside the lamp
• Large water droplets, drip marks or streaks present on the interior of
the lens
Take your vehicle to a dealer for service if any of the above conditions of
unacceptable moisture are present.
Using the right bulbs
Replacement bulbs are specified in the chart below. Headlamp bulbs
must be marked with an authorized “D.O.T.” for North America and an
“E” for Europe to ensure lamp performance, light brightness and pattern
and safe visibility. The correct bulbs will not damage the lamp assembly
or void the lamp assembly warranty and will provide quality bulb burn
time.

89

2011 F-150 (f12)

Owners Guide, 3rd Printing
USA (fus)
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
 Lights

Function Number of Trade number

bulbs
Headlamps 2 H13/9008
Front park/turn lamps 2 3157NA (natural
amber)
Front sidemarker 2 168
Fog lamps 2 9140
Backup lamp (styleside) 2 921
Backup lamp (Harley) 2 921
Rear stop/turn/sidemarker/tail 4 3057K
lamp (styleside)
High-mount brakelamp 1 912
Cargo lamp 2 912
License plate lamp 2 194
Exterior mounted mirror turn 2 See your dealer
signal indicator (if equipped)
Puddle lamp (if equipped) 2 See your dealer
All replacement bulbs are clear in color except where noted.
To replace all instrument panel lights - see your authorized dealer

Replacing exterior bulbs

Check the operation of all the bulbs frequently.
Replacing headlamp bulbs
1. Make sure that the headlamp control is in the off position and open
the hood.
2. Remove the pushpin that holds
the air deflector/protective cover
from the upper inboard corner of
the lamp.

90

2011 F-150 (f12)

Owners Guide, 3rd Printing
USA (fus)
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
 Lights
3. Loosen the three retaining bolts
(two at top of lamp, one at lower
inboard corner).

4. Once the three retaining bolts have been removed, slide the headlamp
assembly forward, disconnecting the two snap attachments at the fender.
5. Disconnect the electrical connector from the bulb by pulling rearward.
6. Remove the bulb and socket by
turning it counterclockwise, then
pull it straight out.

WARNING: Handle a halogen headlamp bulb carefully and keep

out of children’s reach. Grasp the bulb only by its plastic base
and do not touch the glass. The oil from your hand could cause the
bulb to break the next time the headlamps are operated.

Install the new bulb in reverse order.

91

2011 F-150 (f12)

Owners Guide, 3rd Printing
USA (fus)
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
 Lights
Replacing front parking lamp/turn signal/sidemarker bulbs
1. Make sure that the headlamp control is in the off position and open
the hood.
2. Remove the pushpin that holds
the air deflector/protective cover
from the upper inboard corner of
the lamp.
3. Loosen the three retaining bolts
(two at top of lamp, one at lower
inboard corner).
4. Once the three retaining bolts
have been removed, slide the
headlamp assembly forward,
disconnecting the two snap attachments at the fender.
5. Remove the bulb and socket by
turning it counterclockwise, then
pull it straight out.
6. Pull the bulb straight out of the
socket.

Install the new bulb(s) in reverse order.

Replacing tail/brake/turn signal/backup lamp bulbs
1. Make sure the headlamp control
is in the off position.
2. Open the tailgate to expose the
lamp assembly and remove the two
bolts from the tail lamp assembly.

92

2011 F-150 (f12)

Owners Guide, 3rd Printing
USA (fus)
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
 Lights
3. Carefully pull the lamp assembly
straight rearward from the tailgate
pillar to disengage two hidden
snap-in retainers. (Flare side tail
lamps are not equipped with snap-in
retainers.)
4. Remove bulb socket from the
lamp assembly by turning it
counterclockwise.
5. Pull bulb straight out of socket
and press in the new bulb.
Install the new bulb(s) in reverse order.
Replacing high-mount brake and cargo lamp bulbs
Make sure the headlamp control is
in the off position.
1. Remove the two screws and move
the lamp assembly away from the
vehicle to expose the bulb sockets.
2. Remove the bulb socket by rotating counterclockwise and pulling it
out of the lamp assembly.
3. Pull the bulb straight out of the socket and push in the new bulb.
Install the new bulbs in reverse order.
Replacing fog lamp bulbs (if equipped)
1. Make sure the headlamp control
is in the off position.
2. Remove the bulb socket from the
fog lamp by turning
counterclockwise.
3. Disconnect the electrical
connector from the fog lamp bulb.
Install the new bulb in reverse order.

93

2011 F-150 (f12)

Owners Guide, 3rd Printing
USA (fus)
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
 Lights
Replacing exterior mounted mirror turn signal indicator lamp bulbs
For bulb replacement, see your authorized dealer.
Replacing license plate lamp bulbs
The license plate bulbs are located
behind the rear bumper. To change
the license plate lamp bulbs:
1. Reach behind the rear bumper to
locate the bulb.
2. Twist the bulb socket
counterclockwise and carefully pull
to remove it from the lamp
assembly.
3. Pull out the old bulb from the
socket and push in the new bulb.
4. Install the bulb socket in lamp assembly by turning it clockwise.

94

2011 F-150 (f12)

Owners Guide, 3rd Printing
USA (fus)
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
 Driver Controls
MULTI-FUNCTION LEVER
Windshield wiper: Rotate the end
of the control away from you to
increase the speed of the wipers;
rotate toward you to decrease the
speed of the wipers. o

Speed-dependent wipers (if equipped): When the wiper control is set

to any of the interval settings except the longest pause setting, the pause
time between wiping will automatically adjust with the vehicle speed.
The faster your vehicle is travelling the shorter the pause time between
wipes will become.
Rain-sensing wipers (if equipped): The rain-sensing wipers,
designated with AUTO on the control, will automatically activate when
moisture is present on the windshield and the control is set to one of
five auto/interval moisture sensitivity settings. Rotate the end of the
control toward the windshield to increase the sensitivity. The speed of
the rain-sensing wipers will vary based on the amount of moisture
detected on the windshield and the auto/interval setting. There are no
interval (intermittent wipe) settings on vehicles with rain-sensing wipers.
The wipers will continue to wipe as long as the presence of moisture is
detected on the windshield. More or less wiping may occur depending on
humidity, mist or light rain, or road spray.
This feature can be enabled/disabled through the message center. Refer
to Message center in the Instrument Cluster chapter.
Keep the outside of the windshield clean, especially the area around the
rear view mirror where the sensor is located or rain sensor performance
may be affected.
Note: During winter driving conditions with ice, snow or a salty road
mist, inconsistent or unexpected wiping or smearing may occur. In these
conditions, you can lower the sensitivity to reduce the amount of
smearing or override the feature by selecting low- or high-speed wiping
or turning the wiper system off.
Note: The rain sensing wiper feature must be turned off before entering
a car wash.
95

2011 F-150 (f12)

Owners Guide, 3rd Printing
USA (fus)
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
 Driver Controls
Windshield washer: Press the end
of the stalk:
• briefly: causes a single swipe of
the wipers without washer fluid.
• a quick press and hold: the o

wipers will swipe three times with

washer fluid.
• a long press and hold: the wipers and washer fluid will be activated for
up to ten seconds.
Note: Do not operate the washer when the washer reservoir is empty.
This may cause the washer pump to overheat. Check the washer fluid
level frequently. Do not operate the wipers when the windshield is dry.
This may scratch the glass, damage the wiper blades and cause the wiper
motor to burn out. Before operating the wiper on a dry windshield,
always use the windshield washer. In freezing weather, be sure the wiper
blades are not frozen to the windshield before operating the wipers.
Courtesy wipe feature: One extra wipe will occur a few seconds after
washing the front window to clear any excess washer fluid remaining on
the windshield. This feature can be enabled/disabled through the
message center. Refer to Message center in the Instrument Cluster
chapter.
Windshield wiper rainlamp feature (if equipped with autolamp)
When the windshield wipers are turned on during daylight, and the
headlamp control is in the autolamp position, the exterior lamps will turn
on after a brief delay and will remain on until the wipers are turned off.
TILT OR TILT/TELESCOPE STEERING COLUMN (IF EQUIPPED)
To adjust the steering column:
1. Pull the lever down to unlock the
steering column.
2. Adjust the steering wheel up or
down.
3. If also equipped with the
telescope feature, adjust the
steering wheel in or out.
4. While holding the steering wheel
in place, pull the lever up to its
original position to lock the steering column.
96

2011 F-150 (f12)

Owners Guide, 3rd Printing
USA (fus)
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
 Driver Controls

WARNING: Never adjust the steering column when the vehicle

is moving.

Power Tilt/Telescope Steering Column (if equipped)

The steering column can be
adjusted using the control on the
side of the steering column. Press
and hold the front or rear of the
control to adjust the telescope.
Press and hold the top or bottom of
the control to adjust the tilt.

Easy entry/exit feature

When you remove the key from the ignition, the column will move to the
full up and in position if this feature is activated through the message
center. Refer to Message center in the Instrument Cluster chapter.
When the key is inserted into the ignition, the column will return to the
previous setting.
Note: The easy entry/exit feature will prevent the steering wheel from
returning to the memory position until the key is inserted into the
ignition.
Memory feature
The steering column positions are saved when doing a memory set
function and can be recalled along with the vehicle personality features
when a memory position is selected through the remote entry
transmitter, keyless entry keypad or memory switch on the side of the
driver’s seat (if equipped with memory feature). Refer to Front seating
in the Seating and Safety Restraints chapter.
If the steering column adjustment control is pressed during memory
recall it will cancel the automatic operation and the column will respond
to manual adjustment of the control.
WARNING: Never adjust the steering column when the vehicle
is moving.

97

2011 F-150 (f12)

Owners Guide, 3rd Printing
USA (fus)
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
 Driver Controls
On vehicles with memory feature, to prevent damage to the steering
column, the steering column is designed to set a stopping position just
short of the end of the column position. If the steering column
encounters an object while moving up or down, a new stopping position
will be set. To reset the steering column to its normal stopping position:
• After encountering the new stopping position, press the steering
column control again to override.
• Continue pressing the control until it reaches the end of the column
position.
• A new soft stop will be automatically set. The next time the steering
column is tilted it will stop just short of the end of the column
position.
ILLUMINATED VISOR MIRROR (IF EQUIPPED)
Lift the mirror cover to turn on the
visor mirror lamp.

Slide-on-rod feature
Rotate the visor towards the side
window and extend it rearward for
additional sunlight coverage.
Note: To stow the visor back into
the headliner, visor must be
retracted before moving it back
towards the windshield.

98

2011 F-150 (f12)

Owners Guide, 3rd Printing
USA (fus)
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
 Driver Controls
CENTER CONSOLE (IF EQUIPPED)
Your vehicle may be equipped with a variety of consoles features. These
include:
• Locking storage compartment
with hanging file folder supports
• Utility compartment with coin
holder slots, cardholder and pen
holder (on underside of lid).
• Storage for laptop computer
• One 12V power point inside the
storage compartment and one on
the rear of the console
• 110V AC power point outlet on
the rear of the console
• Front and rear cupholders
• Rear passenger air registers
WARNING: Use only soft cups in the cupholder. Hard objects
can injure you in a collision.

ELECTRONIC COMPASS (IF EQUIPPED)

The compass heading is displayed in the Center Integrated Display
(CID).
The compass reading may be affected when you drive near large
buildings, bridges, power lines and powerful broadcast antenna. Magnetic
or metallic objects placed in, on or near the vehicle may also affect
compass accuracy.
Usually, when something affects the compass readings, the compass will
correct itself after a few days of operating your vehicle in normal
conditions. If the compass still appears to be inaccurate, a manual
calibration may be necessary. Refer to Compass calibration
adjustment.
Most geographic areas (zones) have a magnetic north compass point that
varies slightly from the northerly direction on maps. This variation is four
degrees between adjacent zones and will become noticeable as the
vehicle crosses multiple zones. A correct zone setting will eliminate this
error. Refer to Compass zone adjustment.
99

2011 F-150 (f12)

Owners Guide, 3rd Printing
USA (fus)
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
 Driver Controls
Compass zone adjustment
1. Determine which magnetic zone
you are in for your geographic
location by referring to the zone 3 2 1 15
map.
4 14
2. Turn ignition to the on position.
13
5
12

6 7 8 9 1011
3. Press and hold the 7 and 9 radio
preset buttons together for
approximately five seconds until
ZONE XX appears in the CID.

4. Press and release the 7 and 9

radio preset buttons together,
repeatedly until ZONE XX changes
to the correct zone (1–15) in the
CID.
5. The direction will display after
the buttons are released. The zone
is now updated.

Compass calibration adjustment

Perform compass calibration in an open area free from steel structures
and high voltage lines. For optimum calibration, turn off all electrical
accessories (heater/air conditioning, wipers, etc.) and make sure all
vehicle doors are shut.
1. Start the vehicle.

100

2011 F-150 (f12)

Owners Guide, 3rd Printing
USA (fus)
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
 Driver Controls
2. To calibrate, press and hold the 7
and 9 radio preset buttons together
for approximately 10 seconds until
CAL appears. Release the buttons.

3. Slowly drive the vehicle in a

circle (less than 3 mph [5 km/h])
until the CAL display changes to the
direction value (N, S, E, W, etc.). It
may take up to five circles to
complete calibration.
4. The compass is now calibrated.
AUXILIARY POWER POINT (12V DC)
Power outlets are designed for accessory plugs only. Do not insert
any other object in the power outlet as this will damage the
outlet and blow the fuse. Do not hang any type of accessory or
accessory bracket from the plug. Improper use of the power
outlet can cause damage not covered by your warranty.
Auxiliary power points can be found in the following locations:
• On the instrument panel
• Inside the center console storage area (if equipped)
• On the rear of the center console (if equipped) accessible from the
rear seat
Always keep the power point caps closed when not being used.
Do not use the power point for operating the cigarette lighter element (if
equipped).
Note: Do not plug optional electrical accessories into the cigarette
lighter socket (if equipped). Improper use of the lighter can cause
damage not covered by your warranty, and can result in fire or serious
injury.
To prevent the fuse from being blown, do not use the power point(s)
over the vehicle capacity of 12V DC/180W. If the power point or cigar
lighter socket is not working, a fuse may have blown. Refer to Fuses and
relays in the Roadside Emergencies chapter for information on
checking and replacing fuses.

101

2011 F-150 (f12)

Owners Guide, 3rd Printing
USA (fus)
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
 Driver Controls
To have full capacity usage of your power point, the engine is required to
be running to avoid unintentional discharge of the battery. To prevent
the battery from being discharged:
• do not use the power point longer than necessary when the engine is
not running,
• do not leave battery chargers, video game adapters, computers and
other devices plugged in overnight or when the vehicle is parked for
extended periods.
Power point (110V AC) (if equipped)
The 110V AC power point outlet is used for powering electrical devices
that require up to 150W. Exceeding the 150W limit will cause the power
point to cut off the power temporarily to provide overload protection.
Note: The 110V AC power point is
equipped with a cap which provides
protection from inserting objects AC 110V
into the socket. The cap should 150W
always be in a closed position
whenever the power point outlet is
not in use.
The 110V AC power point is located
on the back of the center console.
The power outlet is not designed for the following electric appliances;
they may not work properly:
• Cathode ray tube type televisions
• Motor loads, such as vacuum cleaners, electric saws and other electric
power tools, compressor-driven refrigerators, etc.
• Measuring devices, which process precise data, such as medical
equipment, measuring equipment, etc.
• Other appliances requiring an extremely stable power supply:
microcomputer-controlled electric blankets, touch sensor lamps, etc.
WARNING: Do not keep electrical devices plugged in the power
point whenever the device is not in use. Do not use any
extension cord with the 110V AC power point, since it will defeat the
safety protection design provided by the cap and twist tab. Doing so
my cause the power point to overload due to powering multiple
devices that can reach beyond the 150W load limit and could result in
fire or serious injury.

102

2011 F-150 (f12)

Owners Guide, 3rd Printing
USA (fus)
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
 Driver Controls
The power point can switch to a fault mode when it is overloaded,
overheated, or shorted. For overloading and shorting conditions, unplug
your device and turn the ignition key off then on. For an overheating
condition, let the system cool off, then turn the ignition key off then on.
The 110V AC power point can provide power whenever the vehicle
ignition is in the on position and the power point green indicator light
located in the top left corner is turned on. Refer to the indicator light
code below for the power point status.
Indicator light codes
Green light is on — Power point is ready to supply power
Green light is off — Power point power supply is off. Ignition is not in
the on position
Green light is blinking — Power point is in fault mode
Note: The 110V AC power point will turn off after 13 minutes if the
ignition is in the on position without the engine running. Keep the
engine running or cycle the ignition before the 13 minute time-out to
keep the inverter on.
Ashtray (if equipped)
The ashtray is located on the
instrument panel.
To open ashtray, push in on the
door and release. The ashtray
assembly will tip out. To close, push
assembly in completely and release.
Up-level ashtray shown; base
similar.

POWER WINDOWS (IF EQUIPPED)

WARNING: Do not leave children unattended in the vehicle and
do not let children play with the power windows. They may
seriously injure themselves.

WARNING: When closing the power windows, you should verify

they are free of obstructions and ensure that children and/or
pets are not in the proximity of the window openings.

103

2011 F-150 (f12)

Owners Guide, 3rd Printing
USA (fus)
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
 Driver Controls
Press and pull the window switches
to open and close windows.
• Press down (to the first detent)
and hold the switch to open.
• Pull up (to the first detent) and
hold the switch to close.

Rear Window Buffeting: When one or both of the rear windows are
open, the vehicle may demonstrate a wind throb or buffeting noise. This
noise can be alleviated by lowering a front window approximately 2–3 in.
(5–8 cm).
One-touch up or down (front windows only)
This feature allows the driver or passenger’s window to open or close
fully without holding the control down.
To operate one-touch down, press the switch completely down to the
second detent and release quickly. The window will open fully.
Momentarily press the switch to any position to stop the window
operation.
To operate one-touch up, pull the switch completely up to the second
detent and release quickly. The window will close fully. Momentarily
press the switch to any position to stop the window operation.
Restoring the one-touch up functionality (front windows only)
Under low battery power conditions, one-touch up only functionality may
be lost. To reset this function after restoring full battery power, pull the
switch to the one-touch up position, hold the switch until the glass
reaches the stall position and continue to hold for two seconds. Press the
window switch down and operate the window to the full down position.
One-touch up will now be functional. Perform one-touch up
re-calibration with the door closed only. Calibrating with the door
open will cause the window to continuously bounce back.
Bounce-back (front windows only)
When an obstacle has been detected in the window opening as the
window is moving upward, the window will automatically move down and
stop.

104

2011 F-150 (f12)

Owners Guide, 3rd Printing
USA (fus)
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
 Driver Controls
Bounce-back override (front windows only)
To override bounce-back, within two seconds after reaching bounce-back
position, if the switch is moved from the neutral to the one-touch up
position the window will travel up with no bounce-back protection.
If the switch is released before the window reaches fully closed position,
the window will stop. For example: bounce-back override can be used to
overcome the resistance of ice on the window or seals.
Window lock
The window lock feature allows only
the driver and front passenger to
operate the power windows.
To lock out all the window controls
(except for the driver’s and front
passenger’s) press the right side of
the control. Press the left side to
restore the window controls.
Note: The rear window switches will not illuminate when the window
control is in the locked position.
Power sliding back window (if equipped)
The control is located on the
overhead console.
Press and hold the control to
open the window all the way to the
full open position.
Pull and hold the control to
close the window.

WARNING: When operating the power sliding back window you

must ensure all rear seat occupants and/or cargo are not in the
proximity of the back window.

WARNING: Do not leave children unattended in the vehicle and

do not let children play with the power sliding back window.
They may seriously injure themselves.

105

2011 F-150 (f12)

Owners Guide, 3rd Printing
USA (fus)
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
 Driver Controls
Accessory delay (if equipped)
With accessory delay, the window switches may be used for up to
10 minutes after the ignition switch is turned to the off position or until
any door is opened.

INTERIOR MIRROR
The interior rearview mirror has two pivot points on the support arm
which lets you adjust the mirror up or down and from side to side.

WARNING: Do not adjust the mirror while the vehicle is in

motion.

Automatic dimming interior rear view mirror (if equipped)

The interior rear view mirror has an auto-dimming function (optional on
the driver’s side exterior mirror). The electronic day/night mirror will
change from the normal (high reflective) state to the non-glare
(darkened) state when bright lights (glare) reach the interior mirror.
When the interior mirror detects bright light from behind the vehicle, the
interior rear view mirror and the driver’s side exterior mirror (if
equipped) will automatically adjust (darken) to minimize glare.
The mirrors will automatically return to the normal state whenever the
vehicle is placed in R (Reverse) to ensure a bright clear view when
backing up.
Do not block the sensors on the front and back of the interior
rear view mirror since this may impair proper mirror
performance.
Note: A rear center passenger and/or raised rear center headrest (if
equipped) may also block the light from reaching the sensor.
Do not clean the housing or glass of any mirror with harsh
abrasives, fuel or other petroleum-based cleaning products.
Note: If equipped with a rearview camera system, a video image will
display in the mirror or the navigation system display (if equipped) when
the vehicle is put in R (Reverse). As you shift into any other gear from R
(Reverse), the image will remain for a few seconds and then turn off.
Refer to Rearview camera system in the Driving chapter.
106

2011 F-150 (f12)

Owners Guide, 3rd Printing
USA (fus)
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
 Driver Controls
EXTERIOR MIRRORS

Power side view mirrors (if equipped)

WARNING: Do not adjust the mirror while the vehicle is in

motion.

To adjust your mirrors:

1. Rotate the control clockwise to
adjust the right mirror and rotate
the control counterclockwise to
adjust the left mirror.
2. Move the control in the direction
you wish to tilt the mirror.
3. Return to the center position to lock mirrors in place.
Memory feature (if equipped)
The power side view mirror positions are saved when doing a memory
set function and can be recalled along with the vehicle personality
features when a memory position is selected through the remote entry
transmitter, keyless entry keypad or memory switch on the driver’s seat.
Refer to Memory seats and mirrors in the Seating and Safety
Restraints chapter.
Automatic dimming feature (if equipped)
The driver’s side view mirror has an auto-dimming function. For more
information, refer to Automatic dimming interior rear view mirror in
this chapter.

107

2011 F-150 (f12)

Owners Guide, 3rd Printing
USA (fus)
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
 Driver Controls
Fold-away mirrors
Fold the side mirrors in carefully
before driving through a narrow
space, like an automatic car wash.
Powerfold mirrors (if equipped)
With powerfold mirrors, you can fold
the side mirrors using the power
mirror switch.
1. Rotate the switch to the
center/neutral position.
2. Momentarily pull the switch
rearward to auto fold in.
3. Momentarily pull the switch rearward again to fold back to design
position.
The powerfold mirrors may be moved inward/outward manually.
However, if a mirror is moved manually, it will need to be reset. A mirror
which has not been reset may appear to be loose. To reset: with the
switch in the center position, momentarily pull the switch rearward to
fold the mirrors in. An audible ⬙click⬙ will be heard indicating
re-synchronization. If the click is not heard, use the switch to fold the
mirrors out, then in, until the click is heard. After that, the mirrors will
operate normally until they are again moved manually.
Note: 10 or more switch activations within one minute, or repeated
folding/unfolding of the mirrors while holding the switch rearward during
full travel, may cause the system to disable the fold/unfold function to
protect motors from overheating. Should this occur, wait approximately
three minutes with the vehicle running and up to 10 minutes with the
vehicle off, for the system to reset and for function to return to normal.
Heated outside mirrors (if equipped)
Heated mirrors remove ice, mist and
fog. To activate the heated mirrors,
press the rear defrost button R
located on the climate control panel.
Refer to Rear window defroster in
the Climate Controls chapter for
more information.
108

2011 F-150 (f12)

Owners Guide, 3rd Printing
USA (fus)
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
 Driver Controls
On vehicles not equipped with rear defrost, press the heated mirror
control located on the climate control panel. For more information
refer to the Climate Controls chapter.
Note: If your vehicle is equipped with the Auto dimming feature, the
mirror glass is thicker and will take longer to defrost.
Do not remove ice from the mirrors with a scraper or attempt to
readjust the mirror glass if it is frozen in place. These actions
could cause damage to the glass and mirrors.
Do not clean the housing or glass of any mirror with harsh
abrasives, fuel or other petroleum-based cleaning products.
Signal indicator mirrors (if equipped)
When the vehicle turn signal is
activated, the lower portion of the
mirror housing will blink.
This feature provides an indicator to
the driver that the vehicle turn
signal is working properly.

Telescoping trailer tow mirrors (if equipped)

The telescoping feature allows the
mirror to extend approximately
3.5 inches (90 mm). This feature is
especially useful to the driver when
towing a trailer. Pull the mirrors
inward carefully when driving
through a narrow space.

Blind spot mirrors (if equipped)

Your vehicle may be equipped with blind spot mirrors. Refer to Blind
spot mirrors in the Driving chapter.
POWER ADJUSTABLE FOOT PEDALS (IF EQUIPPED)
The accelerator and brake pedal should only be adjusted when the
vehicle is stopped and the gearshift lever is in the P (Park) position. The
control is located on the side of the steering column.
109

2011 F-150 (f12)

Owners Guide, 3rd Printing
USA (fus)
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
 Driver Controls
Press and hold the rear of the
control to adjust the pedals toward
you. Press and hold the front of the
control to adjust the pedals away from you.
WARNING: Never adjust the accelerator and brake pedal with
feet on the pedals while the vehicle is moving.

POWER DEPLOYABLE RUNNING BOARDS (IF EQUIPPED)

Deployable running boards (DRB) automatically move when the doors
are opened to assist entering and exiting the vehicle.
Automatic power deploy:
• The running boards will extend
down and out when the doors are
opened.
Automatic power stow:
• The running boards will return to
the stowed position when the
doors are closed. There will be a
two second delay before the
running boards move in to the
stowed position.
Manual power deploy:
To manually operate the running boards, refer to Message center in the
Instrument Cluster chapter.
• This feature can manually set the running boards in the deployed
(OUT) position for access to the roof.
• When running boards are manually set in the deployed position, the
boards will return to the stowed position and enter automatic mode
when the vehicle speed exceeds 5 mph (8 km/h).
Enable/disable:
To enable/disable the power running board feature, refer to Message
center in the Instrument Cluster chapter.
• When this feature is disabled (OFF), the running boards will move to
the stowed position regardless of the position of the doors.
• When this feature is enabled (AUTO), the running boards will move
back to the correct positions based off of the door positions.
110

2011 F-150 (f12)

Owners Guide, 3rd Printing
USA (fus)
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
 Driver Controls
Bounce-back:
• If an object is in the way of the moving running board, the running
board will automatically bounce back in the reverse direction and
move to the end of travel.
Note: The running boards may operate slower in cooler temperatures. In
adverse conditions, debris such as mud, dirt, and salt may become
trapped in the running board mechanism, possibly leading to unwanted
noise. If this occurs, manually set the running boards to the deployed
position and flush the system (in particular the front and rear hinge
arms) with a high-pressure car wash wand.
Note: Do not use the running boards, front and rear hinge assemblies,
running board motors, or the running board under body mounts to lift
the vehicle when jacking. Please utilize proper jacking points. Refer to
Changing the tires in the Roadside Emergencies chapter.
WARNING: In extreme climates, excessive ice buildup may
occur, causing the running boards not to deploy. Be sure that the
running boards have deployed, and have finished moving before
attempting to step on them. Note: The running boards will resume
normal function once the blockage is cleared.

WARNING: Turn off the running boards before jacking or

placing any object under the vehicle. Never place your hand
between the extended running board and the vehicle. A moving
running board may cause injury.

SPEED CONTROL (IF EQUIPPED)

With speed control set, you can maintain a set speed without keeping
your foot on the accelerator pedal.
WARNING: Do not use the speed control in heavy traffic or on
roads that are winding, slippery or unpaved.

111

2011 F-150 (f12)

Owners Guide, 3rd Printing
USA (fus)
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
 Driver Controls
Using speed controls
The speed controls are located on the steering wheel. The following
buttons work with speed control:
– SET +: Press to set a speed or to
increase or decrease the set speed.
CNCL (Cancel)/RSM (Resume):
Press to cancel or resume a set
speed.
ON/OFF: Press to turn speed
control on or off.
The speed control system uses two indicator lights in the
instrument cluster:
• an amber indicator light which illuminates when the system is on, and
• a green indicator light which illuminates when the system is engaged.
Setting speed control
To set speed control:
1. Press and release ON.
2. Accelerate to the desired speed.
3. Press and release SET +.
4. Take your foot off the accelerator pedal.
5. The green indicator light on the instrument cluster will turn on.
Note:
• Vehicle speed may vary momentarily when driving up and down a
steep hill.
• If the vehicle speed increases above the set speed on a downhill, you
may want to apply the brakes to reduce the speed.
• If the vehicle speed decreases more than 10 mph (16 km/h) below
your set speed on an uphill, your speed control will disengage.
Disengaging speed control
To disengage speed control, tap the brake pedal or clutch pedal (if
equipped) or press CNCL.
Disengaging the speed control will not erase the previous set speed.
Note: When you use the clutch pedal to disengage the speed control,
the engine speed may briefly increase, this is normal.
112

2011 F-150 (f12)

Owners Guide, 3rd Printing
USA (fus)
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
 Driver Controls
Resuming a set speed
Press and release RSM. This will automatically return the vehicle to the
previously set speed.
Increasing speed while using speed control
To increase the set speed:
• Press and hold SET + until you get to the desired speed, then release.
You can also use SET + to operate the tap-up function. Press and
release SET + to increase the vehicle set speed in 1 mph (1.6 km/h)
increments.
• Use the accelerator pedal to get to the desired speed then press and
release SET +.

Reducing speed while using speed control

To reduce the set speed:
• Press and hold – SET until you get to the desired speed, then release.
You can also use – SET to operate the tap-down function. Press and
release – SET to decrease the vehicle set speed in 1 mph (1.6 km/h)
increments.
• Press the brake pedal or the clutch pedal (if equipped) until the
desired vehicle speed is reached then press SET +.

Turning off speed control

To turn off the speed control, press OFF or turn off the ignition.
Note: When you turn off the speed control or the ignition, your speed
control set speed memory is erased.

113

2011 F-150 (f12)

Owners Guide, 3rd Printing
USA (fus)
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
 Driver Controls
STEERING WHEEL CONTROLS (IF EQUIPPED)

Radio control features

– VOL + (Volume): Press to
decrease or increase the volume.
(Seek): Press to select
the previous/next radio station
preset, CD track or satellite radio
station preset depending on which
media mode you are in.
MEDIA: Press repeatedly to scroll
through available audio modes.
Navigation system hands-free
control features (if equipped)
Press and hold control briefly
until the voice icon appears on
the navigation display to use the
voice command feature.
Press to complete a voice
command.
For further information on the
navigation system, refer to the Navigation System supplement.
SYNC威 system hands-free
control feature (if equipped)
Press briefly to use the voice
command feature. You will hear a
tone and LISTENING will appear in
the radio display. Press and
hold to exit voice command.
Press to activate phone mode or
answer a phone call. Press and
hold to end a call or exit phone
mode.
Press to scroll through various menus and selections. Press
OK to confirm your selection.
114

2011 F-150 (f12)

Owners Guide, 3rd Printing
USA (fus)
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
 Driver Controls
For further information on the SYNC威 system, refer to the SYNC威
supplement.
Navigation system/SYNC威
hands-free control features (if
equipped)
Press control briefly until the
voice icon appears on the
Navigation display to use the voice
command feature.
Press to activate phone mode or
answer a phone call. Press and
hold to exit phone mode or end
a call.
For further information on the Navigation system/SYNC威 system, refer to
the Navigation System and SYNC威 supplements.

MOON ROOF (IF EQUIPPED)

The moon roof control is located on the overhead console.
WARNING: Do not let children play with the moon roof or leave
children unattended in the vehicle. They may seriously hurt
themselves.

WARNING: When closing the moon roof, you should verify that
it is free of obstructions and ensure that children and/or pets are
not in the proximity of the moon roof opening.

The moon roof is equipped with an automatic, one-touch, express

opening and closing feature. To stop motion at any time during the
one-touch operation, press the control a second time.

115

2011 F-150 (f12)

Owners Guide, 3rd Printing
USA (fus)
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
 Driver Controls
To open the moon roof: Press and
release the SLIDE control, the moon
roof will open automatically. Press
the switch again to stop the moon
roof.
To close the moon roof: Pull and
release the SLIDE control, the moon
roof will close automatically. Press
the switch again to stop the moon
roof.
Bounce-back: When an obstacle has been detected in the moon roof
opening as the moon roof is closing, the moon roof will automatically
open and stop at a prescribed position.
Bounce-back override: To override bounce-back function, pull and hold
the SLIDE switch within two seconds of a bounce-back event. The
closing force will begin to increase each time the moon roof is closed for
the first three closing cycles, with bounce-back active. For example:
Bounce-back can be used to overcome the resistance of ice on the moon
roof or seals
To vent the moon roof: Press and release the TILT control, the moon
roof will move to the vent position automatically from any moon roof
position. Press the switch again to stop the moon roof. Pull and hold the
TILT control to close the moon roof.
The moon roof has a built-in sliding shade that can be manually opened
or closed when the glass panel is shut. To close the shade, pull it toward
the front of the vehicle.

UNIVERSAL GARAGE DOOR OPENER (IF EQUIPPED)

Your vehicle may be equipped with a universal garage door opener which
can be used to replace the common hand-held transmitter.

116

2011 F-150 (f12)

Owners Guide, 3rd Printing
USA (fus)
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
 Driver Controls
Car2U姞 Home Automation System (if equipped)
The Car2U威 Home Automation
System is a universal transmitter
located in the driver’s visor that
includes two primary features – a
garage door opener and a platform
for remote activation of devices
within the home. The Car2U威
system’s garage door opener
function replaces the common
hand-held garage door opener with a three-button transmitter that is
integrated into the interior of your vehicle. After being programmed for
garage doors, the Car2U威 system transmitter can be programmed to
operate security devices and home lighting systems.
WARNING: Make sure that people and objects are clear of the
garage door or security device you are programming. Do not
program the Car2U威 system with the vehicle in the garage.

Do not use the Car2U威 system with any garage door opener that lacks
safety stop and reverse features as required by U.S. Federal Safety
Standards (this includes any garage door opener manufactured before
April 1, 1982).
Be sure to keep the original remote control transmitter for use in other
vehicles as well as for future Car2U威 system programming. It is also
recommended that upon the sale or lease termination of the vehicle, the
programmed Car2U威 system buttons should be erased for security
reasons. Refer to Erasing the Car2U威 Home Automation System
buttons later in this section.
Read the instructions completely before attempting to program the
Car2U威 system. Because of the steps involved, it may be helpful to have
another person assist you in programming the transmitter.
Additional Car2U威 system information can be found on-line at
www.learcar2U.com or by calling the toll-free Car2U威 system help line at
1-866-572-2728.
Types of garage door openers (rolling code and fixed code)
The Car2U威 Home Automation System may be programmed to operate
rolling code and fixed code garage door openers.
• Rolling code garage door openers were produced after 1996 and are
code protected. Rolling code means the coded signal is changed every
time your remote control garage door opener is used.
117

2011 F-150 (f12)

Owners Guide, 3rd Printing
USA (fus)
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
 Driver Controls
• Fixed code garage door openers were produced prior to 1996. Fixed
code uses the same coded signal every time. It is manually
programmed by setting DIP switches for a unique personal code.
If you do not know if your garage
door opener is a rolling code or 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12
O
N
fixed code device, open your garage
door opener’s remote control battery CTS 206-12 T124

cover. If a panel of DIP switches is

present your garage door opener is
a fixed code device. If not, your
garage door opener is a rolling code
device.

Note: Programming the Car2U威 system to a community gate will require

a unique set of instructions depending on the gate system model.
Contact the Car2U威 help line at 1-866-572-2728 to program your Car2U威
system.
Note: Accidentally entering the program mode may override previously
programmed buttons. This can happen by pressing and releasing the
outer two buttons, or all three buttons, simultaneously. If this happens,
do not press any button until the module times out after approximately
2.5 seconds and resets to normal mode. When time-out occurs, all three
LEDs will flash rapidly for a few seconds then turn off. Any settings
should remain as previously set.
Rolling code programming
Note: Programming the rolling code garage door opener involves
time-sensitive actions. Read the entire procedure prior to beginning so
you will know which actions are time-sensitive. If you do not follow the
time-sensitive actions, the device will time out and you will have to
repeat the procedure.
Note: Do not program the Car2U威 system with the vehicle in the garage.
Make sure that your key is on and engine off while programming the
transmitter.

118

2011 F-150 (f12)

Owners Guide, 3rd Printing
USA (fus)
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
 Driver Controls
1. Firmly press the two outer
Car2U威 system buttons for
1–2 seconds, then release.

2. Go to the garage to locate the

garage door opener motor and its
“learn” button. You may need a
ladder to reach the unit and you
may need to remove the unit’s cover
or light lens to locate the “learn”
button. Press the “learn” button,
after which you will have
10–30 seconds to return to your
vehicle and complete the following
steps. If you cannot locate the
“learn” button, refer to the Owner’s Guide of your garage door opener or
call the toll-free Car2U威 system help line at 1-866-57Car2U
(1-866-572-2728).
3. Return to your vehicle. Press and
hold the Car2U威 system button you
would like to use to control the
garage door. You may need to hold
the button from 5–20 seconds,
during which time the selected
button indicator light will blink
slowly. Immediately (within
1 second) release the button once the garage door moves. When the
button is released, the indicator light will begin to blink rapidly until
programming is complete.
4. Press and release the button again. The garage door should move,
confirming that programming is successful. If your garage door does not
operate, repeat the previous steps in this section.
After successful programming, you will be able to operate your Car2U威
system by pressing the button you programmed to activate the opener.
119

2011 F-150 (f12)

Owners Guide, 3rd Printing
USA (fus)
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
 Driver Controls
The indicator light above the selected button will turn on to confirm that
the Car2U威 system is responding to the button command.
To program another rolling code device such as an additional garage door
opener, a security device or home lighting, repeat Steps 1 through 4
substituting a different function button in Step 3 than what you used for
the garage door opener. For example, you could assign the left-most
button to the garage door, the center button to a security device, and
the right-most button to another garage door opener.
Note: The Car2U威 system allows for three devices to be programmed. If
you need to change or replace any of the three devices after it has been
initially programmed, it is necessary to erase the current settings using
the Erasing the Car2U威 Home Automation System buttons procedure
and then programming all of the devices being used.
Fixed code programming
Note: Do not program the Car2U威 system with the vehicle in the garage.
Make sure that your key is on and engine off while programming the
transmitter.
1. To program units with fixed code DIP switches, you will need the
garage door hand-held transmitter, paper and a pen or pencil.
2. Open the battery cover and record the switch settings from left to
right for all 8 to 12 switches. Use the figure below:
When a switch is in the up, on, or + position, circle “L.”
When a switch is in the middle, neutral, or 0 position, circle “M.”
When a switch is in the down, off, or – position, circle “R.”

120

2011 F-150 (f12)

Owners Guide, 3rd Printing
USA (fus)
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
 Driver Controls

Switch
position 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12
Up, on
L L L L L L L L L L L L
or +
Middle,
neutral M M M M M M M M M M M M
or 0
Down,
R R R R R R R R R R R R
off or –
L=left; M=middle; R=right
3. To input these positions into the
Car2U威 system, simultaneously
press all three Car2U威 system
buttons for a few seconds and then
release to put the device into
programming mode. The indicator
lights will blink slowly. Within
2.5 minutes enter your
corresponding DIP switch settings
from left to right into your Car2U威 system by pressing and releasing the
buttons corresponding to the settings you circled.
4. After inputting switch settings, simultaneously press and release all
three Car2U威 system buttons. The indicator lights will turn on.
5. Press and hold the Car2U威
system button you would like to use
to control the garage door.
Immediately (within 1 second)
release the button once the garage
door moves. During this time the
selected button indicator light will
blink slowly. Do not release the
button until you see the garage door move. Most garage doors open
quickly. You may need to hold the button from 5–55 seconds before
observing movement of the garage door.
6. The indicator light will (begin to) blink rapidly until programming is
complete. If your garage door opener does not operate following these
steps, repeat Steps 2 through 6. Otherwise, call the toll-free Car2U威 help
line at 1-866-57Car2U (1-866-572-2728).
121

2011 F-150 (f12)

Owners Guide, 3rd Printing
USA (fus)
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
 Driver Controls
After successful programming, you will be able to operate your Car2U威
system by pressing the button you programmed to activate the opener.
The indicator light above the selected button will turn on to confirm that
the Car2U威 system is responding to the button command.
Erasing the Car2U姞 Home Automation System buttons
Note: The system allows for three devices to be programmed. If you
need to change or replace any of the three devices after it has been
initially programmed, it will be necessary to erase the current settings
using the procedure below and then reprogramming all of the devices
being used.
To erase programming on the Car2U威 system (individual buttons cannot
be erased), use the following procedure:
1. Firmly press the two outside
Car2U威 system buttons
simultaneously for approximately
20 seconds until the indicator lights
begin to blink rapidly. The indicator
lights are located directly above the
buttons.
2. Once the indicator lights begin to
blink, release your fingers from the
buttons. The codes for all buttons
are erased.
If you sell your vehicle equipped with the Car2U威 system, it is
recommended that you erase the programming for security reasons.
FCC and RSS-210 Industry Canada Compliance
The Car2U威 system complies with Part 15 of the FCC rules and with
RSS-210 of Industry Canada. Operation is subject to the following two
conditions: (1) This device may not cause harmful interference, and (2)
This device must accept any interference received including interference
that may cause undesired operation.
Changes and modifications to the Car2U威 system transmitter by other
than an authorized service facility could void authorization to use the
equipment.

122

2011 F-150 (f12)

Owners Guide, 3rd Printing
USA (fus)
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
 Driver Controls
POSITIVE RETENTION FLOOR MAT (IF EQUIPPED)
WARNING: Always use
floor mats that are designed
to fit the foot well of your vehicle.
Only use floor mats that leave the
pedal area unobstructed. Only use
floor mats that are firmly secured
to retention posts so that they
cannot slip out of position and
interfere with the pedals or impair
safe operation of your vehicle in
other ways.
• Pedals that cannot move freely can cause loss of vehicle control and
increase the risk of serious personal injury.
• Always make sure that the floor mats are properly attached to the
retention posts in the carpet that are supplied with your vehicle.
Floor mats must be properly secured to both retention posts to
ensure mats do not shift out of position.
• Never place floor mats or any other covering in the vehicle foot well
that cannot be properly secured to prevent them from moving and
interfering with the pedals or the ability to control the vehicle.
• Never place floor mats or any other covering on top of already
installed floor mats. Floor mats should always rest on top of vehicle
carpeting surface and not another floor mat or other covering.
Additional floor mats or any other covering will reduce the pedal
clearance and potentially interfere with pedal operation.
• Check attachment of floor mats on a regular basis. Always properly
reinstall and secure floor mats that have been removed for cleaning
or replacement.
• Always make sure that objects cannot fall into the driver foot well
while the vehicle is moving. Objects that are loose can become
trapped under the pedals causing a loss of vehicle control.
• Failure to properly follow floor mat installation or attachment
instructions can potentially cause interference with pedal operation
causing loss of control of vehicle.
• To install floor mats, position the floor mat so that the eyelet is over
the retention post and press down to lock in.
• To remove the floor mat, reverse the installation procedure.

123

2011 F-150 (f12)

Owners Guide, 3rd Printing
USA (fus)
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
 Driver Controls
TAILGATE LOCK
Your vehicle may be equipped with a
tailgate lock designed to help
prevent theft of the tailgate.
• Insert ignition key and turn to the
right to engage lock.
• Turn ignition key to the left to
unlock.

Tailgate removal
Your tailgate is removable to allow more room for loading.
WARNING: Always properly secure cargo to prevent shifting
cargo or cargo falling from vehicle, which could result in
compromised vehicle stability and serious personal injury to vehicle
occupants or others.

Note: If equipped with a rearview camera system, do Steps 1 through 3

before removing the tailgate.
1. Before removal of the tailgate,
locate and disconnect the tailgate
in-line connector under the pickup
box on the passenger side of the
vehicle near the spare tire.
2. Install a protective cap (located
in the glove box) onto the in-line
rearview camera system connector
that remains under the pickup box.
3. Partially lower tailgate and
carefully feed tailgate harness up through the gap between the pickup
box and the bumper. Place the tailgate harness out of the way under the
pickup box.

124

2011 F-150 (f12)

Owners Guide, 3rd Printing
USA (fus)
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
 Driver Controls
4. Lower the tailgate.
5. Using a screwdriver, gently pry
the spring clip (on each connector)
past the head of the support screw.
Disconnect cable.
6. Disconnect the other cable.
7. Lift tailgate to a 45-degree angle
from horizontal.
8. Lift right side off of its hinge.
9. Lift tailgate to a 80-degree angle from horizontal.
10. Remove tailgate from left side hinge by sliding tailgate to the right.
To install, follow the removal procedures in reverse order.
Tailgate step (if equipped)
Your vehicle may be equipped with a feature that allows easier entry into
the truck bed. To open the tailgate step:
1. Flip down the tailgate.
2. Pull the yellow latch lever to the
unlock position ( ) to release the
grab handle from its stowed position
and raise the handle upright until
you feel it latch and see the latch
lever in the lock position ( ). The
yellow lever only needs to be used
when releasing the grab handle.

3. Rotate the center molding to

unlatch the tailgate step and pull it
towards you to extend it.
4. Flip open the step panel to widen
the step.
Note: To reduce risk of falling:
• Operate step only when the
vehicle is on level surface.
• Operate step only in areas with
sufficient lighting
• Always open flip panel to widen step.
125

2011 F-150 (f12)

Owners Guide, 3rd Printing
USA (fus)
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
 Driver Controls
• Always use grab handle when stepping up and down.
• Step not intended for bare-footed use.
• Keep step clean from contamination before use (e.g. snow, mud)
• Keep the step load (you + load) below 350 lb (159 kg).
• Never drive with step deployed.
To close the tailgate step:
1. Close the step panel, then lift and fully close the tailgate step into the
tailgate.
2. Slide the latch at the bottom of the handle, then lower the handle.
Note:
• Fully close and latch the tailgate step before moving the vehicle.
• Never drive with the step or grab handle deployed.
• Replace slip resistance tape (serviceable item) if worn out.
• Replace handle molding (serviceable item) if damaged.
• Do not tow with grab handle or step frame.

Box side step (if equipped)

Your vehicle may be equipped with a box side step that allows easier
access to the truck bed.
Note: Do not drive vehicle with box side step(s) in the deployed
position.
Note: The box side step load carrying capability (1 person + cargo) is
500 lb (227 kg). Do not exceed 500 lb (227 kg).

126

2011 F-150 (f12)

Owners Guide, 3rd Printing
USA (fus)
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
 Driver Controls

To deploy the box side step, with your foot, push down on the button.
The step will automatically extend out from the stowed position.
Note: The box side steps may operate slower in cooler temperatures. In
adverse conditions, debris such as mud, dirt, snow, ice, and salt may
become trapped in the box side step mechanism, possibly causing the
box side step to not deploy automatically after pressing the button. If
this occurs, ensure that the button is pressed down, carefully manually
pull out the box side step, wash off the debris with a high-pressure car
wash wand, and re-stow the step.

To stow the box side step, with your foot, push the box side step under
the truck until fully latched. Do not push on the button while stowing
the box side step.
Note: Do not use the box side steps to lift the vehicle when jacking.
Utilize proper jacking points. Refer to Changing the tires in the
Roadside Emergencies chapter.

127

2011 F-150 (f12)

Owners Guide, 3rd Printing
USA (fus)
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
 Driver Controls
BED EXTENDER (IF EQUIPPED)
Your vehicle may be equipped with a cargo management feature in the
truck bed.
Note: This feature is not intended for off-road usage.
To open the bed extender into tailgate mode:
1. Pull the locking pin toward the
center of the vehicle.

2. Open the latches to release the

panels.

3. Rotate the panels toward the

tailgate.

Repeat Steps 1–3 for the other side of the bed extender.

128

2011 F-150 (f12)

Owners Guide, 3rd Printing
USA (fus)
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
 Driver Controls

4. Connect the two panels, then rotate both knobs a quarter-turn

clockwise to secure the panels.
5. Ensure the latch rod is inserted
into the tailgate hole and the locking
pins on both sides are engaged into
their holes in the pick-up box.
6. Reverse steps for storage of the
bed extender.

Note: When the vehicle is in motion, ensure the locking pins and knobs
are fully engaged.
Note: Ensure all cargo is secured.
Note: When the vehicle is in motion, the tailgate load must not exceed
150 lb (68 kg).
Note: The bed extender should always be kept in the grocery mode or
stowed position with the tailgate closed when not being used for the
purpose of restraining cargo in the tailgate mode.

129

2011 F-150 (f12)

Owners Guide, 3rd Printing
USA (fus)
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
 Driver Controls

To open the bed extender into grocery mode, follow Steps 1–4 by
rotating the panels away from the tailgate. Close the tailgate.

CARGO MANAGEMENT SYSTEM (IF EQUIPPED)

The cargo management system consists of the Cargo rail package with
the following as optional accessories:
• Front header bar (if equipped)
• Cross bars (if equipped)
• Bed divider (if equipped)
• Side mounted tool bins (if equipped)

130

2011 F-150 (f12)

Owners Guide, 3rd Printing
USA (fus)
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
 Driver Controls
Cargo rail package: The strong extruded aluminum double channel
rails and four adjustable cleats are designed to hold loads up to 600 lb
(272 kg) per cleat (maximum of two cleats per rail).

• Cleat positions are adjusted by pulling the knob and turning slightly to
lock open. The cleat can then be moved along the rail. Once the
desired position is reached, return the knob to the horizontal position.
Pull the cleat side-to-side to ensure it has locked into the next
available hole location.
• To remove cleat from rail, pull the knob and turn slightly to lock open
and slide it off the end of the rail.
When installing cleat, reverse instructions above.
Note: When replacing a cleat into the rail, make sure the oval embossed
on the knob is not upside down. This will ensure that the cleat is
properly oriented to accept accessory attachments.

131

2011 F-150 (f12)

Owners Guide, 3rd Printing
USA (fus)
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
 Driver Controls
Front header bar: Spans the header area of the pickup box, providing
the function of a header rail.

• Attachment cleats from side rails or other attachments may be

positioned in the front header bar to secure loads up to 600 lb
(272 kg) per cleat (maximum of two cleats).
• Cleats and other attachments may be inserted through the access
window located in the center of the header bar. These items can then
be slid to either side, and secured the same way as the side rails.

132

2011 F-150 (f12)

Owners Guide, 3rd Printing
USA (fus)
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
 Driver Controls
Cross bars: Aluminum cross bars with T-slot channels in all four sides,
and a latch mechanism that allows the end supports to snap over the
existing cleats. Cross bars are rated to hold loads up to 100 lb (45 kg)
load evenly distributed between the two crossbars, and the T-slots are
sized to accept industry-standard roof rack accessories.

• To remove cross bar, lift handle on each side and lift end support
shroud off of the cleat.
• To install cross bar, align cleats directly across from each other on the
same rail (upper or lower). Then place crossbar end support onto
cleat and press down on each side until the latch handle cycles up and
then press the handle down to secure (pull up on the bars to ensure
they are securely attached).
• To install accessories into T-slots, remove cross bar and turn upside
down, then find the slip joint end, indicated with an arrow embossed
on the bottom of the support. Using a T25 Torx driver, remove two
Torx head bolts from bottom, and slide end support off of aluminum
extrusion. Insert accessory into desired T-slot, and install end support.
When tightening Torx head bolts, hand tightening with a Torx driver is
sufficient, DO NOT over torque by using a ratchet.

133

2011 F-150 (f12)

Owners Guide, 3rd Printing
USA (fus)
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
 Driver Controls
Bed divider: This panel will keep small items up to 400 lb (180 kg) in
position in the pickup box. Also includes T-slots to allow attachment of
industry-standard roof rack accessories.

• To remove bed divider, lift handle on each side and lift end support
shroud off of the cleat.
• To install bed divider, align cleats directly across from each other on
the lower rail. Then place divider end support onto the cleats and
press down on each side until the latch handle cycles up then press
the handle down to secure (pull up on the divider to ensure they are
securely attached).
• To install accessories into T-slots, remove bed divider, then find the
slip joint end, indicated with an arrow embossed on the support. Using
a T25 Torx driver, remove two Torx head bolts and slide end support
off of the aluminum extrusion. Insert accessory into desired T-slot and
install end support. When tightening Torx head bolts, hand tightening
with a Torx driver is sufficient, DO NOT over torque by using a
ratchet.

134

2011 F-150 (f12)

Owners Guide, 3rd Printing
USA (fus)
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
 Driver Controls
Side mounted tool bins: Watertight bins can be positioned at any point
along the side rails and can be easily removed (even when full), and
carried to wherever the contents are needed. Each bin will hold up to
60 lb (27 kg) of cargo, and has a drain plug for use as a cooler. Note:
When multiple bins are placed on one side of the pickup box, the total
cargo weight in all bins on that side of the pickup box cannot exceed
60 lb (27 kg).

• To access the lock, pull the tab at the base of the rubber cap to
uncover the lock. When you are done with the lock always reinstall
the rubber cap on the lock to ensure proper sealing. When the bin is
unlocked the rubber cap does not need to be removed to open the
bin, just press the rubber cap to unlatch the lid.
• The lock cylinder is keyed to the first ignition key to be turned in the
lock. This allows one key to work all bins, even if more are ordered
through the dealer. The dealer will usually key the locks during
pre-delivery, but if necessary, simply remove the sticker covering the
keyhole, insert ignition key and turn to the extent of travel in each
direction. This key will then be the only key to unlock the bin.
• Once the key has been set, simply turn the key to the right to lock, or
to the left to unlock. When locked, the push-button will not depress
when pushed.

135

2011 F-150 (f12)

Owners Guide, 3rd Printing
USA (fus)
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
 Driver Controls
• To remove the bin from the rail, open lid and pull up on both levers
located on the outboard edge (next to the pickup box top rail) until
the handles are all the way up (approximately 90 degrees). Once both
handles are raised, the lid may be closed. Note: Windows in the lid
will allow the handles to stick up above the lid (with the lid closed).
After closing the lid, simply lift up and inboard away from the pickup
box side to release bin from rail.
• To install, reverse the above instructions.
Note: Remove the bins during severe off-road driving to avoid damage to
the cargo bins and pickup box.
WARNING: If any levers are visible above the lid of the bin, the
bin is not securely attached to the rail, and may become
detached from the vehicle if driven in that configuration.

136

2011 F-150 (f12)

Owners Guide, 3rd Printing
USA (fus)
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
 Locks and Security
KEYS
Your vehicle may be equipped with
two integrated keyhead transmitters
(IKTs). The key blade functions as a
programmed key which starts the
vehicle and unlocks/locks all the
doors. The transmitter portion
functions as the remote entry
transmitter.
Your IKTs are programmed to your vehicle; using a non-programmed key
will not permit your vehicle to start. If you lose one or both of your
original programmed IKTs, replacement IKTs are available through your
authorized dealer. Standard SecuriLock威 keys without remote entry
transmitter functionality can also be purchased from your authorized
dealer if desired.
Always carry a spare key with you in case of an emergency.
For more information regarding programming replacement IKTs, refer to
the SecuriLock威 passive anti-theft system section later in this chapter.
Note: Your vehicle’s IKTs were
issued with a security tag that
provides important vehicle key cut
information. It is recommended that
you keep the tag in a safe place for
future reference.

MYKEY姞 (IF EQUIPPED)

The MyKey威 feature allows you to program a restricted driving mode to
promote good driving habits. All but one of the keys programmed to the
vehicle can be activated as a MyKey威. The key will remain restricted
until MyKey威 is cleared. Any remaining keys are referred to as an
“administrator key” or admin key. The admin key can be used to create a
MyKey威, program optional MyKey威 settings, and clear the MyKey威
feature. When the MyKey威 feature is enabled the user can use the
system check in the message center to see how many MyKeys™ and
admin keys are programmed to the vehicle, and how many total miles
have been driven with the MyKey威 active.

137

2011 F-150 (f12)

Owners Guide, 3rd Printing
USA (fus)
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
 Locks and Security
MyKey威 restricted features
Standard settings – These settings cannot be changed
• The audio system will be muted whenever Belt-Minder威 is activated
until the safety belts are buckled. Refer to the Seating and Safety
Restraints chapter for a detailed description of Belt-Minder威 operation.
• Low fuel warnings are displayed in the message center followed by a
chime when the vehicle has only 1/8 tank of fuel.
• If equipped, any of the following: parking aid, Blind Spot Information
System (BLIS™) with cross traffic alert and forward collision warning
systems cannot be turned off.
Optional settings – These settings can be changed
• Vehicle speed is limited to 80 mph (130 km/h). Visual warnings are
displayed followed by a chime when the vehicle speed has reached
80 mph (130 km/h).
• Visual warnings are displayed followed by a chime when a preselected
vehicle speed of 45, 55 or 65 mph (75, 90, or 105 km/h) is exceeded.
• The maximum volume of the audio system is limited to 45%. MYKEY
VOLUME LIMITED will be displayed in the radio or navigation screen
(if equipped) when attempting to exceed the limited volume.
• The AdvanceTrac威 system cannot be turned off. When this optional
setting is on, the MyKey威 user will not be able to deactivate the
system. Note: It may be beneficial to deactivate the AdvanceTrac威
system if the vehicle is stuck in snow, mud, or sand.
Create a MyKey威
To program MyKey威 on one of the keys programmed to the vehicle,
insert the key that you want to make a MyKey威 into the ignition. (For
vehicles equipped with push button start, put the intelligent access key
in the backup slot with the buttons facing out of the slot; see the
Driving chapter for the location of the backup slot.) Turn the ignition
on. Use the message center buttons to do the following:
For standard message center:
1. Press SETUP until PRESS RESET TO CREATE MYKEY is displayed.
2. Press and release the RESET button. HOLD RESET TO CONFIRM
MYKEY will be displayed.
3. Press and hold the RESET button for two seconds until MARK THIS
AS RESTRICTED is displayed.
4. Wait until KEY RESTRICTED AT NEXT START is displayed.
138

2011 F-150 (f12)

Owners Guide, 3rd Printing
USA (fus)
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
 Locks and Security
For optional message center:
1. At the main menu screen select SETTING then MYKEY by pressing
OK or the right arrow key.
2. Press OK to select CREATE MYKEY.
3. Hold OK as prompted until you see MARK THIS KEY AS
RESTRICTED.
MyKey威 is successfully programmed. Make sure you label it so you can
distinguish it from the admin keys. Note: To program the optional
settings go to Step 2 in the Programming MyKey威 optional settings
section. If your vehicle is equipped with remote start, see the Using
MyKey威 with remote start systems section.
Note: The MyKey威 can be cleared within the same key cycle that it was
created, otherwise a standard key (administrator key) is required to
clear the MyKey威 programming. To clear all MyKeys威 go to Step 2 in the
Clear MyKey威 section.
Programming MyKey威 optional settings
To program the optional settings, use the message center buttons to do
the following:
For standard message center:
1. Press SETUP until RESET FOR MYKEY SETTINGS is displayed.
2. Press and release the RESET button to display MyKey威 setup menus.
The first menu shown is:
MYKEY MAX MPH <80 MPH> OFF
3. If you don’t want to change the maximum speed setting, press the
SETUP button to display the next menu. The remaining menus appear as
follows with the default settings shown:
MYKEY MPH TONES 45 55 65 <OFF>
MYKEY VOLUME LIMIT <ON> OFF
MYKEY ADVTRAC CTRL ON <OFF>.
4. On any of the menus press RESET to highlight your choice with the
<…>.
5. Press SETUP to enter your choice. The next optional setting will be
displayed.
6. Repeat Steps 4 and 5 until you are done changing the optional
settings.

139

2011 F-150 (f12)

Owners Guide, 3rd Printing
USA (fus)
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
 Locks and Security
For optional message center:
1. At the main menu screen select SETTING then MYKEY by pressing
OK or the right arrow key.
2. Use the up and down arrows to get to any of the optional features.
3. Press the right arrow key to bring up the settings available for each
feature.
4. Press OK or the right arrow key to make your choice.
Clear MyKey威
To reset all MyKeys威 as admin keys do the following:
For standard message center:
1. Turn the vehicle on using the admin key.
2. Press SETUP until PRESS RESET TO CLEAR MYKEY is displayed.
3. Press and release the RESET button. HOLD RESET TO CONFIRM
CLEAR is displayed.
4. Press and hold the RESET button for two seconds until ALL MYKEYS
CLEARED is displayed.
For optional message center:
1. At the main menu screen select SETTING then MYKEY by pressing
OK or the right arrow key.
2. Press the down arrow key to get to CLEAR MYKEYS.
3. Hold OK until you see ALL MYKEYS CLEARED.
Check MyKey威 system status
The vehicle system check will provide the status of the following MyKey威
parameters:
• MYKEY MILES — This odometer only tracks distance when a MyKey威
is used. If mileage does not accumulate as expected, then the MyKey威
is not being used by the intended user. The only way to reset this
odometer to zero is by clearing MyKey威. If this odometer is lower than
the last time you checked, then the MyKey威 system has been recently
cleared.
• # MYKEY(S) PROGRAMMED — Indicates how many MyKeys威 are
programmed to the vehicle. Can be used to detect deletion of a
MyKey威.
• # ADMIN KEYS PROGRAMMED — Indicates how many admin keys
are programmed to the vehicle. Can be used to detect if an additional
spare key has been programmed to the vehicle
140

2011 F-150 (f12)

Owners Guide, 3rd Printing
USA (fus)
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
 Locks and Security
Refer to Message center in the Instrument Cluster chapter for MyKey威
system warnings displays.
Using MyKey威 with remote start systems
MyKey威 is not compatible with non Ford-approved aftermarket remote
start systems. If you choose to install a remote start system please see
your authorized dealer for a Ford approved remote start system.
The following information MAY help customers who choose to use a non
Ford-approved remote start system. The actions proved below do not
make MyKey威 compatible with non Ford-approved remote start system,
but it MAY help you to retain some MyKey威 functions.
Vehicles equipped with traditional keys
When using a non Ford-approved remote start system, the default
settings may recognize the remote start system as an additional admin
key with its associated privileges. This makes it NOT compatible with
MyKey威. The following action may help you to retain some MyKey威
functions:
1. Restart the engine when you insert a key into the ignition cylinder.
2. In addition to the key that you have already programmed as a
MyKey威, owners of vehicles equipped with traditional keys may want to
program the non Ford-approved remote start system as a MyKey威 if the
remote start fob is used by the MyKey威 driver.
To program a non Ford-approved remote start system as MyKey威, do the
following:
1. Enter the vehicle and close all doors.
2. Remote start the vehicle using a remote start fob.
3. Follow steps 1-4 in the Create a MyKey威 section.
Vehicles equipped with intelligent access key (push button start)
• It is not possible to program any remote start system as MyKey威 on
vehicles equipped with an intelligent access key (push button start).
Therefore, you should treat the remote start fob as you would any
other admin key. When the vehicle is started using remote start, the
system will stall the engine when you either enter the vehicle or shift
the vehicle into gear. Prior to the engine stall, the vehicle will have
administrative privileges. When you restart the engine, the vehicle will
identify the user as an admin or MyKey威 drive depending on the
settings of the actual key used to start the vehicle.

141

2011 F-150 (f12)

Owners Guide, 3rd Printing
USA (fus)
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
 Locks and Security
Note: For all vehicles, the number of MYKEY(S) PROGRAMMED or
ADMIN KEYS PROGRAMMED that is displayed in the MyKey威 system
status menus will include the non Ford-approved remote start system as
an additional key in the total count. See the Check MyKey威 system
status section.
Note: For all vehicles with a non Ford-approved remote start installed, it
is possible to program all “real” keys as MyKeys威, in which case, you will
need to use your remote start system to reset all MyKeys威 as admin keys
by doing the following:
1. Enter the vehicle, close all doors.
2. Remote start the vehicle using your remote start fob.
3. Follow steps 1-4 in the Clear MyKey威 section.
Using MyKey威 with remote start systems
MyKey威 is not compatible with non Ford-approved aftermarket remote
start systems. If you choose to install a remote start system please see
your authorized dealer for a Ford-approved remote start system.
When using a Ford-approved remote start system, the default settings
will recognize the remote start system as an additional admin key with
its associated privileges. Owners of vehicles equipped with traditional
keys should program the remote start system as a MyKey威 in addition to
the key that they have already programmed as a MyKey威. To program
the remote start system as MyKey威, do the following:
1. Enter the vehicle and close all doors.
2. Remote start the vehicle using a remote start fob.
3. Follow Steps 1-4 in the Create a MyKey威 section.
Note: For all vehicles, the number of MYKEY(S) PROGRAMMED or
ADMIN KEYS PROGRAMMED that is displayed in the MyKey威 system
status menus will include the remote start system as an additional key in
the total count. See the Check MyKey威 system status section.
Note: For all vehicles with remote start installed, it is possible to
program all “real” keys as MyKeys威, in which case, you will need to use
your remote start system to reset all MyKeys威 as admin keys by doing
the following:
1. Enter the vehicle, close all doors.
2. Remote start the vehicle using your remote start fob.
3. Follow Steps 1-4 in the Clear MyKey威 section.
142

2011 F-150 (f12)

Owners Guide, 3rd Printing
USA (fus)
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
 Locks and Security
Troubleshooting
Condition Potential Causes
Can’t create a MyKey威 • Key in the ignition is already a
MyKey威.
• Key in the ignition is the last
remaining admin key (there always
has to be at least one admin key).
• SecuriLock威 passive anti-theft
system is disabled or in unlimited
mode.
• Vehicle has been started using a
non Ford-approved remote start
system that is programmed as
MyKey威. Refer to Using MyKey威 with
remote start systems section.
Cannot program the MyKey威 • Key in the ignition is a MyKey威.
optional settings • No MyKeys威 are programmed to the
vehicle. Refer to Create a MyKey威
section.
• Vehicle has been started using a
non Ford-approved remote start
system that is programmed as
MyKey威. Refer to Using MyKey威 with
remote start systems section.
Cannot clear MyKey威 • Key in the ignition is a MyKey威 .
• No MyKeys威 are programmed to the
vehicle. Refer to Create a MyKey威
section.
• Vehicle has been started using a
non Ford-approved remote start
system that is programmed as
MyKey威. Refer to Using MyKey威 with
remote start systems section.
Lost the only admin key • Purchase a new key from your
authorized dealer.

143

2011 F-150 (f12)

Owners Guide, 3rd Printing
USA (fus)
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
 Locks and Security

Condition Potential Causes

Lost any key • For programming spare keys, refer
to the Programming spare keys
section in this chapter.
I accidentally programmed all • Vehicle has a non Ford-approved
keys as MyKeys威 remote start system that is recognized
as an admin key. Refer to the Using
MyKey威 with remote start systems
section to reset all MyKeys威 as admin
keys.
No MyKey威 function with (if • An admin intelligent access key is
equipped) intelligent access present at a push-and-start vehicle.
key with push button start • No MyKeys威 are programmed to the
vehicle. Refer to Create a MyKey威
section.
• Vehicle has been started using a
non Ford-approved remote start
system (as an admin key) then a
MyKey威 is inserted without restarting
the engine.
MyKey威 programmed total • Unknown key has been programmed
includes one additional key to the vehicle as a MyKey威.
• Vehicle is equipped with a non
Ford-approved remote start system.
Refer to Using MyKey威 with remote
start systems section.
Admin keys programmed total • Unknown key has been programmed
includes one additional key to the vehicle as admin key.
• Vehicle is equipped with a non
Ford-approved remote start system.
Refer to Using MyKey威 with remote
start systems section.

144

2011 F-150 (f12)

Owners Guide, 3rd Printing
USA (fus)
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
 Locks and Security

Condition Potential Causes

MyKey威 distance does not • MyKey威 is not being used by the
accumulate intended user.
• MyKey威 system has been recently
cleared.
• Vehicles has been started using a
non Ford-approved remote start
system (as an admin key) then a
MyKey威 is inserted without recycling
the MyKey威 in ignition.

POWER DOOR LOCKS (IF EQUIPPED)

Press control to unlock all doors.

Press control to lock all doors.

Smart locks (if equipped)

This feature prevents you from locking yourself out of the vehicle if your
key is still in the ignition.
When you open the driver’s door and you lock the vehicle with the
power door lock control, all the doors will lock, then the driver’s door
will automatically unlock reminding you that your key is still in the
ignition.

145

2011 F-150 (f12)

Owners Guide, 3rd Printing
USA (fus)
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
 Locks and Security
The vehicle can still be locked, with the key in the ignition, using the
manual lock button on the door, locking the driver’s door with a key, by
simultaneously pressing button 7 • 8 and the 9 • 0 controls on the
remote entry keypad (if equipped), or using the button on the
remote entry transmitter (if equipped).

Autolock feature (if equipped)

The autolock feature will lock all the doors when:
• all the doors are closed,
• the ignition is in the on position,
• you shift into any gear putting the vehicle in motion, and
• the vehicle attains a speed greater than 12 mph (20 km/h) for greater
than two seconds.
The autolock feature repeats when:
• any door is opened then closed while the ignition is in the on position
and the vehicle speed is 9 mph (15 km/h) or lower, and
• the vehicle then attains a speed greater than 12 mph (20 km/h) for
greater than two seconds.

Deactivating/activating autolock feature

There are four methods to enable/disable this feature:
• Through your authorized dealer,
• by using a power door unlock/lock procedure,
• using a keypad procedure (if equipped), or
• or by using the instrument cluster message center (if equipped). Refer
to Message center in the Instrument Cluster chapter.
Note: The autolock feature can be activated/deactivated independently
of the autounlock feature.
Power door lock switch autolock enable/disable procedure
Before starting, ensure the ignition is in the off position and all vehicle
doors are closed. You must complete Steps 1–5 within 30 seconds or the
procedure will have to be repeated. If the procedure needs to be
repeated, wait a minimum of 30 seconds before beginning again.
146

2011 F-150 (f12)

Owners Guide, 3rd Printing
USA (fus)
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
 Locks and Security
1. Place the key in the ignition and
turn the ignition to the on position.
2. Press the power door unlock
control on the door panel three
times.
3. Turn the ignition from the on
position to the off position.
4. Press the power door unlock control on the door panel three times.
5. Turn the ignition back to the on position. The horn will chirp one time
to confirm programming mode has been entered and is active.
6. To enable/disable the autolock feature, press the unlock control, then
press the lock control. The horn will chirp once if autolock was
deactivated or twice (one short and one long chirp) if autolock was
activated.
7. Turn the ignition to the off position. The horn will chirp once to
confirm the procedure is complete.
Keyless entry keypad autolock enable/disable procedure
1. Turn the ignition to the off
position.
2. Close all the doors.
3. Enter factory–set 5–digit entry
code.
4. Press and hold the 3 • 4. While holding the 3 • 4 press the 7 • 8.
5. Release the 7 • 8.
6. Release the 3 • 4.
The user should receive a horn chirp to indicate the system has been
disabled or a chirp followed by a honk to indicate the system has been
enabled.
Autounlock feature (if equipped)
The autounlock feature will unlock all the doors when:
• the ignition is in the on position, all the doors are closed, and the
vehicle has been in motion at a speed greater than 12 mph (20 km/h);
• the vehicle has then come to a stop and the ignition is turned to the
off ) or accessory position; and
• the driver door is opened within 10 minutes of the ignition being
transitioned to the off or accessory position.
147

2011 F-150 (f12)

Owners Guide, 3rd Printing
USA (fus)
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
 Locks and Security
Note: The doors will not autounlock if the vehicle has been
electronically locked before the driver door is opened.
Deactivating/activating autounlock feature
There are three methods to enable/disable this feature:
• Through your authorized dealer,
• by using a power door unlock/lock sequence,
• using a keypad procedure (if equipped)
• or by using the instrument cluster message center (if equipped). Refer
to Optional message center in the Driver controls chapter.
Note: The autounlock feature can be activated/deactivated
independently of the autolock feature.
Power door lock switch autounlock enable/disable procedure
Before starting, ensure the ignition is in the off position and all vehicle
doors are closed. You must complete Steps 1–5 within 30 seconds or the
procedure will have to be repeated. If the procedure needs to be
repeated, wait a minimum of 30 seconds before beginning again.
1. Place the key in the ignition and
turn the ignition to the on position.
2. Press the power door unlock
control on the door panel three
times.
3. Turn the ignition from the on
position to the off position.
4. Press the power door unlock control on the door panel three times.
5. Turn the ignition back to the on position. The horn will chirp one time
to confirm programming mode has been entered and is active.
6. To enable/disable the autounlock feature, press the lock control, then
press the unlock control. The horn will chirp once if autounlock was
deactivated or twice (one short and one long chirp) if autounlock was
activated.
7. Turn the ignition to the off position. The horn will chirp once to
confirm the procedure is complete.

148

2011 F-150 (f12)

Owners Guide, 3rd Printing
USA (fus)
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
 Locks and Security
Keyless entry keypad autounlock enable/disable procedure
1. Turn the ignition to the off
position.
2. Close all the doors.
3. Enter factory–set 5–digit entry
code.
4. Press and hold the 3 • 4. While holding the 3 • 4, press and release
the 7 • 8. While still holding the 3 • 4, press and release the 7 • 8 a
second time.
5. Release the 3 • 4.
The user should receive a horn chirp to indicate the system has been
disabled or a chirp followed by a honk to indicate the system has been
enabled.
CHILDPROOF DOOR LOCKS (ON VEHICLES WITH REAR DOORS)
• When these locks are set, the
rear doors cannot be opened from
the inside.
• The rear doors can be opened
from the outside when the
childproof door locks are set, but
the doors are unlocked.
The childproof locks are located on
the rear edge of each rear door and
must be set separately for each
door. Setting the lock for one door
will not automatically set the lock
for both doors.
• Insert the key and turn to the
lock position (key horizontal) to
engage the childproof locks.
• Insert the key and turn to the
unlock position (key vertical) to
disengage the childproof locks.

149

2011 F-150 (f12)

Owners Guide, 3rd Printing
USA (fus)
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
 Locks and Security
REMOTE ENTRY SYSTEM (IF EQUIPPED)
The integrated keyhead transmitter (IKT) complies with part 15 of the
FCC rules and with RSS-210 of Industry Canada. Operation is subject to
the following two conditions: (1) This device may not cause harmful
interference, and (2) This device must accept any interference received,
including interference that may cause undesired operation.
Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party
responsible for compliance could void the user’s authority to
operate the equipment.
There are two possible types of
IKTs: vehicles with the remote start
feature will have the IKT shown.
Vehicle’s without remote start will
not have the remote start
button .

The typical operating range for your IKT is approximately 33 feet

(10 meters). A decrease in operating range could be caused by:
• weather conditions,
• nearby radio towers,
• structures around the vehicle, or
• other vehicles parked next to your vehicle.
The IKT allows you to:
• remotely unlock the vehicle doors.
• remotely lock all the vehicle doors.
• remotely start the engine (if equipped with remote start).
• activate the personal alarm.
• operate the illuminated entry feature.
The remote entry lock/unlock feature operates in any ignition position
except while the key is held in the start position. The panic feature
operates with the key in the off position.
If there are problems with the remote entry system, make sure to take
ALL integrated keyhead transmitters with you to the authorized
dealer in order to aid in troubleshooting the problem.
150

2011 F-150 (f12)

Owners Guide, 3rd Printing
USA (fus)
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
 Locks and Security
Two step door unlocking
1. Press and release to unlock the driver’s door. Note: The parking
lamps and interior lamps will illuminate (refer to the Illuminated entry
feature later in this section) if the control on the overhead lamp is not
set to the off position.
2. Press and release again within three seconds to unlock the
passenger doors.
The battery saver feature will turn off the lamps 10 minutes after the
ignition is turned to the off position.
One step door unlocking
If the one step door unlocking feature is activated, press and release
once to unlock all of the doors. Note: The parking lamps and interior
lamps will illuminate (refer to the Illuminated entry feature later in this
section) if the control on the overhead lamp is not set to the off position.
Switching from two step to one step door unlocking
Your vehicle comes with two step unlocking enabled. Unlocking can be
switched between two step and one step door unlocking by pressing and
holding both the and buttons simultaneously on the remote entry
transmitter for approximately four seconds. The hazard lamps will flash
twice to indicate that the vehicle has switched to one step unlocking.
Repeat the procedure to switch back to two-step unlocking.
Locking the doors
1. Press and release to lock all the doors. The parking lamps will
illuminate if all the doors are closed and locked.
2. Press and release again within three seconds to confirm that all
the doors are closed and locked. Note: The doors will lock again, the
horn will chirp once, and the parking lamps will illuminate once more.
If any of the doors are not properly closed the horn will make two quick
chirps and the parking lamps will not flash.
Car finder
Press twice within three seconds. The horn will chirp and the turn
lamps will flash. It is recommended that this method be used to locate
your vehicle, rather than using the panic alarm.
Sounding a panic alarm
Press to activate the alarm. Press again or turn the ignition to on to
deactivate.
151

2011 F-150 (f12)

Owners Guide, 3rd Printing
USA (fus)
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
 Locks and Security
Note: The panic alarm will only operate when the ignition is off.
Memory feature (seat, mirrors and adjustable pedals)
The integrated keyhead transmitter (IKT) allows you to recall the
memory seat/power mirrors/adjustable pedals feature.
Press to automatically move the driver seat, power mirrors and
adjustable pedals to the desired memory position. (The seat position
corresponds to the transmitter being used).
Programming memory feature to transmitter
To activate this feature:
1. Move the driver seat, power mirrors, and adjustable pedals to the
desired positions using the associated controls.
2. Press and hold control button 1
for five seconds. A tone will be
heard after two seconds confirming
memory position has been set.
Continue to hold until a second tone
is heard after five seconds.
3. Within three seconds press .
4. Wait 10 seconds, then press .
5. Repeat this procedure for
memory 2 and another transmitter if
desired.
Deprogramming memory feature from transmitter
To deactivate this feature:
1. Press and hold either the 1 or 2 control on the driver’s door for five
seconds. A tone will be heard after 11⁄2 seconds when the memory store
is done, continue to hold until a second tone is heard after five seconds.
2. Within three seconds press .
3. Repeat this procedure for another transmitter if desired.
Replacing the battery
The integrated keyhead transmitter (IKT) or intelligent access key (IA
key) uses one coin type three-volt lithium battery CR2032 or equivalent.

152

2011 F-150 (f12)

Owners Guide, 3rd Printing
USA (fus)
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
 Locks and Security
Integrated keyhead transmitter (IKT)
To replace the battery:
1. Twist a thin coin in the slot near
the key ring to remove the battery 1
cover (1).
Note: Do not wipe off any grease on 2
the battery terminals on the back
surface of the circuit board.
2. Carefully peel up the rubber 3
gasket (2) from the transmitter if it
does not come off with battery
cover.
3. Remove the old battery (3).
Note: Please refer to local regulations when disposing of transmitter
batteries.
4. Insert the new battery. Refer to the instructions inside the IKT for the
correct orientation of the battery. Press the battery down to ensure that
the battery is fully seated in the battery housing cavity.
5. Snap the battery cover back onto the key.
Note: Replacement of the battery will not cause the IKT or IA key to
become de-programmed from your vehicle. They should operate normally
after battery replacement.
Replacing lost Integrated Keyhead Transmitters (IKTs)
If you would like to have your Integrated Keyhead Transmitters
reprogrammed because you lost one, or would like to buy additional
IKTs, you can either reprogram them yourself, or take all IKTs to your
authorized dealer for reprogramming.
How to reprogram your Integrated Keyhead Transmitters (IKTs)
To program a new Integrated Keyhead Transmitter yourself, refer to
Programming spare keys in the SecuriLock威 passive anti-theft system
section of this chapter. Note: At least two IKTs are required to perform
this procedure yourself.

153

2011 F-150 (f12)

Owners Guide, 3rd Printing
USA (fus)
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
 Locks and Security
Illuminated entry
The interior lamps and parking lamps illuminate when the remote entry
system is used to unlock the door(s).
The illuminated entry system will turn off the lights if:
• the ignition switch is turned to the on position, or
• the remote transmitter lock control is pressed, or
• the 7 • 8 and the 9 • 0 controls on the keyless entry keypad are
pressed, or
• after 25 seconds of illumination.
The dome lamp control (if equipped) must not be set to the off position
for the illuminated entry system to operate.
The lights will not turn off if:
• they have been turned on with the dimmer control, or
• any door is open.
The battery saver will shut off the interior lamps 30 minutes after the
ignition has been turned to the off position, 10 minutes after if the dome
lamp is off, and 30 minutes after if the dome lamp switch is left on.
Remote start (if equipped)
Your vehicle may be equipped with the remote start feature which allows
you to start the engine from outside the vehicle. If your transmitter has
a icon, you have remote start. The remote start feature has an
extended operating range which allows you to remote start your vehicle
from a farther distance from your vehicle. All the buttons have this
increased range performance capability when equipped with remote
start.
Many states and provinces have restrictions for the use of remote start.
Check your local and state or provincial laws for specific requirements
regarding remote start systems.
Note: Do not use remote start if your vehicle is low on fuel.
WARNING: To avoid exhaust fumes, do not use remote start if
your vehicle is parked indoors or areas that are not well
ventilated.

154

2011 F-150 (f12)

Owners Guide, 3rd Printing
USA (fus)
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
 Locks and Security
The remote start system will not work if:
• The ignition is in the on position.
• The alarm system is triggered.
• The feature has been disabled.
• The hood is not closed.
• Two remote vehicle starts have already been attempted within the last
hour.
• The vehicle is not in P (Park).
Starting the engine with remote start
To start the engine using remote start:
Note: Each button press must be done within 3 seconds of each other. If
this sequence is not followed the vehicle will not remote start and the
horn will not chirp.
1. Press on the IKT to lock all the doors.
2. Press two times. The exterior lamps will flash twice.
If for some reason, the system fails to start, the horn will chirp twice.
3. Insert the key in the ignition and turn to the on position before
driving.
The power windows will be inhibited during the remote start and the
radio will not turn on.
The parking lamps will remain on and the engine will run for 5, 10, or
15 minutes, depending on how you programmed the system. To select
the duration of the remote start system refer to Message center in the
Instrument Cluster chapter.
Extending the engine run time
To keep the engine running for another remote start duration, repeat
Steps 1 and 2 with the engine still running. If you programmed the
duration to last 10 minutes, the second 10 minutes will begin
immediately so that, for example, if the vehicle had been running from
the first remote start for five minutes, the engine will continue to run for
a total of 15 minutes. You can only extend the remote start once.
If the vehicle is remote started then remote stopped, wait at least five
seconds before remote starting a second time.
The ignition switch must be turned to the on position and then back to
the off position or allow one hour to pass before using remote start
again.
155

2011 F-150 (f12)

Owners Guide, 3rd Printing
USA (fus)
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
 Locks and Security
Turning the engine off after using remote start
• Press one time. The parking lamps will turn off.
You may have to be closer to the vehicle than when starting due to
ground reflection and the added noise of the running engine.
You can disable or enable the remote start system through the message
center. Refer to Message center in the Instrument Cluster chapter.
SECURICODE™ KEYLESS ENTRY SYSTEM (IF EQUIPPED)
You can use the keyless entry
keypad to lock or unlock the doors
without using a key.
The keypad can be operated with
the factory set 5–digit entry code;
this code is located on the owner’s wallet card in the glove box, is
marked on the computer module, and is available from your authorized
dealer. You can also create your own 5–digit personal entry code.
When pressing the controls on the keypad, press the middle of the
controls to ensure a good activation.
Programming a personal entry code and keypad association to
memory feature
To create your own personal entry code:
1. Enter the factory set code.
2. Within five seconds press the 1 • 2 on the keypad.
3. Enter your personal 5-digit code. Each number must be entered
within five seconds of each other.
4. To associate the entry code with a memory setting, enter a sixth digit
to indicate which driver should be set in a memory recalled by the
personal entry code:
• Pressing 1 • 2 recalls Driver 1 settings.
• Pressing 3 • 4 recalls Driver 2 settings.
• Pressing other keypad buttons or not pressing a keypad button as a
sixth digit does not set a driver and will not recall a memory setting.
Note: The factory-set code cannot be associated with a memory
setting.
5. The doors will again lock then unlock to confirm that your personal
entry code has been programmed to the module.
156

2011 F-150 (f12)

Owners Guide, 3rd Printing
USA (fus)
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
 Locks and Security
Tips:
• Do not set a code that uses five of the same number.
• Do not use five numbers in sequential order.
• The factory set code will work even if you have set your own personal
code.
Erasing personal code
1. Enter the factory set 5–digit code.
2. Within five seconds, press the 1 • 2 on the keypad and release.
3. Press and hold the 1 • 2 for two seconds. This must be done within
five seconds of completing Step 2.
Your personal code is now erased and only the factory set 5–digit code
will work.
Anti-scan feature
If an incorrect code has been entered seven times (35 consecutive
button presses), the keypad will go into an anti-scan mode. This mode
disables the keypad for one minute and the keypad lamp will flash during
this time.
The anti-scan feature will turn off after:
• one minute of keypad inactivity.
• pressing the control on the remote entry transmitter.
• the ignition is turned to the on position.
Unlocking and locking the doors using keyless entry
To unlock the driver’s door, enter the factory set 5-digit code or your
personal code. Each number must be pressed within five seconds of each
other. The interior lamps will illuminate after entering a valid keypad
entry code.
To unlock all doors, press the 3 • 4 control within five seconds.
To lock all doors, press the 7 • 8 and the 9 • 0 at the same time. You
do not need to enter the keypad code first. Note: The interior lamps
will turn off.

157

2011 F-150 (f12)

Owners Guide, 3rd Printing
USA (fus)
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
 Locks and Security
SECURILOCK姞 PASSIVE ANTI-THEFT SYSTEM (IF EQUIPPED)
SecuriLock威 passive anti-theft system is an engine immobilization
system. This system is designed to help prevent the engine from being
started unless a coded key programmed to your vehicle is used. The
use of the wrong type of coded key may lead to a “no-start” condition.
The message center will display: STARTING SYSTEM FAULT.
Your vehicle comes with two coded keys; additional coded keys may be
purchased from your authorized dealer. The authorized dealer can
program your spare keys to your vehicle or you can program the keys
yourself. Refer to Programming spare keys for instructions on how to
program the coded key.
Note: The SecuriLock威 passive anti-theft system is not compatible with
non-Ford aftermarket remote start systems. Use of these systems may
result in vehicle starting problems and a loss of security protection.
Note: Large metallic objects, electronic devices that are used to
purchase gasoline or similar items, or a second coded key on the same
key chain may cause vehicle starting issues. You need to prevent these
objects from touching the coded key while starting the engine. These
objects will not cause damage to the coded key, but may cause a
momentary issue if they are too close to the key when starting the
engine. If a problem occurs, turn the ignition off, remove all objects on
the key chain away from the coded key and restart the engine.
Note: Do not leave a duplicate coded key in the vehicle. Always
take your keys and lock all doors when leaving the vehicle.
Automatic arming
The vehicle is armed immediately after turning the ignition off.
Automatic disarming
Switching the ignition on with a coded key disarms the vehicle.
Replacement keys
If your keys are lost or stolen and you don’t have an extra coded key,
you will need to have your vehicle towed to an authorized dealer. The
key codes need to be erased from your vehicle and new coded keys will
need to be programmed.
Replacing coded keys can be very costly. Store an extra programmed key
away from the vehicle in a safe place to help prevent any
inconveniences. Please visit an authorized dealer to purchase additional
spare or replacement keys.
158

2011 F-150 (f12)

Owners Guide, 3rd Printing
USA (fus)
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
 Locks and Security
Programming spare keys
A maximum of eight keys can be coded to your vehicle. Only
SecuriLock威 keys can be used. To program a coded key yourself, you
will need two previously programmed coded keys (keys that already
operate your vehicle’s engine) and the new unprogrammed key(s) readily
accessible for timely implementation of each step in the procedure.
If two previously programmed coded keys are not available, you must
bring your vehicle to your authorized dealer to have the spare coded
key(s) programmed.
Please read and understand the entire procedure before you begin.
1. Insert the first previously
programmed coded key into the
ignition and turn the ignition from
the 1 (off) position to the 3 (on)
position (maintain ignition in the 3
(on) position for at least one
second, but no more than
10 seconds).
2. Turn ignition from the 3 (on)
position back to the 1 (off) position
in order to remove the first coded
key from the ignition.
3. After three seconds but within 10 seconds of removing the first coded
key, insert the second previously programmed coded key into the
ignition and turn the ignition from the 1 (off) position to the 3 (on)
position (maintain ignition in the 3 (on) position for at least one second
but no more than 10 seconds).
4. Turn the ignition from the 3 (on) position back to the 1 (off) position
in order to remove the second coded key from the ignition.
5. After three seconds but within 10 seconds of removing the second
coded key, insert the new unprogrammed key (new key/valet key) into
the ignition and turn the ignition from the 1 (off) position to the 3 (on)
position (maintain ignition in the 3 (on) position for at least one second,
but no more than 10 seconds). This step will program your new key to a
coded key.
6. To program additional new unprogrammed key(s), repeat Steps 1
through 5.
If successful, the new coded key(s) will start the vehicle’s engine.
159

2011 F-150 (f12)

Owners Guide, 3rd Printing
USA (fus)
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
 Locks and Security
If not successful, the new coded key(s) will not start the vehicle’s engine
and you may repeat Steps 1 through 5. If failure repeats, bring your
vehicle to your authorized dealer to have the new spare key(s)
programmed.
PERIMETER ALARM SYSTEM (IF EQUIPPED)
The perimeter anti-theft system will warn you in the event of an
unauthorized entry to your vehicle.
If there is any potential perimeter anti-theft problem with your vehicle,
ensure ALL remote entry transmitters are taken to the authorized
dealer to aid in troubleshooting.
Arming the system
When armed, this system will respond if unauthorized entry is
attempted. When unauthorized entry occurs, the system will flash the
park/turn lamps and will sound the horn.
The system is ready to arm whenever the key is removed from the
ignition. Either of the following actions will prearm the alarm system:
• Press the control on the remote entry transmitter.
• Open a door and press the power door lock control to lock all the
doors, and then close the door.
• Press and hold the 7 • 8 and 9 • 0 controls on the keyless entry pad
at the same time to lock the doors (driver’s door must be closed).
There is a 20 second countdown when any of the above actions occur
before the vehicle becomes armed.
Each door and the hood is armed individually, and if any are open, they
must be closed before the open entry point can enter the 20 second
countdown.
The turn signal lamps will flash once when all doors and the hood are
closed indicating the vehicle is locked and entering the 20 second
countdown.

160

2011 F-150 (f12)

Owners Guide, 3rd Printing
USA (fus)
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
 Locks and Security
Disarming the system
You can disarm the system by any of the following actions:
• Unlock the doors by pressing the control on your remote entry
transmitter.
• Turn the ignition to the on position with a programmed coded ignition
key.
• Unlock the doors by using your keyless entry pad.
• If using a key in the driver’s door to unlock the vehicle, a chime will
sound when you open the door and you will have 12 seconds to
disarm the alarm system using any of the actions above, otherwise the
alarm will trigger.
Pressing the power door unlock control within the 20 second prearmed
mode will return the vehicle to a disarmed state.
Triggering the anti-theft system
The armed system will be triggered if any door or hood is opened
without using the key or the remote entry transmitter.

161

2011 F-150 (f12)

Owners Guide, 3rd Printing
USA (fus)
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
 Seating and Safety Restraints
FRONT SEATS
WARNING: Reclining the seatback can cause an occupant to
slide under the seat’s safety belt, resulting in severe personal
injuries in the event of a collision.

WARNING: Do not pile cargo higher than the seatbacks to

reduce the risk of injury in a collision or sudden stop.

WARNING: Before returning the seatback to its original

position, make sure that cargo or any objects are not trapped
behind the seatback. After returning the seatback to its original
position, pull on the seatback to ensure that it has fully latched. An
unlatched seat may become dangerous in the event of a sudden stop or
collision.

WARNING: Never adjust the driver’s seat or seatback when the

vehicle is moving.

WARNING: Always drive and ride with your seatback upright

and the lap belt snug and low across the hips.

Adjustable head restraints

Your vehicle is equipped with front row outboard head restraints that are
vertically adjustable.
WARNING: To minimize the risk of neck injury in the event of a
crash, the driver and passenger occupants should not sit in
and/or operate the vehicle, until the head restraint is placed in its
proper position. The driver should never adjust the head restraint
while the vehicle is in motion.

162

2011 F-150 (f12)

Owners Guide, 3rd Printing
USA (fus)
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
 Seating and Safety Restraints
The adjustable head restraints
consist of :
• a trimmed energy absorbing foam
and structure (1),
• two steel stems (2),
• a guide sleeve adjust/release
button (3),
• and a guide sleeve unlock/remove
button (4).
To adjust the head restraint, do the following:
1. Adjust the seatback to an upright driving/riding position.
2. Raise the head restraint by pulling up on the head restraint.
3. Lower the head restraint by pressing and holding the guide sleeve
adjust/release button (3) and pushing down on the head restraint.
Properly adjust the head restraint so that the top of the head restraint is
even with the top of your head and positioned as close as possible to the
back of your head. For occupants of extremely tall stature, adjust the
head restraint to its full up position.
WARNING: The adjustable head restraint is a safety device.
Whenever possible it should be installed and properly adjusted
when the seat is occupied.

To remove the adjustable head restraint, do the following:

1. Pull up the head restraint until it reaches the highest adjustment
position.
2. Simultaneously press and hold both the adjust/release button (3) and
the unlock/remove button (4), then pull up on the head restraint.

163

2011 F-150 (f12)

Owners Guide, 3rd Printing
USA (fus)
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
 Seating and Safety Restraints
To reinstall the adjustable head restraint, do the following:
1. Insert the two stems (2) into the
guide sleeve collars.
2. Push the head restraint down
until it locks.

Properly adjust the head restraint so that the top of the head restraint is
even with the top of your head and positioned as close as possible to the
back of your head. For occupants of extremely tall stature, adjust the
head restraint to its full up position.
WARNING: To minimize the risk of neck injury in the event of a
crash, head restraints must be installed properly.

164

2011 F-150 (f12)

Owners Guide, 3rd Printing
USA (fus)
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
 Seating and Safety Restraints
Front seat
• Lift the track release bar to move
the seat forward or rearward.
Make sure that the seat is
relatched into place.

165

2011 F-150 (f12)

Owners Guide, 3rd Printing
USA (fus)
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
 Seating and Safety Restraints
• Pull the release lever handle
located on the side of the seat up
to move the seatback forward or
backward.

Using the armrest (if equipped)

• Push the release control to move
the armrest up or down.
• Pull out the drawer at the bottom
of the center seat to access the
cup holders (if equipped)

166

2011 F-150 (f12)

Owners Guide, 3rd Printing
USA (fus)
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
 Seating and Safety Restraints
• To gain access to the storage
compartment (if equipped) in
your armrest, lift the latch to
open the lid.

Using the manual lumbar support (if equipped)

For more lumbar support, turn the
lumbar support control toward the
front of vehicle.
For less lumbar support, turn the
lumbar support control toward the
rear of vehicle.

167

2011 F-150 (f12)

Owners Guide, 3rd Printing
USA (fus)
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
 Seating and Safety Restraints
Using the power lumbar support (if equipped)
The power lumbar control is located on the outboard side of the seat.
Press the forward side of the control
for additional support.
Press the rear side of the control to
reduce support.

Adjusting the front power seat (if equipped)

WARNING: Never adjust the driver’s seat or seatback when the
vehicle is moving.

WARNING: Always drive and ride with your seatback upright

and the lap belt snug and low across the hips.

WARNING: Reclining the seatback can cause an occupant to

slide under the seat’s safety belt, resulting in severe personal
injuries in the event of a collision.

WARNING: Sitting improperly out of position or with the seat

back reclined too far can take off weight from the seat cushion
and affect the decision of the passenger sensing system, resulting in
serious injury or death in a crash. Always sit upright against your
seatback, with your feet on the floor.

WARNING: To reduce the risk of possible serious injury: Do not

hang objects off seat back or stow objects in the seatback map
pocket (if equipped) when a child is in the front passenger seat. Do
not place objects underneath the front passenger seat or between the
seat and the center console (if equipped). Check the “passenger airbag
off” or “pass airbag off” indicator lamp for proper airbag status. Refer
to Front passenger sensing system in the Airbag supplemental
restraint system (SRS) section for additional details. Failure to follow
these instructions may interfere with the front passenger seat sensing
system.

168

2011 F-150 (f12)

Owners Guide, 3rd Printing
USA (fus)
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
 Seating and Safety Restraints
The control is located on the outboard side of the seat cushion.
Move the switch to raise or lower
the front or rear portion of the seat
cushion.

Move the switch to move the seat

forward, backward, up or down.

Power recline (if equipped)

Move the switch to recline the
seatback forward or rearward.

169

2011 F-150 (f12)

Owners Guide, 3rd Printing
USA (fus)
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
 Seating and Safety Restraints
Memory seat/power mirrors/adjustable pedals/steering column
(if equipped)
This system allows automatic
positioning of the driver seat, power
mirrors, adjustable pedals, and
steering column to two
programmable positions.
The memory seat control is located
on the driver’s seat.
• To program position 1, move the
memory features to the desired
positions using the associated
controls. Press and hold button 1 for at least two seconds. A chime
will sound confirming that a memory position has been set.
• To program position 2, repeat the previous procedure using button 2.
A memory seat position may be programmed at any time.
To program the memory feature to a remote entry transmitter, refer to
Remote entry system in the Locks and Security chapter.
A programmed memory position can be recalled:
• in any gearshift position if the ignition is not on.
• only in P (Park) or N (Neutral) if the ignition is on.
The memory positions are also recalled when you press your remote
entry transmitter (unlock) control (if the transmitter is programmed
to a memory position) or, when you enter a valid personal entry code
that is programmed to a memory position. The mirrors will move to the
programmed position and the seat will move to the easy entry position.
The seat will move to the final position when the key is in the ignition (if
easy entry feature is enabled).
Easy-access/easy-out feature (if equipped)
The easy entry feature can be turned off or on through the vehicle
message center. Refer to Message center in the Instrument Cluster
chapter.
The easy entry feature automatically moves the driver’s seat 2 inches
(5 cm) forward when:
• the transmission is in P (Park)
• the key is inserted into the ignition cylinder
170

2011 F-150 (f12)

Owners Guide, 3rd Printing
USA (fus)
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
 Seating and Safety Restraints
(If the seat is located less than 2 inches [5 cm] from the front of the seat
track, the seat will travel up to 1⁄4 inch (6 mm) to the front of the seat
track).
The easy out feature automatically moves the driver’s seat 2 inches
(5 cm) backward when:
• the transmission is in P (Park)
• the key is removed from the ignition cylinder
(If the seat is located less than 2 inches (5 cm) from the rear of the seat
track, the seat will travel up to 1⁄4 inch (6 mm) to the rear of the seat
track).
If the memory setting is programmed through the remote transmitter,
upon unlocking the door via remote entry system, the seat position will
travel to the desired memory setting less 2 inches (5 cm). Once entering
the vehicle and inserting the key in the ignition while in P (Park), the
easy entry feature will move the seat an additional 2 inches (5 cm) to
the desired memory location. See Locks and Security for activating the
memory seat feature through the remote entry system.
Heated seats (if equipped)
WARNING: Persons who are unable to feel pain to the skin
because of advanced age, chronic illness, diabetes, spinal cord
injury, medication, alcohol use, exhaustion, or other physical
conditions, must exercise care when using the seat heater. The seat
heater may cause burns even at low temperatures, especially if used
for long periods of time. Do not place anything on the seat that
insulates against heat, such as a blanket or cushion, because this may
cause the seat heater to overheat. Do not puncture the seat with pins,
needles, or other pointed objects because this may damage the heating
element which may cause the seat heater to overheat. An overheated
seat may cause serious personal injury.

Note: Do not do the following:

• Place heavy objects on the seat
• Operate the seat heater if water or any other liquid is spilled on the
seat. Allow the seat to dry thoroughly.

171

2011 F-150 (f12)

Owners Guide, 3rd Printing
USA (fus)
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
 Seating and Safety Restraints
To operate the heated seats, do the following:
Press the heated seat button/symbol
to cycle through the various heat
settings and off. Warmer settings are
indicated by more indicator lights.

Heated and cooled seats (if equipped)

The controls for the climate controlled seats are located on the climate
control system.
Heated seats
WARNING: Persons who are unable to feel pain to the skin
because of advanced age, chronic illness, diabetes, spinal cord
injury, medication, alcohol use, exhaustion, or other physical
conditions, must exercise care when using the seat heater. The seat
heater may cause burns even at low temperatures, especially if used
for long periods of time. Do not place anything on the seat that
insulates against heat, such as a blanket or cushion, because this may
cause the seat heater to overheat. Do not puncture the seat with pins,
needles, or other pointed objects because this may damage the heating
element which may cause the seat heater to overheat. An overheated
seat may cause serious personal injury.

Note: Do not do the following:

• Place heavy objects on the seat
• Operate the seat heater if water or any other liquid is spilled on the
seat. Allow the seat to dry thoroughly.
The heated seats will only function when the engine is running.
To operate the heated seats:
Press the heated seat button/symbol
to cycle through the various heat
settings and off. Warmer settings are
indicated by more indicator lights.

172

2011 F-150 (f12)

Owners Guide, 3rd Printing
USA (fus)
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
 Seating and Safety Restraints
Cooled seats
The cooled seats will only function when the engine is running.
To operate the cooled seats:
Press the cooled seat button/symbol
to cycle through the various cooling A/C
settings and off. Cooler settings are
indicated by more indicator lights.

If the engine falls below 350 rpm while the cooled seats are on, the
feature will turn itself off and will need to be reactivated.
Climate controlled seats air filter replacement (if equipped)
The heated and cooled seat system includes air filters that must be
replaced periodically. Refer to Scheduled maintenance information.
• There is a filter located under
each front seat.

• The filter can be accessed from the 2nd row foot-well area. Move the
front seats all the way to the full front and full up positions to ease
access.
To remove an air filter:
1. Turn the vehicle off.
2. Push up on the outside rigid edge
of the filter until the tabs are
released, then rotate the air filter
toward the front of the vehicle.

173

2011 F-150 (f12)

Owners Guide, 3rd Printing
USA (fus)
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
 Seating and Safety Restraints
3. Remove filter.

To install a filter:
1. First, position the filter in its
housing making sure that the far
forward end is all the way up in the
housing.
2. Push in on the center of the
outside edge of the filter and rotate
up into the housing until it clips into
position.

REAR SEATS

Second row head restraints

Your vehicle is equipped with head restraints that are vertically
adjustable.
WARNING: To minimize the risk of neck injury in the event of a
crash, the driver and passenger occupants should not sit in
and/or operate the vehicle, until the head restraint is placed in its
proper position. The driver should never adjust the head restraint
while the vehicle is in motion.

WARNING: The adjustable head restraint is a safety device.

Whenever possible it should be installed and properly adjusted
when the seat is occupied.

174

2011 F-150 (f12)

Owners Guide, 3rd Printing
USA (fus)
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
 Seating and Safety Restraints
The adjustable head restraints
consist of :
• a trimmed energy absorbing foam
and structure (1),
• two steel stems (2),
• a guide sleeve adjust/release
button (3),
• and a guide sleeve unlock/remove
button (4).
The second row head restraints look differently than the front head
restraints, but function similarly. For details about how to raise, lower
and remove/reinstall the second row head restraints, refer to Adjustable
head restraints at the beginning of this chapter.
Folding up the rear seats (SuperCab only)
The rear seat has a split 60/40 cushion. Each seat cushion can be flipped
up into a vertical storage position.
1. Pull control to release seat
cushion.
2. Rotate seat cushion up until it
locks into vertical storage position.

Returning the seat to seating position

WARNING: Make sure that cargo or any objects are not trapped
underneath the seat cushion before returning the seat cushion to
its original position, and that the seat cushion locks into place. Failure
to do so may prevent the seat from operating properly in the event of
a crash, which could increase the risk of serious injury.

1. Pull control on the side of the seat to release seat cushion from
storage position.
2. Push seat cushion down until it locks into horizontal position.
175

2011 F-150 (f12)

Owners Guide, 3rd Printing
USA (fus)
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
 Seating and Safety Restraints
Folding up the rear seats (SuperCrew vehicles only)
The rear seat has a split 60/40 cushion. Each seat cushion can be flipped
up into a vertical storage position.
• Rotate the seat cushion up by
lifting on the corner until it locks
into vertical storage position.

Returning the seat to seating position

WARNING: Before returning the seat cushion to its original
position, make sure that cargo or any objects are not trapped
underneath the seat cushion.

1. Pull control on the bottom of the

seat cushion to release seat cushion
from storage position.
2. Push seat cushion down until it
rests into the horizontal position.

176

2011 F-150 (f12)

Owners Guide, 3rd Printing
USA (fus)
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
 Seating and Safety Restraints
Armrest and cupholders (if equipped)
Pull the strap located on the center
seatback to access the armrest and
cupholders.
The cupholders are located inside
the rear seat armrest. To open the
cupholders:
• Push in gently on the center of
the plastic panel on the front
edge of the armrest. The
cupholders will partially open.
• Pull the cupholder fully open before using.
To close the cupholders:
• Push the front edge back into the seat until the cupholders are fully
seated.
• Make sure there is nothing in the cupholders before attempting to
close them.
Make sure that the cupholders are fully seated before stowing the
armrest.
Rear heated seats (if equipped)
WARNING: Persons who are unable to feel pain to the skin
because of advanced age, chronic illness, diabetes, spinal cord
injury, medication, alcohol use, exhaustion, or other physical
conditions, must exercise care when using the seat heater. The seat
heater may cause burns even at low temperatures, especially if used
for long periods of time. Do not place anything on the seat that
insulates against heat, such as a blanket or cushion, because this may
cause the seat heater to overheat. Do not puncture the seat with pins,
needles, or other pointed objects because this may damage the heating
element which may cause the seat heater to overheat. An overheated
seat may cause serious personal injury.

Note: Do not do the following:

• Place heavy objects on the seat
• Operate the seat heater if water or any other liquid is spilled on the
seat. Allow the seat to dry thoroughly.
The rear seat heat controls are located on the rear door armrest.
177

2011 F-150 (f12)

Owners Guide, 3rd Printing
USA (fus)
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
 Seating and Safety Restraints
To operate the heated seats:
• Push the indicated side of the
control for maximum heat.
• Push again to deactivate.

• Push the indicated side of the

control for minimum heat.
• Push again to deactivate.

The heated seat module resets at every ignition run cycle. While the
ignition is in the on position, activating the high or low heated seat
switch enables heating mode. When activated, they will turn off
automatically when the engine is turned off.
The indicator light will illuminate when the heated seats have been
activated.
SAFETY RESTRAINTS
Personal Safety System™
The Personal Safety System provides an improved overall level of frontal
crash protection to front seat occupants and is designed to help further
reduce the risk of airbag-related injuries. The system is able to analyze
different occupant classifications and conditions and crash severity
before activating the appropriate safety devices to help better protect a
range of occupants in a variety of frontal crash situations.
Your vehicle’s Personal Safety System consists of:
• Driver and passenger dual-stage airbag supplemental restraints.
• Front outboard safety belts with pretensioners, energy management
retractors, and safety belt usage sensors.
• Driver’s seat position sensor.
• Front crash severity sensor.
• Front passenger sensing system
178

2011 F-150 (f12)

Owners Guide, 3rd Printing
USA (fus)
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
 Seating and Safety Restraints
• Passenger Airbag Off indicator light.
• Restraints Control Module (RCM) with impact and safing sensors.
• Restraint system warning light and back-up tone.
• The electrical wiring for the airbags, crash sensor(s), safety belt
pretensioners, front safety belt usage sensors, driver seat position
sensor, and indicator lights.
How does the Personal Safety System™ work?
The Personal Safety System can adapt the deployment strategy of your
vehicle’s safety devices according to crash severity and occupant
classification and conditions. A collection of crash and occupant sensors
provides information to the Restraints Control Module (RCM). During a
crash, the RCM may activate the safety belt pretensioners and/or either
none, one, or both stages of the dual-stage airbag supplemental restraints
based on crash severity and occupant classification and conditions.
The fact that the pretensioners or airbags did not activate for both front
seat occupants in a collision does not mean that something is wrong with
the system. Rather, it means the Personal Safety System determined the
accident conditions (crash severity, belt usage, etc.) were not
appropriate to activate these safety devices. Front airbags are designed
to activate only in frontal and near-frontal collisions, not rollovers,
side-impacts, or rear-impacts unless the collision causes sufficient
longitudinal deceleration.
Driver and passenger dual-stage airbag supplemental restraints
The dual-stage airbags offer the capability to tailor the level of airbag
inflation energy. A lower, less forceful energy level is provided for more
common, moderate-severity impacts. A higher energy level is used for
the most severe impacts. Refer to Airbag Supplemental Restraints
(SRS) section in this chapter.
Front crash severity sensor
The front crash severity sensor enhances the ability to detect the
severity of an impact. Positioned up front, it provides valuable
information early in the crash event on the severity of the impact. This
allows your Personal Safety System to distinguish between different
levels of crash severity and modify the deployment strategy of the
dual-stage airbags and safety belt pretensioners.
Driver’s seat position sensor
The driver’s seat position sensor allows your Personal Safety System to
tailor the deployment level of the driver dual-stage airbag based on seat
179

2011 F-150 (f12)

Owners Guide, 3rd Printing
USA (fus)
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
 Seating and Safety Restraints
position. The system is designed to help protect smaller drivers sitting
close to the driver airbag by providing a lower airbag output level.
Front passenger sensing system
For airbags to do their job they must inflate with great force, and this
force can pose a potentially deadly risk to occupants that are very close
to the airbag when it begins to inflate. For some occupants, like infants
in rear-facing child seats, this occurs because they are initially sitting
very close to the airbag. For other occupants, this occurs when the
occupant is not properly restrained by safety belts or child safety seats
and they move forward during pre-crash braking. The most effective way
to reduce the risk of unnecessary injuries is to make sure all occupants
are properly restrained. Accident statistics suggest that children are
much safer when properly restrained in the rear seating positions than in
the front.
WARNING: Airbags can kill or injure a child in a child seat.
NEVER place a rear-facing child seat in front of an active air
bag. If you must use a forward-facing child seat in the front seat, move
the seat all the way back.

WARNING: Always transport children 12 years old and under in

the back seat and always properly use appropriate child
restraints.

WARNING: When possible, all children 12 years old and under

should be properly restrained in a rear seating position.

The front passenger sensing system can automatically turn off the
passenger front airbag when a rear facing child seat, a forward-facing
child restraint, or a booster seat is detected. Even with this technology,
parents are STRONGLY encouraged to always properly restrain children
in the rear seat. The sensor also turns off the passenger front airbag and
passenger seat-mounted side airbag when the passenger seat is empty.
When the front passenger seat is occupied and the sensing system has
turned off the passenger’s frontal airbag, the “pass airbag off” indicator
will light and stay lit to remind you that the front passenger frontal
airbag is off. See Front passenger sensing system in the Airbag
supplemental restraint system (SRS) section of this chapter.
180

2011 F-150 (f12)

Owners Guide, 3rd Printing
USA (fus)
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
 Seating and Safety Restraints
Front safety belt usage sensors
The front safety belt usage sensors detect whether or not the driver and
front outboard passenger safety belts are fastened. This information
allows your Personal Safety System to tailor the airbag deployment and
safety belt pretensioner activation depending upon safety belt usage.
Refer to Safety belt usage sensors later in this chapter.
Front outboard safety belt pretensioners
The safety belt pretensioners at the front outboard seating positions are
designed to tighten the safety belts firmly against the occupant’s body
during frontal collisions, and in side collisions and rollovers. This helps
increase the effectiveness of the safety belts. In frontal collisions, the
safety belt pretensioners can be activated alone or, if the collision is of
sufficient severity, together with the front airbags.
Front outboard safety belt energy management retractors
The front outboard safety belt energy management retractors allow
webbing to be pulled out of the retractor in a gradual and controlled
manner in response to the occupant’s forward momentum. This helps
reduce the risk of force-related injuries to the occupant’s chest by
limiting the load on the occupant. Refer to Energy management
retractors section in this chapter.
Determining if the Personal Safety System is operational
The Personal Safety System uses a warning light in the instrument
cluster or a back-up tone to indicate the condition of the system. Refer
to the Warning lights and chimes section in the Instrument Cluster
chapter. Routine maintenance of the Personal Safety System is not
required.
The Restraints Control Module (RCM) monitors its own internal circuits
and the circuits for the airbag supplemental restraints, crash sensor(s),
safety belt pretensioners, front safety belt buckle sensors, and the driver
seat position sensor. In addition, the RCM also monitors the restraints
warning light in the instrument cluster. A difficulty with the system is
indicated by one or more of the following.
• The warning light will either flash or stay lit.
• The warning light will not illuminate immediately after ignition is
turned on.
• A series of five beeps will be heard. The tone pattern will repeat
periodically until the problem and warning light are repaired.
181

2011 F-150 (f12)

Owners Guide, 3rd Printing
USA (fus)
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
 Seating and Safety Restraints
If any of these things happen, even intermittently, have the Personal
Safety System serviced at an authorized dealer immediately. Unless
serviced, the system may not function properly in the event of a
collision.
Safety restraints precautions
WARNING: Always drive and ride with your seatback upright
and the lap belt snug and low across the hips.

WARNING: To reduce the risk of injury, make sure children sit

in a rear seating position where they can be properly restrained.

WARNING: Never let a passenger hold a child on his or her lap

while the vehicle is moving. The passenger cannot protect the
child from injury in a collision.

WARNING: All occupants of the vehicle, including the driver,

should always properly wear their safety belts, even when an
airbag supplemental restraint system (SRS) is provided.

WARNING: It is extremely dangerous to ride in a cargo area,

inside or outside of a vehicle. In a collision, people riding in
these areas are more likely to be seriously injured or killed. Do not
allow people to ride in any area of your vehicle that is not equipped
with seats and safety belts. Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a
seat and using a safety belt properly.

WARNING: In a rollover crash, an unbelted person is

significantly more likely to die than a person wearing a safety
belt.

WARNING: Each seating position in your vehicle has a specific

safety belt assembly which is made up of one buckle and one
tongue that are designed to be used as a pair. 1) Use the shoulder belt
on the outside shoulder only. Never wear the shoulder belt under the
arm. 2) Never swing the safety belt around your neck over the inside
shoulder. 3) Never use a single belt for more than one person.

182

2011 F-150 (f12)

Owners Guide, 3rd Printing
USA (fus)
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
 Seating and Safety Restraints

WARNING: When possible, all children 12 years old and under

should be properly restrained in a rear seating position.

WARNING: Safety belts and seats can become hot in a vehicle

that has been closed up in sunny weather; they could burn a
small child. Check seat covers and buckles before you place a child
anywhere near them.

WARNING: Front and rear seat occupants, including pregnant

women, should wear safety belts for optimum protection in an
accident.

Combination lap and shoulder belts

1. Insert the belt tongue into the
proper buckle (the buckle closest to
the direction the tongue is coming
from) until you hear a snap and feel
it latch. Make sure the tongue is
securely fastened in the buckle.

2. To unfasten, push the release

button and remove the tongue from
the buckle.

183

2011 F-150 (f12)

Owners Guide, 3rd Printing
USA (fus)
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
 Seating and Safety Restraints
Safety belt with cinch tongue (front center seat only)
The cinch tongue will slide up and down the belt webbing when the belt
is stowed or while putting safety belts on. When the lap/shoulder safety
belt is buckled, the cinch tongue will allow the lap portion to be
shortened, but pinches the webbing to keep the lap portion from getting
longer. The cinch tongue is designed to slip during a crash, so always
wear the shoulder belt properly and don’t allow any slack in either the
lap or shoulder portions.
Before you can reach and latch a combination lap and shoulder belt
having a cinch tongue into the buckle, you may have to lengthen the lap
belt portion of it.
1. To lengthen the lap belt, pull
some webbing out of the shoulder
belt retractor.
2. While holding the webbing below
the tongue, grasp the tip (metal
portion) of the tongue so that it is
parallel to the webbing and slide the
tongue upward.

3. Provide enough lap belt length so that the tongue can reach the
buckle.
How to fasten the cinch tongue
1. Pull the combination lap and shoulder belt from the retractor so that
the shoulder belt portion of the safety belt crosses your shoulder and
chest.
2. Be sure the belt is not twisted. If the belt is twisted, remove the twist.
3. Insert the belt tongue into the proper buckle for your seating position
until you hear a snap and feel it latch.
4. Make sure the tongue is securely fastened to the buckle by pulling on
the tongue.
WARNING: The lap belt should fit snugly and as low as possible
around the hips, not across the waist.

WARNING: Front and rear seat occupants, including pregnant

women, should wear safety belts for optimum protection in an
accident.

184

2011 F-150 (f12)

Owners Guide, 3rd Printing
USA (fus)
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
 Seating and Safety Restraints

WARNING: Each seating position in your vehicle has a specific

safety belt assembly which is made up of one buckle and one
tongue that are designed to be used as a pair. 1) Use the shoulder belt
on the outside shoulder only. Never wear the shoulder belt under the
arm. 2) Never swing the safety belt around your neck over the inside
shoulder. 3) Never use a single belt for more than one person.

While you are fastened in the safety belt, the combination lap/shoulder
belt with a cinch tongue adjusts to your movement. However, if you
brake hard, turn hard, or if your vehicle receives an impact of 5 mph
(8 km/h) or more, the safety belt will become locked and help reduce
your forward movement.
Restraint of pregnant women
WARNING: Always ride and drive with your seatback upright
and the safety belt properly fastened. The lap portion of the
safety belt should fit snug and be positioned low across the hips. The
shoulder portion of the safety belt should be positioned across the
chest. Pregnant women should also follow this practice. See figure
below.

Pregnant women should always

wear their safety belt. The lap belt
portion of a combination lap and
shoulder belt should be positioned
low across the hips below the belly
and worn as tight as comfort will
allow. The shoulder belt should be
positioned to cross the middle of
the shoulder and the center of the
chest.

Energy management retractors

Your vehicle has a safety belt system equipped with energy management
retractors at the driver and front outboard passenger seating positions.
An energy management retractor is a device which pays out webbing in a
controlled manner. This feature is designed to help further reduce the
risk of force-related injuries to the occupant.

185

2011 F-150 (f12)

Owners Guide, 3rd Printing
USA (fus)
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
 Seating and Safety Restraints
Safety belt systems equipped with an energy management retractor must
be replaced if they were in use during a frontal collision which resulted
in deployment of the frontal airbags. Refer to the Safety belt
maintenance section in this chapter.
Safety belt locking modes
All safety restraints in the vehicle are combination lap and shoulder
belts. The driver safety belt and the optional front center seat’s safety
belt have the first locking mode only. All outboard passenger and rear
safety belts have both types of locking modes described as follows:
Vehicle sensitive mode
This is the normal retractor mode, which allows free shoulder belt length
adjustment to your movements and locking in response to vehicle
movement. For example, if the driver brakes suddenly or turns a corner
sharply, or the vehicle receives an impact of approximately 5 mph
(8 km/h) or more, the combination safety belts will lock to help reduce
forward movement of the driver and passengers.
In addition, the retractor is designed to lock if the webbing is pulled out
too quickly. If this occurs, let the belt retract slightly and pull webbing
out again in a slow and controlled manner.
Automatic locking mode
In this mode, the shoulder belt is automatically pre-locked. The belt will
still retract to remove any slack in the shoulder belt. The automatic
locking mode is not available on the driver safety belt or the optional
front seat’s center safety belt.
When to use the automatic locking mode
This mode should be used any time a child safety seat is installed in a
front outboard passenger seating position in a Regular Cab / SuperCab /
SuperCrew or any rear seating position of a SuperCab or SuperCrew. The
optional front seat’s center safety belt has a cinch mechanism. Refer to
Safety belt with cinch tongue earlier in this chapter. Children 12 years
old and under should be properly restrained in a rear seat whenever
possible. Refer to Safety restraints for children or Safety seats for
children later in this chapter.

186

2011 F-150 (f12)

Owners Guide, 3rd Printing
USA (fus)
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
 Seating and Safety Restraints
How to use the automatic locking mode
1. Buckle the combination lap and
shoulder belt (front safety
belt/buckle shown, rear similar).
2. Grasp the shoulder portion and
pull downward until the entire belt
is pulled out.

• Allow the belt to retract. As the belt retracts, you will hear a clicking
sound. This indicates the safety belt is now in the automatic locking
mode.
How to disengage the automatic locking mode
Disconnect the combination lap/shoulder belt and allow it to retract
completely to disengage the automatic locking mode and activate the
vehicle sensitive (emergency) locking mode.
WARNING: After any vehicle collision, the safety belt system at
all passenger seating positions must be checked by an authorized
dealer to verify that the “automatic locking retractor” feature for child
seats is still functioning properly. In addition, all safety belts should be
checked for proper function.

WARNING: BELT AND RETRACTOR ASSEMBLY MUST BE

REPLACED if the safety belt assembly “automatic locking
retractor” feature or any other safety belt function is not operating
properly when checked by an authorized dealer. Failure to replace the
belt and retractor assembly could increase the risk of injury in collisions.

Safety belt pretensioner

Your vehicle is equipped with safety belt pretensioners at the driver and
right front passenger seating positions.
The safety belt pretensioner removes some slack from the safety belt
system at the start of a crash. The safety belt pretensioner uses the
same crash sensor system as the front airbags and Safety Canopy威
System. When the safety belt pretensioner deploys, the lap and shoulder
belt are tightened.
187

2011 F-150 (f12)

Owners Guide, 3rd Printing
USA (fus)
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
 Seating and Safety Restraints
When the Safety Canopy威 System and/or the front airbags are activated,
the safety belt pretensioners for the driver and right front passenger
seating positions will be activated when the respective seatbelt is
properly buckled.
WARNING: The driver and the right front passenger safety belt
system (including retractors, buckles and height adjusters) must
be replaced if the vehicle is involved in a collision that results in
deployment of front airbags or Safety Canopy威 System and safety belt
pretensioners.

WARNING: Failure to replace the safety belt assembly under

the above conditions could result in severe personal injuries in
the event of a collision.

Refer to the Safety belt maintenance section in this chapter.

Safety belt usage sensors

The driver and front outboard passenger safety belt buckles are
equipped with sensors that detect if the safety belts are fastened. The
sensors provide information to the Personal Safety System威 which can
then adapt the airbag deployment or safety belt pretensioner activation
based upon safety belt usage.
WARNING: The Personal Safety System威 provides the most
benefit to belted occupants. The system monitors and tailors the
airbag deployment based upon safety belt usage. Failure to properly
wear your safety belt will increase your risk of injury.

188

2011 F-150 (f12)

Owners Guide, 3rd Printing
USA (fus)
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
 Seating and Safety Restraints
Front safety belt height adjustment
Your vehicle has safety belt height
adjustments at the front outboard
seating positions. Adjust the height
of the shoulder belt so the belt rests
across the middle of your shoulder.
To adjust the shoulder belt height,
pull on the center button and slide
the height adjuster down. Release
the button and pull down on the
height adjuster to make sure it is
locked in place. To adjust the belt
upward, slide the adjuster up and then pull down on the height adjuster
to make sure it is locked in place
WARNING: Position the safety belt height adjusters so that the
belt rests across the middle of your shoulder. Failure to adjust
the safety belt properly could reduce the effectiveness of the safety
belt and increase the risk of injury in a collision.

Safety belt warning light and indicator chime

The safety belt warning light illuminates in the instrument cluster and a
chime sounds to remind the occupants to fasten their safety belts.
Conditions of operation
If... Then...
The driver’s safety belt is not The safety belt warning light
buckled before the ignition illuminates 1-2 minutes and the
switch is turned to the on warning chime sounds 4-8 seconds.
position...
The driver’s safety belt is The safety belt warning light and
buckled while the indicator warning chime turn off.
light is illuminated and the
warning chime is sounding...
The driver’s safety belt is The safety belt warning light and
buckled before the ignition indicator chime remain off.
switch is turned to the on
position...
189

2011 F-150 (f12)

Owners Guide, 3rd Printing
USA (fus)
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
 Seating and Safety Restraints
Belt-Minder姞
The Belt-Minder威 feature is a supplemental warning to the safety belt
warning function. This feature provides additional reminders by
intermittently sounding a chime and illuminating the safety belt warning
lamp in the instrument cluster when the driver’s and front passenger’s
safety belt is unbuckled.
The Belt-Minder威 feature uses information from the front passenger
sensing system to determine if a front seat passenger is present and
therefore potentially in need of a warning. To avoid activating the
Belt-Minder威 feature for objects placed in the front passenger seat,
warnings will only be given to large front seat occupants as determined
by the front passenger sensing system.
Both the driver’s and passenger’s safety belt usages are monitored and
either may activate the Belt-Minder威 feature. The warnings are the same
for the driver and the front passenger. If the Belt-Minder威 warnings have
expired (warnings for approximately five minutes) for one occupant
(driver or front passenger), the other occupant can still activate the
Belt-Minder威 feature.
Note: If you are using MyKey威, the Belt-Minder威 warning will not
expire. Refer to MyKey威 in the Locks and security chapter.
When the Belt-Minder威 feature is activated, the safety belt warning light
illuminates and the warning chime sounds for six seconds every
30 seconds, repeating for approximately five minutes or until the safety
belts are buckled.
The Belt-Minder威 feature uses two different warning chimes. During the
first minute of activation, the warning chime will sound once every
second. The remaining warning chimes will sound twice every second
while the system is activated.
If... Then...
The driver’s and front The Belt-Minder威 feature will not
passenger’s safety belts are activate.
buckled...
The driver’s or front The Belt-Minder威 feature is activated
passenger’s safety belt is not - the safety belt warning light
buckled when the vehicle has illuminates and the warning chime
reached at least 6 mph and sounds for six seconds every
1-2 minutes have elapsed since 30 seconds, repeating for
the ignition switch has been approximately five minutes or until
turned to ON... the safety belts are buckled.
190

2011 F-150 (f12)

Owners Guide, 3rd Printing
USA (fus)
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
 Seating and Safety Restraints

If... Then...
The driver’s or front The Belt-Minder威 feature is activated
passenger’s safety belt becomes - the safety belt warning light
unbuckled for approximately illuminates and the warning chime
1 minute while the vehicle is sounds for six seconds every
traveling at least 6 mph and 30 seconds, repeating for
1-2 minutes have elapsed since approximately five minutes or until
the ignition switch has been the safety belts are buckled.
turned to ON...
The Belt-Minder威 feature is The Belt-Minder威 feature is
activated and the vehicle speed suspended - the safety belt warning
is less than 3 mph... light remains illuminated, but the
warning chime does not sound. This
time does not count towards the
five-minute expiration time.
The following are reasons most often given for not wearing safety belts:
(All statistics based on U.S. data)
Reasons given... Consider...
“Crashes are rare events” 36700 crashes occur every day. The
more we drive, the more we are
exposed to “rare” events, even for
good drivers. 1 in 4 of us will be
seriously injured in a crash during
our lifetime.
“I’m not going far” 3 of 4 fatal crashes occur within 25
miles of home.
“Belts are uncomfortable” We design our safety belts to enhance
comfort. If you are uncomfortable -
try different positions for the safety
belt upper anchorage and seatback
which should be as upright as
possible; this can improve comfort.
“I was in a hurry” Prime time for an accident.
Belt-Minder威 reminds us to take a few
seconds to buckle up.
191

2011 F-150 (f12)

Owners Guide, 3rd Printing
USA (fus)
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
 Seating and Safety Restraints

Reasons given... Consider...

“Safety belts don’t work” Safety belts, when used properly,
reduce risk of death to front seat
occupants by 45% in cars, and by
60% in light trucks.
“Traffic is light” Nearly 1 of 2 deaths occur in
single-vehicle crashes, many when
no other vehicles are around.
“Belts wrinkle my clothes” Possibly, but a serious crash can do
much more than wrinkle your clothes,
particularly if you are unbelted.
“The people I’m with don’t Set the example, teen deaths occur 4
wear belts” times more often in vehicles with
TWO or MORE people. Children and
younger brothers/sisters imitate
behavior they see.
“I have an airbag” Airbags offer greater protection when
used with safety belts. Frontal airbags
are not designed to inflate in rear and
side crashes or rollovers.
“I’d rather be thrown clear” Not a good idea. People who are
ejected are 40 times more likely
to DIE. Safety belts help prevent
ejection, WE CAN’T “PICK OUR
CRASH”.

WARNING: Do not sit on top of a buckled safety belt or insert a

latchplate into the buckle to avoid the Belt-Minder威 chime. To
do so may adversely affect the performance of the vehicle’s airbag
system.

Deactivating/activating the Belt-Minder姞 feature

The driver and front passenger Belt-Minder威 are
deactivated/activated independently. When deactivating/activating
one seating position, do not buckle the other position as this will
terminate the process.
192

2011 F-150 (f12)

Owners Guide, 3rd Printing
USA (fus)
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
 Seating and Safety Restraints
Read Steps 1 - 4 thoroughly before proceeding with the
deactivation/activation programming procedure.
Note: If you are using MyKey威, the Belt-Minder威 cannot be disabled.
Also, if the Belt-Minder威 has been previously disabled, it will be
re-enabled after the use of MyKey威. Refer to MyKey威 in the Locks and
security chapter.
The driver and front passenger Belt-Minder威 features can be
deactivated/activated by performing the following procedure:
Before following the procedure, make sure that:
• The parking brake is set
• The gearshift is in P (Park)
• The ignition switch is in the off position
• The driver and front passenger safety belts are unbuckled
WARNING: While the design allows you to deactivate your
Belt-Minder威, this system is designed to improve your chances of
being safely belted and surviving an accident. We recommend you
leave the Belt-Minder威 system activated for yourself and others who
may use the vehicle. To reduce the risk of injury, do not
deactivate/activate the Belt-Minder威 feature while driving the vehicle.

1. Turn the ignition switch to the on position. DO NOT START THE

ENGINE.
2. Wait until the safety belt warning light turns off. (Approximately one
minute)
• Step 3 must be completed within 30 seconds after the safety belt
warning light turns off.
3. For the seating position being disabled, buckle then unbuckle the
safety belt three times, ending in the unbuckled state.
• After Step 3, the restraint system warning light (airbag light) will be
turned on for three seconds.
4. Within approximately seven seconds of the light turning off, buckle
then unbuckle the safety belt.
• This will disable the Belt-Minder威 feature for that seating position if it
is currently enabled. As confirmation, the restraint system warning
light will flash four times per second for three seconds.

193

2011 F-150 (f12)

Owners Guide, 3rd Printing
USA (fus)
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
 Seating and Safety Restraints
• This will enable the Belt-Minder威 feature for that seating position if it
is currently disabled. As confirmation, the restraint system warning
light will flash four times per second for three seconds, followed by
three seconds with the light off, then followed by the restraint system
warning light flashing four times per second for three seconds again.
Safety belt extension assembly
If the safety belt is too short when fully extended, there is an 8 inch
(20 cm) safety belt extension assembly that can be added (part number
611C22). This assembly can be obtained from an authorized dealer.
Use only extensions manufactured by the same supplier as the safety
belt. Manufacturer identification is located at the end of the webbing on
the label. Also, use the safety belt extension only if the safety belt is too
short for you when fully extended.
WARNING: Do not use extensions to change the fit of the
shoulder belt across the torso.

AIRBAG SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM (SRS)

The airbag supplemental restraint system is designed to work in

conjunction with the safety belts to help protect the driver and front
outboard passenger from certain upper body injuries. The term
“supplemental restraint” means the airbags are intended as a supplement
to the safety belts. Airbags alone cannot protect as well as airbags plus
safety belts in impacts for which the airbags are designed to deploy, and
airbags do not offer any protection in crashes for which they do not
deploy.
194

2011 F-150 (f12)

Owners Guide, 3rd Printing
USA (fus)
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
 Seating and Safety Restraints
The airbag supplemental restraint system consists of:
• driver and passenger dual stage airbag modules (which include the
inflators and airbags).
• side airbags and Safety Canopy威. Refer to Seat-mounted side airbag
system and Safety Canopy威 system later in this chapter.
• one or more impact and safing sensors.
• the same indicator light, RCM (restraints control module) and
diagnostic unit used for the Personal safety system.
• Front passenger sensing system
• Passenger airbag off indicator light.
The airbag supplemental restraints are an integral part of the Personal
Safety System. They are designed to be deployed in cases where the
Personal Safety System has determined the occupant conditions and
crash severity are appropriate to activate these devices. Refer to the
Personal Safety System™ section in this chapter.
Important SRS precautions
The SRS is designed to work with
the safety belt to help protect the
driver and right front passenger
from certain upper body injuries.
Airbags DO NOT inflate slowly;
there is a risk of injury from a
deploying airbag.

WARNING: All occupants of the vehicle, including the driver,

should always properly wear their safety belts, even when an air
bag supplemental restraint system (SRS) is provided.

WARNING: When possible, all children 12 years old and under

should be properly restrained in a rear seating position.

195

2011 F-150 (f12)

Owners Guide, 3rd Printing
USA (fus)
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
 Seating and Safety Restraints

WARNING: The National Highway Traffic Safety Administration

(NHTSA) recommends a minimum distance of at least 10 inches
(25 cm) between an occupant’s chest and the driver airbag module.

WARNING: Never place your arm over the airbag module as a

deploying airbag can result in serious arm fractures or other
injuries.

To properly position yourself away from the airbag:

• Move your seat to the rear as far as you can while still reaching the
pedals comfortably.
• Recline the seat slightly one or two degrees from the upright position.
WARNING: Do not put anything on or over the airbag module.
Placing objects on or over the airbag inflation area may cause
those objects to be propelled by the airbag into your face and torso
causing serious injury.

WARNING: Do not attempt to service, repair, or modify the

airbag supplemental restraint systems or its fuses. Contact your
authorized dealer as soon as possible.

WARNING: The front passenger airbag is not designed to offer

protection to an occupant in the center front seating position.

WARNING: Modifying or adding equipment to the front end of

the vehicle (including frame, bumper, front end body structure
and tow hooks) may affect the performance of the airbag system,
increasing the risk of injury. Do not modify the front end of the
vehicle.

WARNING: Additional equipment may affect the performance of

the airbag sensors increasing the risk of injury.

196

2011 F-150 (f12)

Owners Guide, 3rd Printing
USA (fus)
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
 Seating and Safety Restraints
Children and airbags
For additional important safety
information, read all information on
safety restraints in this guide.
Children must always be properly
restrained. Accident statistics
suggest that children are safer when
properly restrained in the rear seat
than in the front seat. Failure to
follow these instructions may
increase the risk of injury in a
collision.
WARNING: Airbags can kill
or injure a child in a child
seat. NEVER place a rear-facing
child seat in front of an active
airbag. If you must use a
forward-facing child seat in the
front seat, move the seat all the
way back.

If two adults and a child occupy a Regular Cab, properly restrain the
child in the center front unless doing so would interfere with driving the
vehicle. This arrangement provides lap and shoulder belt protection for
all occupants, and airbag protection for the adults. All occupants of the
vehicle should always properly wear their safety belts. Ensure the child
is properly restrained in an appropriate child seat or with the use of a
booster. A child or infant properly restrained in the center front seat
should not incur risk of serious injury from the airbags.

197

2011 F-150 (f12)

Owners Guide, 3rd Printing
USA (fus)
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
 Seating and Safety Restraints
How does the airbag supplemental restraint system work?
The airbag SRS is designed to
activate when the vehicle sustains
sufficient longitudinal deceleration.
The fact that the airbags did not
inflate in a collision does not mean
that something is wrong with the
system. Rather, it means the forces
were not of the type sufficient to
cause activation. Airbags are
designed to inflate in frontal and
near-frontal collisions, not rollover,
side-impact, or rear-impacts.
The airbags inflate and deflate
rapidly upon activation. After airbag
deployment, it is normal to notice a
smoke-like, powdery residue or
smell the burnt propellant. This may
consist of cornstarch, talcum
powder (to lubricate the bag) or
sodium compounds (e.g., baking
soda) that result from the
combustion process that inflates the
airbag. Small amounts of sodium
hydroxide may be present which
may irritate the skin and eyes, but
none of the residue is toxic.
While the system is designed to help
reduce serious injuries, it may also
cause minor abrasions, swelling or temporary hearing loss. Because
airbags must inflate rapidly and with considerable force, there is the risk
of death or serious injuries such as fractures, facial and eye injuries or
internal injuries, particularly to occupants who are not properly
restrained or are otherwise out of position at the time of airbag
deployment. Thus, it is extremely important that occupants be properly
restrained as far away from the airbag cover as possible while
maintaining vehicle control.
WARNING: Several airbag system components get hot after
inflation. Do not touch them after inflation.

198

2011 F-150 (f12)

Owners Guide, 3rd Printing
USA (fus)
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
 Seating and Safety Restraints

WARNING: If the airbag has deployed, the airbag will not

function again and must be replaced immediately. If the
airbag is not replaced, the unrepaired area will increase the risk of
injury in a collision.

Front passenger sensing system

The front passenger sensing system is designed to meet the regulatory
requirements of Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standard (FMVSS) 208
and is designed to disable (will not inflate) the front passenger’s frontal
airbag under certain conditions.
The front passenger sensing system works with sensors that are part of
the front passenger’s seat and safety belt. The sensors are designed to
detect the presence of a properly seated occupant and determine if the
front passenger’s frontal airbag should be enabled (may inflate) or
disabled (will not inflate).
The front passenger sensing system will disable (will not inflate) the
front passenger’s frontal airbag if:
• the front passenger seat is unoccupied, or has small/medium objects in
the front seat,
• the system determines that an infant is present in a rear-facing infant
seat that is installed according to the manufacturer’s instructions,
• the system determines that a small child is present in a forward-facing
child restraint that is installed according to the manufacturer’s
instructions,
• the system determines that a small child is present in a booster seat,
• a front passenger takes his/her weight off of the seat for a period of
time,
• a child or a small person occupies the front passenger seat.
Note: When the passenger airbag off light is illuminated, the passenger
(seat mounted) side airbag may be disabled to avoid the risk of airbag
deployment injuries.

199

2011 F-150 (f12)

Owners Guide, 3rd Printing
USA (fus)
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
 Seating and Safety Restraints
The front passenger sensing system
uses a ⬙passenger airbag off⬙ or
⬙pass airbag off⬙ indicator which will
illuminate and stay lit to remind you
that the front passenger frontal
airbag is disabled. The indicator
lamp is located in the center stack
of the instrument panel just above the radio.
Note: The indicator lamp will illuminate for a short period of time when
the ignition is turned to the on position to confirm it is functional.
When the front passenger seat is not occupied (empty seat) or in the
event that the front passenger frontal airbag is enabled (may inflate), the
indicator lamp will be unlit.
The front passenger sensing system is designed to disable (will not
inflate) the front passenger’s frontal airbag when a rear facing infant
seat, a forward-facing child restraint, or a booster seat is detected.
• When the front passenger sensing system disables (will not inflate)
the front passenger frontal airbag, the indicator lamp will illuminate
and stay lit to remind you that the front passenger frontal airbag is
disabled.
• If the child restraint has been installed and the indicator lamp is not
lit, then turn the vehicle off, remove the child restraint from the
vehicle and reinstall the restraint following the child restraint
manufacturer’s instructions.
The front passenger sensing system is designed to enable (may inflate)
the front passenger’s frontal airbag anytime the system senses that a
person of adult size is sitting properly in the front passenger seat.
• When the front passenger sensing system enables the front passenger
frontal airbag (may inflate), the indicator will be unlit and stay unlit.
If a person of adult size is sitting in the front passenger’s seat, but the
⬙passenger airbag off⬙ or ⬙pass airbag off⬙ indicator lamp is lit, it is
possible that the person isn’t sitting properly in the seat. If this happens:
• Turn the vehicle off and ask the person to place the seatback in the
full upright position.
• Have the person sit upright in the seat, centered on the seat cushion,
with the person’s legs comfortably extended.
• Restart the vehicle and have the person remain in this position for
about two minutes. This will allow the system to detect that person
and enable the passenger’s frontal airbag.
200

2011 F-150 (f12)

Owners Guide, 3rd Printing
USA (fus)
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
 Seating and Safety Restraints
• If the indicator lamp remains lit even after this, the person should be
advised to ride in the rear seat.
Pass Airbag Off
Occupant Passenger Airbag
Indicator Lamp
Empty seat Unlit Disabled
Small child in child Lit Disabled
safety seat or booster
Small child with safety Lit Disabled
belt buckled or
unbuckled
Adult Unlit Enabled

WARNING: Even with Advanced Restraints Systems, children

12 and under should be properly restrained in a rear seating
position.

After all occupants have adjusted their seats and put on safety belts, it’s
very important that they continue to sit properly. A properly seated
occupant sits upright, leaning against the seat back, and centered on the
seat cushion, with their feet comfortably extended on the floor. Sitting
improperly can increase the chance of injury in a crash event. For
example, if an occupant slouches, lies down, turns sideways, sits forward,
leans forward or sideways, or puts one or both feet up, the chance of
injury during a crash is greatly increased.
WARNING: Sitting improperly out of position or with the seat
back reclined too far can take off weight from the seat cushion
and affect the decision of the front passenger sensing system, resulting
in serious injury or death in a crash.
Always sit upright against your seatback, with your feet on the floor.

The front passenger sensing system may detect small or medium objects
placed on the seat cushion. For most objects that are in the front
passenger seat, the passenger airbag will be disabled. Even though the
passenger airbag is disabled, the ⬙pass airbag off⬙ lamp may or may not
be illuminated according to the table below.

201

2011 F-150 (f12)

Owners Guide, 3rd Printing
USA (fus)
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
 Seating and Safety Restraints

Pass Airbag Off

Objects Passenger Airbag
Indicator Lamp
Small (i.e. three-ring Unlit Disabled
binder, small purse,
bottled water)
Medium (i.e. heavy Lit Disabled
briefcase, fully packed
luggage)
Empty seat, or small Lit Disabled
to medium object with
safety belt buckled
In case there is a problem with the
front passenger sensing system, the
airbag readiness lamp in the
instrument cluster will stay lit.
DO NOT attempt to repair or service the system; take your vehicle
immediately to an authorized dealer.
WARNING: The front passenger airbag is not designed to offer
protection to an occupant in the center seating position.

WARNING: An out of position front center occupant could

affect the decision of the front passenger sensing system.

If it is necessary to modify an advanced front airbag system to

accommodate a person with disabilities, contact the Ford Customer
Relationship Center at the phone number shown in the Customer
Assistance chapter of this Owner’s Guide.
WARNING: Any alteration/modification to the front passenger
seat may affect the performance of the front passenger sensing
system.

Determining if the system is operational

The SRS uses readiness lights in the instrument cluster or a tone to
indicate the condition of the system. Refer to Airbag readiness in the
Instrument Cluster chapter. Routine maintenance of the airbag is not
required.
202

2011 F-150 (f12)

Owners Guide, 3rd Printing
USA (fus)
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
 Seating and Safety Restraints
A difficulty with the system is indicated by one or more of the following:
• The readiness lights will either
flash or stay lit.
• The readiness lights will not
illuminate immediately after
ignition is turned on.
• A series of five beeps will be heard. The tone pattern will repeat
periodically until the problem and/or light are repaired.
If any of these things happen, even intermittently, have the SRS serviced
at an authorized dealer immediately. Unless serviced, the system may not
function properly in the event of a collision.

Seat-mounted side airbag system

WARNING: Do not place objects or mount equipment on or

near the airbag cover on the side of the seatbacks of the front
seats or in front seat areas that may come into contact with a
deploying airbag. Failure to follow these instructions may increase the
risk of personal injury in the event of a collision.

WARNING: Do not use accessory seat covers. The use of

accessory seat covers may prevent the deployment of the side
airbags and increase the risk of injury in an accident.

WARNING: Do not lean your head on the door. The side airbag
could injure you as it deploys from the side of the seatback.

WARNING: Do not attempt to service, repair, or modify the

airbag SRS, its fuses or the seat cover on a seat containing an
airbag. See an authorized dealer.

WARNING: All occupants of the vehicle should always wear

their safety belts even when an airbag SRS is provided.

203

2011 F-150 (f12)

Owners Guide, 3rd Printing
USA (fus)
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
 Seating and Safety Restraints
How does the side airbag system work?
The design and development of the
side airbag system included
recommended testing procedures
that were developed by a group of
automotive safety experts known as
the Side Airbag Technical Working
Group. These recommended testing
procedures help reduce the risk of
injuries related to the deployment of
side airbags.
The side airbag system consists of
the following:
• An inflatable bag (airbag) with a gas generator concealed behind the
outboard bolster of the driver and front passenger seatbacks.
• A special seat cover designed to allow airbag deployment.
• The same warning light, electronic control and diagnostic unit as used
for the front airbags.
• Crash sensors located on the front doors.
• One crash sensor located on each side of the b-pillar, (SuperCab only).
• One crash sensor located on each side of the c-pillar, (SuperCrew
only).
Side airbags, in combination with safety belts, can help reduce the risk of
severe injuries in the event of a significant side impact collision.
The side airbags are fitted on the outboard side of the seatbacks of the
front seats. In certain lateral collisions, the airbag on the side affected by
the collision will be inflated. The airbag was designed to inflate between
the door panel and occupant to further enhance the protection provided
occupants in side impact collisions.
The airbag SRS is designed to activate when the vehicle sustains lateral
deceleration sufficient to cause the sensors to close an electrical circuit
that initiates airbag inflation.
The fact that the airbags did not inflate in a collision does not mean that
something is wrong with the system. Rather, it means the forces were
not of the type sufficient to cause activation. Side airbags are designed
to inflate in side-impact collisions, not roll-over, rear-impact, frontal or
near-frontal collisions, unless the collision causes sufficient lateral
deceleration.
204

2011 F-150 (f12)

Owners Guide, 3rd Printing
USA (fus)
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
 Seating and Safety Restraints

WARNING: Several airbag system components get hot after

inflation. Do not touch them after inflation.

WARNING: If the side

airbag has deployed, the
airbag will not function again.
The side airbag system
(including the seat) must be
inspected and serviced by an
authorized dealer. If the airbag
is not replaced, the unrepaired
area will increase the risk of injury
in a collision.

Determining if the system is operational

The SRS uses a readiness light in the instrument cluster or a tone to
indicate the condition of the system. Refer to Warning lights and
chimes in the Instrument Cluster chapter. Routine maintenance of the
side airbag is not required.
A difficulty with the system is indicated by one or more of the following:
• The readiness light (same light as for front airbag system) will either
flash or stay lit.
• The readiness light will not illuminate immediately after ignition is
turned on.
• A series of five beeps will be heard. The tone pattern will repeat
periodically until the problem and/or light are repaired.
If any of these things happen, even intermittently, have the SRS serviced
at your authorized dealer immediately. Unless serviced, the system may
not function properly in the event of a collision.

205

2011 F-150 (f12)

Owners Guide, 3rd Printing
USA (fus)
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
 Seating and Safety Restraints
Safety Canopy姞 System

WARNING: Do not place

objects or mount equipment
on or near the headliner at the
siderail that may come into
contact with a deploying Safety
Canopy威. Failure to follow these
instructions may increase the risk
of personal injury in the event of a
collision.

WARNING: Do not lean your head on the door. The Safety

Canopy威 could injure you as it deploys from the headliner.

WARNING: Do not attempt to service, repair, or modify the

Safety Canopy威 System, its fuses, the A, B, or C pillar trim, or
the headliner on a vehicle containing a Safety Canopy威. Contact your
authorized dealer as soon as possible.

WARNING: All occupants of the vehicle including the driver

should always wear their safety belts even when an airbag SRS
and Safety Canopy威 System is provided.

WARNING: To reduce risk of injury, do not obstruct or place

objects in the deployment path of the inflatable Safety Canopy威.

206

2011 F-150 (f12)

Owners Guide, 3rd Printing
USA (fus)
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
 Seating and Safety Restraints
How does the Safety Canopy姞 System work?
The design and development of the
Safety Canopy system included
recommended testing procedures
that were developed by a group of
automotive safety experts known as
the Side Airbag Technical Working
Group. These recommended testing
procedures help reduce the risk of
injuries related to the deployment of
side airbags (including the Safety
Canopy威).
The Safety Canopy system consists
of the following:
• An inflatable curtain with a gas
generator concealed behind the
headliner and in the corner or C
pillar behind the doors.
• A headliner designed to flex open
above the side doors to allow Safety Canopy deployment.
• The same warning light, electronic control and diagnostic unit as used
for the front airbags.
• Two crash sensors located on the C-pillar (one on each side)
(SuperCab and SuperCrew only).
• Crash sensors located on the front doors.
• Rollover sensor in the restraints control module (RCM).
The Safety Canopy system, in combination with safety belts, can help
reduce the risk of severe injuries in the event of a significant side impact
collision or rollover event.
Children 12 years old and under should always be properly restrained in
the second row seats. The Safety Canopy will not interfere with children
restrained using a properly installed child or boost er seat because it is
designed to inflate downward from the headliner above the doors along
the side window opening.
The Safety Canopy system is designed to activate when the vehicle
sustains lateral deceleration sufficient to cause the RCM to initiate Safety
Canopy inflation or when a certain likelihood of a rollover event is
detected by the rollover sensor.
207

2011 F-150 (f12)

Owners Guide, 3rd Printing
USA (fus)
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
 Seating and Safety Restraints
The Safety Canopy is mounted to roof side-rail sheet metal, behind the
headliner, above each row of seats. The Safety Canopy is designed to
inflate between the side window area and occupants to further enhance
protection provided in side impact collisions and rollover events.
The fact that the Safety Canopy did not activate in a collision does not
mean that something is wrong with the system. Rather, it means the
forces were not of the type sufficient to cause activation. The Safety
Canopy is designed to inflate in certain side impact collisions or rollover
events, not in rear impact, frontal or near-frontal collisions, unless the
collision causes sufficient lateral deceleration or rollover likelihood.

WARNING: Several Safety

Canopy system components
get hot after inflation. Do not
touch them after inflation.

WARNING: If the Safety Canopy system has deployed, the

Safety Canopy will not function again unless replaced. The
Safety Canopy system (including the A, B, C, and D pillar trim and
headliner) must be inspected and serviced by an authorized dealer. If
the Safety Canopy is not replaced, it will not function again, which will
increase the risk of injury in a future collision.

Determining if the system is operational

The SRS uses a readiness light in the instrument cluster or a tone to
indicate the condition of the system. Refer to Warning lights and
chimes in the Instrument Cluster chapter. Routine maintenance of the
side airbag is not required.
A difficulty with the system is indicated by one or more of the following:
• The readiness light (same light as for front airbag system) will either
flash or stay lit.
• The readiness light will not illuminate immediately after ignition is
turned on.
• A series of five beeps will be heard. The tone pattern will repeat
periodically until the problem and/or light are repaired.
208

2011 F-150 (f12)

Owners Guide, 3rd Printing
USA (fus)
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
 Seating and Safety Restraints
If any of these things happen, even intermittently, have the SRS serviced
at your authorized dealer immediately. Unless serviced, the system may
not function properly in the event of a collision.

SOS Post-Crash Alert System™

The system automatically flashes the turn signal lamps and sounds the
horn three times at four second intervals in the event of a serious impact
that deploys an airbag (front, side, side curtain [if equipped] or Safety
Canopy威 [if equipped]) or the safety belt pretensioners.
The system can be turned off when any one of the following actions are
taken by the driver or any other person:
• pressing the hazard control button,
• or pressing the panic button on the remote entry transmitter.
The feature will continue to operate until the vehicle runs out of power.

Disposal of airbags and airbag equipped vehicles (including

pretensioners)
Contact your authorized dealer as soon as possible. Airbags MUST BE
disposed of by qualified personnel.

SAFETY RESTRAINTS FOR CHILDREN

See the following sections for directions on how to properly use safety
restraints for children. Also see Airbag supplemental restraint system
(SRS) in this chapter for special instructions about using airbags.

Important child restraint precautions

WARNING: Always make sure your child is secured properly in
a device that is appropriate for their height, age and weight.
Child safety restraints must be purchased separately from the vehicle.
Failure to follow these instructions and guidelines may result in an
increased risk of serious injury or death to your child.

209

2011 F-150 (f12)

Owners Guide, 3rd Printing
USA (fus)
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
 Seating and Safety Restraints

WARNING: All children are shaped differently. The

Recommendations for Safety Restraints are based on probable
child height, age and weight thresholds from NHTSA and other safety
organizations or are the minimum requirements of law. Ford
recommends checking with a NHTSA Certified Child Passenger Safety
Technician (CPST) and consult your pediatrician to make sure your
child seat is appropriate for your child, and is compatible with and
properly installed in the vehicle. To locate a child seat fitting station
and CPST contact the NHTSA toll free at 1-888-327-4236 or on the
internet at http://www.nhtsa.dot.gov. In Canada, check with your local
St. John Ambulance office for referral to a CPST or for further
information, contact your provincial ministry of transportation, your
local St. John Ambulance office at http://www.sfa.ca, or Transport
Canada at 1–800–333–0371 (http://www.tc.gc.ca). Failure to properly
restrain children in safety seats made especially for their height, age,
and weight may result in an increased risk of serious injury or death to
your child.

Recommendations for Safety Restraints for Children

Recommended
Child size, height, weight, or age
restraint type
Infants or Children weighing 40 lb (18 kg) or less Use a child safety
toddlers (generally age four or younger) seat (sometimes
called an infant
carrier,
convertible seat,
or toddler seat).
Small Children who have outgrown or no Use a
children longer properly fit in a child safety belt-positioning
seat (generally children who are less booster seat.
than 4 feet 9 inches (1.45 meters) tall,
are greater than age four (4) and less
than age twelve (12), and between
40 lb (18 kg) and 80 lb (36 kg) and
upward to 100 lb (45 kg) if
recommended by your child restraint
manufacturer)

210

2011 F-150 (f12)

Owners Guide, 3rd Printing
USA (fus)
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
 Seating and Safety Restraints

Recommendations for Safety Restraints for Children

Recommended
Child size, height, weight, or age
restraint type
Larger Children who have outgrown or no Use a vehicle
children longer properly fit in a belt-positioning safety belt having
booster seat (generally children who the lap belt snug
are at least 4 feet 9 inches and low across
(1.45 meters) tall or greater than 80 lb the hips, shoulder
(36 kg) or 100 lb (45 kg) if belt centered
recommended by child restraint across the
manufacturer) shoulder and
chest, and
seatback upright.
• You are required by law to properly use safety seats for infants and
toddlers in the U.S. and Canada.
• Many states and provinces require that small children use approved
booster seats until they reach age eight, a height of 4 ft 9 in.
(1.45 meters) tall, or 80 lb (36 kg). Check your local and state or
provincial laws for specific requirements regarding the safety of
children in your vehicle.
• When possible, always properly restrain children twelve (12) years of
age and under in a rear seating position of your vehicle. Accident
statistics suggest that children are safer when properly restrained in
the rear seating positions than in a front seating position.

211

2011 F-150 (f12)

Owners Guide, 3rd Printing
USA (fus)
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
 Seating and Safety Restraints
Recommendations for attaching child safety restraints for children
Use any attachment method as indicated
below by “X”
LATCH LATCH Safety Safety Safety
(lower (lower belt belt and belt
Restraint Child anchors anchors and LATCH only
Type Weight and only) top (lower
top tether anchors
tether anchor and top
anchor) tether
anchor)
Rear Up to
facing 48 lb X X
child seat (21 kg)
Forward Up to
facing 48 lb X X X
child seat (21 kg)
Forward Over
facing 48 lb X X
child seat (21 kg)

WARNING: Airbags can kill or injure a child in a child seat.

NEVER place a rear-facing child seat in front of an active airbag.
If you must use a forward-facing child seat in the front seat, move the
vehicle seat all the way back. When possible, all children age 12 and
under should be properly restrained in a rear seating position. If all
children cannot be seated and restrained properly in a rear seating
position, properly restrain the largest child in the front seat.

WARNING: Always carefully follow the instructions and

warnings provided by the manufacturer of any child restraint to
determine if the restraint device is appropriate for your child’s size,
height, weight, or age. Follow the child restraint manufacturer’s
instructions and warnings provided for installation and use in
conjunction with the instructions and warnings provided by the vehicle
manufacturer. A safety seat that is improperly installed or utilized, is
inappropriate for your child’s height, age, or weight or does not
properly fit the child may increase the risk of serious injury or death.

212

2011 F-150 (f12)

Owners Guide, 3rd Printing
USA (fus)
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
 Seating and Safety Restraints

WARNING: Never let a passenger hold a child on his or her lap

while the vehicle is moving. The passenger cannot protect the
child from injury in a collision, which may result in serious injury or
death.

WARNING: Never use pillows, books, or towels to boost a child.

They can slide around and increase the likelihood of injury or
death in a collision.

WARNING: Always restrain an unoccupied child seat or booster

seat. These objects may become projectiles in a collision or
sudden stop, which may increase the risk of serious injury.

WARNING: Never place, or allow a child to place, the shoulder

belt under a child’s arm or behind the back because it reduces
the protection for the upper part of the body and may increase the risk
of injury or death in a collision.

WARNING: Do not leave children, unreliable adults, or pets

unattended in your vehicle.

Transporting children
Always make sure your child is secured properly in a device that is
appropriate for their age, height and weight. All children are shaped
differently. The child height, age and weight thresholds provided are
recommendations or the minimum requirements of law. The National
Highway Traffic Safety Administration (NHTSA) provides education and
training to ensure that all children ages 0 to 16 are properly restrained in
the correct restraint system. Ford recommends checking with a NHTSA
Certified Child Passenger Safety Technician (CPST) and your
pediatrician to make sure your seat is appropriate for your child and
properly installed in the vehicle. To locate a child seat fitting station and
CPST contact the NHTSA toll free at 1-888-327-4236 or on the internet
at http://www.nhtsa.dot.gov. In Canada, check with your local St. John
Ambulance office for referral to a CPST or for further information,
contact your provincial ministry of transportation, your local St. John
Ambulance office at http://www.sfa.ca, or Transport Canada at
1–800–333–0371 (http://www.tc.gc.ca).
213

2011 F-150 (f12)

Owners Guide, 3rd Printing
USA (fus)
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
 Seating and Safety Restraints
Follow all the safety restraint and airbag precautions that apply to adult
passengers in your vehicle.
If the child is the proper height, age, and weight (as specified by your
child safety seat or booster manufacturer), fits the restraint and can be
restrained properly, then restrain the child in the child safety seat or
with the belt-positioning booster. Remember that child seats and
belt-positioning boosters vary and may be designed to fit children of
different heights, ages and weights. Children who are too large for child
safety seats or belt-positioning boosters (as specified by your child safety
seat manufacturer) should always properly wear safety belts.
SAFETY SEATS FOR CHILDREN
Infant and/or toddler seats
Use a safety seat that is recommended for the size and weight of the
child.
When installing a child safety seat:
• Review and follow the information
presented in the Airbag
supplemental restraint system
(SRS) section in this chapter.
• Carefully follow all of the
manufacturer’s instructions
included with the safety seat you
put in your vehicle. If you do not
install and use the safety seat
properly, the child may be injured
in a sudden stop or collision.
• In order to install your child seat properly, you may need to remove
the head restraint to access the child seat tether. See Front seats and
Rear seats in this chapter for information on removing the headrests.
Airbags can kill or injure a child in a child seat. NEVER place a
rear-facing child seat in front of an active airbag. If you must use a
forward-facing child seat in the front seat, move the vehicle seat all the
way back.
Children 12 and under should be properly restrained in a rear seating
position whenever possible. If all children cannot be seated and
restrained properly in a rear seating position, properly restrain the
largest child in the front seat.
214

2011 F-150 (f12)

Owners Guide, 3rd Printing
USA (fus)
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
 Seating and Safety Restraints
Installing child safety seats with combination lap and shoulder
belts
Check to make sure the child seat is properly secured before each use.
Children 12 and under should be properly restrained in a rear seating
position whenever possible. If all children cannot be seated and
restrained properly in a rear seating position, properly restrain the
largest child in the front seat.
When installing a child safety seat with combination lap/shoulder belts:
• Use the correct safety belt buckle for that seating position.
• Insert the belt tongue into the proper buckle until you hear a snap
and feel it latch. Make sure the tongue is securely fastened in the
buckle.
• Keep the buckle release button pointing up and away from the safety
seat, with the tongue between the child seat and the release button,
to help prevent accidental unbuckling.
• Place vehicle seat back in upright position.
• Put the safety belt in the automatic locking mode. Refer to step 5
below. This vehicle does not require the use of a locking clip.
WARNING: Depending on where you secure a child restraint,
and depending on the child restraint design, you may block
access to certain safety belt buckle assemblies and/or LATCH lower
anchors, rendering those features potentially unusable. To avoid risk of
injury, occupants should only use seating positions where they are able
to be properly restrained.

215

2011 F-150 (f12)

Owners Guide, 3rd Printing
USA (fus)
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
 Seating and Safety Restraints
If you are using a front center seat, see Installing child safety seats in
cinch tongue combination lap and shoulder belt seating position
later in this chapter for instructions.
Perform the following steps when installing the child seat with
combination lap/shoulder belts:
Note: Although the child seat illustrated is a forward facing child seat,
the steps are the same for installing a rear facing child seat.
1. Position the child safety seat in a
seat with a combination lap and
shoulder belt.

2. Pull down on the shoulder belt

and then grasp the shoulder belt
and lap belt together.

216

2011 F-150 (f12)

Owners Guide, 3rd Printing
USA (fus)
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
 Seating and Safety Restraints
3. While holding the shoulder and
lap belt portions together, route the
tongue through the child seat
according to the child seat
manufacturer’s instructions. Be sure
the belt webbing is not twisted.

4. Insert the belt tongue into the

proper buckle (the buckle closest to
the direction the tongue is coming
from) for that seating position until
you hear a snap and feel the latch
engage. Make sure the tongue is
latched securely by pulling on it.

5. To put the retractor in the

automatic locking mode, grasp the
shoulder portion of the belt and pull
downward until all of the belt is
pulled out and a click is heard.

6. Allow the belt to retract to remove slack. The belt will click as it
retracts to indicate it is in the automatic locking mode.
7. Try to pull the belt out of the retractor to make sure the retractor is
in the automatic locking mode (you should not be able to pull more belt
out). If the retractor is not locked, unbuckle the belt and repeat Steps 5
and 6.
217

2011 F-150 (f12)

Owners Guide, 3rd Printing
USA (fus)
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
 Seating and Safety Restraints
8. Remove remaining slack from the
belt. Force the seat down with extra
weight, e.g., by pressing down or
kneeling on the child restraint while
pulling up on the shoulder belt in
order to force slack from the belt.
This is necessary to remove the
remaining slack that will exist once
the additional weight of the child is
added to the child restraint. It also
helps to achieve the proper
snugness of the child seat to the
vehicle. Sometimes, a slight lean
towards the buckle will additionally
help to remove remaining slack from the belt.
9. Attach the tether strap (if the child seat is equipped). Refer to
Attaching child safety seats with tether straps later in this chapter.
10. Before placing the child in the
seat, forcibly move the seat forward
and back to make sure the seat is
securely held in place. To check
this, grab the seat at the belt path
and attempt to move it side to side
and forward and back. There should
be no more than 1 inch (2.5 cm) of
movement for proper installation.

11. Ford recommends checking with a NHTSA Certified Child Passenger

Safety Technician (CPST) to make certain the child restraint is properly
installed.
Installing child safety seats in cinch tongue combination lap and
shoulder belt seating position (front center seating position only)
The belt webbing below the tongue is the lap portion of the combination
lap/shoulder belt, and the belt webbing above the tongue is the shoulder
belt portion of the combination lap/shoulder belt.
WARNING: Always use both lap and shoulder safety belt in the
center seating position.

218

2011 F-150 (f12)

Owners Guide, 3rd Printing
USA (fus)
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
 Seating and Safety Restraints
1. Position the child safety seat in
the center front seat.

2. If the center lap/shoulder safety

belt has been disconnected from the
seat to carry large cargo behind the
seat, reconnect it by buckling the
small buckle on the end of the belt
into the mini-buckle on the driver’s
side.

3. Slide the tongue up the webbing.

4. While holding both shoulder and

lap portions next to the tongue,
route the tongue and webbing
through the child seat according to
the child seat manufacturer’s
instructions. Be sure that the belt
webbing is not twisted.

219

2011 F-150 (f12)

Owners Guide, 3rd Printing
USA (fus)
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
 Seating and Safety Restraints
5. Insert the belt tongue into the
proper buckle (the buckle closest to
the direction the tongue is coming
from) for that seating position until
you hear a snap and feel the latch
engage. Make sure the tongue is
latched securely by pulling on it.

6. While pushing down with your

knee on the child seat pull up on
the shoulder belt portion to tighten
the lap belt portion of the
combination lap and shoulder belt.

7. Allow the safety belt to retract and remove any slack in the belt to
securely tighten the child safety seat in the vehicle.
8. Attach the tether strap (if the child seat is equipped). Refer to
Attaching child safety seats with tether straps later in this chapter.

220

2011 F-150 (f12)

Owners Guide, 3rd Printing
USA (fus)
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
 Seating and Safety Restraints
9. Before placing the child into the
child seat, forcibly pull the child
seat forward and back to make sure
that the seat is held securely in
place. To check this, grab the seat
at the belt path and attempt to
move it side to side and forward and
back. There should be no more than
1 inch (2.5 cm) of movement for
proper installation.

10. Check from time to time to be sure that there is no slack in the
lap/shoulder belt. The shoulder belt must be snug to keep the lap belt
tight during a collision.
11. Ford recommends checking with a NHTSA Certified Child Passenger
Safety Technician (CPST) to make certain the child restraint is properly
installed. In Canada, check with your local St. John Ambulance office for
referral to a CPST.
WARNING: Airbags can kill or injure a child in a child seat. If
you must use a forward-facing child seat in the front seat, move
seat all the way back.

WARNING: Rear facing child seats should NEVER be placed in

front of an active airbag.

Attaching child safety seats with LATCH (Lower Anchors and

Tethers for CHildren) attachments
The LATCH system is composed of three vehicle anchor points: two (2)
lower anchors located where the vehicle seat back and seat cushion meet
(called the “seat bight”) and one (1) top tether anchor located behind
that seating position.
LATCH compatible child safety seats have two rigid or webbing mounted
attachments that connect to the two lower anchors at the LATCH
equipped seating positions in your vehicle. This type of attachment
method eliminates the need to use safety belts to attach the child seat,
however the safety belt can still be used to attach the child seat if the
lower anchors are not used. For forward-facing child seats, the top tether
strap must also be attached to the proper top tether anchor, if a top
tether strap has been provided with your child seat. See Attaching child
safety seats with tether straps in this chapter for more information.
221

2011 F-150 (f12)

Owners Guide, 3rd Printing
USA (fus)
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
 Seating and Safety Restraints
Your vehicle is equipped with LATCH lower anchors for child seat
installation at the following seating positions (LATCH is not available on
F150 Regular cab) :

• F150 SuperCab and SuperCrew

The lower LATCH anchors are
located at the rear section of the
rear seat between the cushion and
seatback. Follow the child seat
manufacturer’s instructions to
properly install a child seat with
LATCH attachments.

Follow the instructions later in this chapter on attaching child safety

seats with tether straps.
Attach LATCH lower attachments of the child seat only to the anchors
shown.
WARNING: Never attach two child safety seats to the same
anchor. In a crash, one anchor may not be strong enough to hold
two child safety seat attachments and may break, causing serious
injury or death.

WARNING: Depending on where you secure a child restraint,

and depending on the child restraint design, you may block
access to certain safety belt buckle assemblies and/or LATCH lower
anchors, rendering those features potentially unusable. To avoid risk of
injury, occupants should only use seating positions where they are able
to be properly restrained.

222

2011 F-150 (f12)

Owners Guide, 3rd Printing
USA (fus)
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
 Seating and Safety Restraints
Use of inboard lower anchors from the outboard seating positions
(center seating use)
The lower anchors at the center of the second row rear seat are spaced
25.7 inches (652 mm) apart. The standardized spacing for LATCH lower
anchors is 11 inches (280 mm) center to center. A child seat with rigid
LATCH attachments cannot be installed at the center seating position.
LATCH compatible child seats (with attachments on belt webbing) can
only be used at this seating position provided that the child seat
manufacturer’s instructions permit use with the anchor spacing stated.
Do not attach a child seat to any lower anchor if an adjacent child seat is
attached to that anchor.
WARNING: The standardized spacing for LATCH lower anchors
is 280 mm (11 inches) center to center. Do not use LATCH
lower anchors for the center seating position unless the child seat
manufacturer’s instructions permit and specify using anchors spaced at
least as far apart as those in this vehicle.

Each time you use the safety seat, check that the seat is properly
attached to the lower anchors and tether anchor, if applicable. Tug the
child seat from side to side and forward and back where it is secured to
the vehicle. The seat should move less than one inch when you do this
for a proper installation.
If the safety seat is not anchored properly, the risk of a child being
injured in a crash greatly increases.
Combining safety belt and LATCH lower anchors for attaching
child safety seats
When used in combination, either the safety belt or the LATCH lower
anchors may be attached first, provided a proper installation is achieved.
Attach the tether strap afterward, if included with the child seat. Refer
to Recommendations for attaching child safety restraints for children
in this chapter.

Attaching child safety seats with tether straps

Many forward-facing child safety seats include a tether strap which
extends from the back of the child safety seat and hooks to an anchoring
point called the top tether anchor. Tether straps are available as an
accessory for many older safety seats. Contact the manufacturer of your
child seat for information about ordering a tether strap, or to obtain a
longer tether strap if the tether strap on your safety seat does not reach
the appropriate top tether anchor in the vehicle.
223

2011 F-150 (f12)

Owners Guide, 3rd Printing
USA (fus)
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
 Seating and Safety Restraints
The passenger seats of your vehicle are equipped with built-in tether
strap anchors located behind the seats as described below.
The tether anchors in your vehicle may be loops of webbing above the
seatback or an anchor bracket behind the seat on the rear edge of the
seat cushion.
The rear seat in the SuperCab and SuperCrew has three straps along the
top of the seatback that function as both routing loops for the tether
straps and anchor loops.
The tether strap anchors in your vehicle are in the following positions
(shown from top view):
• F150 Regular Cab

• F150 SuperCrew and SuperCab

Attach the tether strap only to the appropriate tether anchor as shown.
The tether strap may not work properly if attached somewhere other
than the correct tether anchor.
If you install a child seat with rigid LATCH attachments, do not tighten
the tether strap enough to lift the child seat off the vehicle seat cushion
when the child is seated in it. Keep the tether strap just snug without
lifting the front of the child seat. Keeping the child seat just touching the
vehicle seat gives the best protection in a severe crash.
224

2011 F-150 (f12)

Owners Guide, 3rd Printing
USA (fus)
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
 Seating and Safety Restraints
Once the child safety seat has been installed using either the safety belt,
the lower anchors of the LATCH system, or both, you can attach the top
tether strap.
Front seat tether strap attachment (Regular cab)
1. Route the child safety seat tether strap over the back of the seat and
under the head restraint.
For vehicles with adjustable head restraints, route the tether strap under
the head restraint and between the head restraint posts, otherwise route
the tether strap over the top of the seatback.
2. Locate the correct anchor for the selected seating position.
• You may need to pull the seatback forward to access the tether
anchors. Make sure the seatback is locked in the upright position
before installing the child seat.
3. Clip the tether strap to the anchor as shown.
• Regular Cab passenger and center
seats (located on back panel)

If the tether strap is clipped

incorrectly, the child safety seat may
not be retained properly in the
event of a collision.
4. Tighten the child safety seat
tether strap according to the
manufacturer’s instructions.
If the safety seat is not anchored
properly, the risk of a child being
injured in a collision greatly
increases.

225

2011 F-150 (f12)

Owners Guide, 3rd Printing
USA (fus)
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
 Seating and Safety Restraints
Rear seat tether strap attachment (SuperCab and SuperCrew)
There are three loops of webbing
just above the back of the rear seat
(along the bottom edge of the rear
window). These loops are to be
used as both routing loops and
anchor loops for up to three child
safety seat tether straps. For
example, the center loop can be
used as a routing loop for a child
safety seat in the center rear seat
and as an anchoring loop for child
seats installed in the outboard rear seats.
Many tether straps cannot be tightened if the tether strap is hooked to
the loop directly behind the child seat. To provide a tight tether strap:
1. Route the tether strap under the
head restraint and through the loop
directly behind the child seat.

2. Route the tether strap behind the

head restraint supports to a loop
behind an adjacent seating position,
and hook the strap hook onto the
loop. If using the driver’s side, pass
the strap behind the shoulder belt
mounting for the center seat.
• Always put the tether strap
through the routing loop. The
head restraint support post will
hold the child seat tightly, but the head restraint post is not strong
enough to hold the child seat during a collision.

226

2011 F-150 (f12)

Owners Guide, 3rd Printing
USA (fus)
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
 Seating and Safety Restraints
3. Tighten the tether strap
according to the child seat
manufacturer’s instructions.

If the safety seat is not anchored properly, the risk of a child being
injured in a collision greatly increases.
If your child restraint system is equipped with a tether strap, and the
child restraint manufacturer recommends its use, Ford also recommends
its use.
Child booster seats
The belt-positioning booster (booster seat) is used to improve the fit of
the vehicle safety belt. Children outgrow a typical child seat (e.g.,
convertible or toddler seat) when they weigh about 40 lb (18 kg) and are
around four (4) years of age. Consult your child safety seat owner guide
for the weight, height, and age limits specific to your child safety seat.
Keep your child in the child safety seat if it properly fits the child,
remains appropriate for their weight, height and age AND if properly
secured to the vehicle.
Although the lap/shoulder belt will provide some protection, children
who have outgrown a typical child seat are still too small for lap/shoulder
belts to fit properly, and wearing an improperly fitted vehicle safety belt
could increase the risk of serious injury in a crash. To improve the fit of
both the lap and shoulder belt on children who have outgrown child
safety seats, Ford Motor Company recommends use of a belt-positioning
booster.
Booster seats position a child so that vehicle lap/shoulder safety belts fit
better. They lift the child up so that the lap belt rests low across the hips
and the knees bend comfortably at the edge of the cushion, while
minimizing slouching. Booster seats may also make the shoulder belt fit
better and more comfortably. Try to keep the belt near the middle of the
shoulder and across the center of the chest. Moving the child closer (a
few centimeters or inches) to the center of the vehicle, but remaining in
the same seating position, may help provide a good shoulder belt fit.
227

2011 F-150 (f12)

Owners Guide, 3rd Printing
USA (fus)
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
 Seating and Safety Restraints
When children should use booster seats
Children need to use booster seats from the time they outgrow the
toddler seat until they are big enough for the vehicle seat and
lap/shoulder belt to fit properly. Generally this is when they reach a
height of at least 4 feet 9 inches (1.45 meters) tall (around age eight to
age twelve and between 40 lb (18 kg) and 80 lb (36 kg) or upward to
100 lb (45 kg) if recommended by your child restraint manufacturer).
Many state and provincial laws require that children use approved
booster seats until they reach age eight, a height of 4 feet 9 inches
(1.45 meters) tall, or 80 lb (36 kg).
Booster seats should be used until you can answer YES to ALL of these
questions when seated without a booster seat:
• Can the child sit all the way back
against the vehicle seat back with
knees bent comfortably at the
edge of the seat cushion?
• Can the child sit without
slouching?

• Does the lap belt rest low across the hips?

• Is the shoulder belt centered on the shoulder and chest?
• Can the child stay seated like this for the whole trip?
Types of booster seats
There are generally two types of belt-positioning booster seats: backless
and high back. Always use booster seats in conjunction with the vehicle
lap/shoulder belt.
• Backless booster seats
If your backless booster seat has a
removable shield, remove the
shield. If a vehicle seating position
has a low seat back or no head
restraint, a backless booster seat
may place your child’s head (as
measured at the tops of the ears)
above the top of the seat. In this
case, move the backless booster
to another seating position with a
higher seat back or head restraint and lap/shoulder belts, or consider
using a high back booster seat.
228

2011 F-150 (f12)

Owners Guide, 3rd Printing
USA (fus)
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
 Seating and Safety Restraints
• High back booster seats
If, with a backless booster seat,
you cannot find a seating position
that adequately supports your
child’s head, a high back booster
seat would be a better choice.

Children and booster seats vary in size and shape. Choose a booster that
keeps the lap belt low and snug across the hips, never up across the
stomach, and lets you adjust the shoulder belt to cross the chest and
rest snugly near the center of the shoulder. The drawings below compare
the ideal fit (center) to a shoulder belt uncomfortably close to the neck
and a shoulder belt that could slip off the shoulder. The drawings below
also show how the lap belt should be low and snug across the child’s
hips.

229

2011 F-150 (f12)

Owners Guide, 3rd Printing
USA (fus)
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
 Seating and Safety Restraints
If the booster seat slides on the vehicle seat, placing a rubberized mesh
sold as shelf or carpet liner under the booster seat may improve this
condition. Do not introduce any item thicker than this under the booster
seat. Check with the booster seat manufacturer’s instructions.
The importance of shoulder belts
Using a booster without a shoulder belt increases the risk of a child’s
head hitting a hard surface in a collision. For this reason, you should
never use a booster seat with a lap belt only. It is generally best to use a
booster seat with lap/shoulder belts in the back seat.
Move a child to a different seating location if the shoulder belt does not
stay positioned on the shoulder during use.
Follow all instructions provided by the manufacturer of the booster seat.
WARNING: Never place, or allow a child to place, the shoulder
belt under a child’s arm or behind the back because it reduces
the protection for the upper part of the body and may increase the risk
of injury or death in a collision.

Child restraint and safety belt maintenance

Inspect the vehicle safety belts and child safety seat systems periodically
to make sure they work properly and are not damaged. Inspect the
vehicle and child seat safety belts to make sure there are no nicks, tears
or cuts. Replace if necessary. All vehicle safety belt assemblies, including
retractors, buckles, front safety belt buckle assemblies, buckle support
assemblies (slide bar-if equipped), shoulder belt height adjusters (if
equipped), shoulder belt guide on seatback (if equipped), child safety
seat LATCH and tether anchors, and attaching hardware, should be
inspected after a collision. Refer to the child restraint manufacturer’s
instructions for additional inspection and maintenance information
specific to the child restraint. Ford Motor Company recommends that all
safety belt assemblies in use in vehicles involved in a collision be
replaced. However, if the collision was minor and an authorized dealer
finds that the belts do not show damage and continue to operate
properly, they do not need to be replaced. Safety belt assemblies not in
use during a collision should also be inspected and replaced if either
damage or improper operation is noted.

230

2011 F-150 (f12)

Owners Guide, 3rd Printing
USA (fus)
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
 Seating and Safety Restraints
For proper care of soiled safety belts, refer to Interior in the Cleaning
chapter.
WARNING: Failure to inspect and if necessary replace the
safety belt assembly or child restraint system under the above
conditions could result in severe personal injuries in the event of a
collision.

231

2011 F-150 (f12)

Owners Guide, 3rd Printing
USA (fus)
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
 Tires, Wheels and Loading
NOTICE TO UTILITY VEHICLE AND TRUCK OWNERS
Utility vehicles and trucks handle
differently than passenger cars in
the various driving conditions that
are encountered on streets,
highways and off-road. Utility
vehicles and trucks are not designed
for cornering at speeds as high as
passenger cars any more than
low-slung sports cars are designed
to perform satisfactorily under
off-road conditions.
WARNING: Utility vehicles have a significantly higher rollover
rate than other types of vehicles. To reduce the risk of serious
injury or death from a rollover or other crash you must:
• Avoid sharp turns and abrupt maneuvers;
• Drive at safe speeds for the conditions;
• Keep tires properly inflated;
• Never overload or improperly load your vehicle; and
• Make sure every passenger is properly restrained.

WARNING: In a rollover crash, an unbelted person is

significantly more likely to die than a person wearing a seat belt.
All occupants must wear seat belts and children/infants must use
appropriate restraints to minimize the risk of injury or ejection.

Study your owner’s guide and any supplements for specific information
about equipment features, instructions for safe driving and additional
precautions to reduce the risk of an accident or serious injury.
VEHICLE CHARACTERISTICS
Four-wheel drive (4WD) system (if equipped)
A vehicle equipped with 4WD (when selected) has the ability to use all
four wheels to power itself. This increases traction which may enable you
to safely drive over terrain and road conditions that a conventional
two-wheel drive vehicle cannot.
232

2011 F-150 (f12)

Owners Guide, 3rd Printing
USA (fus)
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
 Tires, Wheels and Loading
Power is supplied to all four wheels through a transfer case or power
transfer unit. 4WD vehicles allow you to select different drive modes as
necessary. Information on transfer case operation and shifting procedures
can be found in the Driving chapter. Information on transfer case
maintenance can be found in the Maintenance and Specifications
chapter. You should become thoroughly familiar with this information
before you operate your vehicle.
On some 4WD models, the initial shift from two-wheel drive to 4WD
while the vehicle is moving can cause a momentary clunk and ratcheting
sound. These sounds are normal as the front drivetrain comes up to
speed and is not cause for concern.
WARNING: Do not become overconfident in the ability of 4WD
vehicles. Although a 4WD vehicle may accelerate better than
two-wheel drive vehicle in low traction situations, it won’t stop any
faster than two-wheel drive vehicles. Always drive at a safe speed.

How your vehicle differs from other vehicles

SUVs and trucks can differ from
some other vehicles in a few
noticeable ways. Your vehicle may
be:
• Higher – to allow higher load
carrying capacity and to allow it
to travel over rough terrain
without getting hung up or
damaging underbody components.
• Shorter – to give it the capability
to approach inclines and drive
over the crest of a hill without
getting hung up or damaging
underbody components. All other
things held equal, a shorter
wheelbase may make your vehicle
quicker to respond to steering inputs than a vehicle with a longer
wheelbase.

233

2011 F-150 (f12)

Owners Guide, 3rd Printing
USA (fus)
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
 Tires, Wheels and Loading
• Narrower – to provide greater
maneuverability in tight spaces,
particularly in off-road use.
As a result of the above dimensional
differences, SUVs and trucks often
will have a higher center of gravity
and a greater difference in center of
gravity between the loaded and
unloaded condition.
These differences that make your
vehicle so versatile also make it
handle differently than an ordinary
passenger car.

INFORMATION ABOUT UNIFORM TIRE QUALITY GRADING

Tire Quality Grades apply to new
pneumatic passenger car tires. The
Quality grades can be found where
applicable on the tire sidewall
between tread shoulder and
maximum section width. For
example:
• Treadwear 200 Traction AA Temperature A
These Tire Quality Grades are determined by standards that the United
States Department of Transportation has set.
Tire Quality Grades apply to new pneumatic passenger car tires. They do
not apply to deep tread, winter-type snow tires, space-saver or
temporary use spare tires, light truck or “LT” type tires, tires with
nominal rim diameters of 10 to 12 inches or limited production tires as
defined in Title 49 Code of Federal Regulations Part 575.104(c)(2).
U.S. Department of Transportation-Tire quality grades: The U.S.
Department of Transportation requires Ford Motor Company to give you
the following information about tire grades exactly as the government
has written it.

234

2011 F-150 (f12)

Owners Guide, 3rd Printing
USA (fus)
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
 Tires, Wheels and Loading
Treadwear
The treadwear grade is a comparative rating based on the wear rate of
the tire when tested under controlled conditions on a specified
government test course. For example, a tire graded 150 would wear one
and one-half (11⁄2) times as well on the government course as a tire
graded 100. The relative performance of tires depends upon the actual
conditions of their use, however, and may depart significantly from the
norm due to variations in driving habits, service practices, and
differences in road characteristics and climate.
Traction AA A B C
The traction grades, from highest to lowest are AA, A, B, and C. The
grades represent the tire’s ability to stop on wet pavement as measured
under controlled conditions on specified government test surfaces of
asphalt and concrete. A tire marked C may have poor traction
performance.
WARNING: The traction grade assigned to this tire is based on
straight-ahead braking traction tests, and does not include
acceleration, cornering, hydroplaning or peak traction characteristics.

Temperature A B C
The temperature grades are A (the highest), B and C, representing the
tire’s resistance to the generation of heat and its ability to dissipate heat
when tested under controlled conditions on a specified indoor laboratory
test wheel. Sustained high temperature can cause the material of the tire
to degenerate and reduce tire life, and excessive temperature can lead to
sudden tire failure. The grade C corresponds to a level of performance
which all passenger car tires must meet under the Federal Motor Vehicle
Safety Standard No. 139. Grades B and A represent higher levels of
performance on the laboratory test wheel than the minimum required by
law.
WARNING: The temperature grade for this tire is established
for a tire that is properly inflated and not overloaded. Excessive
speed, underinflation, or excessive loading, either separately or in
combination, can cause heat buildup and possible tire failure.

235

2011 F-150 (f12)

Owners Guide, 3rd Printing
USA (fus)
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
 Tires, Wheels and Loading
TIRES
Tires are designed to give many thousands of miles of service, but they
must be maintained in order to get the maximum benefit from them.
Glossary of tire terminology
• Tire label: A label showing the OE (Original Equipment) tire sizes,
recommended inflation pressure and the maximum weight the vehicle
can carry.
• Tire Identification Number (TIN): A number on the sidewall of
each tire providing information about the tire brand and
manufacturing plant, tire size and date of manufacture. Also referred
to as DOT code.
• Inflation pressure: A measure of the amount of air in a tire.
• Standard load: A class of P-metric or Metric tires designed to carry a
maximum load at 35 psi [37 psi (2.5 bar) for Metric tires]. Increasing
the inflation pressure beyond this pressure will not increase the tire’s
load carrying capability.
• Extra load: A class of P-metric or Metric tires designed to carry a
heavier maximum load at 41 psi [43 psi (2.9 bar) for Metric tires].
Increasing the inflation pressure beyond this pressure will not increase
the tire’s load carrying capability.
• kPa: Kilopascal, a metric unit of air pressure.
• PSI: Pounds per square inch, a standard unit of air pressure.
• Cold inflation pressure: The tire pressure when the vehicle has
been stationary and out of direct sunlight for an hour or more and
prior to the vehicle being driven for 1 mile (1.6 km).
• Recommended inflation pressure: The cold inflation pressure found
on the Safety Compliance Certification Label or Tire Label located on
the B-Pillar or the edge of the driver’s door.
• B-pillar: The structural member at the side of the vehicle behind the
front door.
• Bead area of the tire: Area of the tire next to the rim.
• Sidewall of the tire: Area between the bead area and the tread.
• Tread area of the tire: Area of the perimeter of the tire that
contacts the road when mounted on the vehicle.
• Rim: The metal support (wheel) for a tire or a tire and tube assembly
upon which the tire beads are seated.
236

2011 F-150 (f12)

Owners Guide, 3rd Printing
USA (fus)
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
 Tires, Wheels and Loading
INFLATING YOUR TIRES
Safe operation of your vehicle requires that your tires are properly
inflated. Remember that a tire can lose up to half of its air pressure
without appearing flat.
Every day before you drive, check your tires. If one looks lower than the
others, use a tire gauge to check pressure of all tires and adjust if
required.
At least once a month and before long trips, inspect each tire and check
the tire pressure with a tire gauge (including spare, if equipped). Inflate
all tires to the inflation pressure recommended by Ford Motor Company.
You are strongly urged to buy a reliable tire pressure gauge, as automatic
service station gauges may be inaccurate. Ford recommends the use of a
digital or dial-type tire pressure gauge rather than a stick-type tire
pressure gauge.
Use the recommended cold inflation pressure for optimum tire
performance and wear. Under-inflation or over-inflation may cause
uneven treadwear patterns.
WARNING: Under-inflation is the most common cause of tire
failures and may result in severe tire cracking, tread separation
or “blowout”, with unexpected loss of vehicle control and increased
risk of injury. Under-inflation increases sidewall flexing and rolling
resistance, resulting in heat buildup and internal damage to the tire. It
also may result in unnecessary tire stress, irregular wear, loss of
vehicle control and accidents. A tire can lose up to half of its air
pressure and not appear to be flat!

Always inflate your tires to the Ford recommended inflation pressure

even if it is less than the maximum inflation pressure information found
on the tire. The Ford recommended tire inflation pressure is found on
the Safety Compliance Certification Label or Tire Label which is located
on the B-Pillar or the edge of the driver’s door. Failure to follow the tire
pressure recommendations can cause uneven treadwear patterns and
adversely affect the way your vehicle handles.
Maximum Permissible Inflation Pressure is the tire manufacturer’s
maximum permissible pressure and/or the pressure at which the
maximum load can be carried by the tire. This pressure is normally
higher than the manufacturer’s recommended cold inflation pressure
which can be found on the Safety Compliance Certification Label or Tire
Label which is located on the B-Pillar or the edge of the driver’s door.
237

2011 F-150 (f12)

Owners Guide, 3rd Printing
USA (fus)
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
 Tires, Wheels and Loading
The cold inflation pressure should never be set lower than the
recommended pressure on the Safety Compliance Certification Label or
Tire Label.
When weather temperature changes occur, tire inflation pressures also
change. A 10°F (6°C) temperature drop can cause a corresponding drop
of 1 psi (7 kPa) in inflation pressure. Check your tire pressures
frequently and adjust them to the proper pressure which can be found
on the Safety Compliance Certification Label or Tire Label.
To check the pressure in your tire(s):
1. Make sure the tires are cool, meaning they are not hot from driving
even a mile.
If you are checking tire pressure when the tire is hot, (i.e. driven more
than 1 mile [1.6 km]), never “bleed” or reduce air pressure. The tires are
hot from driving and it is normal for pressures to increase above
recommended cold pressures. A hot tire at or below recommended cold
inflation pressure could be significantly under-inflated.
Note: If you have to drive a distance to get air for your tire(s), check
and record the tire pressure first and add the appropriate air pressure
when you get to the pump. It is normal for tires to heat up and the air
pressure inside to go up as you drive.
2. Remove the cap from the valve on one tire, then firmly press the tire
gauge onto the valve and measure the pressure.
3. Add enough air to reach the recommended air pressure.
Note: If you overfill the tire, release air by pressing on the metal stem in
the center of the valve. Then recheck the pressure with your tire gauge.
4. Replace the valve cap.
5. Repeat this procedure for each tire, including the spare.
Note: Some spare tires operate at a higher inflation pressure than the
other tires. For T-type/mini-spare tires (see the Dissimilar spare
tire/wheel information section for description): Store and maintain at
60 psi (4.15 bar). For full-size and dissimilar spare tires (see the
Dissimilar spare tire/wheel information section for description): Store
and maintain at the higher of the front and rear inflation pressure as
shown on the Tire Label.
6. Visually inspect the tires to make sure there are no nails or other
objects embedded that could poke a hole in the tire and cause an air
leak.
7. Check the sidewalls to make sure there are no gouges, cuts or bulges.
238

2011 F-150 (f12)

Owners Guide, 3rd Printing
USA (fus)
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
 Tires, Wheels and Loading
TIRE CARE

Inspecting your tires and wheel valve stems

Periodically inspect the tire treads for uneven or excessive wear and
remove objects such as stones, nails or glass that may be wedged in the
tread grooves. Check the tire and valve stems for holes, cracks, or cuts
that may permit air leakage and repair or replace the tire and replace
the valve stem. Inspect the tire sidewalls for cracking, cuts, bruises and
other signs of damage or excessive wear. If internal damage to the tire is
suspected, have the tire demounted and inspected in case it needs to be
repaired or replaced. For your safety, tires that are damaged or show
signs of excessive wear should not be used because they are more likely
to blow out or fail.
Improper or inadequate vehicle maintenance can cause tires to wear
abnormally. Inspect all your tires, including the spare, frequently, and
replace them if one or more of the following conditions exist:

Tire wear
When the tread is worn down to
1/16th of an inch (2 mm), tires must
be replaced to help prevent your
vehicle from skidding and
hydroplaning. Built-in treadwear
indicators, or “wear bars”, which
look like narrow strips of smooth
rubber across the tread will appear
on the tire when the tread is worn
down to 1/16th of an inch (2 mm).
When the tire tread wears down to
the same height as these “wear bars”, the tire is worn out and must be
replaced.

Damage
Periodically inspect the tire treads and sidewalls for damage (such as
bulges in the tread or sidewalls, cracks in the tread groove and
separation in the tread or sidewall). If damage is observed or suspected
have the tire inspected by a tire professional. Tires can be damaged
during off-road use, so inspection after off-road use is also
recommended.
239

2011 F-150 (f12)

Owners Guide, 3rd Printing
USA (fus)
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
 Tires, Wheels and Loading

WARNING: Age
Tires degrade over time depending on many factors such as
weather, storage conditions, and conditions of use (load, speed,
inflation pressure, etc.) the tires experience throughout their lives.
In general, tires should be replaced after six years regardless of tread
wear. However, heat caused by hot climates or frequent high loading
conditions can accelerate the aging process and may require tires to be
replaced more frequently.
You should replace your spare tire when you replace the road tires or
after six years due to aging even if it has not been used.

U.S. DOT Tire Identification Number (TIN)

Both U.S. and Canada Federal regulations require tire manufacturers to
place standardized information on the sidewall of all tires. This
information identifies and describes the fundamental characteristics of
the tire and also provides a U.S. DOT Tire Identification Number for
safety standard certification and in case of a recall.
This begins with the letters “DOT” and indicates that the tire meets all
federal standards. The next two numbers or letters are the plant code
designating where it was manufactured, the next two are the tire size
code and the last four numbers represent the week and year the tire was
built. For example, the numbers 317 mean the 31st week of 1997. After
2000 the numbers go to four digits. For example, 2501 means the 25th
week of 2001. The numbers in between are identification codes used for
traceability. This information is used to contact customers if a tire defect
requires a recall.

Tire replacement requirements

Your vehicle is equipped with tires designed to provide a safe ride and
handling capability.

240

2011 F-150 (f12)

Owners Guide, 3rd Printing
USA (fus)
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
 Tires, Wheels and Loading

WARNING: Only use replacement tires and wheels that are the
same size, load index, speed rating and type (such as P-metric
versus LT-metric or all-season versus all-terrain) as those originally
provided by Ford. The recommended tire and wheel size may be found
on either the Safety Compliance Certification Label or the Tire Label
which is located on the B-Pillar or edge of the driver’s door. If this
information is not found on these labels then you should contact your
authorized dealer as soon as possible. Use of any tire or wheel not
recommended by Ford can affect the safety and performance of your
vehicle, which could result in an increased risk of loss of vehicle
control, vehicle rollover, personal injury and death. Additionally the use
of non-recommended tires and wheels could cause steering,
suspension, axle or transfer case/power transfer unit failure. If you
have questions regarding tire replacement, contact your authorized
dealer as soon as possible.

WARNING: When mounting replacement tires and wheels, you

should not exceed the maximum pressure indicated on the
sidewall of the tire to set the beads without additional precautions
listed below. If the beads do not seat at the maximum pressure
indicated, re-lubricate and try again.
When inflating the tire for mounting pressures up to 20 psi (1.38 bar)
greater than the maximum pressure on the tire sidewall, the following
precautions must be taken to protect the person mounting the tire:
1. Make sure that you have the correct tire and wheel size.
2. Lubricate the tire bead and wheel bead seat area again.
3. Stand at a minimum of 12 ft (3.66 m) away from the tire wheel
assembly.
4. Use both eye and ear protection.
For a mounting pressure more than 20 psi (1.38 bar) greater than the
maximum pressure, a Ford dealer or other tire service professional
should do the mounting.
Always inflate steel carcass tires with a remote air fill with the person
inflating standing at a minimum of 12 ft (3.66 m) away from the tire
wheel assembly.

Important: Remember to replace the wheel valve stems when the road
tires are replaced on your vehicle.

241

2011 F-150 (f12)

Owners Guide, 3rd Printing
USA (fus)
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
 Tires, Wheels and Loading
It is recommended that the two front tires or two rear tires generally be
replaced as a pair.
The tire pressure sensors mounted in the wheels (originally installed on
your vehicle) are not designed to be used in aftermarket wheels.
The use of wheels or tires not recommended by Ford Motor Company
may affect the operation of your tire pressure monitoring system.
If the TPMS indicator is flashing, your TPMS is malfunctioning. Your
replacement tire might be incompatible with your TPMS, or some
component of the TPMS may be damaged.
Safety practices
Driving habits have a great deal to do with your tire mileage and safety.
• Observe posted speed limits
• Avoid fast starts, stops and turns
• Avoid potholes and objects on the road
• Do not run over curbs or hit the tire against a curb when parking
WARNING: If your vehicle is stuck in snow, mud, sand, etc., do
not rapidly spin the tires; spinning the tires can tear the tire and
cause an explosion. A tire can explode in as little as three to five
seconds.

WARNING: Do not spin the wheels at over 35 mph (56 km/h).

The tires may fail and injure a passenger or bystander.

Highway hazards
No matter how carefully you drive there’s always the possibility that you
may eventually have a flat tire on the highway. Drive slowly to the
closest safe area out of traffic. This may further damage the flat tire, but
your safety is more important.
If you feel a sudden vibration or ride disturbance while driving, or you
suspect your tire or vehicle has been damaged, immediately reduce your
speed. Drive with caution until you can safely pull off the road. Stop and
inspect the tires for damage. If a tire is under-inflated or damaged,
deflate it, remove wheel and replace it with your spare tire and wheel. If
you cannot detect a cause, have the vehicle towed to the nearest repair
facility or tire dealer to have the vehicle inspected.
242

2011 F-150 (f12)

Owners Guide, 3rd Printing
USA (fus)
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
 Tires, Wheels and Loading
Tire and wheel alignment
A bad jolt from hitting a curb or pothole can cause the front end of your
vehicle to become misaligned or cause damage to your tires. If your
vehicle seems to pull to one side when you’re driving, the wheels may be
out of alignment. Have an authorized dealer check the wheel alignment
periodically.
Wheel misalignment in the front or the rear can cause uneven and rapid
treadwear of your tires and should be corrected by an authorized dealer.
Front-wheel drive (FWD) vehicles and those with an independent rear
suspension (if equipped) may require alignment of all four wheels.
The tires should also be balanced periodically. An unbalanced tire and
wheel assembly may result in irregular tire wear.
Tire rotation
Rotating your tires at the recommended interval (as indicated in the
Scheduled Maintenance chapter) will help your tires wear more evenly,
providing better tire performance and longer tire life.
• Rear-wheel drive (RWD)
vehicles/Four-wheel drive (4WD)
vehicles (front tires at top of
diagram)

Sometimes irregular tire wear can be corrected by rotating the tires.

Note: If your tires show uneven wear ask an authorized dealer to check
for and correct any wheel misalignment, tire imbalance or mechanical
problem involved before tire rotation.
Note: Your vehicle may be equipped with a dissimilar spare tire/wheel. A
dissimilar spare tire/wheel is defined as a spare tire and/or wheel that is
different in brand, size or appearance from the road tires and wheels. If
you have a dissimilar spare tire/wheel it is intended for temporary use
only and should not be used in a tire rotation.
Note: After having your tires rotated, check tire pressure and adjust to
the recommended inflation pressure.
243

2011 F-150 (f12)

Owners Guide, 3rd Printing
USA (fus)
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
 Tires, Wheels and Loading

WARNING: If the tire label shows different tire pressures for

the front and rear tires and the vehicle is equipped with TPMS
(tire pressure monitoring system), then the settings for the TPMS
sensors need to be updated. Always perform the TPMS reset procedure
after tire rotation. If the system is not reset, it may not provide a low
tire pressure warning when necessary. See the TPMS reset procedure
in this chapter.

INFORMATION CONTAINED ON THE TIRE SIDEWALL

Both U.S. and Canada Federal regulations require tire manufacturers to
place standardized information on the sidewall of all tires. This
information identifies and describes the fundamental characteristics of
the tire and also provides a U.S. DOT Tire Identification Number for
safety standard certification and in case of a recall.
Information on “P” type tires
P215/65R15 95H is an example of a
tire size, load index and speed
rating. The definitions of these
items are listed below. (Note that
the tire size, load index and speed
rating for your vehicle may be
different from this example.)
1. P: Indicates a tire, designated by
the Tire and Rim Association
(T&RA), that may be used for
service on cars, SUVs, minivans and
light trucks.
Note: If your tire size does not
begin with a letter this may mean it
is designated by either ETRTO
(European Tire and Rim Technical Organization) or JATMA (Japan Tire
Manufacturing Association).
2. 215: Indicates the nominal width of the tire in millimeters from
sidewall edge to sidewall edge. In general, the larger the number, the
wider the tire.
3. 65: Indicates the aspect ratio which gives the tire’s ratio of height to
width.
4. R: Indicates a “radial” type tire.
244

2011 F-150 (f12)

Owners Guide, 3rd Printing
USA (fus)
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
 Tires, Wheels and Loading
5. 15: Indicates the wheel or rim diameter in inches. If you change your
wheel size, you will have to purchase new tires to match the new wheel
diameter.
6. 95: Indicates the tire’s load index. It is an index that relates to how
much weight a tire can carry. You may find this information in your
owner’s guide. If not, contact a local tire dealer.
Note: You may not find this information on all tires because it is not
required by federal law.
7. H: Indicates the tire’s speed rating. The speed rating denotes the
speed at which a tire is designed to be driven for extended periods of
time under a standard condition of load and inflation pressure. The tires
on your vehicle may operate at different conditions for load and inflation
pressure. These speed ratings may need to be adjusted for the difference
in conditions. The ratings range from 81 mph (130 km/h) to 186 mph
(299 km/h). These ratings are listed in the following chart.
Note: You may not find this information on all tires because it is not
required by federal law.
Letter rating Speed rating - mph (km/h)
M 81 mph (130 km/h)
N 87 mph (140 km/h)
Q 99 mph (159 km/h)
R 106 mph (171 km/h)
S 112 mph (180 km/h)
T 118 mph (190 km/h)
U 124 mph (200 km/h)
H 130 mph (210 km/h)
V 149 mph (240 km/h)
W 168 mph (270 km/h)
Y 186 mph (299 km/h)
Note: For tires with a maximum speed capability over 149 mph
(240 km/h), tire manufacturers sometimes use the letters ZR. For
those with a maximum speed capability over 186 mph (299 km/h), tire
manufacturers always use the letters ZR.
8. U.S. DOT Tire Identification Number (TIN): This begins with the
letters “DOT” and indicates that the tire meets all federal standards. The
next two numbers or letters are the plant code designating where it was
manufactured, the next two are the tire size code and the last four
245

2011 F-150 (f12)

Owners Guide, 3rd Printing
USA (fus)
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
 Tires, Wheels and Loading
numbers represent the week and year the tire was built. For example,
the numbers 317 mean the 31st week of 1997. After 2000 the numbers
go to four digits. For example, 2501 means the 25th week of 2001. The
numbers in between are identification codes used for traceability. This
information is used to contact customers if a tire defect requires a recall.
9. M+S or M/S: Mud and Snow, or
AT: All Terrain, or
AS: All Season.
10. Tire Ply Composition and Material Used: Indicates the number of
plies or the number of layers of rubber-coated fabric in the tire tread and
sidewall. Tire manufacturers also must indicate the ply materials in the
tire and the sidewall, which include steel, nylon, polyester, and others.
11. Maximum Load: Indicates the maximum load in kilograms and
pounds that can be carried by the tire. Refer to the Safety Compliance
Certification Label, which is located on the B-Pillar or the edge of the
driver’s door, for the correct tire pressure for your vehicle.
12. Treadwear, Traction and Temperature Grades
• Treadwear: The treadwear grade is a comparative rating based on the
wear rate of the tire when tested under controlled conditions on a
specified government test course. For example, a tire graded 150
would wear one and one-half (11⁄2) times as well on the government
course as a tire graded 100.
• Traction: The traction grades, from highest to lowest are AA, A, B,
and C. The grades represent the tire’s ability to stop on wet pavement
as measured under controlled conditions on specified government test
surfaces of asphalt and concrete. A tire marked C may have poor
traction performance.
• Temperature: The temperature grades are A (the highest), B and C,
representing the tire’s resistance to the generation of heat and its
ability to dissipate heat when tested under controlled conditions on a
specified indoor laboratory test wheel.
13. Maximum Permissible Inflation Pressure: Indicates the tire
manufacturers’ maximum permissible pressure and/or the pressure at
which the maximum load can be carried by the tire. This pressure is
normally higher than the manufacturer’s recommended cold inflation
pressure which can be found on the Safety Compliance Certification
Label or Tire Label which is located on the B-Pillar or the edge of the
driver’s door. The cold inflation pressure should never be set lower than
the recommended pressure on the vehicle label.
The tire suppliers may have additional markings, notes or warnings such
as standard load, radial tubeless, etc.
246

2011 F-150 (f12)

Owners Guide, 3rd Printing
USA (fus)
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
 Tires, Wheels and Loading
Additional information contained on the tire sidewall for “LT” type
tires
“LT” type tires have some additional
information beyond those of “P”
type tires; these differences are
described below.
Note: Tire Quality Grades do not
apply to this type of tire.
1. LT: Indicates a tire, designated by
the Tire and Rim Association
(T&RA), that is intended for service
on light trucks.
2. Load Range/Load Inflation
Limits: Indicates the tire’s
load-carrying capabilities and its
inflation limits.
3. Maximum Load Dual lb (kg) at psi (kPa) cold: Indicates the
maximum load and tire pressure when the tire is used as a dual; defined
as four tires on the rear axle (a total of six or more tires on the vehicle).
4. Maximum Load Single lb (kg) at psi (kPa) cold: Indicates the
maximum load and tire pressure when the tire is used as a single;
defined as two tires (total) on the rear axle.

247

2011 F-150 (f12)

Owners Guide, 3rd Printing
USA (fus)
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
 Tires, Wheels and Loading
Information on “T” type tires
“T” type tires have some additional
information beyond those of “P”
type tires; these differences are
described below:
T145/80D16 is an example of a tire
size.
Note: The temporary tire size for
your vehicle may be different from
this example. Tire Quality Grades do
not apply to this type of tire.
1. T: Indicates a type of tire,
designated by the Tire and Rim
Association (T&RA), that is
intended for temporary service on
cars, SUVs, minivans and light
trucks.
2. 145: Indicates the nominal width
of the tire in millimeters from sidewall edge to sidewall edge. In general,
the larger the number, the wider the tire.
3. 80: Indicates the aspect ratio which gives the tire’s ratio of height to
width. Numbers of 70 or lower indicate a short sidewall.
4. D: Indicates a “diagonal” type tire.
R: Indicates a “radial” type tire.
5. 16: Indicates the wheel or rim diameter in inches. If you change your
wheel size, you will have to purchase new tires to match the new wheel
diameter.

Location of the tire label

You will find a Tire Label containing tire inflation pressure by tire size
and other important information located on the B-Pillar or the edge of
the driver’s door. Refer to the payload description and graphic in the
Vehicle loading – with and without a trailer section.

248

2011 F-150 (f12)

Owners Guide, 3rd Printing
USA (fus)
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
 Tires, Wheels and Loading
TIRE PRESSURE MONITORING SYSTEM (TPMS)
Each tire, including the spare (if
provided), should be checked
monthly when cold and inflated to
the inflation pressure recommended
by the vehicle manufacturer on the
vehicle placard or tire inflation pressure label. (If your vehicle has tires
of a different size than the size indicated on the vehicle placard or tire
inflation pressure label, you should determine the proper tire inflation
pressure for those tires.)
As an added safety feature, your vehicle has been equipped with a tire
pressure monitoring system (TPMS) that illuminates a low tire pressure
telltale when one or more of your tires is significantly under-inflated.
Accordingly, when the low tire pressure telltale illuminates, you should
stop and check your tires as soon as possible, and inflate them to the
proper pressure. Driving on a significantly under-inflated tire causes the
tire to overheat and can lead to tire failure. Under-inflation also reduces
fuel efficiency and tire tread life, and may affect the vehicle’s handling
and stopping ability.
Please note that the TPMS is not a substitute for proper tire
maintenance, and it is the driver’s responsibility to maintain correct tire
pressure, even if under-inflation has not reached the level to trigger
illumination of the TPMS low tire pressure telltale.
Your vehicle has also been equipped with a TPMS malfunction indicator
to indicate when the system is not operating properly. The TPMS
malfunction indicator is combined with the low tire pressure telltale.
When the system detects a malfunction, the telltale will flash for
approximately one minute and then remain continuously illuminated.
This sequence will continue upon subsequent vehicle start-ups as long as
the malfunction exists.
When the malfunction indicator is illuminated, the system may not be
able to detect or signal low tire pressure as intended. TPMS malfunctions
may occur for a variety of reasons, including the installation of
replacement or alternate tires or wheels on the vehicle that prevent the
TPMS from functioning properly. Always check the TPMS malfunction
telltale after replacing one or more tires or wheels on your vehicle to
ensure that the replacement or alternate tires and wheels allow the
TPMS to continue to function properly.

249

2011 F-150 (f12)

Owners Guide, 3rd Printing
USA (fus)
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
 Tires, Wheels and Loading
The tire pressure monitoring system complies with part 15 of the FCC
rules and with RSS-210 of Industry Canada. Operation is subject to the
following two conditions: (1) This device may not cause harmful
interference, and (2) This device must accept any interference received,
including interference that may cause undesired operation.
WARNING: The tire pressure monitoring system is NOT a
substitute for manually checking tire pressure. The tire pressure
should be checked periodically (at least monthly) using a tire gauge,
see Inflating your tires in this chapter. Failure to properly maintain
your tire pressure could increase the risk of tire failure, loss of control,
vehicle rollover and personal injury.

Changing tires with a TPMS

Each road tire is equipped with
a tire pressure sensor located
inside the tire/wheel cavity. The
pressure sensor is attached to
the valve stem. The pressure
sensor is covered by the tire and
is not visible unless the tire is
removed. Care must be taken
when changing the tire to avoid
damaging the sensor. It is
recommended that you always have
your tires serviced by an authorized dealer.
The tire pressure should be checked periodically (at least monthly) using
an accurate tire gauge, refer to Inflating your tires in this chapter.
Understanding your tire pressure monitoring system (TPMS)
The tire pressure monitoring system measures pressure in your four road
tires and sends the tire pressure readings to your vehicle. The low tire
pressure warning light will turn on if the tire pressure is significantly low.
Once the light is illuminated, your tires are under-inflated and need to be
inflated to the manufacturer’s recommended tire pressure. Even if the light
turns on and a short time later turns off, your tire pressure still needs to
be checked. Visit www.checkmytires.org for additional information.
When your temporary spare tire is installed
When one of your road tires needs to be replaced with the temporary spare,
the TPMS will continue to identify an issue to remind you that the damaged
road wheel/tire needs to be repaired and put back on your vehicle.
250

2011 F-150 (f12)

Owners Guide, 3rd Printing
USA (fus)
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
 Tires, Wheels and Loading
To restore the full functionality of the tire pressure monitoring system,
have the damaged road wheel/tire repaired and remounted on your
vehicle. For additional information, refer to Changing tires with a
TPMS in this section.
When you believe your system is not operating properly
The main function of the tire pressure monitoring system is to warn you
when your tires need air. It can also warn you in the event the system is no
longer capable of functioning as intended. Please refer to the following
chart for information concerning your tire pressure monitoring system:
Low tire Possible cause Customer action required
pressure
warning light
Solid warning Tire(s) 1. Make sure tires are at the proper
light under-inflated pressure. See Inflating your tires
in this chapter.
2. After inflating your tires to the
manufacturer’s recommended
pressure as shown on the Tire
Label (located on the edge of
driver’s door or the B-Pillar), the
vehicle must be driven for at least
two minutes over 20 mph
(32 km/h) before the light turns
off.
Spare tire in use Repair the damaged road wheel/tire
and reinstall it on the vehicle to
restore system functionality. For a
description on how the system
functions, refer to When your
temporary spare tire is installed
in this section.
TPMS If the tires are properly inflated
malfunction and the spare tire is not in use but
the light remains on, contact your
authorized dealer as soon as
possible.
Tire rotation On vehicles with different front and
without sensor rear tire pressures, the TPMS must
training be retrained following every tire
rotation. See Tire rotation in this
chapter.
251

2011 F-150 (f12)

Owners Guide, 3rd Printing
USA (fus)
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
 Tires, Wheels and Loading

Low tire Possible cause Customer action required

pressure
warning light
Flashing Spare tire in use Repair the damaged road wheel/tire
warning light and reinstall it on the vehicle to
restore system functionality. For a
description on how the system
functions, refer to When your
temporary spare tire is installed
in this section.
TPMS If the tires are properly inflated
malfunction and the spare tire is not in use but
the light remains on, contact your
authorized dealer as soon as
possible.
When inflating your tires
When putting air into your tires (such as at a gas station or in your
garage), the tire pressure monitoring system may not respond
immediately to the air added to your tires.
It may take up to two minutes of driving over 20 mph (32 km/h) for the
light to turn off after you have filled your tires to the recommended
inflation pressure.
How temperature affects your tire pressure
The tire pressure monitoring system (TPMS) monitors tire pressure in
each pneumatic tire. While driving in a normal manner, a typical
passenger tire inflation pressure may increase approximately 2 to 4 psi
(14 to 28 kPa) from a cold start situation. If the vehicle is stationary
overnight with the outside temperature significantly lower than the
daytime temperature, the tire pressure may decrease approximately 3 psi
(21 kPa) for a drop of 30°F (17°C) in ambient temperature. This lower
pressure value may be detected by the TPMS as being significantly lower
than the recommended inflation pressure and activate the TPMS warning
light for low tire pressure. If the low tire pressure warning light is on,
visually check each tire to verify that no tire is flat. (If one or more tires
are flat, repair as necessary.) Check air pressure in the road tires. If any
tire is under-inflated, carefully drive the vehicle to the nearest location
where air can be added to the tires. Inflate all the tires to the
recommended inflation pressure.
252

2011 F-150 (f12)

Owners Guide, 3rd Printing
USA (fus)
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
 Tires, Wheels and Loading
TPMS reset procedure
The TPMS reset procedure needs to be performed after each tire
rotation on vehicles that require different recommended tire
pressures in the front tires as compared to the rear tires.
WARNING: To determine the required pressure(s) for your
vehicle, refer to the Safety Compliance Certification Label or
Tire Label located on the B-Pillar or the edge of the driver’s door. See
Vehicle loading - with and without a trailer in this chapter for more
information.

Overview
To provide the vehicle’s load carrying capability, some vehicles require
different recommended tire pressures in the front tires as compared to
the rear tires. The tire pressure monitoring system (TPMS) equipped on
these vehicles is designed to illuminate the low tire pressure warning
light at two different pressures; one for the front tires and one for the
rear tires.
Since tires need to be rotated to provide consistent performance and
maximum tire life, the tire pressure monitoring system needs to know
when the tires are rotated to determine which set of tires are on the
front and which are on the rear. With this information, the system can
detect and properly warn of low tire pressures.
TPMS reset tips:
• To reduce the chances of interference from another vehicle, the TPMS
reset procedure should be performed at least three feet (one meter)
away from another Ford Motor Company vehicle undergoing the TPMS
reset procedure at the same time.
• Do not wait more than two minutes between resetting each tire sensor
or the system will time-out and the entire procedure will have to be
repeated on all four wheels.
• A double horn chirp indicates the need to repeat the procedure.
Performing the TPMS reset procedure
It is recommended that you read the entire procedure before attempting.
1. Drive the vehicle above 20 mph (32 km/h) for at least two minutes
and then park in a safe location where you can easily get to all four tires
and have access to an air pump.
2. Place the ignition in the off position and keep the key in the ignition.
253

2011 F-150 (f12)

Owners Guide, 3rd Printing
USA (fus)
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
 Tires, Wheels and Loading
3. Cycle the ignition to the on
position with the engine off.

4. Turn the hazard flashers on then

off three times. This must be
accomplished within 10 seconds.

If the reset mode has been entered successfully, the horn will sound
once, the TPMS indicator will flash and the message center (if
equipped) will display TRAIN LEFT FRONT TIRE. If this does not
occur, please try again starting at Step 2.
If after repeated attempts to enter the reset mode, the horn does not
sound, the TPMS indicator does not flash and the message center (if
equipped) does not display TRAIN LEFT FRONT TIRE, seek service
from your authorized dealer.
5. Train the TPMS sensors in the tires using the following TPMS reset
sequence starting with the left front tire in the following clockwise
order:
• Left front (Driver’s side front tire)
• Right front (Passenger’s side front tire)
• Right rear (Passenger’s side rear tire)
• Left rear (Driver’s side rear tire)
6. Remove the valve cap from the valve stem on the left front tire;
decrease the air pressure until the horn sounds.
Note: The single horn chirp confirms that the sensor identification code
has been learned by the module for this position. If a double horn is
heard, the reset procedure was unsuccessful, and must be repeated.
7. Remove the valve cap from the valve stem on the right front tire;
decrease the air pressure until the horn sounds.
254

2011 F-150 (f12)

Owners Guide, 3rd Printing
USA (fus)
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
 Tires, Wheels and Loading
8. Remove the valve cap from the valve stem on the right rear tire;
decrease the air pressure until the horn sounds.
9. Remove the valve cap from the valve stem on the left rear tire;
decrease the air pressure until the horn sounds.
Training is complete after the horn sounds for the last tire trained
(driver’s side rear tire), the TPMS indicator stops flashing, and the
message center (if equipped) displays:
TRAINING COMPLETE.
10. Turn the ignition off. If two short horn beeps are heard, the reset
procedure was unsuccessful and must be repeated.
If after repeating the procedure and two short beeps are heard when the
ignition is turned to off, seek assistance from your authorized dealer.
11. Set all four tires to the recommended air pressure as indicated on
the Safety Compliance Certification Label or Tire Label located on the
B-Pillar or the edge of the driver’s door. See Vehicle loading - with and
without a trailer in this chapter for more information.
SNOW TIRES AND CHAINS
WARNING: Snow tires must be the same size, load index, speed
rating as those originally provided by Ford. Use of any tire or
wheel not recommended by Ford can affect the safety and
performance of your vehicle, which could result in an increased risk of
loss of vehicle control, vehicle rollover, personal injury and death.
Additionally, the use of non-recommended tires and wheels could
cause steering, suspension, axle or transfer case/power transfer unit
failure.

The tires on your vehicle have all-weather treads to provide traction in

rain and snow. However, in some climates, you may need to use snow
tires and chains. If you need to use chains, it is recommended that steel
wheels (of the same size and specifications) be used, as chains may chip
aluminum wheels.
Note: The suspension insulation and bumpers will help prevent vehicle
damage. Do not remove these components from your vehicle when using
snow tires and chains.
Note: Do not place chains on the following tires sizes: P265/60R18,
P275/65R18, LT275/70R17, LT275/65R18, LT315/70R17, P275/55R20, and
P275/45R22.
255

2011 F-150 (f12)

Owners Guide, 3rd Printing
USA (fus)
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
 Tires, Wheels and Loading
Follow these guidelines when using snow tires and chains:
• If possible, avoid fully loading your vehicle.
• Use only SAE Class S chains.
• Install chains securely, verifying that the chains do not touch any
wiring, brake lines or fuel lines.
• Drive cautiously. If you hear the chains rub or bang against your
vehicle, stop and retighten the chains. If this does not work, remove
the chains to prevent damage to your vehicle.
• Remove the tire chains when they are no longer needed. Do not use
tire chains on dry roads.

VEHICLE LOADING – WITH AND WITHOUT A TRAILER

This section will guide you in the proper loading of your vehicle and/or
trailer, to keep your loaded vehicle weight within its design rating
capability, with or without a trailer. Properly loading your vehicle will
provide maximum return of vehicle design performance. Before loading
your vehicle, familiarize yourself with the following terms for determining
your vehicle’s weight ratings, with or without a trailer, from the vehicle’s
Tire Label or Safety Compliance Certification Label:
Base Curb Weight – is the weight of the vehicle including a full tank of
fuel and all standard equipment. It does not include passengers, cargo, or
optional equipment.
Vehicle Curb Weight – is the weight of your new vehicle when you
picked it up from your authorized dealer plus any aftermarket
equipment.

256

2011 F-150 (f12)

Owners Guide, 3rd Printing
USA (fus)
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
 Tires, Wheels and Loading

Payload – is the combined weight of cargo and passengers that the

vehicle is carrying. The maximum payload for your vehicle can be found
on the Tire Label on the B-Pillar or the edge of the driver’s door
(vehicles exported outside the US and Canada may not have a Tire
Label). Look for “THE COMBINED WEIGHT OF OCCUPANTS AND
CARGO SHOULD NEVER EXCEED XXX kg OR XXX lb.” for
maximum payload. The payload listed on the Tire Label is the maximum
payload for the vehicle as built by the assembly plant. If any aftermarket
or authorized-dealer installed equipment has been installed on the
vehicle, the weight of the equipment must be subtracted from the
payload listed on the Tire Label in order to determine the new payload.
WARNING: The appropriate loading capacity of your vehicle can
be limited either by volume capacity (how much space is
available) or by payload capacity (how much weight the vehicle should
carry). Once you have reached the maximum payload of your vehicle,
do not add more cargo, even if there is space available. Overloading or
improperly loading your vehicle can contribute to loss of vehicle
control and vehicle rollover.

257

2011 F-150 (f12)

Owners Guide, 3rd Printing
USA (fus)
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
 Tires, Wheels and Loading
Example only:

Cargo Weight – includes all weight added to the Base Curb Weight,
including cargo and optional equipment. When towing, trailer tongue load
or king pin weight is also part of cargo weight.
GAW (Gross Axle Weight) – is the total weight placed on each axle
(front and rear) – including vehicle curb weight and all payload.
258

2011 F-150 (f12)

Owners Guide, 3rd Printing
USA (fus)
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
 Tires, Wheels and Loading
GAWR (Gross Axle Weight Rating) – is the maximum allowable
weight that can be carried by a single axle (front or rear). These
numbers are shown on the Safety Compliance Certification Label
located on the B-Pillar or the edge of the driver’s door. The total
load on each axle must never exceed its GAWR.
Note: For trailer towing information refer to Trailer towing found in
this chapter or the RV and Trailer Towing Guide provided by your
authorized dealer.

GVW (Gross Vehicle Weight) – is the Vehicle Curb Weight + cargo +

passengers.
GVWR (Gross Vehicle Weight Rating) – is the maximum allowable
weight of the fully loaded vehicle (including all options, equipment,
passengers and cargo). The GVWR is shown on the Safety
Compliance Certification Label located on the B-Pillar or the
edge of the driver’s door. The GVW must never exceed the GVWR.

259

2011 F-150 (f12)

Owners Guide, 3rd Printing
USA (fus)
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
 Tires, Wheels and Loading
• Example only:

WARNING: Exceeding the Safety Compliance Certification Label

vehicle weight rating limits could result in substandard vehicle
handling or performance, engine, transmission and/or structural
damage, serious damage to the vehicle, loss of control and personal
injury.

260

2011 F-150 (f12)

Owners Guide, 3rd Printing
USA (fus)
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
 Tires, Wheels and Loading

GCW (Gross Combined Weight) – is the weight of the loaded vehicle

(GVW) plus the weight of the fully loaded trailer.
GCWR (Gross Combined Weight Rating) – is the maximum allowable
weight of the vehicle and the loaded trailer – including all cargo and
passengers – that the vehicle can handle without risking damage.
(Important: The towing vehicle’s braking system is rated for operation at
GVWR, not at GCWR.) Separate functional brakes should be used for
safe control of towed vehicles and for trailers where the GCW of the
towing vehicle plus the trailer exceed the GVWR of the towing vehicle.
The GCW must never exceed the GCWR.
Maximum Loaded Trailer Weight – is the highest possible weight of a
fully loaded trailer the vehicle can tow. It assumes a vehicle with only
mandatory options, no cargo (internal or external), a tongue load of
10–15% (conventional trailer) or king pin weight of 15–25% (fifth wheel
trailer), and driver only (150 lb. [68 kg]). Consult your authorized
dealer (or the RV and Trailer Towing Guide provided by your
authorized dealer) for more detailed information.
Tongue Load or Fifth Wheel King Pin Weight – refers to the amount
of the weight that a trailer pushes down on a trailer hitch.
Examples: For a 5,000 lb. (2,268 kg) conventional trailer, multiply 5,000
by 0.10 and 0.15 to obtain a proper tongue load range of 500 to 750 lb.
(227 to 340 kg). For an 11,500 lb. (5,216 kg) fifth wheel trailer, multiply
by 0.15 and 0.25 to obtain a proper king pin load range of 1,725 to
2,875 lb. (782 to 1,304 kg)
WARNING: Do not exceed the GVWR or the GAWR specified on
the Safety Compliance Certification Label.

WARNING: Do not use replacement tires with lower load

carrying capacities than the original tires because they may
lower the vehicle’s GVWR and GAWR limitations. Replacement tires
with a higher limit than the original tires do not increase the GVWR
and GAWR limitations.

261

2011 F-150 (f12)

Owners Guide, 3rd Printing
USA (fus)
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
 Tires, Wheels and Loading

WARNING: Exceeding any vehicle weight rating limitation could

result in serious damage to the vehicle and/or personal injury.

Steps for determining the correct load limit:

1. Locate the statement “The combined weight of occupants and cargo
should never exceed XXX kg or XXX lb.” on your vehicle’s placard.
2. Determine the combined weight of the driver and passengers that will
be riding in your vehicle.
3. Subtract the combined weight of the driver and passengers from XXX
kg or XXX lb.
4. The resulting figure equals the available amount of cargo and luggage
load capacity. For example, if the “XXX” amount equals 1,400 lb. and
there will be five 150 lb. passengers in your vehicle, the amount of
available cargo and luggage load capacity is 650 lb. (1400-750 (5 x 150)
= 650 lb.). In metric units (635-340 (5 x 68) = 295 kg.)
5. Determine the combined weight of luggage and cargo being loaded on
the vehicle. That weight may not safely exceed the available cargo and
luggage load capacity calculated in Step 4.
6. If your vehicle will be towing a trailer, load from your trailer will be
transferred to your vehicle. Consult this manual to determine how this
reduces the available cargo and luggage load capacity of your vehicle.
The following gives you a few examples on how to calculate the available
amount of cargo and luggage load capacity:
• Another example for your vehicle with 1,400 lb. (635 kg) of cargo and
luggage capacity. You decide to go golfing. Is there enough load
capacity to carry you, 4 of your friends and all the golf bags? You and
four friends average 220 lb. (99 kg) each and the golf bags weigh
approximately 30 lb. (13.5 kg) each. The calculation would be: 1400 -
(5 x 220) - (5 x 30) = 1400 - 1100 - 150 = 150 lb. Yes, you have
enough load capacity in your vehicle to transport four friends and
your golf bags. In metric units, the calculation would be: 635 kg - (5 x
99 kg) - (5 x 13.5 kg) = 635 - 495 - 67.5 = 72.5 kg.

262

2011 F-150 (f12)

Owners Guide, 3rd Printing
USA (fus)
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
 Tires, Wheels and Loading
• A final example for your vehicle with 1,400 lb. (635 kg) of cargo and
luggage capacity. You and one of your friends decide to pick up
cement from the local home improvement store to finish that patio
you have been planning for the past 2 years. Measuring the inside of
the vehicle with the rear seat folded down, you have room for
12-100 lb. (45 kg) bags of cement. Do you have enough load capacity
to transport the cement to your home? If you and your friend each
weigh 220 lb. (99 kg), the calculation would be: 1400 - (2 x 220) - (12
x 100) = 1400 - 440 - 1200 = - 240 lb. No, you do not have enough
cargo capacity to carry that much weight. In metric units, the
calculation would be: 635 kg - (2 x 99 kg) - (12 x 45 kg) = 635 - 198 -
540 = -103 kg. You will need to reduce the load weight by at least
240 lb. (104 kg). If you remove 3-100 lb. (45 kg) cement bags, then
the load calculation would be:
1400 - (2 x 220) - (9 x 100) = 1400 - 440 - 900 = 60 lb. Now you have
the load capacity to transport the cement and your friend home. In
metric units, the calculation would be: 635 kg - (2 x 99 kg) - (9 x
45 kg) = 635 - 198 - 405 = 32 kg.
The above calculations also assume that the loads are positioned in your
vehicle in a manner that does not overload the Front or the Rear Gross
Axle Weight Rating specified for your vehicle on the Safety Compliance
Certification Label found on the edge of the driver’s door.
Special loading instructions for owners of pick-up trucks and
utility-type vehicles
WARNING: For important information regarding safe operation
of this type of vehicle, see the Preparing to drive your vehicle
section in the Driving chapter of this owner’s guide.

WARNING: Loaded vehicles may handle differently than

unloaded vehicles. Extra precautions, such as slower speeds and
increased stopping distance, should be taken when driving a heavily
loaded vehicle.

Your vehicle can haul more cargo and people than most passenger cars.
Depending upon the type and placement of the load, hauling cargo and
people may raise the center of gravity of the vehicle.

263

2011 F-150 (f12)

Owners Guide, 3rd Printing
USA (fus)
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
 Tires, Wheels and Loading
TRAILER TOWING
Your vehicle may tow a class I, II, III or IV trailer provided the maximum
trailer weight is less than or equal to the maximum trailer weight listed
for your engine and rear axle ratio on the following charts.
When driving with a trailer or payload, a slight takeoff vibration or
shudder may be present due to the increased payload weight. Additional
information regarding proper trailer loading and setting your vehicle up
for towing is noted under Vehicle Loading – With and Without a
Trailer in this chapter and in the RV & Trailer Towing Guide, available
at your authorized dealer.
If your vehicle is not equipped with a heavy-duty trailer towing package,
the maximum weight your vehicle can tow is limited to 5,000 lb
(2,268 kg).
Note: Do not exceed trailer weight of 5,000 lb (2,268 kg) when towing
with bumper only.
Exceeding the maximum GCWR could result in extensive damage
to your vehicle and personal injury.
Your vehicle’s load capacity is designated by weight, not by volume, so
you cannot necessarily use all available space when loading a vehicle.
Towing a trailer places an additional load on your vehicle’s engine,
transmission, axle, brakes, tires and suspension. Inspect these
components carefully periodically during, and after any towing operation.
Follow these guidelines to ensure safe towing:
• Do not tow a trailer until your vehicle has been driven at least
1,000 miles (1,600 km).
• Consult your local motor vehicle laws for towing a trailer.
• Refer to the instructions included with towing accessories for the
proper installation and adjustment specifications.
• Thoroughly prepare your vehicle for towing. Refer to Preparing to
tow in this chapter.
• Stay within your vehicle’s load limits.
• Use extra caution when driving while trailer towing. Refer to Driving
while you tow in this chapter.
• Service your vehicle more frequently if you tow a trailer. Refer to
Special operating conditions in your scheduled maintenance.

264

2011 F-150 (f12)

Owners Guide, 3rd Printing
USA (fus)
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
 Tires, Wheels and Loading
For load specification terms found on the label and instructions on
calculating your vehicle’s load, refer to Vehicle loading - with and
without a trailer in this chapter. Remember to figure in the tongue load
of your loaded vehicle when figuring the total weight.
WARNING: Do not exceed the GVWR or the GAWR specified on
the certification label.

WARNING: Towing trailers beyond the maximum recommended

gross trailer weight exceeds the limit of the vehicle and could
result in engine damage, transmission damage, structural damage, loss
of vehicle control, vehicle rollover and personal injury.

Regular Cab
Engine Rear axle Maximum Maximum Trailer
ratio GCWR - lb (kg) Weight - lb (kg)
2WD 126” wheelbase
3.55 10400 (4717) 5500 (2495)
3.7L
3.73 10900 (4944) 6000 (2721)
3.31 12900 (5851) 7900 (3583)
5.0L
3.55 13300 (6033) 8300 (3765)
2WD 145” wheelbase
3.15 14000 (6350) 8800 (3992)
3.5L
3.55 15000 (6804) 9800 (4445)
3.5L (Heavy 3.73 16700 (7575) 11300 (5126)
Payload Package)
3.55 10600 (4808) 5600 (2540)
3.7L
3.73 11100 (5035) 6100 (2767)
3.31 13500 (6123) 8400 (3810)
5.0L
3.55 14900 (6759) 9800 (4445)
5.0L (Heavy 3.73 15300 (6940) 10000 (4536)
Payload Package)
4WD 126” wheelbase
3.7L 3.73 10900 (4944) 5700 (2585)
3.55 12900 (5851) 7600 (3447)
5.0L
3.73 13300 (6033) 8000 (3629)
265

2011 F-150 (f12)

Owners Guide, 3rd Printing
USA (fus)
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
 Tires, Wheels and Loading

Regular Cab
Engine Rear axle Maximum Maximum Trailer
ratio GCWR - lb (kg) Weight - lb (kg)
4WD 145” wheelbase
3.31 14000 (6350) 8600 (3901)
3.5L
3.55/3.73 15200 (6895) 9800 (4445)
3.5L (Heavy 3.73 17100 (7756) 11300 (5126)
Payload Package)
3.7L 3.73 11100 (5035) 5800 (2630)
3.55 13500 (6123) 8200 (3719)
5.0L
3.73 15100 (6849) 9800 (4445)
5.0L (Heavy 3.73 15300 (6940) 9700 (4400)
Payload Package)
SuperCab
Engine Rear axle Maximum Maximum Trailer
ratio GCWR - lb (kg) Weight - lb (kg)
2WD 145” wheelbase
3.5L 3.15 14000 (6350) 8600 (3901)
3.55 15200 (6895) 9800 (4445)
3.5L (Max Trailer 3.73 16900 (7666) 11300 (5126)
Tow Package)
3.7L 3.73 11100 (5035) 5800 (2630)
3.31 13500 (6123) 8100 (3674)
5.0L
3.55 14900 (6759) 9500 (4309)
4WD 145” wheelbase
3.31 14000 (6350) 8400 (3810)
3.5L
3.55/3.73 15400 (6985) 9800 (4445)
3.5L (Max Trailer 3.73/4.10 17100 (7756) 11300 (5126)
Tow Package)
3.7L 3.73 11100 (5035) 5500 (2495)
3.55 13500 (6123) 7800 (3538)
5.0L
3.73 15100 (6849) 9400 (4264)

266

2011 F-150 (f12)

Owners Guide, 3rd Printing
USA (fus)
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
 Tires, Wheels and Loading

SuperCab
Engine Rear axle Maximum Maximum Trailer
ratio GCWR - lb (kg) Weight - lb (kg)
2WD 163” wheelbase
3.5L (Heavy 3.73 17100 (7756) 11300 (5126)
Payload Package)
5.0L (Heavy 3.73 15300 (6940) 9600 (4355)
Payload Package)
4WD 163” wheelbase
3.5L (Heavy 3.73 17100 (7756) 11200 (5080)
Payload Package)
5.0L (Heavy 3.73 15300 (6940) 9300 (4218)
Payload Package)
SuperCrew
Engine Rear axle Maximum Maximum Trailer
ratio GCWR - lb (kg) Weight - lb (kg)
2WD 145” wheelbase
3.5L 3.15 14000 (6350) 8500 (3856)
3.55 15300 (6940) 9800 (4445)
3.5L (Max Trailer 3.73 16900 (7666) 11300 (5126)
Tow Package)
3.7L 3.73 11100 (5035) 5700 (2585)
3.55 13500 (6123) 8000 (3629)
5.0L
3.73 14900 (6759) 9400 (4264)
6.2L 3.73 13500 (6123) 7500 (3402)
(Harley-Davidson™
and Lariat
Limited)
6.2L (Max Trailer 3.73 17100 (7756) 11300 (5126)
Tow Package)

267

2011 F-150 (f12)

Owners Guide, 3rd Printing
USA (fus)
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
 Tires, Wheels and Loading

SuperCrew
Engine Rear axle Maximum Maximum Trailer
ratio GCWR - lb (kg) Weight - lb (kg)
4WD 145” wheelbase
3.31 14000 (6350) 8200 (3719)
3.5L
3.55/3.73 15500 (7031) 9700 (4400)
3.5L (Max Trailer 3.73/4.10 17100 (7756) 11300 (5126)
Tow Package)
3.55 13500 (6123) 7700 (3493)
5.0L
3.73 15100 (6849) 9300 (4218)
6.2L 3.73 13500 (6123) 7200 (3266)
(Harley-Davidson™
and Lariat
Limited)
6.2L (Max Trailer 3.73 17100 (7756) 11100 (5035)
Tow Package)
2WD 157” wheelbase
3.15 14000 (6350) 8400 (3810)
3.5L
3.55 15300 (6940) 9700 (4400)
3.5L (Max Trailer 3.73 17000 (7711) 11300 (5126)
Tow Package)
3.55 13500 (6123) 7900 (3583)
5.0L
3.73 14900 (6759) 9300 (4218)
4WD 157” wheelbase
3.31 14000 (6350) 8000 (3629)
3.5L
3.55/3.73 15500 (7031) 9600 (4354)
3.5L (Max Trailer 3.73/4.10 17100 (7756) 11200 (5080)
Tow Package)
3.55 13500 (6123) 7500 (3402)
5.0L
3.73 15100 (6849) 9100 (4128)

268

2011 F-150 (f12)

Owners Guide, 3rd Printing
USA (fus)
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
 Tires, Wheels and Loading
Note: When taking into consideration trailer frontal area, ensure not to
exceed:
• 45 ft2 (4.18 m2) without the Trailer Tow Package or the Heavy
Payload Package.
• 60 ft2 (5.52 m2) with the Trailer Tow Package or the Heavy Payload
Package.
Preparing to tow
Use the proper equipment for towing a trailer and make sure it is
properly attached to your vehicle. Contact your authorized dealer or a
reliable trailer dealer as soon as possible if you require assistance.
Hitches
Do not use a hitch that clamps onto the vehicle’s bumper or attaches to
the axle. You must distribute the load in your trailer so that 10–15% of
the total weight of the trailer is on the tongue.
Weight-distributing hitch
When hooking-up a trailer using a weight-distributing hitch, always use
the following procedure:
1. Park the vehicle (without the trailer) on a level surface.
2. Measure the height of the top of the front wheel opening on the
fender, this is H1.
3. Attach the trailer to the vehicle without the weight distributing bars
connected.
4. Measure the height of the top of the front wheel opening on the
fender a second time, this is H2.
5. Install and adjust the tension in the weight distributing bars so that
the height of the front fender is approximately halfway between H1 and
H2.
6. Check that the trailer is level. If not level, adjust the ball height
accordingly and repeat Steps 3–6.
WARNING: Do not adjust a weight-distributing hitch to any
position where the rear bumper of the vehicle is higher than it
was before attaching the trailer. Doing so will defeat the function of
the weight-distributing hitch, which may cause unpredictable handling,
and could result in serious personal injury.

269

2011 F-150 (f12)

Owners Guide, 3rd Printing
USA (fus)
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
 Tires, Wheels and Loading
Safety chains
Always connect the trailer’s safety chains to the frame or hook retainers
of the vehicle hitch. To connect the trailer’s safety chains, cross the
chains under the trailer tongue and allow slack for turning corners.
If you use a rental trailer, follow the instructions that the rental agency
gives to you.
Do not attach safety chains to the bumper.

Trailer brakes
Electric brakes and manual, automatic or surge-type trailer brakes are
safe if installed properly and adjusted to the manufacturer’s
specifications. The trailer brakes must meet local and Federal
regulations.
WARNING: Do not connect a trailer’s hydraulic brake system
directly to your vehicle’s brake system. Your vehicle may not
have enough braking power and your chances of having a collision
greatly increase.

The braking system of the tow vehicle is rated for operation at the
GVWR not GCWR.
Integrated trailer brake controller (if equipped)
Your vehicle may be equipped with a fully integrated electronic trailer
brake controller (TBC). When used properly, the TBC helps ensure
smooth and effective trailer braking by powering the trailer’s electric
brakes with a proportional output based on the towing vehicle’s brake
pressure.
WARNING: The Ford TBC has only been verified to be
compatible with trailers having electric-actuated drum brakes
(one to four axles) and not hydraulic surge or electric-over-hydraulic
types. It is the responsibility of the customer to ensure that the trailer
brakes are adjusted appropriately, functioning normally and all electric
connections are properly made. Failure to do so may result in loss of
vehicle control, crash or serious injury.

270

2011 F-150 (f12)

Owners Guide, 3rd Printing
USA (fus)
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
 Tires, Wheels and Loading
The TBC user interface consists of
the following: TRAILER BRAKE
1. +/- (GAIN adjustment
buttons): Pressing these buttons - +
adjusts the TBC’s power output to
the trailer brakes (in
0.5 increments). The GAIN setting 1 2
can be increased to a maximum of
10.0 or decreased to a minimum of 0 (no trailer braking). Pressing and
holding a button raises or lowers the setting continuously. The gain
setting displays in the message center as follows: TBC GAIN = XX.X.
The trailer brake controller (TBC) is designed to display three items of
information in the instrument cluster message center. These are: gain
setting, output bar graph, and trailer connectivity status. They appear in
the message center as follows:
• TBC GAIN = XX.X NO TRAILER: The instrument cluster message
center displays the current gain setting during a given ignition cycle
and when adjusting the gain. This message is also displayed during
manual activation without a trailer connected or when gain
adjustments are made with no trailer connected.
• TBC GAIN = XX.X OUTPUT = //////: When the vehicle’s brake pedal
is pushed, or when the manual control is activated, bar indicators
illuminate in the instrument cluster message center to indicate the
amount of power going to the trailer brakes relative to the brake pedal
or manual control input. One bar indicates the least amount of output
with six bars indicating maximum output.
• TRAILER CONNECTED: This message is displayed when a correct
trailer wiring connection (a trailer with electric trailer brakes) has
been sensed during a given ignition cycle.
• TRAILER DISCONNECTED: This message is displayed and
accompanied by a single chime, when a trailer connection was
determined and then a disconnection, either intentionally or
unintentionally, has been sensed during a given ignition cycle. It is also
displayed if a truck or trailer wiring fault occurs causing the trailer to
appear disconnected. This message is also displayed during manual
activation without a trailer connected.

271

2011 F-150 (f12)

Owners Guide, 3rd Printing
USA (fus)
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
 Tires, Wheels and Loading
2. Manual control lever: Slide the control lever to the left to activate
power to the trailer’s electric brakes independent of the tow vehicle’s
brakes (see the following Procedure for adjusting GAIN section for
instructions on proper use of this feature). If the manual control is
activated while the brake is also applied, the greater of the two inputs
determines the power sent to the trailer brakes.
• Stop lamps: Activating the TBC manual control lever illuminates both
the trailer brake lamps and the tow vehicle brake lamps except the
center high-mount stop lamp (presuming proper trailer electrical
connection). Pressing the vehicle brake pedal also illuminates both
trailer and vehicle brake lamps.
Procedure for adjusting GAIN:
The GAIN setting is used to set the TBC for the specific towing condition
and should be changed as towing conditions change. Changes to towing
conditions include trailer load, vehicle load, road conditions and weather.
The GAIN should be set to provide the maximum trailer braking
assistance while ensuring the trailer wheels do not lock when braking;
locked trailer wheels may lead to trailer instability.
Note: This should only be performed in a traffic-free environment at
speeds of approximately 20–25 mph (30–40 km/h).
1. Make sure the trailer brakes are in good working condition,
functioning normally and properly adjusted. See your trailer dealer if
necessary.
2. Hook up the trailer and make the electrical connections according to
the trailer manufacturer’s instructions.
3. When a trailer with electric brakes is plugged in, the TRAILER
CONNECTED message displays in the instrument cluster message
center.
4. Use the GAIN adjustment (+/-) buttons to increase or decrease the
GAIN setting to the desired starting point. A GAIN setting of 6.0 is a
good starting point for heavier loads.
5. In a traffic-free environment, tow the trailer on a dry, level surface at
a speed of 20–25 mph (30–40 km/h) and squeeze the manual control
lever completely.
6. If the trailer wheels lock up (indicated by squealing tires), reduce the
GAIN setting; if the trailer wheels turn freely, increase the GAIN setting.
Repeat Steps 5 and 6 until the GAIN setting is at a point just below
trailer wheel lock-up. If towing a heavier trailer, trailer wheel lock-up
may not be attainable even with the maximum GAIN setting of 10.
272

2011 F-150 (f12)

Owners Guide, 3rd Printing
USA (fus)
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
 Tires, Wheels and Loading
Explanation of instrument cluster warning messages:
The TBC interacts with the instrument cluster message center to display
the following messages:
TRAILER BRAKE MODULE FAULT: This message is displayed and
accompanied by a single chime, in response to faults sensed by the TBC.
In the event this message is seen, please contact your authorized dealer
as soon as possible for diagnosis and repair. The TBC may still function,
but performance may be degraded.
WIRING FAULT ON TRAILER: This message is displayed when a
Short circuit on the electric brake output wire has occurred. If the
WIRING FAULT ON TRAILER message is displayed and accompanied
by a single chime, with no trailer connected, the problem is with the
vehicle wiring from the TBC to the 7–pin connector at the bumper. If the
message is only displayed with a trailer connected, the problem is related
to the trailer wiring; consult your trailer dealer for assistance. This can
be a short to ground (i.e., chaffed wire) or a short to voltage (i.e., pulled
pin on trailer emergency break-away battery) or trailer brakes drawing
too much current.
Note: Your TBC can be diagnosed by your authorized dealer to
determine exactly which trailer fault has occurred; however, if the fault
is with the trailer this diagnosis is not covered under your Ford
warranty.
Points to Remember:
• Remember to adjust gain setting before using the TBC for the first
time.
• Readjust gain setting on the TBC (according to procedure above)
whenever road, weather and trailer or vehicle loading conditions
change from those that existed when the gain was initially set.
• The sliding lever on the TBC should be used only for manual
activation of trailer brakes to assist with proper adjustment of the
GAIN. Misuse, such as application during trailer sway, could cause
instability of trailer and/or tow vehicle.
• Avoid towing in adverse weather conditions. The TBC does not
provide anti-lock control of the trailer wheels. Trailer wheels can lock
up on slippery surfaces, resulting in reduced stability of trailer and
tow vehicle.
• The TBC is equipped with a feature which reduces output at vehicle
speeds below 11 mph (18 km/h) so trailer and vehicle braking is not
jerky or harsh. This feature is only available when applying the brakes
using the vehicle’s brake pedal, not the TBC.
273

2011 F-150 (f12)

Owners Guide, 3rd Printing
USA (fus)
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
 Tires, Wheels and Loading
• The TBC interacts with the brake system of the vehicle, including
ABS, in order to reduce the likelihood of trailer wheel lock-up;
therefore, if these systems are not functioning properly, the TBC may
not function at full performance.
• Your vehicle’s brake system and the trailer brake system work
independently of each other; changing the GAIN setting on the TBC
does not affect the operation of your vehicle’s brakes whether a trailer
is attached or not.
• When the vehicle is turned off, the TBC output is disabled and the
display is shut down; turning the ignition from off to on awakens the
TBC module.
• The TBC is only a factory- or dealer-installed item; Ford is not
responsible for warranty or performance of the TBC due to misuse or
customer installation.
• Do not attempt removal of the TBC without consulting the
Workshop Manual; damage to the unit may result.
Trailer lamps
Trailer lamps are required on most towed vehicles. Make sure all running
lights, brake lights, turn signals and hazard lights are working. Contact
your authorized dealer or trailer rental agency for proper instructions
and equipment for hooking-up trailer lamps.
Using a step bumper (if equipped)
The rear bumper is equipped with an integral hitch and only requires a
ball with a one inch (25.4 mm) shank diameter. The bumper has a
5,000 lb (2,270 kg) trailer weight and 500 lb (227 kg) tongue weight
capacity.
If it is necessary to relocate the trailer hitch ball position, a
frame-mounted trailer hitch must be installed.
Driving while you tow
When towing a trailer:
• Do not drive faster than 70 mph (113 km/h) during the first 500 miles
(800 km) of trailer towing and don’t make full-throttle starts.
• Turn off the speed control. The speed control may shut off
automatically when you are towing on long, steep grades.
• Activate the tow/haul feature to eliminate excessive transmission
shifting and assist in transmission cooling. For additional information,
refer to Automatic transmission operation in the Driving chapter.
274

2011 F-150 (f12)

Owners Guide, 3rd Printing
USA (fus)
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
 Tires, Wheels and Loading
• Allow more distance for stopping with a trailer attached; anticipate
stops and brake gradually.
If your vehicle is equipped with AdvanceTrac威 with RSC, you may
experience AdvanceTrac威 with RSC activations during typical cornering
maneuvers with a heavily loaded trailer; this is normal. Cornering at a
slower speed while towing will reduce the tendency of the AdvanceTrac威
stability enhancement system to activate.
Trailer towing tips
• Practice turning, stopping and backing-up before starting on a trip to
get the feel of the vehicle-trailer combination. When turning, make
wider turns so the trailer wheels will clear curbs and other obstacles.
• To aid in engine/transmission cooling and A/C efficiency during hot
weather while stopped in traffic, place the gearshift lever in P (Park).
• After you have traveled 50 miles (80 km), thoroughly check your
hitch, electrical connections and trailer wheel lug nuts.
• If you are driving down a long or steep hill, shift to a lower gear. Do
not apply the brakes continuously, as they may overheat and become
less effective. Also, see the information on tow/haul mode operation
under Automatic transmission operation in the Driving chapter.
• If you will be towing a trailer frequently in hot weather, hilly
conditions, at GCWR, or any combination of these factors, consider
refilling your rear axle with synthetic gear lube if not already so
equipped. Refer to the Maintenance and Specifications chapter for
the lubricant specification. Remember that regardless of the rear axle
lube used, do not tow a trailer for the first 1,000 miles (1,600 km) of a
new vehicle, and that the first 500 miles (800 km) of towing be done
at no faster than 70 mph (113 km/h) with no full throttle starts.
• Vehicles with trailers should not be parked on a grade. If you must
park on a grade, place wheel chocks under the trailer’s wheels.
Launching or retrieving a boat
Disconnect the wiring to the trailer before backing the trailer
into the water. Reconnect the wiring to the trailer after the
trailer is removed from the water.
When backing down a ramp during boat launching or retrieval:
• Do not allow the static water level to rise above the bottom edge of
the rear bumper.
• Do not allow waves to break higher than 6 in (15 cm) above the
bottom edge of the rear bumper.
275

2011 F-150 (f12)

Owners Guide, 3rd Printing
USA (fus)
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
 Tires, Wheels and Loading
Exceeding these limits may allow water to enter vehicle components:
• Causing internal damage to the components.
• Affecting driveability, emissions and reliability.
Replace the rear axle lubricant any time the axle has been submerged in
water. Rear axle lubricant quantities are not to be checked or changed
unless a leak is suspected or repair required.

RECREATIONAL TOWING
Follow these guidelines if you have a need for recreational (RV) towing.
An example of recreational towing would be towing your vehicle behind
a motor home.
Note: Put your climate control system in recirculated air mode to
prevent exhaust fumes from entering the vehicle. Refer to the Climate
Controls chapter for more information.
In case of a roadside emergency with a disabled vehicle, see Wrecker
towing in the Roadside Emergencies chapter.
These guidelines are designed to prevent damage to your vehicle and its
transmission after it is hooked-up to the RV or tow dolly.
2WD vehicles and 4WD vehicles equipped with an electronic-shift
transfer case: Do not tow your vehicle with any wheels on the ground,
as vehicle or transmission damage may occur. It is recommended to tow
your vehicle with all four (4) wheels off the ground such as when using a
car-hauling trailer. Otherwise, no recreational towing is permitted.
4WD vehicles equipped with a manual-shift transfer case:
• Release the parking brake.
• Turn the key in the ignition to the off position.
• Place the transmission in N (Neutral).
• Place the transfer case lever in N (Neutral).
• The maximum recommended distance is unlimited.
• The vehicle must be towed in the forward position to ensure no
damage is done to the internal transfer case components.
The transfer case N (Neutral) position overrides the transmission and
puts the vehicle in neutral regardless of transmission gearshift lever
position. The vehicle can move forward or backward. This position
should only be used when towing the vehicle.
276

2011 F-150 (f12)

Owners Guide, 3rd Printing
USA (fus)
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
 Tires, Wheels and Loading

WARNING: Do not leave the vehicle unattended with the

transfer case in the N (Neutral) position. Always set the parking
brake fully and turn off the ignition when leaving the vehicle.

After reaching the destination, you must place your vehicle’s 4WD
gearshift lever in gear (2H, 4H or 4L).

277

2011 F-150 (f12)

Owners Guide, 3rd Printing
USA (fus)
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
 Driving
STARTING

Positions of the ignition

1. Off — locks the automatic
transmission gearshift lever and
allows key removal. Note: In order
to switch off the engine while the
vehicle is in motion, shift to neutral
and use the brakes to bring the
vehicle to a safe stop. After the
vehicle has stopped, turn the engine
off and shift into park. Then, turn
the key to the accessory or off
position.
Note: The ignition key cannot be removed from the ignition unless the
gearshift lever is securely latched in P (Park).
2. Accessory — allows the electrical accessories such as the radio to
operate while the engine is not running.
3. On — all electrical circuits operational. Warning lights illuminated. Key
position when driving.
4. Start — cranks the engine. Release the key as soon as the engine
starts.

Preparing to start your vehicle

Engine starting is controlled by the powertrain control system.
This system meets all Canadian interference-causing equipment standard
requirements regulating the impulse electrical field strength of radio
noise.
When starting a fuel-injected engine, don’t press the accelerator before
or during starting. Only use the accelerator when you have difficulty
starting the engine. For more information on starting the vehicle, refer to
Starting the engine in this chapter.
WARNING: Extended idling at high engine speeds can produce
very high temperatures in the engine and exhaust system,
creating the risk of fire or other damage.

278

2011 F-150 (f12)

Owners Guide, 3rd Printing
USA (fus)
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
 Driving

WARNING: Do not park, idle, or drive your vehicle in dry grass

or other dry ground cover. The emission system heats up the
engine compartment and exhaust system, which can start a fire.

WARNING: Do not start your vehicle in a closed garage or in

other enclosed areas. Exhaust fumes can be toxic. Always open
the garage door before you start the engine. See Guarding against
exhaust fumes in this chapter for more instructions.

WARNING: If you smell exhaust fumes inside your vehicle, have

your dealer inspect your vehicle immediately. Do not drive if you
smell exhaust fumes.

Important safety precautions

A computer system controls the engine’s idle revolutions per minute
(RPM). When the engine starts, the idle RPM runs higher than normal in
order to warm the engine. If the engine idle speed does not slow down
automatically, have the vehicle checked. If the vehicle is operated in a
heavy snow storm or blowing snow conditions, the engine air induction
may become partially clogged with snow and/or ice. If this occurs the
engine may experience a significant reduction in power output. At the
earliest opportunity, clear all snow and/or ice away from the air induction
inlet. Do not allow the vehicle to idle for more than 10 minutes at the
higher engine RPM.
Before starting the vehicle:
1. Make sure all vehicle occupants have buckled their safety belts. For
more information on safety belts and their proper usage, refer to the
Seating and Safety Restraints chapter.
2. Make sure the headlamps and vehicle accessories are off.

279

2011 F-150 (f12)

Owners Guide, 3rd Printing
USA (fus)
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
 Driving
3. Make sure the gearshift is in P
(Park).

4. Make sure the parking brake is

set. BRAKE

5. Turn the key to 3 (on) without

turning the key to 4 (start).

Some warning lights will briefly illuminate. See Warning lights and
chimes in the Instrument Cluster chapter for more information
regarding the warning lights.
280

2011 F-150 (f12)

Owners Guide, 3rd Printing
USA (fus)
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
 Driving
Starting the engine
1. Turn the key to 3 (on) without
turning the key to 4 (start).
2. Turn the key to 4 (start), then
release the key as soon as the
engine begins cranking. Your vehicle
has a computer assisted cranking
system that assists in starting the
engine. After releasing the key from
the 4 (start) position, the engine
may continue cranking for up to
10 seconds or until the vehicle
starts.
Note: Cranking may be stopped at any time by turning the key to the off
position.
3. After idling for a few seconds, release the parking brake, apply the
brake, shift into gear and drive.
Note: If the engine does not start on the first try, turn the key to the off
position, wait 10 seconds and try Step 2 again. If the engine still fails to
start, press the accelerator to the floor and try Step 2 again, keeping the
accelerator on the floor until the engine begins to accelerate above
cranking speeds; this will allow the engine to crank with the fuel shut off
in case the engine is flooded with fuel.
Cold weather starting (flexible fuel vehicles only)
The starting characteristics of all grades of E85 ethanol make it
unsuitable for use when ambient temperatures fall below 0°F (-18°C).
Consult your fuel distributor for the availability of winter grade ethanol.
As the outside temperature approaches freezing, ethanol fuel distributors
should supply winter grade ethanol (same as with unleaded gasoline). If
summer grade ethanol is used in cold weather conditions, 0°F to 32°F
(-18°C to 0°C), you may experience increased cranking times, rough idle
or hesitation until the engine has warmed up.
You may experience a decrease in peak performance when the engine is
cold when operating on E85 ethanol.
Do not crank the engine for more than 10 seconds at a time as starter
damage may occur. If the engine fails to start, turn the key to off and
wait 30 seconds before trying again.
Do not use starting fluid such as ether in the air intake system. Such
fluid could cause immediate explosive damage to the engine and possible
personal injury.
281

2011 F-150 (f12)

Owners Guide, 3rd Printing
USA (fus)
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
 Driving
If you should experience cold weather starting problems on E85 ethanol,
and neither an alternative brand of E85 ethanol nor an engine block
heater is available, the addition of unleaded gasoline to your tank will
improve cold starting performance. Your vehicle is designed to operate
on E85 ethanol alone, unleaded gasoline alone, or any mixture of the two.
See Choosing the right fuel in the Maintenance and Specifications
chapter for more information on ethanol.
If the engine fails to start using the preceding instructions (flexible
fuel vehicles only)
1. Press and hold down the accelerator 1/3 to 1/2 way to floor, then
crank the engine.
2. When the engine starts, release the key, then gradually release the
accelerator pedal as the engine speeds up. If the engine still fails to start,
repeat Step 1.
Guarding against exhaust fumes
Carbon monoxide is present in exhaust fumes. Take precautions to avoid
its dangerous effects.
WARNING: If you smell exhaust fumes inside your vehicle, have
your dealer inspect your vehicle immediately. Do not drive if you
smell exhaust fumes.

Important ventilating information

If the engine is idling while the vehicle is stopped for a long period of
time, open the windows at least 1 inch (2.5 cm) or adjust the heating or
air conditioning to bring in fresh air.
ENGINE BLOCK HEATER (IF EQUIPPED)
An engine block heater warms the engine coolant which aids in starting
and allows the heater/defroster system to respond quickly. If your vehicle
is equipped with this system, your equipment includes a heater element
which is installed in your engine block and a wire harness which allows
the user to connect the system to a grounded 120 volt A/C electrical
source. The block heater system is most effective when outdoor
temperatures reach below 0°F (-18°C).
For flexible fuel vehicles, if operating with E85 ethanol, an engine block
heater must be used if ambient temperature is below 0°F (-18°C).
See Cold weather starting earlier in this chapter for more information
on starting with ethanol.
282

2011 F-150 (f12)

Owners Guide, 3rd Printing
USA (fus)
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
 Driving

WARNING: Failure to follow engine block heater instructions

could result in property damage or physical injury.

WARNING: To reduce the risk of electrical shock, do not use

your heater with ungrounded electrical systems or two-pronged
(cheater) adapters.

Prior to using the engine block heater, follow these recommendations for
proper and safe operation:
• For your safety, use an outdoor extension cord that is product
certified by Underwriter’s Laboratory (UL) or Canadian Standards
Association (CSA). Use only an extension cord that can be used
outdoors, in cold temperatures, and is clearly marked “Suitable for Use
with Outdoor Appliances.” Never use an indoor extension cord
outdoors; it could result in an electric shock or fire hazard.
• Use a 16 gauge outdoor extension cord, minimum.
• Use as short an extension cord as possible.
• Do not use multiple extension cords. Instead, use one extension cord
which is long enough to reach from the engine block heater cord to
the outlet without stretching.
• Make certain that the extension cord is in excellent condition (not
patched or spliced). Store your extension cord indoors at
temperatures above 32°F (0°C). Outdoor conditions can deteriorate
extension cords over a period of time.
• To reduce the risk of electrical shock, do not use your heater with
ungrounded electrical systems or two pronged (cheater) adapters.
Also ensure that the block heater, especially the cord, is in good
condition before use.
• Make sure that when in operation, the extension cord plug /engine
block heater cord plug connection is free and clear of water in order
to prevent possible shock or fire.
• Be sure that areas where the vehicle is parked are clean and clear of
all combustibles such as petroleum products, dust, rags, paper and
similar items.
• Be sure that the engine block heater, heater cord and extension cord
are solidly connected. A poor connection can cause the cord to
become very hot and may result in an electrical shock or fire. Be sure
to check for heat anywhere in the electrical hookup once the system
has been operating for approximately a half hour.
283

2011 F-150 (f12)

Owners Guide, 3rd Printing
USA (fus)
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
 Driving
• Finally, have the engine block heater system checked during your fall
tune-up to be sure it’s in good working order.
How to use the engine block heater
Ensure the receptacle terminals are clean and dry prior to use. To clean
them, use a dry cloth.
Depending on the type of factory installed equipment, your engine block
heater system may consume anywhere between 400 watts or 1000 watts
of power per hour. Your factory installed block heater system does not
have a thermostat; however, maximum temperature is attained after
approximately three hours of operation. Block heater operation longer
than three hours will not improve system performance and will
unnecessarily use additional electricity.
Make sure system is unplugged and properly stowed before driving the
vehicle. While not in use, make sure the protective cover seals the
prongs of the engine block heater cord plug.
BRAKES
Occasional brake noise is normal. If a metal-to-metal, continuous grinding
or continuous squeal sound is present, the brake linings may be worn-out
and should be inspected by an authorized dealer. If the vehicle has
continuous vibration or shudder in the steering wheel while braking, the
vehicle should be inspected by an authorized dealer.
Refer to Warning lights and
chimes in the Instrument Cluster ! P
chapter for information on the brake
system warning light. BRAKE
Four-wheel anti-lock brake system (ABS)
Your vehicle is equipped with an anti-lock braking system (ABS). This
system helps you maintain steering control during emergency stops by
keeping the brakes from locking. Noise from the ABS pump motor and
brake pedal pulsation may be observed during ABS braking and the
brake pedal may suddenly travel a little farther as soon as ABS braking is
done and normal brake operation resumes. These are normal
characteristics of the ABS and should be no reason for concern.

284

2011 F-150 (f12)

Owners Guide, 3rd Printing
USA (fus)
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
 Driving
Using ABS
When hard braking is required, apply continuous force on the brake
pedal. Do not pump the brake pedal since this will reduce the
effectiveness of the ABS and will increase your vehicle’s stopping
distance. The ABS will be activated immediately, allowing you to retain
steering control during hard braking and on slippery surfaces. However,
the ABS does not decrease stopping distance.
ABS warning lamp
The ABS lamp in the instrument
cluster momentarily illuminates
when the ignition is turned on. If ABS
the light does not illuminate during
start up, remains on or flashes, the
ABS may be disabled and may need to be serviced.
Even when the ABS is disabled,
normal braking is still effective. If ! P
your BRAKE warning lamp
illuminates with the parking brake BRAKE
released, have your brake system
serviced immediately.

Parking brake
To set the parking brake (1), press
the parking brake pedal down until
the pedal stops.

The BRAKE warning lamp will

illuminate and will remain ! P
illuminated until the parking brake
is released. BRAKE
To release, pull the lever (2).
285

2011 F-150 (f12)

Owners Guide, 3rd Printing
USA (fus)
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
 Driving

WARNING: Always set the parking brake fully and make sure
that the gearshift is securely latched in P (Park) (automatic
transmission) or in 1 (First) (manual transmission).

Brake over accelerator

This vehicle is equipped with a brake over accelerator feature. In the
event the accelerator pedal becomes stuck or entrapped, applying steady
and firm pressure to the brake pedal will both slow the vehicle and
reduce engine power. If you experience this condition, apply the brakes
and bring your vehicle to a safe stop. Turn the engine off, shift to P
(Park) and apply the parking brake, and then inspect the accelerator
pedal for any interferences. If none are found and the condition persists,
have your vehicle towed to the nearest authorized dealer.

ADVANCETRAC姞 WITH ROLL STABILITY CONTROL™ (RSC姞)

STABILITY ENHANCEMENT SYSTEM
The AdvanceTrac威 with RSC威 system provides the following stability
enhancement features for certain driving situations:
• Traction control system (TCS), which functions to help avoid
drive-wheel spin and loss of traction.
• Electronic stability control (ESC), which functions to help avoid skids
or lateral slides.
• Roll Stability Control™ (RSC威), which functions to help avoid a
vehicle roll-over.
WARNING: Vehicle modifications involving braking system,
aftermarket roof racks, suspension, steering system, tire
construction and/or wheel/tire size may change the handling
characteristics of the vehicle and may adversely affect the performance
of the AdvanceTrac威 with RSC威 system. In addition, installing any
stereo loudspeakers may interfere with and adversely affect the
AdvanceTrac威 with RSC威 system. Install any aftermarket stereo
loudspeaker as far as possible from the front center console, the
tunnel, and the front seats in order to minimize the risk of interfering
with the AdvanceTrac威 with RSC威 sensors. Reducing the effectiveness
of the AdvanceTrac威 with RSC威 system could lead to an increased risk
of loss of vehicle control, vehicle rollover, personal injury and death.

286

2011 F-150 (f12)

Owners Guide, 3rd Printing
USA (fus)
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
 Driving

WARNING: Remember that even advanced technology cannot

defy the laws of physics. It’s always possible to lose control of a
vehicle due to inappropriate driver input for the conditions. Aggressive
driving on any road condition can cause you to lose control of your
vehicle increasing the risk of personal injury or property damage.
Activation of the AdvanceTrac威 with RSC威 system is an indication that
at least some of the tires have exceeded their ability to grip the road;
this could reduce the operator’s ability to control the vehicle,
potentially resulting in a loss of vehicle control, vehicle rollover,
personal injury and death. If your AdvanceTrac威 with RSC威 system
activates, SLOW DOWN.

WARNING: When a failure has been detected with the

AdvanceTrac威 with RSC威 system, the stability control light will
illuminate steadily. AdvanceTrac威 with RSC威 can be disabled manually
by pressing the stability control off button located on the center of the
instrument panel. When the system is disabled, the stability control off
light will illuminate. If the stability control light still illuminates
steadily, have the system serviced by an authorized dealer immediately.
Operating your vehicle with AdvanceTrac威 with RSC威 disabled could
lead to an increased risk of loss of vehicle control, vehicle rollover,
personal injury and death.

The AdvanceTrac威 with RSC威 system automatically enables each time

the engine is started. All features of the AdvanceTrac威 with RSC威 system
(TCS, ESC, and RSC威) are active and monitor the vehicle from start-up.
However, the system will only intervene if the driving situation requires
it.
The AdvanceTrac威 with RSC威
system includes a stability control
off button located on the center of
the instrument panel.
There are two stability control lights
in the instrument cluster. The stability control light in the instrument
cluster will flash if a driving situation causes the AdvanceTrac威 with
RSC威 system to operate. If the stability control light illuminates steadily,
have the system serviced by an authorized dealer immediately.
Note: If the system cannot be turned off, refer to MyKey威 in the Locks
and Security chapter for more information.
287

2011 F-150 (f12)

Owners Guide, 3rd Printing
USA (fus)
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
 Driving
When AdvanceTrac威 with RSC威 performs a normal system self-check,
some drivers may notice a slight movement of the brake, and/or a
rumble, grunting, or grinding noise after startup and when driving off.
When an event occurs that activates AdvanceTrac威 with RSC威 you may
experience the following:
• A slight deceleration of the vehicle
• The stability control light will flash.
• A vibration in the pedal when your foot is on the brake pedal
• If the driving condition is severe and your foot is not on the brake, the
brake pedal may move as the systems applies higher brake forces. You
may also hear a whoosh of air from under the instrument panel during
this severe condition.
• The brake pedal may feel stiffer than usual.
Traction control system (TCS)
Traction control is a driver aid feature that helps your vehicle maintain
traction of the wheels, typically when driving on slippery and/or hilly
road surfaces, by detecting and controlling wheel spin.
Excessive wheel spin is controlled in two ways, which may work
separately or in tandem: engine traction control and brake traction
control. Engine traction control works to limit drive-wheel spin by
momentarily reducing engine power. Brake traction control works to limit
single wheel spin by momentarily applying the brakes to the wheel that
is slipping. Traction control is most active at low speeds.
During either engine or brake TCS events, the stability control light in
the instrument cluster will flash.
If the TCS is activated excessively in a short period of time, the braking
portion of the system may become temporarily disabled to allow the
brakes to cool down. In this situation, TCS will use only engine power
reduction or transfer to help control the wheels from over-spinning.
When the brakes have cooled down, the system will regain all features.
Anti-lock braking, RSC威, and ESC are not affected by this condition and
will continue to function during the cool-down period.
The engine traction control and brake traction control system may be
deactivated in certain situations. But single wheel spin brake traction
control is always on. See the Switching off AdvanceTrac威 with RSC威
section following.

288

2011 F-150 (f12)

Owners Guide, 3rd Printing
USA (fus)
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
 Driving
Electronic stability control (ESC)
Electronic stability control (ESC) may enhance your vehicle’s directional
stability during adverse maneuvers, for example when cornering severely
or avoiding objects in the roadway. ESC operates by applying brakes to
one or more of the wheels individually and, if necessary, reducing engine
power if the system detects that the vehicle is about to skid or slide
laterally.
During ESC events, the stability control light in the instrument cluster
will flash.
Certain adverse driving maneuvers may activate the ESC system, which
include but are not limited to:
• Taking a turn too fast
• Maneuvering quickly to avoid an accident, pedestrian or obstacle
• Driving over a patch of ice or other slippery surfaces
• Changing lanes on a snow-rutted road
• Entering a snow-free road from a snow-covered side street, or vice
versa
• Entering a paved road from a gravel road, or vice versa
• Cornering while towing a heavily loaded trailer (refer to Trailer
towing in the Tires, Wheels and Loading chapter).
The Electronic Stability Control system may be deactivated in certain
situations. See the Switching off AdvanceTrac威 with RSC威 section
following.
Roll Stability Control™ (RSC威)
Roll Stability Control™ (RSC威) may help to maintain roll stability of the
vehicle during adverse maneuvers. RSC威 operates by detecting the
vehicle’s roll motion and the rate at which it changes and by applying the
brakes to one or more wheels individually.
During an event that activates the Roll Stability Control™ (RSC威), the
stability control light in the instrument cluster will flash.
Certain adverse driving maneuvers may activate the Roll Stability
Control™ system, which include:
• Emergency lane-change
• Taking a turn too fast
• Quick maneuvering to avoid an accident, pedestrian or obstacle
The Roll Stability Control™ system may be deactivated in certain
situations. See the Switching off AdvanceTrac威 with RSC威 section
following.
289

2011 F-150 (f12)

Owners Guide, 3rd Printing
USA (fus)
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
 Driving
Switching off AdvanceTrac威 with RSC威
If the vehicle is stuck in snow, mud or sand, and seems to lose engine
power, switching off certain features of the AdvanceTrac威 with RSC威
system may be beneficial because the wheels are allowed to spin. This
will restore full engine power and will enhance momentum through the
obstacle.
To switch off certain features of the AdvanceTrac威 with RSC威 system,
press the stability control button. Full features of the AdvanceTrac威 with
RSC威 system can be restored by pressing the button again or by turning
off and restarting the engine.
If you switch off the AdvanceTrac威 with RSC威 system, the stability
control off light will illuminate steadily. Pressing the stability control
button again will turn off the stability control off light.
In R (Reverse), ABS and the engine traction control and brake traction
control features will continue to function; however, ESC and RSC威 are
disabled.
AdvanceTrac威 with RSC威 Features
Stability
Button
control RSC威 ESC TCS
functions
OFF light
Illuminated
Default at
during bulb Enabled Enabled Enabled
start-up
check
Button pressed Illuminated
Enabled Enabled1 Disabled1
momentarily solid
Button pressed
and held for
more than Flashes then
5 seconds at illuminated Disabled Disabled Disabled4
vehicle speed solid2
under 35 mph
(56 km/h)

290

2011 F-150 (f12)

Owners Guide, 3rd Printing
USA (fus)
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
 Driving

AdvanceTrac威 with RSC威 Features

Stability
Button
control RSC威 ESC TCS
functions
OFF light
Vehicle speed
exceeds
35 mph
(56 km/h) Illuminated
Enabled Enabled1 Disabled1
after button is solid
pressed and
held for more
than 5 seconds
Button pressed
Not
again after Enabled Enabled Enabled
illuminated
deactivation
Transfer case
switched to
Illuminated Disabled Disabled Disabled4
4WD Low
Locked3
1
TCS could be enabled but with higher entry thresholds compared to full
system. ESC entry thresholds are higher compared to full system.
2
Lamp light starts blinking for three seconds after entering press and
hold state.
3
Control switch is not pressed. Stability control light turned on when
4WD low locked transfer case mode selected.
4
Engine traction control and two-wheel spin brake traction control
functions are disabled. Single wheel spin traction control is always
enabled.
Trailer sway control
Your vehicle is equipped with trailer sway control. When properly
equipped, trailer sway control will use the vehicle’s AdvanceTrac威 with
RSC威 system to detect and help reduce trailer sway by applying brake
force at individual wheels and, if necessary, by reducing engine power.

291

2011 F-150 (f12)

Owners Guide, 3rd Printing
USA (fus)
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
 Driving

WARNING: Trailer sway control does not prevent a trailer from

swaying, it mitigates the sway from increasing once it has
occurred. If you are experiencing trailer sway it is likely that the trailer
is improperly loaded for the correct tongue weight or the speed of the
vehicle and trailer is too high. Pull the vehicle-trailer over to a safe
location to check the trailer weight distribution and tongue load and
reduce speed to a safe level while towing. If trailer sway is
experienced, SLOW DOWN. Note: When trailer sway control is
activated, cruise control is disabled.

During trailer sway control events, the stability control light in the
instrument cluster will flash momentarily. The message center will also
display TRAILER SWAY REDUCE SPEED. In some cases when trailer
sway is detected, the vehicle speed is too high and may be above a
speed at which trailer sway will not grow continuously. This may cause
the system to activate multiple times, causing a gradual reduction in
speed.
Note: The trailer sway control will only activate at speeds greater than
31 mph (50 km/h).
Disabling trailer sway control
Trailer sway control can be disabled during any key cycle. See trailer
sway control under the Message center in the Instrument Cluster
chapter. Note that regardless of chosen enable state, trailer sway control
will be re-enabled at each new key cycle.
WARNING: Turning off trailer sway control increases the risk of
loss of vehicle control, serious injury, or death. Ford does not
recommend disabling this feature except in situations where speed
reduction may be detrimental (e.g., hill climbing), the driver has
significant trailer towing experience, and can control trailer sway and
maintain safe operation.

STEERING
3.7L, 5.0L and 3.5L EcoBoost™ engines:
Your vehicle is equipped with an electric power steering (EPS) system.
There is no fluid reservoir to check or fill.
If your vehicle loses electrical power while you are driving (or if the
ignition is turned off), you can steer the vehicle manually, but it takes
more effort. Under extreme usage conditions, the steering effort may
292

2011 F-150 (f12)

Owners Guide, 3rd Printing
USA (fus)
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
 Driving
increase. This occurs to prevent overheating and permanent damage to
your steering system. If this should occur, you will neither lose the ability
to steer the vehicle manually nor will it cause permanent damage.
Typical steering and driving maneuvers will allow the system to cool and
steering assist will return to normal.
The EPS system has diagnostic checks that continuously monitor the
EPS system to ensure proper operation. When a system error is
detected, the following message SERVICE POWER STEERING, SERVICE
POWER STEERING NOW or POWER STEERING ASSIST FAULT may
display in the message center, refer to the Message center in the Driver
Controls chapter for more information.
WARNING: The EPS system has diagnostics checks that
continuously monitor the EPS system to ensure proper operation
of the electronic system. When an electronic error is detected, the
message POWER STEERING ASSIST FAULT will be displayed in the
message center. If this happens, stop the vehicle in a safe place, and
turn off the engine. After at least 10 seconds, reset the system by
restarting the engine, and watch the message center for POWER
STEERING ASSIST FAULT. If the message returns, or returns while
driving, take the vehicle to your dealer to have it checked. With the
message displayed, the steering assist is turned off, making the vehicle
harder to steer.

WARNING: If the message SERVICE POWER STEERING is

displayed in the message center, the EPS system has detected a
problem with the system function. On the next key cycle the message
SERVICE POWER STEERING NOW will be displayed and steering
assist will be removed until the steering system is serviced. Have your
vehicle taken to the nearest dealer as soon as possible.

6.2L engine: Your vehicle is equipped with a hydraulic steering system.

To help prevent damage to the power steering system, never hold the
steering wheel at its furthest turning points (until it stops) for more than
a few seconds when the engine is running. If the power steering system
breaks down (or if the engine is turned off), you can steer the vehicle
manually, but it takes more effort.
• Do not operate the vehicle with a low power steering pump fluid level
(below the MIN mark on the reservoir).
293

2011 F-150 (f12)

Owners Guide, 3rd Printing
USA (fus)
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
 Driving
• Some noise is normal during operation. If excessive, check for low
power steering pump fluid level before seeking service by your
authorized dealer.
• Heavy or uneven steering efforts may be caused by low power steering
pump fluid level. Check for low power steering pump fluid level before
seeking service by your authorized dealer.
• Do not fill the power steering pump reservoir above the MAX mark on
the reservoir, as this may result in leaks from the reservoir.
All engines
If the steering wanders or pulls equipped with either an EPS or a
hydraulic steering system, check for:
• an improperly inflated tire
• uneven tire wear
• loose or worn suspension components
• loose or worn steering components
• improper steering alignment
A high crown in the road or high crosswinds may also make the steering
seem to wander/pull.
LIMITED-SLIP AXLE (IF EQUIPPED)
This axle provides added traction on slippery surfaces, particularly when
one wheel is on a poor traction surface. Under normal conditions, the
limited-slip axle functions like a standard rear axle. The axle may exhibit
a slight noise or vibration in tight turns with low vehicle speed. This is
normal behavior and indicates the axle is working.
Electronic locking differential (ELD) (if equipped)
The electronic locking differential provides added traction on slippery
and/or off-road surfaces, particularly when one wheel is on a poor
traction surface. In normal driving conditions, the rear axle functions as
a standard axle. The ELD may be locked or unlocked by the vehicle
operator. Refer to Four-wheel drive (4WD) operation section in this
chapter for further details on ELD function and usage. When the axle is
unlocked, it will function like a standard rear axle. When the axle is
locked, it will not allow the rear wheels to rotate at different speeds
when turning. The ELD axle is not recommended for use on good
traction surfaces such as dry pavement. Doing so may result in abnormal
driving behavior while cornering and excessive tire wear.
294

2011 F-150 (f12)

Owners Guide, 3rd Printing
USA (fus)
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
 Driving
PREPARING TO DRIVE
WARNING: Utility vehicles have a significantly higher rollover
rate than other types of vehicles.

WARNING: In a rollover crash, an unbelted person is

significantly more likely to die than a person wearing a seat belt.

Utility vehicles and trucks have larger tires and increased ground
clearance, giving the vehicle a higher center of gravity than a passenger
car.
WARNING: Vehicles with a higher center of gravity such as
utility vehicles and trucks handle differently than vehicles with a
lower center of gravity. Utility vehicles and trucks are not designed for
cornering at speeds as high as passenger cars any more than low-slung
sports cars are designed to perform satisfactorily under off-road
conditions. Avoid sharp turns, excessive speed or abrupt maneuvers in
these vehicles. Failure to drive cautiously could result in an increased
risk of loss of vehicle control, vehicle rollover, personal injury and
death.

WARNING: Loaded vehicles, with a higher center of gravity,

may handle differently than unloaded vehicles. Do not overload
your vehicle and use extra precautions, such as driving at slower
speeds, avoiding abrupt steering changes and allowing for increased
stopping distance, when driving a heavily loaded vehicle. Over-loading
or loading the vehicle improperly can deteriorate handling capability
and contribute to loss of vehicle control and vehicle rollover.

BRAKE-SHIFT INTERLOCK - COLUMN-SHIFT TRANSMISSION

This vehicle is equipped with a park/brake-shift interlock feature that
prevents the gearshift lever from being moved from P (Park) when the
ignition is in the on position unless the brake pedal is pressed.
If you cannot move the gearshift lever out of P (Park) with ignition in
the on position and the brake pedal pressed, it is possible that a fuse has
blown or the vehicle’s brake lamps are not operating properly. Refer to
Fuses and relays in the Roadside Emergencies chapter.

295

2011 F-150 (f12)

Owners Guide, 3rd Printing
USA (fus)
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
 Driving
If the fuse is not blown, perform the following procedure:
Note: The following procedure is easier to perform when the steering
column is adjusted to the full up position. Refer to Tilt steering wheel in
the Driver Controls chapter.
1. Apply the parking brake, turn the ignition to the off position, then
remove the key.
2. Move the shift lever boot by
pressing on the edges and moving it
up the gearshift lever.

3. Turn the steering wheel one-half

turn to access the slots on each side
of the steering wheel.

296

2011 F-150 (f12)

Owners Guide, 3rd Printing
USA (fus)
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
 Driving
4. Insert a flat head screwdriver into
each slot to unsnap and remove the
steering column cover. Rotate the
column up on its hinges and pull
rearward to remove the cover from
the hinges.

5. With the ignition in the on

position, pull back on the BSI
solenoid found on top of the
uncovered steering column and at
the same time, apply the brake
pedal and shift the transmission into
N (Neutral).

6. Reinstall the steering column cover, start the vehicle and release the
parking brake.
Note: After the transmission is shifted to N (Neutral), it is easier to
reinstall the cover when the column is in the middle or lower tilt
position.
WARNING: Do not drive your vehicle until you verify that the
brakelamps are working.

WARNING: Always set the parking brake fully and make sure
the gearshift is latched in P (Park). Turn the ignition to the off
position and remove the key whenever you leave your vehicle.

WARNING: If the parking brake is fully released, but the brake

warning lamp remains illuminated, the brakes may not be
working properly. See your authorized dealer.

297

2011 F-150 (f12)

Owners Guide, 3rd Printing
USA (fus)
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
 Driving
Brake-shift interlock – floor-shift transmission
This vehicle is equipped with a brake-shift interlock feature that prevents
the gearshift lever from being moved from P (Park) when the ignition is
in the on position unless the brake pedal is pressed.
If you cannot move the gearshift lever out of P (Park) with ignition in
the on position and the brake pedal pressed, it is possible that a fuse has
blown or the vehicle’s brake lamps are not operating properly. Refer to
Fuses and relays in the Roadside Emergencies chapter.
If the fuse is not blown and the brake lamps are working properly, the
following procedure will allow you to move the gearshift lever from P
(Park):
1. Apply the parking brake, turn the
ignition key to the off position, and
remove the key.
2. Starting at the rear of the trim
panel, using a screwdriver (or
similar tool) carefully pry up the
trim panel from rear attachments
and disconnect it from the console
to expose the inside of the gearshift.

3. Locate the brake shift interlock

lever on the passenger side of the
shifter assembly.
4. Apply the brake pedal. Using a
screwdriver (or similar tool), press
and hold the brake shift interlock
lever while pulling the gearshift
lever out of the P (Park) position
and into the N (Neutral) position.
5. Install the trim panel.
6. Apply brake pedal, start the vehicle, and release the parking brake.
See your authorized dealer as soon as possible if this procedure
is used.
WARNING: Do not drive your vehicle until you verify that the
brakelamps are working.

298

2011 F-150 (f12)

Owners Guide, 3rd Printing
USA (fus)
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
 Driving

WARNING: Always set the parking brake fully and make sure
the gearshift is latched in P (Park). Turn the ignition to the off
position and remove the key whenever you leave your vehicle.

WARNING: If the parking brake is fully released, but the brake

warning lamp remains illuminated, the brakes may not be
working properly. See your authorized dealer.

AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION OPERATION

Understanding the shift positions of the 6-speed automatic
transmission
This vehicle is equipped with an adaptive transmission shift strategy. The
adaptive transmission shift strategy offers the optimal transmission
operation and shift quality. When the engine is turned off, the shift data
which includes the adaptive information will be stored automatically in
the powertrain control module (PCM). If the battery is disconnected for
any reason, the stored information from the last time the key was turned
to off will be read. This way, no information will be lost with any battery
removal or battery disconnect.
P (Park)
This position locks the transmission +
-
and prevents the rear wheels from
turning. T/H

To put your vehicle in gear:

• Press the brake pedal
P
R

• Start the engine

N
D
M
2
1

• Move the gearshift lever into the

desired gear. If your vehicle is
equipped with a floor-shift transmission, press the gearshift lever
release button (on the front of the lever) while shifting into the
desired gear.

299

2011 F-150 (f12)

Owners Guide, 3rd Printing
USA (fus)
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
 Driving
To put your vehicle in P (Park):
• Come to a complete stop
• Move the gearshift lever and securely latch it in P (Park)
WARNING: Always set the parking brake fully and make sure
the gearshift is latched in P (Park). Turn the ignition to the off
position and remove the key whenever you leave your vehicle.

R (Reverse)
With the gearshift lever in R (Reverse), the vehicle will move backward.
Always come to a complete stop before shifting into and out of R
(Reverse).
N (Neutral)
With the gearshift lever in N (Neutral), the vehicle can be started and is
free to roll. Hold the brake pedal down while in this position.
D (Drive) with Tow/Haul Off
The normal driving position for the best fuel economy. Transmission
operates in gears one through six.
D (Drive) with Tow/Haul On
The Tow/Haul feature improves transmission operation when towing a
trailer or a heavy load. All transmission gear ranges are available when
using Tow/Haul.
Tow/Haul can be activated by pressing the transmission control switch on
the end of the gearshift lever (column-shift transmission) or on the side
of the gearshift lever (floor-shift transmission).
• Column-shift transmission

300

2011 F-150 (f12)

Owners Guide, 3rd Printing
USA (fus)
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
 Driving
• Floor-shift transmission
+
-

T/H

P
R
N
D
M
2
1
The TOW HAUL indicator light will
illuminate in the instrument cluster.

Tow/haul delays upshifts to reduce frequency of transmission shifting.

Tow/haul also provides engine braking in all forward gears when the
transmission is in the D (Drive) position; this engine braking will slow
the vehicle and assist the driver in controlling the vehicle when
descending a grade. Depending on driving conditions and load
conditions, the transmission may downshift, slow the vehicle and control
the vehicle speed when descending a hill, without the accelerator pedal
being pressed. The amount of downshift braking provided will vary based
upon the amount the brake pedal is pressed.
To deactivate the tow/haul feature and return to normal driving mode,
press the button on the end of the gearshift lever. The TOW HAUL light
will no longer be illuminated. Tow/haul will also deactivate when the
vehicle is powered down.
WARNING: Do not use the tow/haul feature when driving in icy
or slippery conditions as the increased engine braking can cause
the rear wheels to slide and the vehicle to swing around with the
possible loss of vehicle control.

3 (Third) (column-shift only) (For vehicles without SST)

Transmission operates in third gear only.
Used for improved traction on slippery roads. Selecting 3 (Third)
provides engine braking.
2 (Second)
Transmission operates in 2nd gear only.
Use 2 (Second) to start-up on slippery roads or to provide additional
engine braking on downgrades.
301

2011 F-150 (f12)

Owners Guide, 3rd Printing
USA (fus)
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
 Driving
1 (First)
• Transmission operates in 1st gear only.
• Provides maximum engine braking.
• Allows upshifts by moving gearshift lever.
• Will not downshift into 1 (First) at high speeds; allows for 1 (First)
when vehicle reaches slower speeds.
Forced downshifts
• Allowed in D (Drive) only.
• Press the accelerator to the floor.
• Allows transmission to select an appropriate gear.
Understanding your SelectShift Automatic™ transmission (SST)
gearshift lever (if equipped)
This vehicle may be equipped with a SelectShift Automatic™
transmission (SST) gearshift lever. The SST is an automatic transmission
with the ability for the driver to change gears up or down (without a
clutch) as desired. The SST feature has two modes: PRS and M mode.
PRS (Progressive Range
Selection)
With the gearshift lever in D
(Drive), press the – button to active
PRS. The available and selected
gears will be indicated on the
instrument cluster.
+
-

T/H
P
R
N
D
M
2
1

All available gears will be displayed with the current gear indicated.
Press the – button again to lock out gears beginning with the highest
gear. Example: press the – button twice to lock out 6th and 5th gears.
Only the available gears will be displayed and the transmission will
automatically shift between the available gears. Press the + button to
unlock gears to allow the transmission to shift to higher gears. The
transmission will shift automatically within the gear range you select.
302

2011 F-150 (f12)

Owners Guide, 3rd Printing
USA (fus)
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
 Driving
M (Manual)
With the gearshift lever in M (Manual), the driver can change gears up
or down as desired. This is called SelectShift Automatic™ transmission
(SST) mode. By moving the gearshift lever from drive position D (Drive)
to M (Manual), you now have control of selecting the gear you desire
using buttons on the shift lever. Only the current gear will be displayed.
Press the + button or the – button to upshift or downshift. If the –
button is pressed at a vehicle speed that would cause an engine
overspeed, the requested gear will flash then disappear and the
transmission will remain in the current gear.
To return to normal D (Drive) position, move the shift lever back from M
to D.
The transmission will operate in gears one through six.
Recommended shift speeds
Upshift according to the following chart:
Upshifts when accelerating
Shift from:
1 – 2 15 mph (24 km/h)
2 – 3 25 mph (40 km/h)
3 – 4 40 mph (64 km/h)
4 – 5 45 mph (72 km/h)
5 – 6 50 mph (80 km/h)
In order to prevent the engine from running at too low an RPM, which
may cause it to stall, the SST will still automatically make some
downshifts if it has determined that you have not downshifted in time.
Although the SST will make some downshifts for you, it will still allow
you to downshift at any time as long as the SST determines that the
engine will not be damaged from over-revving.
The SST will not automatically upshift, even if the engine is approaching
the RPM limit. It must be shifted manually by pressing the + button.
Engine damage may occur if excessive engine revving is held
without shifting.
If your vehicle gets stuck in mud or snow
If your vehicle gets stuck in mud or snow, it may be rocked out by
shifting between forward and reverse gears, stopping between shifts in a
steady pattern. Press lightly on the accelerator in each gear.
303

2011 F-150 (f12)

Owners Guide, 3rd Printing
USA (fus)
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
 Driving
Do not rock the vehicle if the engine is not at normal operating
temperature or damage to the transmission may occur.
Do not rock the vehicle for more than a minute or damage to the
transmission and tires may occur, or the engine may overheat.

REVERSE SENSING SYSTEM (IF EQUIPPED)

The Reverse Sensing System (RSS) sounds a tone to warn the driver of
obstacles near the rear bumper when R (Reverse) is selected and the
vehicle is moving at speeds less than 3 mph (5 km/h). The system is not
effective at speeds above 3 mph (5 km/h) and may not detect certain
angular or moving objects.
WARNING: To help avoid personal injury, please read and
understand the limitations of the reverse sensing system as
contained in this section. Reverse sensing is only an aid for some
(generally large and fixed) objects when moving in reverse on a flat
surface at “parking speeds”. Inclement weather may also affect the
function of the RSS; this may include reduced performance or a false
activation.

WARNING: To help avoid personal injury, always use caution

when in reverse and when using the RSS.

WARNING: This system is not designed to prevent contact with

small or moving objects. The system is designed to provide a
warning to assist the driver in detecting large stationary objects to
avoid damaging the vehicle. The system may not detect smaller
objects, particularly those close to the ground.

WARNING: Certain add-on devices such as large trailer hitches,

bike or surfboard racks and any device that may block the
normal detection zone of the RSS system may create false beeps.

304

2011 F-150 (f12)

Owners Guide, 3rd Printing
USA (fus)
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
 Driving
The RSS detects obstacles up to
6 feet (2 meters) from the rear
bumper with a decreased coverage
area at the outer corners of the
bumper, (refer to the figures for
approximate zone coverage areas).
As you move closer to the obstacle,
the rate of the tone increases. When
the obstacle is less than 10 inches
(25.0 cm) away, the tone will sound
continuously. If the RSS detects a
stationary or receding object further
than 10 inches (25.0 cm) from the
side of the vehicle, the tone will
sound for only three seconds. Once
the system detects an object
approaching, the tone will sound
again.
While receiving a warning the radio
volume may be reduced to a
predetermined level. After the
warning goes away, the radio will return to the previous volume.
The RSS may have reduced performance or an increased chance of false
detection if the tailgate is not locked and in the upright position. If the
tailgate is down, the RSS tone may be heard intermittently or
continuously. The tone may also be heard if items in the truck bed
protrude rearward outside the bed.
The RSS automatically turns on when the gearshift lever is placed in R
(Reverse) and the ignition is on. A control in the message center allows
the driver to disable the system, refer to Message center and Rear park
aid in the Instrument Cluster chapter for more information.
Note: If the system cannot be turned off, refer to MyKey威 restricted
features in the Locks and Security chapter for more information.
Note: If your vehicle is equipped with a fully integrated electronic trailer
brake controller (TBC) and a trailer with electric trailer brakes is
connected to your vehicle, the RSS will be disabled. When the vehicle is
shifted into reverse, the message center display will remain in the Rear
Park Aid Off selection. For more information on the TBC, refer to the
Tires, Wheels and Loading chapter.

305

2011 F-150 (f12)

Owners Guide, 3rd Printing
USA (fus)
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
 Driving
Keep the RSS sensors (located on the rear bumper/fascia) free
from snow, ice and large accumulations of dirt (do not clean the
sensors with sharp objects). If the sensors are covered, it will
affect the accuracy of the RSS.
If your vehicle sustains damage to the rear bumper/fascia, leaving
it misaligned or bent, the sensing zone may be altered causing
inaccurate measurement of obstacles or false alarms.
REARVIEW CAMERA SYSTEM (IF EQUIPPED)
The rear video camera system,
located on the tailgate, provides a
video image which appears on the
rearview mirror or touchscreen
display, of the area behind the
vehicle. It adds assistance to the
driver while reversing or reverse
parking the vehicle. To use the rear
video camera system, place the
transmission in R (Reverse). An
image will display on the rearview
mirror or on the touchscreen display. The area displayed on the screen
may vary according to the vehicle orientation and/or road condition.
The rear video camera includes the following features that will assist the
driver in reverse driving.
Fixed guidelines
The fixed guidelines assist a driver with backing into a parking space or
aligning with an object behind the vehicle.
If equipped with touch screen display: To turn this feature on or off
when the vehicle is in R (Reverse), select Settings on the touch screen
display. The fixed guideline options are FIXED and OFF.
If equipped with rearview mirror display and optional instrument cluster:
To turn this feature on or off, select the following from the message
center in the instrument cluster:
1. Settings
2. Driver Assist
3. Rear View Camera
4. Guidelines
The guidelines options are FIXED and OFF. If the vehicle is equipped
with a rearview mirror display and a standard instrument cluster, the
fixed guidelines will always remain on. There is no option to turn the
fixed guidelines off.
306

2011 F-150 (f12)

Owners Guide, 3rd Printing
USA (fus)
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
 Driving
Visual park aid alert (if equipped)
Visual park aid alert allows the driver to see the area that is causing the
reverse sensing system to beep. The visual alerts are red, yellow or green
highlights which appear on top of the video image when an object is
detected by the reverse sensing system. The visual alert will highlight
the closest object detected by the reverse sensing system. The reverse
sensing alert can be disabled and if visual park aid alert is enabled,
highlighted areas will still be displayed.
If equipped with touch screen display: To turn this feature on or off
when the vehicle is in R (Reverse), select Settings on the touch screen
display. The visual park aid alert options are ON and OFF.
If equipped with rearview mirror display and optional instrument cluster:
To turn this feature on or off, select the following from the message
center in the instrument cluster:
1. Settings
2. Driver Assist
3. Rear View Camera
4. Visual Park Aid
The visual park aid alert options are ON and OFF. The visual park aid
alert feature is not available on vehicles with a rearview mirror and a
standard instrument cluster.
Note: The reverse sensing system is not effective at speeds above 3 mph
(5 km/h) and may not detect certain angular or moving objects.
• (1) Rear bumper
• (2) Red zone
• (3) Yellow zone
• (4) Green zone
• (5) Center line of vehicle

Always use caution while backing. Objects in the red zone (2) are closest
to your vehicle and objects in the green zone (4) are further away.
Objects are getting closer to your vehicle as they move from the green
zone (4) to the yellow (3) or red zones (2). Use the side mirrors and
rearview mirror to get better coverage on both sides and rear of the
vehicle.
307

2011 F-150 (f12)

Owners Guide, 3rd Printing
USA (fus)
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
 Driving
When towing, the reverse camera system will only see what is being
towed behind the vehicle. This might not provide adequate coverage as it
usually provides in normal operation and some objects might not be
seen.
Fixed guidelines and visual park aid alert features are only available
when the vehicle is in R (Reverse).
Manual zoom
The manual zoom feature assists drivers with connecting their vehicle to
a trailer for the purpose of towing. It allows the driver to manually zoom
closer to an object behind the vehicle. The zoomed image keeps the
bumper in the image to provide a reference.
If equipped with touch screen display: To turn the manual zoom feature
on or off, do the following:
1. Place the vehicle in R (Reverse).
2. Select Zoom on the touch screen display.
Press or to manually adjust
the zoom levels. You can choose
from OFF, Level 1, Level 2 and
Level 3. The selected level will
appear between the buttons (i.e.
Level 1). When activating manual
zoom mode, the system always
starts from OFF.

If equipped with rearview mirror display and optional instrument cluster:

To turn the manual zoom feature on or off, do the following:
1. Place the vehicle in R (Reverse).
2. A rear park aid menu will appear. Select either ON or OFF by using
the steering wheel controls to scroll up or down and the OK button to
make a selection. A selection must be made in order to get to the
camera zoom menu.

308

2011 F-150 (f12)

Owners Guide, 3rd Printing
USA (fus)
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
 Driving
Press and on the steering
wheel controls to select a zoom
option. You can choose from OFF,
Level 1, Level 2 and Level 3. Use
the OK button to make a selection.
When activating manual zoom mode,
the system will always start from
OFF.
The manual zoom feature is not available on vehicles equipped a
rearview mirror display and a standard instrument cluster.
When manual zoom is enabled, only the centerline will be shown.
Rear camera delay
If equipped with rearview mirror display and optional instrument cluster:
After shifting out of R (Reverse) and into any gear, the image will remain
until vehicle speed reaches 5 mph (8 km/h). This will only occur if the
rear camera delay feature is ON. The default setting for the rear camera
delay is ON. To turn this feature on or off, select the following from the
message center in the instrument cluster:
1. Settings
2. Driver Assist
3. Rear View Camera
4. Camera Delay
The camera delay options are ON and OFF. If the vehicle is equipped
with a rearview mirror display and the standard instrument cluster, the
camera delay will always remain on. There is no option to turn the
camera delay off.
If equipped with the touchscreen display: After shifting out of R
(Reverse) and into any gear other than P (Park), the image will remain
until the vehicle speed reaches five mph (8 km/h). This will only occur if
the rear camera delay feature is on, or until any radio button is selected.
The default setting for the rear camera delay is ON. Use the Settings
function on the touchscreen display to set the rear camera delay on or
off. Refer to the navigation supplement for more information.
When towing, the rearview camera system will only see what is being
towed behind the vehicle. This might not provide adequate coverage it
usually provides in normal operation and some objects might not be
seen.
309

2011 F-150 (f12)

Owners Guide, 3rd Printing
USA (fus)
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
 Driving
The camera lens for the reverse camera system is located on the tailgate.
Keep the lens clean so the video image remains clear and undistorted.
Clean the lens with a soft, lint-free cloth and non-abrasive cleaner.
Note: If the camera system image is not clear or seems distorted, it may
be covered with water droplets, snow, mud or any other substance. If
this occurs, clean the camera lens before using the camera system.
WARNING: The rearview camera system is a reverse aid
supplement device that still requires the driver to use it in
conjunction with the rearview mirror and the side mirrors for
maximum coverage.

WARNING: Objects that are close to either corner of the

bumper or under the bumper, might not be seen on the screen
due to the limited coverage of the camera system.

WARNING: Backup as slow as possible since higher speeds

might limit your reaction time to stop the vehicle.

WARNING: Do not use the rearview camera system when the

tailgate is open. If the back end of the vehicle is hit or damaged,
check with your authorized dealer to have your rear camera system
checked for proper coverage and operation.

WARNING: When manual zoom is enabled (Level 1, Level 2 or

Level 3), the full area behind the vehicle will not be shown. Be
aware of your surroundings when using the manual zoom feature.

Night time and dark area use

At night time or in dark areas, the camera system relies on the reverse
lamp lighting to produce an image. Therefore it is necessary that both
reverse lamps are operating in order to get a clear image in the dark. If
either of the lamps are not operating, stop using the camera system, at
least in the dark, until the lamp(s) are replaced and functioning.

310

2011 F-150 (f12)

Owners Guide, 3rd Printing
USA (fus)
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
 Driving
Servicing
• If the image comes on while the vehicle is not in R (Reverse), have
the system inspected by your authorized dealer.
• If the image is not clear, then check if there is anything covering the
lens such as dirt, mud, ice, snow, etc. If the image is still not clear
after cleaning, have your system inspected by your authorized dealer.
BLIND SPOT MIRRORS (IF EQUIPPED)
Blind spot mirrors have a convex spotter mirror built into the upper
outboard corner of the outside mirrors. They are designed to assist the
driver by increasing visibility along the side of the vehicle. This vehicle is
equipped with a spotter mirror on the driver side only. The addition of
this spotter mirror on the passenger side would not increase that mirror’s
field of view.
Driving with blind spot mirrors
Before a lane change, check the
main mirror first, then check the
blind spot mirror. If no vehicles are
present in the blind spot mirror and
the traffic in the adjacent lane is at
a safe distance, signal that you are
going to change lanes. Glance over
your shoulder to verify traffic is 3
clear, and carefully change lanes.
When the approaching vehicle is at
a distance, its image is small and
near the inboard edge of the main
mirror. As the vehicle approaches, 2
the image becomes larger and
begins to move outboard across the
main mirror (1). As the vehicle
approaches its image will transition
from the main mirror and begin to 1
appear in the blind spot mirror (2).
As the vehicle leaves the blind spot
mirror it will transition to the driver’s peripheral field of view (3).
WARNING: Objects in the blind spot mirror are closer than they
appear.

311

2011 F-150 (f12)

Owners Guide, 3rd Printing
USA (fus)
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
 Driving
FOUR-WHEEL DRIVE (4WD) OPERATION (IF EQUIPPED)
WARNING: For important information regarding safe operation
of this type of vehicle, see Preparing to drive your vehicle in
this chapter.

Four–wheel drive (4WD) supplies power to all four wheels. 4WD should
not be operated on dry pavement; driveline damage may occur.
If equipped with the electronic shift 4WD system, and 4X4 low is
selected while the vehicle is moving above 3 mph (5 km/h), the
4WD system will not perform a shift. This is normal and should be
no reason for concern. Refer to Shifting to/from 4L (4X4 Low) for
proper operation.

4WD indicator lights

The indicator lights illuminate in the message center in the
reconfigurable telltale (RTT) location under the following conditions.
Refer to Warning lights and chimes in the Instrument Cluster chapter.
• 4X2 - Momentarily illuminates
when 2H is selected on electronic
shift 4WD systems only. 4x2

• AWD - Illuminates when AWD is

selected (all-wheel drive
equipped vehicles only). AWD

• 4X4 HIGH - Illuminates when 4H 4x4

is selected.
HIGH
• 4X4 LOW - Illuminates when 4L
is selected.
4x4
LOW
• - Illuminates when the
electronic locking differential
(ELD) is selected (if equipped).

312

2011 F-150 (f12)

Owners Guide, 3rd Printing
USA (fus)
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
 Driving
• CHECK 4X4 - Displays when a
4X4 fault is present.

Note: When a 4X4 system fault is present, the system will typically
remain in whichever 4X4 mode was selected prior to the fault condition
occurring. It will not default to 4X2 in all circumstances. When this
warning is displayed, have your vehicle serviced by an authorized dealer.
Using a manual 4WD system (if equipped)
2H (4X2) – Power to the rear
wheels only; used for street and
highway driving. Provides optimal
smoothness and fuel economy at
high speeds.
4H (4X4 High) – Used for extra
traction such as in snow or icy roads
or in off-road situations. Not
intended for use on dry pavement.
N (Neutral) – No power to either
front or rear wheels.
4L (4X4 Low) – Uses extra gearing to provide maximum power to all
four wheels at reduced speeds. Intended only for off-road applications
such as deep sand, steep grades or pulling heavy objects. The shift lever
will not engage 4L (4X4 LOW) until the transmission is in N (neutral)
and the vehicle is moving below 3 mph (5 km/h); this is normal and
should be no reason for concern. Refer to Shifting to/from 4L (4X4
Low) for proper operation.
Shifting between 2H (4X2) and 4H (4X4 high)
• Move the transfer case lever between 2H (4X2) and 4H (4X4 high) at
a stop or any forward speed.
Note: Momentarily releasing the accelerator pedal while performing a
shift will improve engagement/disengagement times.
Note: Do not perform this operation if the rear wheels are slipping.
Note: Some noise may be heard as the system shifts or engages; this is
normal.
Note: 4X4 high mode is not intended for use on dry pavement.
Shifting to/from 4L (4X4 low)
1. Bring the vehicle to a speed of 3 mph (5 km/h) or less.
2. Place the transmission in N (Neutral).
313

2011 F-150 (f12)

Owners Guide, 3rd Printing
USA (fus)
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
 Driving
3. Move the transfer case lever through N (Neutral) directly to the
desired position.
• If the transfer case will not engage into 4L (4X4 low) do not force
the lever. Allow the vehicle to coast at a speed below 3 mph
(5 km/h), then repeat Steps 2 and 3.
Note: Some noise may be heard as the system shifts or engages; this is
normal.
Note: 4X4 low mode is not intended for use on dry pavement.
Note: For proper operation in 4X4 low, ensure the transfer case shift
lever is moved entirely rearward in to the 4L (4X4 Low) position and
that the 4x4 Low light is displayed in the message center.
Note: Ideal 4L (4X4 low) shift conditions occur when the vehicle is
rolling at a speed below 3 mph (5 km/h) and the transmission is in N
(Neutral).
Using the N (Neutral) position
The transfer case N (Neutral) position overrides the transmission
and puts the vehicle in neutral regardless of transmission
gearshift lever position. The vehicle can move forward or
backward.
This position should only be used when towing the vehicle.
WARNING: Do not leave the vehicle unattended with the
transfer case in the N (Neutral) position. Always set the parking
brake fully and turn off the ignition when leaving the vehicle.

Using the electronic shift 4WD system (if equipped)

2H (2WD) - For general on-road
driving. Sends power to the rear
wheels only and should be used for
street and highway driving. Provides
optimal smoothness and fuel
economy at high speeds.
4H (4X4 High) - Used for extra
traction such as in snow or icy roads
or in off road situations. This mode
is not intended for use on dry
pavement.
314

2011 F-150 (f12)

Owners Guide, 3rd Printing
USA (fus)
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
 Driving
4L (4X4 Low) - Uses extra gearing to provide maximum power to all
four wheels at reduced speeds. Intended only for off-road applications
such as deep sand, steep grades or pulling heavy objects. 4L (4X4 low)
will not engage while the vehicle is moving above 3 mph (5 km/h); this is
normal and should be no reason for concern. Refer to Shifting to/from
4L (4X4 low) for proper operation.
Shifting between 2H (4X2) and 4H (4X4 high)
Move the 4WD control between 2H (4X2) and 4H (4X4 high) at any
forward speed. The message center will display 4X4 SHIFT IN
PROGRESS during the system shift. “4X4 HIGH” will display in the
message center if 4H is selected and “4X2” will momentarily display in
the message center if 2H is selected.
If SHIFT DELAYED PULL FORWARD is displayed in the message
center during the mode shift, transfer case gear tooth blockage is
present. To alleviate this condition, place the transmission in a forward
gear and move the vehicle forward approximately 5 feet (2 meters) to
allow the transfer case to complete the mode shift.
Note: Momentarily releasing the accelerator pedal while performing a
shift will improve engagement/disengagement times.
Note: Do not perform this operation if the rear wheels are slipping.
Note: Some noise may be heard as the system shifts or engages; this is
normal.
Note: 4X4 high mode is not intended for use on dry pavement.
Shifting to/from 4L (4X4 low)
1. Bring the vehicle to a speed of 3 mph (5 km/h) or less.
2. Place the transmission in N (Neutral).
3. Move the 4WD control to the desired position.
The message center will display 4X4 SHIFT IN PROGRESS during the
shift. The message center will then display the system mode selected. If
any of the above shift conditions are not met, the shift will not occur and
the message center will display information guiding the driver through
the proper shifting procedures.
If SHIFT DELAYED PULL FORWARD is displayed in the message
center, transfer case gear tooth blockage is present. To alleviate this
condition, place the transmission in a forward gear, move the vehicle
forward approximately 5 feet (1.5 m), and shift the transmission back to
neutral to allow the transfer case to complete the range shift.
315

2011 F-150 (f12)

Owners Guide, 3rd Printing
USA (fus)
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
 Driving
Note: Some noise may be heard as the system shifts or engages; this is
normal.
Note: 4x4 low mode is not intended for use on dry pavement.
Using the all-wheel drive (AWD) system
(if equipped, Harley-Davidson™ only)
This system includes an electronically controlled transfer case. The
system is interactive with the road, continually monitoring and adjusting
torque delivery to the front and rear wheels to optimize traction.
2H (4X2) - Power to the rear
wheels only; used for street and
highway driving. Provides optimal
smoothness and fuel economy at
high speeds. The message center
will momentarily display “4X2” when
this mode is selected.
AWD (4X4 auto) - Power delivered
to all four wheels, as required, for
increased traction.
4H (4X4 high) - Used for extra
traction on snow covered or icy roads and in off-road situations. This
position is not recommended for use on dry pavement. This position is
only intended for severe winter or off-road conditions, such as deep
snow, ice or deep sand. The message center will display “4X4 High”
when this mode is selected.
Note: Do not use 4H (4X4 high) on dry, hard surfaced roads. Doing so
will produce excessive noise, increased tire wear and may damage drive
components. 4H (4X4 High) is only intended for consistently slippery or
loose surfaces. Use of 4H (4X4 High) on these surfaces may produce
some noise (such as occasional clunks), but will not damage drive
components.
Shifting between 2H (4X2) and AWD (auto) or 4H (high)
Move the control from the 2H position to the AWD or 4H position at a
stop or while driving at any forward speed. The message center may
display ⬙4X4 SHIFT IN PROGRESS⬙ during the system shift. The message
center will then display “AWD” if AWD has been selected or “4X4 high” if
4H is selected. The message center will momentarily display “4X2” if 2H
has been selected.
Note: 4X4 high mode is not intended for use on dry pavement
316

2011 F-150 (f12)

Owners Guide, 3rd Printing
USA (fus)
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
 Driving
Shifting between AWD (auto) and 4H (high)
Move the control from AWD to 4H at a stop or while driving at any
speed. The message center will display “AWD” if AWD has been selected
and “4X4 high” if 4H has been selected
Note: 4X4 high mode is not intended for use on dry pavement

Electronic locking differential (ELD) (if equipped)

The electronic locking differential (ELD) is a device housed in the rear
axle which allows both rear wheels to turn at the same speed. The ELD
can provide additional traction should the vehicle become stuck. The
ELD is electronically activated by the driver and can be shifted on the
fly. It is intended for use in mud, rocks, sand, or any off-road condition
where maximum traction is needed. It is not intended for use on dry
pavement.
The ELD is affected by the following conditions:
• The 4WD control must be in either 4H (4X4 high) or 4L (4X4 low)
mode.
• The ELD will not engage if the vehicle speed is above 20 mph
(30 km/h) in 4X4 high or 56 mph (90 km/h) in 4X4 low.
• In 4H (4X4 high), the ELD will disengage at speeds above 25 mph
(40 km/h) and will automatically reengage at speeds below 20 mph
(30 km/h).
• In 4L (4X4 low), the ELD will disengage at speeds above 62 mph
(100 km/h) and will automatically reengage at speeds below 56 mph
(90 km/h).
The ELD is designed for off-road use only and is not intended for use on
dry pavement.

317

2011 F-150 (f12)

Owners Guide, 3rd Printing
USA (fus)
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
 Driving
Activating the electronic locking differential (ELD)
The ELD can be turned on by
pulling the knob on the 4WD control
toward you while the control is in
either 4H (4X4 high) or 4L (4X4
low) mode.
Once the knob is pulled, the
light located on the control will
blink for approximately two seconds
and then it will remain solid. The
indicator light will also display in
the message center.
Once the light on the control
remains solid and the indicator
light is displayed in the message
center, both rear wheel axle shafts
will be locked together providing
added traction.
If the light blinks for 10 seconds, then turns off, and the indicator
light in the message center turns off, one of the following has occurred:
• The vehicle speed is too high.
• The left and right rear wheel speed difference is too high during an
engagement attempt.
• The system has malfunctioned and will be accompanied by a CHECK
LOCKING DIFFERENTIAL message in the message center.
Note: If the ELD has difficulty disengaging, release the accelerator pedal
and turn the steering wheel in the opposite direction while rolling.
Driving off-road with truck and utility vehicles
4WD vehicles are specially equipped for driving on sand, snow, mud and
rough terrain and have operating characteristics that are somewhat
different from conventional vehicles, both on and off the road.
Your vehicle may be equipped with a front air dam that can become
damaged (due to reduced ground clearance) when taking your vehicle
off-road. This air dam can be taken off by removing two bolts.
For vehicles equipped with a 3.5L Ecoboost™ engine:
Your vehicle is equipped with an underbody transmission shield and
brackets that may become damaged (due to reduced ground clearance)
318

2011 F-150 (f12)

Owners Guide, 3rd Printing
USA (fus)
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
 Driving
when taking your vehicle off-road. Remove the shield by disengaging the
fasteners at each corner of the shield. Then, remove the shield rear
brackets by removing the bracket to frame bolts, or have your authorized
dealer perform the work for you
How your vehicle differs from other vehicles
Truck and utility vehicles can differ from some other vehicles. Your
vehicle may be higher to allow it to travel over rough terrain without
getting hung up or damaging underbody components.
The differences that make your vehicle so versatile also make it handle
differently than an ordinary passenger car.
Maintain steering wheel control at all times, especially in rough terrain.
Since sudden changes in terrain can result in abrupt steering wheel
motion, make sure you grip the steering wheel from the outside. Do not
grip the spokes.
Drive cautiously to avoid vehicle damage from concealed objects such as
rocks and stumps.
You should either know the terrain or examine maps of the area before
driving. Map out your route before driving in the area. To maintain
steering and braking control of your vehicle, you must have all four
wheels on the ground and they must be rolling, not sliding or spinning.
Basic operating principles
• Do not use 4WD on dry, hard surfaced roads. Doing so will produce
excessive noise, increase tire wear and may damage drive components.
4WD modes are only intended for consistently slippery or loose
surfaces.
• Drive slower in strong crosswinds which can affect the normal steering
characteristics of your vehicle.
• Be extremely careful when driving on pavement made slippery by
loose sand, water, gravel, snow or ice.
If your vehicle goes off the edge of the pavement
• If your vehicle goes off the edge of the pavement, slow down, but
avoid severe brake application, ease the vehicle back onto the
pavement only after reducing your speed. Do not turn the steering
wheel too sharply while returning to the road surface.
• It may be safer to stay on the apron or shoulder of the road and slow
down gradually before returning to the pavement. You may lose
control if you do not slow down or if you turn the steering wheel too
sharply or abruptly.
319

2011 F-150 (f12)

Owners Guide, 3rd Printing
USA (fus)
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
 Driving
• It often may be less risky to strike small objects, such as highway
reflectors, with minor damage to your vehicle rather than attempt a
sudden return to the pavement which could cause the vehicle to slide
sideways out of control or roll over. Remember, your safety and the
safety of others should be your primary concern.
WARNING: Vehicles with a higher center of gravity such as
utility and four-wheel drive vehicles handle differently than
vehicles with a lower center of gravity. Utility and four-wheel drive
vehicles are not designed for cornering at speeds as high as passenger
cars any more than low-slung sports cars are designed to perform
satisfactorily under off-road conditions. Avoid sharp turns, excessive
speed and abrupt maneuvers in these vehicles. Failure to drive
cautiously could result in an increased risk of loss of vehicle control,
vehicle rollover, personal injury and death.

If your vehicle gets stuck

If your vehicle gets stuck in mud or snow it may be rocked out by
shifting between forward and reverse gears, stopping between shifts, in a
steady pattern. Press lightly on the accelerator in each gear.
Do not rock the vehicle if the engine is not at normal operating
temperature or damage to the transmission may occur.
Do not rock the vehicle for more than a few minutes or damage
to the transmission and tires may occur or the engine may
overheat.
WARNING: Do not spin the wheels at over 35 mph (56 km/h).
The tires may fail and injure a passenger or bystander.

Emergency maneuvers
• In an unavoidable emergency situation where a sudden sharp turn
must be made, remember to avoid “over-driving” your vehicle, i.e.,
turn the steering wheel only as rapidly and as far as required to avoid
the emergency. Excessive steering will result in less vehicle control,
not more. Additionally, smooth variations of the accelerator and/or
brake pedal pressure should be utilized if changes in vehicle speed are
called for. Avoid abrupt steering, acceleration or braking which could
result in an increased risk of loss of vehicle control, vehicle rollover
and/or personal injury. Use all available road surface to return the
vehicle to a safe direction of travel.
320

2011 F-150 (f12)

Owners Guide, 3rd Printing
USA (fus)
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
 Driving
• In the event of an emergency stop, avoid skidding the tires and do not
attempt any sharp steering wheel movements.
WARNING: Vehicles with a higher center of gravity such as
utility and four-wheel drive vehicles handle differently than
vehicles with a lower center of gravity. Utility and four-wheel drive
vehicles are not designed for cornering at speeds as high as passenger
cars any more than low-slung sports cars are designed to perform
satisfactorily under off-road conditions. Avoid sharp turns, excessive
speed and abrupt maneuvers in these vehicles. Failure to drive
cautiously could result in an increased risk of loss of vehicle control,
vehicle rollover, personal injury and death.

• If the vehicle goes from one type of surface to another (i.e., from
concrete to gravel) there will be a change in the way the vehicle
responds to a maneuver (steering, acceleration or braking). Again,
avoid these abrupt inputs.
Parking
On some 4WD vehicles, when the transfer case is in the N (Neutral)
position, the engine and transmission are disconnected from the rest of
the driveline. Therefore, the vehicle is free to roll even if the automatic
transmission is in P (Park) or the manual transmission is in gear. Do not
leave the vehicle unattended with the transfer case in the N (Neutral)
position. Always set the parking brake fully and turn off the ignition
when leaving the vehicle.
WARNING: Always set the parking brake fully and make sure
the gearshift is latched in P (Park). Turn the ignition to the off
position and remove the key whenever you leave your vehicle.

WARNING: If the parking brake is fully released, but the brake

warning lamp remains illuminated, the brakes may not be
working properly. See your authorized dealer.

4WD systems
4WD (when you select a 4WD mode) uses all four wheels to power the
vehicle. This increases traction, enabling you to drive over terrain and
road conditions that a conventional two-wheel drive vehicle cannot.
Power is supplied to all four wheels through a transfer case. On 4WD
vehicles, the transfer case allows you to select 4WD when necessary.
321

2011 F-150 (f12)

Owners Guide, 3rd Printing
USA (fus)
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
 Driving
Information on transfer case operation and shifting procedures can be
found in this chapter. Information on transfer case maintenance can be
found in the Maintenance and Specifications chapter. You should
become thoroughly familiar with this information before you operate
your vehicle.
Normal characteristics
On some 4WD models, the initial shift from two-wheel drive to 4x4 while
the vehicle is moving can cause some momentary clunk and ratcheting
sounds. This is the front drivetrain coming up to speed and the
automatic locking hubs engaging and is not cause for concern.
Sand
When driving over sand, try to keep all four wheels on the most solid
area of the trail. Avoid reducing the tire pressures but shift to a lower
gear and drive steadily through the terrain. Apply the accelerator slowly
and avoid spinning the wheels.
Avoid excessive speed because vehicle momentum can work against you
and cause the vehicle to become stuck to the point that assistance may
be required from another vehicle. Remember, you may be able to back
out the way you came if you proceed with caution.
Mud and water
If you must drive through high
water, drive slowly. Traction or
brake capability may be limited.
When driving through water,
determine the depth; avoid water
higher than the bottom of the hubs
(if possible) and proceed slowly. If
the ignition system gets wet, the
vehicle may stall.
Once through water, always try the brakes. Wet brakes do not stop the
vehicle as effectively as dry brakes. Drying can be improved by moving
your vehicle slowly while applying light pressure on the brake pedal.
Be cautious of sudden changes in vehicle speed or direction when you
are driving in mud. Even 4WD vehicles can lose traction in slick mud. As
when you are driving over sand, apply the accelerator slowly and avoid
spinning your wheels. If the vehicle does slide, steer in the direction of
the slide until you regain control of the vehicle.
If the transmission, transfer case or front axle are submerged in water,
their fluids should be checked and changed, if necessary.
322

2011 F-150 (f12)

Owners Guide, 3rd Printing
USA (fus)
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
 Driving
Driving through deep water may damage the transmission.
If the front or rear axle is submerged in water, the axle lubricant should
be replaced.
After driving through mud, clean off residue stuck to rotating driveshafts
and tires. Excess mud stuck on tires and rotating driveshafts causes an
imbalance that could damage drive components.
“Tread Lightly” is an educational
program designed to increase public
awareness of land-use regulations
and responsibilities in our nations
wilderness areas. Ford Motor
Company joins the U.S. Forest Service and the Bureau of Land
Management in encouraging you to help preserve our national forest and
other public and private lands by “treading lightly.”
Driving on hilly or sloping terrain
Although natural obstacles may make it necessary to travel diagonally up
or down a hill or steep incline, you should always try to drive straight up
or straight down. Avoid driving crosswise or turning on steep
slopes or hills. A danger lies in losing traction, slipping sideways and
possibly rolling over. Whenever driving on a hill, determine beforehand
the route you will use. Do not drive over the crest of a hill without
seeing what conditions are on the other side. Do not drive in reverse
over a hill without the aid of an observer.
When climbing a steep slope or hill,
start in a lower gear rather than
downshifting to a lower gear from a
higher gear once the ascent has
started. This reduces strain on the
engine and the possibility of stalling.
If you do stall out, do not try to
turn around because you might roll
over. It is better to back down to a safe location.
Apply just enough power to the wheels to climb the hill. Too much
power will cause the tires to slip, spin or lose traction, resulting in loss of
vehicle control.

323

2011 F-150 (f12)

Owners Guide, 3rd Printing
USA (fus)
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
 Driving
Descend a hill in the same gear you
would use to climb up the hill to
avoid excessive brake application
and brake overheating. Do not
descend in neutral; instead,
disengage overdrive or manually
shift to a lower gear. When
descending a steep hill, avoid
sudden hard braking as you could
lose control. When you brake hard,
the front wheels can’t turn and if
they aren’t turning, you won’t be
able to steer. The front wheels have to be turning in order to steer the
vehicle. Rapid pumping of the brake pedal will help you slow the vehicle
and still maintain steering control.
If your vehicle has anti-lock brakes, apply the brakes steadily. Do not
“pump” the brakes.
Driving on snow and ice
4WD vehicles have advantages over 2WD vehicles in snow and ice but
can skid like any other vehicle.
Should you start to slide while driving on snowy or icy roads, turn the
steering wheel in the direction of the slide until you regain control.
Avoid sudden applications of power and quick changes of direction on
snow and ice. Apply the accelerator slowly and steadily when starting
from a full stop.
Avoid sudden braking as well. Although a 4WD vehicle may accelerate
better than a two-wheel drive vehicle in snow and ice, it won’t stop any
faster, because as in other vehicles, braking occurs at all four wheels. Do
not become overconfident as to road conditions.
Make sure you allow sufficient distance between you and other vehicles
for stopping. Drive slower than usual and consider using one of the lower
gears. In emergency stopping situations, apply the brake steadily. Do not
“pump” the brakes. Refer to the Brakes section of this chapter for
additional information on the operation of the Anti-lock Brake System
(ABS).

324

2011 F-150 (f12)

Owners Guide, 3rd Printing
USA (fus)
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
 Driving

WARNING: If you are driving in slippery conditions that require

tire chains or cables, then it is critical that you drive cautiously.
Keep speeds down, allow for longer stopping distances and avoid
aggressive steering to reduce the chances of a loss of vehicle control
which can lead to serious injury or death. If the rear end of the vehicle
slides while cornering, steer in the direction of the slide until you
regain control of the vehicle.

Maintenance and modifications

The suspension and steering systems on your vehicle have been designed
and tested to provide predictable performance whether loaded or empty
and durable load carrying capability. For this reason, Ford Motor
Company strongly recommends that you do not make modifications such
as adding or removing parts (such as lift kits or stabilizer bars) or by
using replacement parts not equivalent to the original factory equipment.
Snow plow restriction
WARNING: Ford does not recommend the use of any F-150
model to be upfitted and equipped with snow plow hardware for
use as a snow plow vehicle.

Any modifications to a vehicle that raise the center of gravity can make
it more likely the vehicle will roll over as a result of a loss of control.
Ford Motor Company recommends that caution be used with any vehicle
equipped with a high load or device (such as ladder racks or pickup box
cover).
Failure to maintain your vehicle properly may void the warranty, increase
your repair cost, reduce vehicle performance and operational capabilities
and adversely affect driver and passenger safety. Frequent inspection of
vehicle chassis components is recommended if the vehicle is subjected to
heavy off-road usage.

325

2011 F-150 (f12)

Owners Guide, 3rd Printing
USA (fus)
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
 Driving
DRIVING THROUGH WATER
If driving through deep or standing
water is unavoidable, proceed very
slowly. Never drive through water
that is higher than the bottom of
the wheel rims (for cars) or the
bottom of the hubs (for trucks).

When driving through water, traction or brake capability may be limited.

Also, water may enter your engine’s air intake and severely damage your
engine or your vehicle may stall. Driving through deep water where
the transmission vent tube is submerged may allow water into the
transmission and cause internal transmission damage.
Once through the water, always dry the brakes by moving your
vehicle slowly while applying light pressure on the brake pedal.
Wet brakes do not stop the vehicle as quickly as dry brakes.

326

2011 F-150 (f12)

Owners Guide, 3rd Printing
USA (fus)
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
 Roadside Emergencies
ROADSIDE ASSISTANCE
Vehicles sold in the U.S. : Getting roadside assistance
To fully assist you should you have a vehicle concern, Ford Motor
Company offers a complimentary roadside assistance program. This
program is separate from the New Vehicle Limited Warranty. The service
is available:
• 24-hours, seven days a week
• for the coverage period listed on the Roadside Assistance Card
included in your Owner Guide portfolio.
Roadside assistance will cover:
• a flat tire change with a good spare (except vehicles that have been
supplied with a tire inflation kit)
• battery jump start
• lock-out assistance (key replacement cost is the customer’s
responsibility)
• fuel delivery – Independent Service Contractors, if not prohibited by
state, local or municipal law shall deliver up to 2.0 gallons (7.5L) of
gasoline or 5.0 gallons (18.9L) of diesel fuel to a disabled vehicle. Fuel
delivery service is limited to two no-charge occurrences within a
12-month period.
• winch out – available within 100 feet (30.5 meters) of a paved or
county maintained road, no recoveries.
• towing – Ford and Lincoln eligible vehicles towed to an authorized
dealer within 35 miles (56 km) of the disablement location or to the
nearest authorized dealer. If a member requests to be towed to an
authorized dealer more than 35 miles (56 km) from the disablement
location, the member shall be responsible for any mileage costs in
excess of 35 miles (56 km).
Trailers shall be covered up to $200 if the disabled eligible vehicle
requires service at the nearest authorized dealer. If the trailer is disabled,
but the towing vehicle is operational, the trailer does not qualify for any
roadside services.
Vehicles sold in the U.S. : Using roadside assistance
Complete the roadside assistance identification card and place it in your
wallet for quick reference. This card is found in the Owner’s Guide
portfolio in the glove compartment.
327

2011 F-150 (f12)

Owners Guide, 3rd Printing
USA (fus)
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
 Roadside Emergencies
U.S. Ford vehicle customers who require Roadside Assistance, call
1-800-241-3673.
If you need to arrange roadside assistance for yourself, Ford Motor
Company will reimburse a reasonable amount for towing to the nearest
dealership within 35 miles (56 km). To obtain reimbursement
information, U.S. Ford vehicle customers call 1-800-241-3673. Customers
will be asked to submit their original receipts.
Vehicles sold in Canada : Getting roadside assistance
Canadian customers who require roadside assistance, call
1–800–665–2006.
Vehicles sold in Canada : Using roadside assistance
Complete the roadside assistance identification card and place it in your
wallet for quick reference. In Canada, the card is found in the Warranty
Guide in the glove box.
Canadian Roadside coverage and benefits may differ from the U.S.
coverage. Please refer to your Warranty Guide or visit our website at
www.ford.ca for information on Canadian services and benefits.
Canadian customers who need to obtain roadside information, call
1-800-665-2006 or visit our website at www.ford.ca.
HAZARD FLASHER CONTROL
The hazard flasher control is located
on the instrument panel by the
radio. The hazard flashers will
operate when the ignition is in any
position or if the key is not in the
ignition.
• Press the flasher control and all front and rear direction signals will
flash.
• Press the flasher control again to turn them off.
Use it when your vehicle is disabled and is creating a safety hazard for
other motorists.
Note: With extended use, the flasher may run down your battery.
FUEL PUMP SHUT-OFF
In the event of a moderate to severe collision, this vehicle is equipped
with a fuel pump shut-off feature that stops the flow of fuel to the
engine. Not every impact will cause a shut-off.
328

2011 F-150 (f12)

Owners Guide, 3rd Printing
USA (fus)
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
 Roadside Emergencies
Should your vehicle shut off after a collision due to this feature, you may
restart your vehicle by doing the following:
1. Turn the ignition switch to the off position.
2. Turn the ignition switch to the on position.
In some instances the vehicle may not restart the first time you try to
restart and may take one additional attempt.
WARNING: Failure to inspect and if necessary repair fuel leaks
after a collision may increase the risk of fire and serious injury.
Ford Motor Company recommends that the fuel system be inspected
by an authorized dealer after any collision.

FUSES AND RELAYS

Fuses
If electrical components in the
vehicle are not working, a fuse may
have blown. Blown fuses are
identified by a broken wire within
the fuse. Check the appropriate 15

fuses before replacing any electrical

components.
Note: Always replace a fuse with one that has the specified amperage
rating. Using a fuse with a higher amperage rating can cause severe wire
damage and could start a fire.
Standard fuse amperage rating and color
COLOR
Cartridge
Fuse Mini Standard Maxi Fuse link
maxi
rating fuses fuses fuses cartridge
fuses
2A Grey Grey — — —
3A Violet Violet — — —
4A Pink Pink — — —
5A Tan Tan — — —
7.5A Brown Brown — — —
10A Red Red — — —
15A Blue Blue — — —
329

2011 F-150 (f12)

Owners Guide, 3rd Printing
USA (fus)
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
 Roadside Emergencies

COLOR
Cartridge
Fuse Mini Standard Maxi Fuse link
maxi
rating fuses fuses fuses cartridge
fuses
20A Yellow Yellow Yellow Blue Blue
25A Natural Natural — Natural Natural
30A Green Green Green Pink Pink
40A — — Orange Green Green
50A — — Red Red Red
60A — — Blue Yellow Yellow
70A — — Tan — Brown
80A — — Natural Black Black

Passenger compartment fuse panel

The fuse panel is located under the right-hand side of the instrument
panel.
To remove the trim panel for access
to the fuse box, pull the panel
toward you and swing it out away
from the side and remove it. To
reinstall it, line up the tabs with the
grooves on the panel, then push it
shut.

To remove the fuse box cover, press in the tabs on both sides of the
cover, then pull the cover off.
To reinstall the fuse box cover, place the top part of the cover on the
fuse panel, then push the bottom part of the cover until you hear it click
shut. Gently pull on the cover to make sure it is seated properly.

330

2011 F-150 (f12)

Owners Guide, 3rd Printing
USA (fus)
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
 Roadside Emergencies

5 19 30
6
20 31
48
7
21 32
8

9
49 40

10
22 33 41
11
23 34 42
12
24 35 43
13
25 36 44
14
26 37 45
15

16 27

17 28 38 46

18 29 39 47

The fuses are coded as follows.

Fuse/Relay Fuse Amp Protected Circuits
Location Rating
1 30A Driver side front window
2 15A SYNC威
3 30A Passenger side front window
4 10A Interior lamps
5 20A Memory module
6 5A Not used (spare)
7 7.5A Power mirror switch, Memory seat
module
8 10A Not used (spare)
9 10A Radio display, GPS module,
Navigation display
10 10A Run/accessory relay
11 10A Instrument cluster
331

2011 F-150 (f12)

Owners Guide, 3rd Printing
USA (fus)
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
 Roadside Emergencies

Fuse/Relay Fuse Amp Protected Circuits

Location Rating
12 15A Interior lighting, Puddle lamps,
Backlighting, Cargo lamp
13 15A Right turn signals/stop lamps
14 15A Left turn signals/stop lamps
15 15A Reverse lights, High-mounted stop
lamp
16 10A Right low-beam headlamp
17 10A Left low-beam headlamp
18 10A Brake-shift interlock, Keypad
illumination, PCM wakeup, PATS
19 20A Audio amplifier
20 20A Power door locks
21 10A Ambient lighting
22 20A Horn
23 15A Steering wheel control module
24 15A Datalink connector, Steering
wheel control module
25 15A Not used (spare)
26 5A Radio frequency module
27 20A Not used (spare)
28 15A Ignition switch
29 20A Radio/Navigation
30 15A Front parking lamps
31 5A BOO – IP, BOO – Engine
32 15A Delay/accessory – moon roof,
power windows, locks, Automatic
dimming mirror/Compass
33 10A Heated seats
34 10A Reverse sensing system, 4x4
switch, Rear video, Off road
indicator (SVT Raptor)
35 5A Hill descent switch (SVT Raptor)

332

2011 F-150 (f12)

Owners Guide, 3rd Printing
USA (fus)
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
 Roadside Emergencies

Fuse/Relay Fuse Amp Protected Circuits

Location Rating
36 10A Restraint control module,
Occupant classification system
module
37 10A Trailer brake control
38 10A Delayed accessory – 110V power
point, Radio (AM/FM)
39 15A High beam headlamps
40 10A Rear park lamps
41 7.5A Passenger airbag deactivation
indicator, Upfitter switch (SVT
Raptor)
42 5A Overdrive cancel switch
43 10A Not used (spare)
44 10A Not used (spare)
45 5A Not used (spare)
46 10A Climate controls module
47 15A Fog lamps, Exterior mirror turn
signals
48 30A Circuit Power rear windows, Power
Breaker sliding back window
49 Relay Delayed accessory

Power distribution box

The power distribution box is located in the engine compartment. The
power distribution box contains high-current fuses that protect your
vehicle’s main electrical systems from overloads.
WARNING: Always disconnect the battery before servicing high
current fuses.

WARNING: To reduce risk of electrical shock, always replace

the cover to the power distribution box before reconnecting the
battery or refilling fluid reservoirs.

333

2011 F-150 (f12)

Owners Guide, 3rd Printing
USA (fus)
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
 Roadside Emergencies
If the battery has been disconnected and reconnected, refer to the
Battery section of the Maintenance and Specifications chapter.

The high-current fuses are coded as follows:

Fuse/Relay Fuse Amp Protected Circuits
Location Rating
1 — Powertrain control module (PCM)
relay (3.7L, 5.0L and 6.2L
engines)
2 — Starter relay
3 — Blower motor relay
4 — Rear window defroster relay
5 — Electric fan relay (high speed)
6 — Trailer tow (TT) park lamp relay
7 — Run/start relay
8 — Fuel pump relay
9 — TT Battery charger relay
10 — PCM relay (3.5L engine)
11 30A** Power running board motors
40A** Electric fan
12 50A** Electric fan (6.2L with max
trailer tow, SVT Raptor)
334

2011 F-150 (f12)

Owners Guide, 3rd Printing
USA (fus)
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
 Roadside Emergencies

Fuse/Relay Fuse Amp Protected Circuits

Location Rating
13 30A** Starter relay power
14 30A** Passenger power seat
40A** Electric fan
15 50A** Electric fan (6.2L with max
trailer tow, SVT Raptor)
16 — Not used
17 30A** Trailer brake control
18 30A** Upfitter 1 (SVT Raptor)
19 30A** Upfitter 2 (SVT Raptor)
20 20A** 4x4 module (electronic shift)
21 30A** TT battery charge relay power
22 20A** Cigar lighter
23 — A/C clutch relay
24 — Not used
25 — Vacuum pump relay (3.5L engine)
26 10A* PCM – keep alive power, PCM
relay coil, canister vent solenoid
(3.7L, 5.0L and 6.2L engines)
27 20A* Fuel pump relay power
28 10A* Upfitter 4 (SVT Raptor)
29 10A* 4x4 IWE solenoid
30 10A* A/C clutch
31 15A* Run/start relay power
32 40A** Rear window defroster relay
power
33 40A** 110V AC power point
34 40A** PCM relay power (3.7L, 5.0L and
6.2L engines)
50A** PCM relay power (3.5L engine)
35 — Not used
36 30A** Roll stability control
(RSC)/Anti-lock brake system
(ABS)

335

2011 F-150 (f12)

Owners Guide, 3rd Printing
USA (fus)
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
 Roadside Emergencies

Fuse/Relay Fuse Amp Protected Circuits

Location Rating
37 — TT left stop/turn relay
38 — TT right stop/turn relay
39 — TT back-up lamps relay
40 — Electric fan relay
41 — Not used
42 5A* Run/start coil
43 15A* TT back-up lamp relay power
44 15A* Upfitter 3 (SVT Raptor)
45 10A* Alternator sensor (non-6.2L
engines)
46 10A* Brake on/off (BOO) switch
47 60A** RSC/ABS module
48 20A** Moon roof
49 30A** Wipers
50 — Not used
51 40A** Blower motor relay power
52 5A* Run/start – Electronic power
assist steering, Blower relay coil
53 5A* Run/start – PCM
54 5A* Run/start – 4x4 module, Back-up
lamps, RSC/ABS, TT battery
charge relay coil, Rear window
defroster relay coil
55 — Not used
56 15A* Heated mirrors
57 — Not used
58 — Not used
59 — Not used
60 — Not used
61 — Not used
62 — Wiper motor relay
63 25A** Electric fan

336

2011 F-150 (f12)

Owners Guide, 3rd Printing
USA (fus)
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
 Roadside Emergencies

Fuse/Relay Fuse Amp Protected Circuits

Location Rating
64 40A** Vacuum pump relay power (3.5L
engine)
65 20A** Auxiliary power point (instrument
panel)
66 20A** Auxiliary power point (inside
center console)
67 20A** TT park lamps relay power
68 25A** 4x4 module
69 30A** Passenger heated/cooled seats
70 — Not used
71 20A** Heated rear seats
72 20A** Auxiliary power point (Rear)
73 20A** TT stop/turn lamps relay power
74 30A** Driver power seat/memory
module
75 15A* PCM – voltage power 1 (3.7L,
5.0L, 6.2L engines PCM module)
25A* PCM – voltage power 1 (3.5L
engine PCM module)
76 20A* PCM – Voltage power 2 (General
powertrain components, Mass air
flow/Intake air temp sensor)
(3.7L, 5.0L, 6.2L engines)
20A* PCM – Voltage power 2 (General
powertrain components, Canister
vent solenoid) (3.5L engine)
77 10A* PCM – Voltage power 3 (Emission
related powertrain components,
Electric fan relays coil)
78 15A* PCM – Voltage power 4 – Ignition
coils (3.5L, 3.7L, 5.0L engines)
20A* PCM – Voltage power 4 – Ignition
coils (6.2L engine)
79 5A* Rain sensor
80 — Not used

337

2011 F-150 (f12)

Owners Guide, 3rd Printing
USA (fus)
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
 Roadside Emergencies

Fuse/Relay Fuse Amp Protected Circuits

Location Rating
81 — Not used
82 — Not used
83 — Not used
84 — Not used
85 — Electric fan relay (low speed)
*Mini fuse **Cartridge fuse
Auxiliary relay box (SVT Raptor only)

2 4 6

1 3 5

The relay box is located in the left rear corner of the engine
compartment.
Fuse/Relay Fuse amp Description
location rating
1 — Upfitter 1 relay
2 — Upfitter 2 relay
3 — Upfitter 3 relay
4 — Upfitter 4 relay
5 — Not used
6 — Not used

338

2011 F-150 (f12)

Owners Guide, 3rd Printing
USA (fus)
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
 Roadside Emergencies
CHANGING THE TIRES
If you get a flat tire while driving, do not apply the brake heavily.
Instead, gradually decrease your speed. Hold the steering wheel firmly
and slowly move to a safe place on the side of the road.
Note: If your vehicle is equipped with the tire pressure monitoring
system (TPMS), the indicator light will illuminate when the spare tire is
in use. To restore the full functionality of the monitoring system, all road
wheels equipped with tire pressure monitoring sensors must be mounted
on the vehicle.
If your vehicle is equipped with TPMS, have a flat serviced by an
authorized dealer in order to prevent damage to the TPMS sensors, refer
to Tire pressure monitoring system (TPMS) in the Tires, Wheels and
Loading chapter. Replace the spare tire with a road tire as soon as
possible. During repairing or replacing of the flat tire, have the
authorized dealer inspect the TPMS sensor for damage.
WARNING: The use of tire sealants may damage your tire
pressure monitoring system (TPMS) and should not be used.
However, if you must use a sealant, the TPMS sensor and valve stem
on the wheel must be replaced by an authorized Ford dealer.

WARNING: Refer to Tire pressure monitoring system (TPMS)

in the Tires, Wheels and Loading chapter for important
information. If the tire pressure monitor sensor becomes damaged, it
will no longer function.

Dissimilar spare tire/wheel information

WARNING: Failure to follow these guidelines could result in an
increased risk of loss of vehicle control, injury or death.

If you have a dissimilar spare tire/wheel, then it is intended for

temporary use only. This means that if you need to use it, you should
replace it as soon as possible with a road tire/wheel that is the same size
and type as the road tires and wheels that were originally provided by
Ford. If the dissimilar spare tire or wheel is damaged, it should be
replaced rather than repaired.

339

2011 F-150 (f12)

Owners Guide, 3rd Printing
USA (fus)
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
 Roadside Emergencies
A dissimilar spare tire/wheel is defined as a spare tire and/or wheel that
is different in brand, size or appearance from the road tires and wheels
and can be one of three types:
1. T-type mini-spare: This spare tire begins with the letter “T” for tire
size and may have “Temporary Use Only” molded in the sidewall
2. Full-size dissimilar spare with label on wheel: This spare tire has
a label on the wheel that states: “THIS TIRE AND WHEEL FOR
TEMPORARY USE ONLY”
When driving with one of the dissimilar spare tires listed above, do not:
• Exceed 50 mph (80 km/h)
• Load the vehicle beyond maximum vehicle load rating listed on the
Safety Compliance Label
• Tow a trailer
• Use snow chains on the end of the vehicle with the dissimilar spare
tire
• Use more than one dissimilar spare tire at a time
• Use commercial car washing equipment
• Try to repair the dissimilar spare tire
Use of one of the dissimilar spare tires listed above at any one wheel
location can lead to impairment of the following:
• Handling, stability and braking performance
• Comfort and noise
• Ground clearance and parking at curbs
• Winter weather driving capability
• Wet weather driving capability
• All-wheel driving capability (if applicable)
3. Full-size dissimilar spare without label on wheel
When driving with the full-size dissimilar spare tire/wheel, do not:
• Exceed 70 mph (113 km/h)
• Use more than one dissimilar spare tire/wheel at a time
• Use commercial car washing equipment
• Use snow chains on the end of the vehicle with the dissimilar spare
tire/wheel
340

2011 F-150 (f12)

Owners Guide, 3rd Printing
USA (fus)
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
 Roadside Emergencies
The usage of a full-size dissimilar spare tire/wheel can lead to
impairment of the following:
• Handling, stability and braking performance
• Comfort and noise
• Ground clearance and parking at curbs
• Winter weather driving capability
• Wet weather driving capability
• All-wheel driving capability (if applicable)
• Load leveling adjustment (if applicable)
When driving with the full-size dissimilar spare tire/wheel additional
caution should be given to:
• Towing a trailer
• Driving vehicles equipped with a camper body
• Driving vehicles with a load on the cargo rack
Drive cautiously when using a full-size dissimilar spare tire/wheel and
seek service as soon as possible.
Stopping and securing the vehicle
1. Park on a level surface, activate
the hazard flashers and set the
parking brake.
2. Place the gearshift in P (Park)
and turn the engine off.

341

2011 F-150 (f12)

Owners Guide, 3rd Printing
USA (fus)
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
 Roadside Emergencies
Location of the spare tire and tools
The spare tire is located under the vehicle, just forward of the rear
bumper. The jack, jack handle and lug wrench are located in the
following locations:
Body Style Location
Regular Cab Attached to a floor bracket
behind/under the driver’s seat (for
easier access move the driver seat
forward)
SuperCab Attached to a floor bracket under
the rear seat on the driver’s side
SuperCrew In a plastic box in the floor under
the rear seat
To remove the jack on Regular Cab and SuperCab models:
Remove the wing nut and turn the jack screw counterclockwise to
release pressure before removing the jack from the bracket.
To remove the jack on SuperCrew models:
1. Lift both rear seat cushions.
2. Remove the insert containing the Easy Fuel ™ funnel from the driver’s
side.
3. Remove the two small wing nuts on the passenger side.
4. Slide the plastic box toward the driver’s side and remove.
Removing the spare tire
1. Use the ignition key to remove
the lock cylinder from the access
hole of the bumper to allow access
to the guide tube. Assemble the jack
handle as shown in the illustration.

342

2011 F-150 (f12)

Owners Guide, 3rd Printing
USA (fus)
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
 Roadside Emergencies
2. Fully insert the jack handle
through the bumper hole and into
the guide tube through the access
hole in the rear bumper.

3. Turn the handle counterclockwise until tire is lowered to the ground,

the tire can be slid rearward and the cable is slightly slack.
4. Slide the retainer through the center of the wheel.
Tire change procedure
WARNING: To help prevent the vehicle from moving when you
change a tire, be sure the parking brake is set, then block (in
both directions) the wheel that is diagonally opposite (other side and
end of the vehicle) to the tire being changed.

WARNING: If the vehicle slips off the jack, you or someone else
could be seriously injured.

WARNING: Do not attempt to change a tire on the side of the

vehicle close to moving traffic. Pull far enough off the road to
avoid the danger of being hit when operating the jack or changing the
wheel.

Note: Passengers should not remain in the vehicle when the vehicle is
being jacked.
Refer to the instruction sheet (located with the jack) for detailed tire
change instructions.
1. Block the diagonally opposite
wheel.
2. Obtain the spare tire and jack
from their storage locations. Note:
F-150 SVT Raptor also includes a
chock, saddle extension and wing
bolt.
3. Use the tip of the lug wrench to remove any wheel trim that is
blocking the lug nuts.
343

2011 F-150 (f12)

Owners Guide, 3rd Printing
USA (fus)
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
 Roadside Emergencies
4. Loosen each wheel lug nut
one-half turn counterclockwise but
do not remove them until the wheel
is raised off the ground.

Note: For F-150 SVT Raptor, install the saddle extension on the jack as
shown in the jack usage and storage instructions.
5. Position the jack according to the following guides and turn the jack
handle clockwise until the wheel is completely off the ground.
WARNING: When one of the rear wheels is off the ground, the
transmission alone will not prevent the vehicle from moving or
slipping off the jack, even if the transmission is in P (Park). To prevent
the vehicle from moving when you change the tire, be sure that the
parking brake is set and the diagonally opposite wheel is blocked. If
the vehicle slips off the jack, someone could be seriously injured.

• Front
Note: Use the frame rail as the jacking location point, NOT the control
arm.
Note: For F-150 SVT Raptor, you must always use the jack saddle
extension.

344

2011 F-150 (f12)

Owners Guide, 3rd Printing
USA (fus)
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
 Roadside Emergencies
• Rear
Note: Never use the front or rear
differential as a jacking point.

WARNING: To lessen the risk of personal injury, do not put any

part of your body under the vehicle while changing a tire. Do not
start the engine when your vehicle is on the jack. The jack is only
meant for changing the tire.

6. Remove the lug nuts with the lug wrench.

7. Replace the flat tire with the spare tire, making sure the valve stem is
facing outward. Reinstall the lug nuts until the wheel is snug against the
hub. Do not fully tighten the lug nuts until the wheel has been lowered.
8. Lower the wheel by turning the jack handle counterclockwise.

345

2011 F-150 (f12)

Owners Guide, 3rd Printing
USA (fus)
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
 Roadside Emergencies
9. Remove the jack and fully tighten
the lug nuts in the order shown
(Refer to Wheel lug nut torque
specifications later in this chapter
for the proper lug nut torque
specification):
• Six lug nut wheel

• Seven lug nut wheel

10. Stow the flat tire. Refer to Stowing the flat/spare tire.
11. Stow the jack and lug wrench. Make sure the jack is fastened so it
does not rattle when you drive.
12. Unblock the wheels.
Stowing the flat/spare tire
Note: Failure to follow spare tire stowage instructions may result in
failure of cable or loss of spare tire.
1. Lay the tire on the ground with the valve stem facing in the direction
specified on the Tire Changing Instructions located with the jack
hardware.
2. Slide the wheel partially under the vehicle and install the retainer
through the wheel center. Pull on the cable to align the components at
the end of the cable.

346

2011 F-150 (f12)

Owners Guide, 3rd Printing
USA (fus)
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
 Roadside Emergencies
3. Turn the jack handle clockwise until the tire is raised to its stowed
position underneath the vehicle. The effort to turn the jack handle
increases significantly and the spare tire carrier ratchets or slips when
the tire is raised to the maximum tightness. Tighten to the best of your
ability, to the point where the ratchet/slip occurs, if possible. The spare
tire carrier will not allow you to overtighten. If the spare tire carrier
ratchets or slips with little effort, take the vehicle to your authorized
dealer for assistance at your earliest convenience.
4. Check that the tire lies flat against the frame and is properly
tightened. Try to push or pull, then turn the tire to be sure it will not
move. Loosen and retighten, if necessary. Failure to properly stow the
spare tire may result in failure of the winch cable and loss of the tire.
5. Repeat this tightness check procedure when servicing the spare tire
pressure (every six months, as per your scheduled maintenance
information), or at any time that the spare tire is disturbed through
service of other components.
6. If removed, install the spare tire lock (if equipped) into the bumper
drive tube with the spare tire lock key (if equipped) and jack handle.
WHEEL LUG NUT TORQUE SPECIFICATIONS
Retighten the lug nuts to the specified torque within 100 miles (160 km)
after any wheel disturbance (rotation, flat tire, wheel removal, etc.).
Bolt size Wheel lug nut torque*
ft-lb N•m
M14 x 2.0 150 200
* Torque specifications are for nut and bolt threads free of dirt and
rust. Use only Ford recommended replacement fasteners.
WARNING: When a wheel is installed, always remove any
corrosion, dirt or foreign materials present on the mounting
surfaces of the wheel or the surface of the wheel hub, brake drum or
brake disc that contacts the wheel. Ensure that any fasteners that
attach the rotor to the hub are secured so they do not interfere with
the mounting surfaces of the wheel. Installing wheels without correct
metal-to-metal contact at the wheel mounting surfaces can cause the
wheel nuts to loosen and the wheel to come off while the vehicle is in
motion, resulting in loss of control.

347

2011 F-150 (f12)

Owners Guide, 3rd Printing
USA (fus)
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
 Roadside Emergencies
Note: Inspect the wheel pilot hole
prior to installation. If there is
visible corrosion in wheel pilot hole,
remove loose particles by wiping
with clean rag and apply grease.
Apply grease only to the wheel pilot
hole surface by smearing a “dime”
(1 square cm) sized glob of grease
around the wheel pilot surface (1)
with end of finger. DO NOT apply
grease to lugnut/stud holes or
wheel-to-brake surfaces.
RUNNING OUT OF FUEL
If you have run out of fuel and need to refill the vehicle with a portable
fuel container, see Running out of fuel in the Maintenance and
Specifications chapter for proper fuel filling method using a portable
fuel container and the included fuel filler funnel. Do not insert the
nozzle of portable fuel containers or any type of aftermarket funnels into
the Easy Fuel威 “no cap” fuel system as it can be damaged. You must use
the included funnel in such circumstances.
WARNING: Do not insert the nozzle of portable fuel containers
or aftermarket funnels into the Easy Fuel威 system. This could
damage the fuel system and its seal, and may cause fuel to run onto
the ground instead of filling the tank, all of which could result in
serious personal injury.

JUMP STARTING
WARNING: The gases around the battery can explode if
exposed to flames, sparks, or lit cigarettes. An explosion could
result in injury or vehicle damage.

WARNING: Batteries contain sulfuric acid which can burn skin,

eyes and clothing, if contacted.

Do not attempt to push-start your automatic transmission

vehicle. Automatic transmissions do not have push-start
capability. Attempting to push-start a vehicle with an automatic
transmission may cause transmission damage.
348

2011 F-150 (f12)

Owners Guide, 3rd Printing
USA (fus)
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
 Roadside Emergencies
Preparing your vehicle
When the battery is disconnected or a new battery is installed, the
automatic transmission must relearn its shift strategy. As a result, the
transmission may have firm and/or soft shifts. This operation is
considered normal and will not affect function or durability of the
transmission. Over time, the adaptive learning process will fully update
transmission operation.
1. Use only a 12–volt supply to start your vehicle.
2. Do not disconnect the battery of the disabled vehicle as this could
damage the vehicle’s electrical system.
3. Park the booster vehicle close to the hood of the disabled vehicle
making sure the two vehicles do not touch. Set the parking brake on
both vehicles and stay clear of the engine cooling fan and other moving
parts.
4. Check all battery terminals and remove any excessive corrosion before
you attach the battery cables. Ensure that vent caps are tight and level.
5. Turn the heater fan on in both vehicles to protect from any electrical
surges. Turn all other accessories off.

Connecting the jumper cables

Note: In the illustration, the vehicle on the bottom is used to designate
the assisting (boosting) battery.

349

2011 F-150 (f12)

Owners Guide, 3rd Printing
USA (fus)
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
 Roadside Emergencies
1. Connect the positive (+) jumper
cable to the positive (+) terminal of
the discharged battery.
1
2. Connect the other end of the 4
positive (+) cable to the positive
(+) terminal of the assisting battery.
3. Connect the negative (-) cable to +

–
the negative (-) terminal of the
assisting battery.
4. Make the final connection of the

–
negative (-) cable to an exposed +

metal part of the stalled vehicle’s 3

engine, away from the battery and
the carburetor/fuel injection system. 2

Note: Do not attach the negative (-) cable to fuel lines, engine rocker
covers, the intake manifold or electrical components as grounding points.
WARNING: Do not connect the end of the second cable to the
negative (-) terminal of the battery to be jumped. A spark may
cause an explosion of the gases that surround the battery.

Ensure that the cables are clear of fan blades, belts, moving parts of both
engines, or any fuel delivery system parts.
Jump starting
1. Start the engine of the booster vehicle and run the engine at
moderately increased speed.
2. Start the engine of the disabled vehicle.
3. Once the disabled vehicle has been started, run both engines for an
additional three minutes before disconnecting the jumper cables.

350

2011 F-150 (f12)

Owners Guide, 3rd Printing
USA (fus)
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
 Roadside Emergencies
Removing the jumper cables
Remove the jumper cables in the reverse order that they were
connected.
Note: In the illustration, the vehicle on the bottom is used to designate
the assisting (boosting) battery.
1. Remove the jumper cable from
the ground metal surface.
2. Remove the jumper cable on the 4
D
negative (-) terminal of the booster 1
D
A
vehicle’s battery.
3. Remove the jumper cable from +

–
the positive (+) terminal of the
booster vehicle’s battery.
4. Remove the jumper cable from
the positive (+) terminal of the

–
+
disabled vehicle’s battery.
2
B

3
C

After the disabled vehicle has been started and the jumper cables
removed, allow it to idle for several minutes so the engine computer can
relearn its idle conditions.

351

2011 F-150 (f12)

Owners Guide, 3rd Printing
USA (fus)
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
 Roadside Emergencies
WRECKER TOWING

If you need to have your vehicle towed, contact a professional towing

service or, if you are a member of a roadside assistance program, your
roadside assistance service provider.
Ford recommends your vehicle be towed with a wheel lift or flatbed. Do
not tow with a slingbelt. Ford Motor Company has not approved a
slingbelt towing procedure.
On 4x2 vehicles, it is acceptable to tow the vehicle with the front wheels
on the ground (without dollies) and the rear wheels off the ground.
On 4x4 vehicles, it is recommended that your vehicle be towed with a
wheel lift and dollies or flatbed equipment with all the wheels off the
ground.
If the vehicle is towed by other means or incorrectly, vehicle
damage may occur.

352

2011 F-150 (f12)

Owners Guide, 3rd Printing
USA (fus)
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
 Roadside Emergencies
Emergency towing
In case of a roadside emergency with a disabled vehicle (without access
to wheel dollies, car hauling trailer, or flatbed transport vehicle) your
vehicle (regardless of transmission powertrain configuration) can be flat
towed (all wheels on the ground) under the following conditions:
• Vehicle is facing forward so that it is being towed in a forward
direction.
• Place the transmission in N (Neutral). If you cannot move the gear
shift lever, refer to Brake shift interlock in the Driving chapter for
instructions.
• Maximum speed is not to exceed 35 mph (56 km/h).
• Maximum distance is 50 miles (80 km).

353

2011 F-150 (f12)

Owners Guide, 3rd Printing
USA (fus)
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
 Customer Assistance
GETTING THE SERVICES YOU NEED
Warranty repairs to your vehicle must be performed by an authorized
dealer. While any authorized dealer handling your vehicle line will
provide warranty service, we recommend you return to your selling
authorized dealer who wants to ensure your continued satisfaction.
Please note that certain warranty repairs require special training and/or
equipment, so not all authorized dealers are authorized to perform all
warranty repairs. This means that, depending on the warranty repair
needed, you may have to take your vehicle to another authorized dealer.
A reasonable time must be allowed to perform a repair after taking your
vehicle to the authorized dealer. Repairs will be made using Ford or
Motorcraft威 parts, or remanufactured or other parts that are authorized
by Ford.
Away from home
If you are away from home when your vehicle needs service, contact the
Ford Customer Relationship Center or use the online resources listed
below to find the nearest authorized dealer.
In the United States:
Mailing address
Ford Motor Company
Customer Relationship Center
P.O. Box 6248
Dearborn, MI 48121
Telephone
1-800-392-3673 (FORD)
(TDD for the hearing impaired: 1-800-232-5952)
Online
Additional information and resources are available online at
www.genuineservice.com.
These are some of the items that can be found online:
• U.S. dealer locator by Dealer Name, City/State, or Zip Code
• Owner Guides
• Maintenance Schedules
• Recalls
• Ford Extended Service Plans
• Ford Genuine Accessories
• Service specials and promotions.
354

2011 F-150 (f12)

Owners Guide, 3rd Printing
USA (fus)
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
 Customer Assistance
In Canada:
Mailing address (Ford vehicles)
Customer Relationship Centre
Ford Motor Company of Canada, Limited
P.O. Box 2000
Oakville, Ontario L6J 5E4
Telephone
1-800-565-3673 (FORD)
Online
www.ford.ca
Mailing address (Lincoln vehicles)
Lincoln Centre
Ford Motor Company of Canada, Limited
P.O. Box 2000
Oakville, Ontario L6J 5E4
Telephone
1-800-387-9333
Online
www.lincolncanada.com
Additional assistance
If you have questions or concerns, or are unsatisfied with the service you
are receiving, follow these steps:
1. Contact your Sales Representative or Service Advisor at your
selling/servicing authorized dealer.
2. If your inquiry or concern remains unresolved, contact the Sales
Manager, Service Manager or Customer Relations Manager.
3. If you require assistance or clarification on Ford Motor Company
policies, please contact the Ford Customer Relationship Center
In order to help you serve you better, please have the following
information available when contacting a Customer Relationship Center:
• Vehicle Identification Number (VIN)
• Your telephone number (home and business)
• The name of the authorized dealer and city where located
• The vehicle’s current odometer reading
In some states, you must directly notify Ford in writing before pursuing
remedies under your state’s warranty laws. Ford is also allowed a final
repair attempt in some states.
355

2011 F-150 (f12)

Owners Guide, 3rd Printing
USA (fus)
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
 Customer Assistance
In the United States, a warranty dispute must be submitted to the BBB
AUTO LINE before taking action under the Magnuson-Moss Warranty
Act, or to the extent allowed by state law, before pursuing replacement
or repurchase remedies provided by certain state laws. This dispute
handling procedure is not required prior to enforcing state created rights
or other rights which are independent of the Magnuson-Moss Warranty
Act or state replacement or repurchase laws.
IN CALIFORNIA (U.S. ONLY)
California Civil Code Section 1793.2(d) requires that, if a manufacturer
or its representative is unable to repair a motor vehicle to conform to the
vehicle’s applicable express warranty after a reasonable number of
attempts, the manufacturer shall be required to either replace the
vehicle with one substantially identical or repurchase the vehicle and
reimburse the buyer in an amount equal to the actual price paid or
payable by the consumer (less a reasonable allowance for consumer
use). The consumer has the right to choose whether to receive a refund
or replacement vehicle.
California Civil Code Section 1793.22(b) presumes that the manufacturer
has had a reasonable number of attempts to conform the vehicle to its
applicable express warranties if, within the first 18 months of ownership
of a new vehicle or the first 18,000 miles (29,000 km), whichever occurs
first:
1. Two or more repair attempts are made on the same non-conformity
likely to cause death or serious bodily injury OR
2. Four or more repair attempts are made on the same nonconformity (a
defect or condition that substantially impairs the use, value or safety of
the vehicle) OR
3. The vehicle is out of service for repair of nonconformities for a total of
more than 30 calendar days (not necessarily all at one time)
In the case of 1 or 2 above, the consumer must also notify the
manufacturer of the need for the repair of the nonconformity at the
following address:
Ford Motor Company
16800 Executive Plaza Drive
Mail Drop 3NE-B
Dearborn, MI 48126

356

2011 F-150 (f12)

Owners Guide, 3rd Printing
USA (fus)
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
 Customer Assistance
You are required to submit your warranty dispute to BBB AUTO LINE
before asserting in court any rights or remedies conferred by California
Civil Code Section 1793.22(b). You are also required to use BBB AUTO
LINE before exercising rights or seeking remedies created by the Federal
Magnuson-Moss Warranty Act, 15 U.S.C. sec. 2301 et seq. If you choose
to seek redress by pursuing rights and remedies not created by California
Civil Code Section 1793.22(b) or the Magnuson-Moss Warranty Act,
resort to BBB AUTO LINE is not required by those statutes.
THE BETTER BUSINESS BUREAU (BBB) AUTO LINE PROGRAM
(U.S. ONLY)
Your satisfaction is important to Ford Motor Company and to your dealer.
If a warranty concern has not been resolved using the three-step
procedure outlined earlier in this chapter in the Getting the services
you need section, you may be eligible to participate in the BBB AUTO
LINE program.
The BBB AUTO LINE program consists of two parts – mediation and
arbitration. During mediation, a representative of the BBB will contact
both you and Ford Motor Company to explore options for settlement of
the claim. If an agreement is not reached during mediation or you do not
want to participate in mediation, and if your claim is eligible, you may
participate in the arbitration process. An arbitration hearing will be
scheduled so that you can present your case in an informal setting
before an impartial person. The arbitrator will consider the testimony
provided and make a decision after the hearing.
Disputes submitted to the BBB AUTO LINE program are usually decided
within forty days after you file your claim with the BBB. You are not
bound by the decision, and may reject the decision and proceed to court
where all findings of the BBB Auto Line dispute, and decision, are
admissible in the court action. Should you choose to accept the BBB
AUTO LINE decision, Ford is then bound by the decision, and must
comply with the decision within 30 days of receipt of your acceptance
letter.
BBB AUTO LINE Application: Using the information provided below,
please call or write to request a program application. You will be asked
for your name and address, general information about your new vehicle,
information about your warranty concerns, and any steps you have
already taken to try to resolve them. A Customer Claim Form will be
mailed that will need to be completed, signed and returned to the BBB
along with proof of ownership. Upon receipt, the BBB will review the
claim for eligibility under the Program Summary Guidelines.
357

2011 F-150 (f12)

Owners Guide, 3rd Printing
USA (fus)
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
 Customer Assistance
You can get more information by calling BBB AUTO LINE at
1-800-955-5100, or writing to:
BBB AUTO LINE
4200 Wilson Boulevard, Suite 800
Arlington, Virginia 22203–1833
BBB AUTO LINE applications can also be requested by calling the Ford
Motor Company Customer Relationship Center at 1-800-392-3673.
Note: Ford Motor Company reserves the right to change eligibility
limitations, modify procedures, or to discontinue this process at any time
without notice and without obligation.
UTILIZING THE MEDIATION/ARBITRATION PROGRAM
(CANADA ONLY)
For vehicles delivered to authorized Canadian dealers. In those cases
where you continue to feel that the efforts by Ford of Canada and the
authorized dealer to resolve a factory-related vehicle service concern
have been unsatisfactory, Ford of Canada participates in an impartial
third party mediation/arbitration program administered by the Canadian
Motor Vehicle Arbitration Plan (CAMVAP).
The CAMVAP program is a straight forward and relatively speedy
alternative to resolve a disagreement when all other efforts to produce a
settlement have failed. This procedure is without cost to you and is
designed to eliminate the need for lengthy and expensive legal
proceedings.
In the CAMVAP program, impartial third-party arbitrators conduct
hearings at mutually convenient times and places in an informal
environment. These impartial arbitrators review the positions of the
parties, make decisions and, when appropriate, render awards to resolve
disputes. CAMVAP decisions are fast, fair, and final as the arbitrator’s
award is binding on both you and Ford of Canada.
CAMVAP services are available in all Canadian territories and provinces.
For more information, without charge or obligation, call your CAMVAP
Provincial Administrator directly at 1-800-207-0685 or visit
www.camvap.ca.
GETTING ASSISTANCE OUTSIDE THE U.S. AND CANADA
Before exporting your vehicle to a foreign country, contact the
appropriate foreign embassy or consulate. These officials can inform you
of local vehicle registration regulations and where to find unleaded fuel.
If you cannot find unleaded fuel or can only get fuel with an anti-knock
index lower than is recommended for your vehicle, contact a regional
office or owner relations/customer relationship office.
358

2011 F-150 (f12)

Owners Guide, 3rd Printing
USA (fus)
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
 Customer Assistance
The use of leaded fuel in your vehicle without proper conversion may
damage the effectiveness of your emission control system and may cause
engine knocking or serious engine damage. Ford Motor Company/Ford of
Canada is not responsible for any damage caused by use of improper
fuel. Using leaded fuel may also result in difficulty importing your vehicle
back into the U.S.
If your vehicle must be serviced while you are traveling or living in
Asia-Pacific Region, Sub-Saharan Africa, U.S. Virgin Islands, Central
America, the Caribbean, and Israel, contact the nearest authorized
dealer. If the authorized dealer cannot help you, contact:
FORD MOTOR COMPANY
FORD EXPORT OPERATIONS & GLOBAL INITIATIVES
1555 Fairlane Drive
Fairlane Business Park #3
Allen Park, Michigan 48101
U.S.A.
Telephone: (313) 594-4857
For customers in Guam, the Commonwealth of the Northern Mariana
Islands (CNMI), America Samoa, and the U.S. Virgin Islands, please feel
free to call our Toll-Free Number: (800) 841-FORD (3673).
FAX: (313) 390-0804
Email: [email protected]
If your vehicle must be serviced while you are traveling or living in
Puerto Rico, contact the nearest authorized dealer. If the authorized
dealer cannot help you, contact:
Ford International Business Development Inc.
Customer Relationship Center
P.O. Box 11957
Caparra Heights Station
San Juan, Puerto Rico 00922-1957
Telephone: (800) 841-FORD (3673)
FAX: (313) 390-0804
Email: [email protected]
www.ford.com.pr

359

2011 F-150 (f12)

Owners Guide, 3rd Printing
USA (fus)
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
 Customer Assistance
If your vehicle must be serviced while you are traveling or living in the
Middle East, contact the nearest authorized dealer. If the authorized
dealer cannot help you, contact:
Ford Middle East
Customer Relationship Center
P.O. Box 21470
Dubai, United Arab Emirates
Telephone: +971 4 3326084
Toll-Free Number for the Kingdom of Saudi Arabia: 800 8971409
Local Telephone Number for Kuwait: 24810575
FAX: +971 4 3327299
Email: [email protected]
www.me.ford.com
If you buy your vehicle in North America and then relocate to any of the
above locations, register your vehicle identification number (VIN) and
new address with Ford Motor Company Export Operations & Global
Growth Initiatives by emailing [email protected].
If you are in another foreign country, contact the nearest authorized
dealer. If the authorized dealer employees cannot help you, they can
direct you to the nearest Ford affiliate office.
Customers in the U.S. should call 1-800-392-3673.
ORDERING ADDITIONAL OWNER’S LITERATURE
To order the publications in this portfolio, contact Helm, Incorporated at:
HELM, INCORPORATED
P.O. Box 07150
Detroit, Michigan 48207
Or to order a free publication catalog, call toll free: 1-800-782-4356
Monday-Friday 8:00 a.m. - 6:00 p.m. EST
Helm, Incorporated can also be reached by their website:
www.helminc.com.
(Items in this catalog may be purchased by credit card, check or
money order.)
Obtaining a French Owner’s Guide
French Owner’s Guides can be obtained from your authorized dealer or
by contacting Helm, Incorporated using the contact information listed
previously in this section.
360

2011 F-150 (f12)

Owners Guide, 3rd Printing
USA (fus)
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
 Customer Assistance
REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS (U.S. ONLY)
If you believe that your vehicle has
a defect which could cause a crash
or could cause injury or death, you
should immediately inform the
National Highway Traffic Safety
Administration (NHTSA) in addition to notifying Ford Motor Company.
If NHTSA receives similar complaints, it may open an investigation, and
if it finds that a safety defect exists in a group of vehicles, it may order a
recall and remedy campaign. However, NHTSA cannot become involved
in individual problems between you, your dealer, or Ford Motor
Company.
To contact NHTSA, you may call the Vehicle Safety Hotline toll-free at
1–888–327–4236 (TTY: 1–800–424–9153); go to http://www.safercar.gov;
or write to:
Administrator
1200 New Jersey Avenue, Southeast
Washington, D.C. 20590
You can also obtain other information about motor vehicle safety from
http://www.safercar.gov.
REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS (CANADA ONLY)
If you believe that your vehicle has a defect which could cause a crash or
could cause injury or death, you should immediately inform Transport
Canada, using their toll-free number: 1–800–333–0510, or online at:
https://wwwapps.tc.gc.ca/Saf-Sec-Sur/7/PCDB-BDPP/Index.aspx.

361

2011 F-150 (f12)

Owners Guide, 3rd Printing
USA (fus)
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
 Cleaning
WASHING THE EXTERIOR
Wash your vehicle regularly with cool or lukewarm water and a neutral
pH shampoo, such as Motorcraft威 Detail Wash (ZC-3-A), which is
available from your authorized dealer.
• Never use strong household detergents or soap, such as dish washing or
laundry liquid. These products can discolor and spot painted surfaces.
• Never wash a vehicle that is “hot to the touch” or during exposure to
strong, direct sunlight.
• Always use a clean sponge or car wash mitt with plenty of water for
best results.
• Dry the vehicle with a chamois or soft terry cloth towel in order to
eliminate water spotting.
• It is especially important to wash the vehicle regularly during the
winter months, as dirt and road salt are difficult to remove and cause
damage to the vehicle.
• Immediately remove items such as gasoline, diesel fuel, bird droppings
and insect deposits because they can cause damage to the vehicle’s
paintwork and trim over time. Use Motorcraft威 Bug and Tar Remover
(ZC-42), which is available from your authorized dealer.
• Remove any exterior accessories, such as antennas, before entering a
car wash.
• Suntan lotions and insect repellents can damage any painted
surface; if these substances come in contact with your vehicle,
wash off as soon as possible.
• If your vehicle is equipped with running boards, use Motorcraft
Detail Wash, ZC-3-A, and, as required, Motorcraft Bug and Tar
Remover, ZC-42, both as per the directions on the products’
labels. To manually dry, use a clean, dry, lint-free towel. Do not
use rubber, plastic and vinyl protectant products on the
running board surface, as the area may become slippery.
Exterior chrome
• Wash the vehicle first, using cool or lukewarm water and a neutral pH
shampoo, such as Motorcraft威 Detail Wash (ZC-3-A).
• Use Motorcraft威 Custom Bright Metal Cleaner (ZC-15), available from
your authorized dealer. Apply the product as you would a wax to
clean bumpers and other chrome parts; allow the cleaner to dry for a
few minutes, then wipe off the haze with a clean, dry rag.
• Never use abrasive materials such as steel wool or plastic pads
as they can scratch the chrome surface.
362

2011 F-150 (f12)

Owners Guide, 3rd Printing
USA (fus)
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
 Cleaning
WAXING
• Wash the vehicle first.
• Use a quality wax that does not contain abrasives.
• Do not allow paint sealant to come in contact with any non-body
(low-gloss black) colored trim, such as grained door handles, roof
racks, bumpers, side moldings, mirror housings or the windshield cowl
area. The paint sealant will “gray” or stain the parts over time.
PAINT CHIPS
Your authorized dealer has touch-up paint to match your vehicle’s color.
Take your color code (printed on a sticker in the driver’s door jamb) to
your authorized dealer to ensure you get the correct color.
• Remove particles such as bird droppings, tree sap, insect deposits, tar
spots, road salt and industrial fallout before repairing paint chips.
• Always read the instructions before using the products.
ALUMINUM WHEELS AND WHEEL COVERS
Aluminum wheels and wheel covers are coated with a clear coat paint
finish. In order to maintain their shine:
• Clean weekly with Motorcraft威 Wheel and Tire Cleaner, which is
available from your authorized dealer. Heavy dirt and brake dust
accumulation may require agitation with a sponge. Rinse thoroughly
with a strong stream of water.
• Never apply any cleaning chemical to hot or warm wheel rims or
covers.
• Some automatic car washes may cause damage to the finish on your
wheel rims or covers. Industrial-strength (heavy-duty) cleaners, or
cleaning chemicals, in combination with brush agitation to remove
brake dust and dirt, could wear away the clear coat finish over time.
• Do not use hydrofluoric acid-based or high caustic-based wheel
cleaners, steel wool, fuels or strong household detergent.
• To remove tar and grease, use Motorcraft威 Bug and Tar Remover ,
available from your authorized dealer.

363

2011 F-150 (f12)

Owners Guide, 3rd Printing
USA (fus)
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
 Cleaning
ENGINE
Engines are more efficient when they are clean because grease and dirt
buildup keep the engine warmer than normal. When washing:
• Take care when using a power washer to clean the engine. The
high-pressure fluid could penetrate the sealed parts and cause
damage.
• Do not spray a hot engine with cold water to avoid cracking the
engine block or other engine components.
• Spray Motorcraft Engine Shampoo and Degreaser (ZC-20) on all parts
that require cleaning and pressure rinse clean. In Canada use
Motorcraft Engine Shampoo (CXC-66-A).
• Cover the highlighted areas to prevent water damage when cleaning
the engine.
• Never wash or rinse the engine while it is hot or running; water in the
running engine may cause internal damage.
• Never wash or rinse any ignition coil, spark plug wire or spark plug
well, or the area in and around these locations.
3.7L engine

364

2011 F-150 (f12)

Owners Guide, 3rd Printing
USA (fus)
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
 Cleaning
5.0L engine

6.2L engine

365

2011 F-150 (f12)

Owners Guide, 3rd Printing
USA (fus)
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
 Cleaning
3.5L Ecoboost™ engine

PLASTIC (NON-PAINTED) EXTERIOR PARTS

Use only approved products to clean plastic parts. These products are
available from your authorized dealer.
• For routine cleaning, use Motorcraft威 Detail Wash (ZC-3-A).
• If tar or grease spots are present, use Motorcraft威 Bug and Tar
Remover (ZC-42).
WINDOWS AND WIPER BLADES
The windshield, rear and side windows and the wiper blades should be
cleaned regularly. If the wipers do not wipe properly, substances on the
vehicle’s glass or the wiper blades may be the cause. These may include
hot wax treatments used by commercial car washes, water repellent
coatings, tree sap, or other organic contamination; these contaminants
may cause squeaking or chatter noise from the blades, and streaking and
smearing of the windshield. To clean these items, follow these tips:
• The windshield, rear windows and side windows may be cleaned with
a non-abrasive cleaner such as Motorcraft威 Ultra-Clear Spray Glass
Cleaner (ZC-23), available from your authorized dealer.
366

2011 F-150 (f12)

Owners Guide, 3rd Printing
USA (fus)
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
 Cleaning
• The wiper blades can be cleaned with isopropyl (rubbing) alcohol or
Motorcraft威 Premium Windshield Washer Concentrate (ZC-32-A) in
the U.S., or Premium Quality Windshield Washer Fluid [CXC-37-(A, B,
D, or F)] in Canada, available from your authorized dealer. This
washer fluid contains special solution in addition to alcohol which
helps to remove the hot wax deposited on the wiper blade and
windshield from automated car wash facilities. Be sure to replace
wiper blades when they appear worn or do not function properly.
• Do not use abrasives, as they may cause scratches.
• Do not use fuel, kerosene, or paint thinner to clean any parts.
If you cannot remove those streaks after cleaning with the glass cleaner
or if the wipers chatter and move in a jerky motion, clean the outer
surface of the windshield and the wiper blades using a sponge or soft
cloth with a neutral detergent or mild-abrasive cleaning solution. After
cleaning, rinse the windshield and wiper blades with clean water. The
windshield is clean if beads do not form when you rinse the windshield
with water.
Do not use sharp objects, such as a razor blade, to clean the
inside of the rear window or to remove decals, as it may cause
damage to the rear window defroster’s heated grid lines (if
equipped).
INSTRUMENT PANEL AND CONSOLE (HARLEY-DAVIDSON
EDITION ONLY)
Your vehicle’s instrument panel and console are uniquely painted with
both high and low gloss paints that require special care. The high gloss
area is similar to that of the vehicle’s exterior; the low gloss area is
designed to help protect the driver from undesirable windshield
reflection.
High gloss paint area
In order to maintain the finish of the instrument panel and console, the
high gloss areas should be treated similar to the that of exterior paint or
glossy plastic surfaces. When cleaning the high gloss areas:
• Do not use paper towels or newspaper.
• Do not use silicone or Teflon威 (PTFE)-based products.
Dust the high gloss areas with a clean, dry cloth, or use Motorcraft
Dusting Cloth (ZC-24).
For general cleaning, use mild, soapy water and a soft, damp cloth, then
dry with a clean, dry cloth.
367

2011 F-150 (f12)

Owners Guide, 3rd Printing
USA (fus)
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
 Cleaning
For removal of fine scuffs and scratches, use Scotch-Brite威 Microfiber
Cloth or cheese cloth along with Motorcraft Premium Liquid Wax
(ZC-53-A), Motorcraft Paint Sealant (ZC-45), or Motorcraft Custom Clear
Coat Polish (ZC-8-A). Note: Removal of deep scuffs and scratches
should be performed by an authorized dealer or an experienced repair
facility.
Low gloss paint area
The low gloss area of the instrument panel’s upper dash should be
cleaned with mild, soapy water and a soft, damp cloth, then dried with a
clean, dry cloth. When cleaning the low gloss areas:
• Do not use paper towels or newspaper.
• Do not use silicone or Teflon威 (PTFE)-based products.
• Do not use exterior paint waxes or sealants.
Dust the low gloss areas with a clean, dry cloth, or use Motorcraft
Dusting Cloth (ZC-24).
INSTRUMENT PANEL/INTERIOR TRIM AND CLUSTER LENS
Clean the instrument panel, interior trim areas and cluster lens with a
clean, damp, white cotton cloth, then use a clean and dry white cotton
cloth to dry these areas.
• Avoid cleaners or polishes that increase the gloss of the upper portion
of the instrument panel. The dull finish in this area helps protect the
driver from undesirable windshield reflection.
• Be certain to wash or wipe your hands clean if you have been in
contact with certain products such as insect repellent and suntan
lotion in order to avoid possible damage to the interior painted
surfaces.
• Do not use household or glass cleaners as these may damage the
finish of the instrument panel, interior trim and cluster lens.
• Do not allow air fresheners and hand sanitizers to spill on interior
surfaces. If a spill occurs, wipe off immediately. Damage may not be
covered by your warranty.
WARNING: Do not use chemical solvents or strong detergents
when cleaning the steering wheel or instrument panel to avoid
contamination of the airbag system.

368

2011 F-150 (f12)

Owners Guide, 3rd Printing
USA (fus)
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
 Cleaning
If a staining liquid like coffee/juice has been spilled on the instrument
panel or on interior trim surfaces, clean as follows:
1. Wipe up spilled liquid using a clean, white, cotton cloth.
2. Wipe the surface with a damp, clean, white cotton cloth. For more
thorough cleaning, use a mild soap and water solution. If the spot cannot
be completely cleaned by this method, the area may be cleaned using a
commercially available cleaning product designed for automotive
interiors.
3. If necessary, apply more soap and water solution or cleaning product
to a clean, white, cotton cloth and press the cloth onto the soiled
area–allow this to set at room temperature for 30 minutes.
4. Remove the soaked cloth, and if it is not soiled badly, use this cloth to
clean the area by using a rubbing motion for 60 seconds.
5. Following this, wipe area dry with a clean, white, cotton cloth.
INTERIOR
For fabric, carpets, cloth seats and safety belts:
• Remove dust and loose dirt with a vacuum cleaner.
• Remove light stains and soil with Motorcraft威 Professional Strength
Carpet & Upholstery Cleaner (ZC-54).
• If grease or tar is present on the material, spot-clean the area first
with Motorcraft威 Spot and Stain Remover (ZC-14). In Canada, use
Motorcraft威 Multi-Purpose Cleaner (CXC-101).
• If a ring forms on the fabric after spot cleaning, clean the entire area
immediately (but do not oversaturate) or the ring will set.
• Do not use household cleaning products or glass cleaners, which can
stain and discolor the fabric and affect the flame retardant abilities of
the seat materials.
WARNING: Do not use cleaning solvents, bleach or dye on the
vehicle’s seatbelts, as these actions may weaken the belt
webbing.

369

2011 F-150 (f12)

Owners Guide, 3rd Printing
USA (fus)
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
 Cleaning
LEATHER SEATS
(IF EQUIPPED, EXCEPT FOR THE KING RANCH姞 EDITION)
For King Ranch威 leather seats, refer to a separate section in this
chapter.
• Clean spills and stains as quickly as possible.
• For routine cleaning, wipe the surface with a soft, damp cloth. For
more thorough cleaning, wipe the surface with a mild soap and water
solution. In Canada, use Motorcraft威 Vinyl Cleaner (CXC-93). Dry the
area with a soft cloth.
• If the leather cannot be completely cleaned using a mild soap and
water solution, the leather may be cleaned using a commercially
available leather cleaning product designed for automotive interiors.
• To check for compatibility, first test any cleaner or stain remover on
an inconspicuous part of the leather.
• Do not use household cleaning products, alcohol solutions, solvents or
cleaners intended for rubber, vinyl and plastics, or oil/petroleum-based
leather conditioners. These products may cause premature wearing or
damage to the leather.
Leather seats for the King Ranch姞 edition only (if equipped)
Your vehicle is equipped with seating covered in premium, top-grain
leather which is extremely durable, but still requires special care and
maintenance in order to ensure longevity and comfort.
Regular cleaning and conditioning will maintain the appearance of the
leather.
Cleaning
For dirt, use a vacuum cleaner then use a clean, damp cloth or soft
brush.
For routine cleaning, wipe the surface with a soft, damp cloth. For more
thorough cleaning, wipe the surface with a mild soap and water solution.
• Clean spills as quickly as possible.
• Test any cleaner or stain remover on an inconspicuous part of the
leather as cleaners may darken the leather.
• Do not spill coffee, ketchup, mustard, orange juice or oil-based
products on the leather as they may permanently stain the leather.
• Do not use household cleaning products, alcohol solutions, solvents or
cleaners intended for rubber, vinyl or plastics.
370

2011 F-150 (f12)

Owners Guide, 3rd Printing
USA (fus)
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
 Cleaning
Scratches
Natural Markings - Because the leather in the seat comes from genuine
steer hides, there will be evidence of naturally occurring markings, such
as small scars. These markings give character to the seating covers and
should be considered as proof of a genuine leather product.
In order to lessen the appearance of certain scratches and other wear
marks, apply conditioner on the affected area following the same
instructions as in the Conditioning section.
Conditioning
Bottles of King Ranch威 Leather Conditioner are available at the King
Ranch威 Saddle Shop. Visit the website at www.krsaddleshop.com, or
telephone (in the United States) 1–800–282–KING (5464). If you are
unable to obtain King Ranch威 Leather Conditioner, use another premium
leather conditioner.
• Clean the surfaces using the steps outlined in the Cleaning section.
• Ensure the leather is dry then apply a nickel-sized amount of
conditioner to a clean, dry cloth.
• Rub the conditioner into leather until it disappears. Allow the
conditioner to dry and repeat the process for the entire interior. If a
film appears, wipe off film with a dry, clean cloth.
UNDERBODY
Flush the complete underside of your vehicle frequently. Keep body and
door drain holes free from packed dirt.
Rear suspension components may require regular cleaning with a power
washer or a thorough rinse with a strong stream of water if the vehicle is
operated in dusty or muddy environments. Rear leaf springs or other
suspension components may emit squeak or popping noises while
operating the vehicle if particles such as dirt, rocks, or other debris are
present in the components.

371

2011 F-150 (f12)

Owners Guide, 3rd Printing
USA (fus)
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
 Cleaning
FORD AND LINCOLN CAR CARE PRODUCTS
Your Ford or Lincoln authorized dealer has many quality products
available to clean your vehicle and protect its finishes. These quality
products have been specifically engineered to fulfill your automotive
needs; they are custom designed to complement the style and
appearance of your vehicle. Each product is made from high quality
materials that meet or exceed rigid specifications. For best results, use
the following products or products of equivalent quality:
Motorcraft威 Bug and Tar Remover (ZC-42)
Motorcraft威 Custom Bright Metal Cleaner (ZC-15)
Motorcraft威 Detail Wash (ZC-3-A)
Motorcraft威 Dusting Cloth (ZC-24)
Motorcraft威 Engine Shampoo and Degreaser (U.S. only) (ZC-20)
Motorcraft威 Engine Shampoo (Canada only) (CXC-66-A)
Motorcraft威 Multi-Purpose Cleaner (Canada only) (CXC-101)
Motorcraft威 Premium Glass Cleaner (Canada only) (CXC-100)
Motorcraft威 Premium Quality Windshield Washer Fluid (Canada only)
[CXC-37-(A, B, D or F)]
Motorcraft威 Premium Windshield Washer Concentrate (U.S. only)
(ZC-32-A)
Motorcraft威 Professional Strength Carpet & Upholstery Cleaner (ZC-54)
Motorcraft威 Spot and Stain Remover (U.S. only) (ZC-14)
Motorcraft威 Ultra-Clear Spray Glass Cleaner (ZC-23)
Motorcraft威 Vinyl Cleaner (Canada only) (CXC-93)
Motorcraft威 Wheel and Tire Cleaner (ZC-37-A)

372

2011 F-150 (f12)

Owners Guide, 3rd Printing
USA (fus)
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
 Maintenance and Specifications
SERVICE RECOMMENDATIONS
To help you service your vehicle, we provide scheduled maintenance
information which makes tracking routine service easy.
If your vehicle requires professional service, your authorized dealer can
provide the necessary parts and service. Check your Warranty Guide to
find out which parts and services are covered.
Use only recommended fuels, lubricants, fluids and service parts
conforming to specifications. Motorcraft威 parts are designed and built to
provide the best performance in your vehicle.
PRECAUTIONS WHEN SERVICING YOUR VEHICLE
• Do not work on a hot engine.
• Make sure that nothing gets caught in moving parts.
• Do not work on a vehicle with the engine running in an enclosed
space, unless you are sure you have enough ventilation.
• Keep all open flames and other lit material away from the battery and
all fuel related parts.
WARNING: Turn off the power running boards, if equipped,
before working under the vehicle, jacking or placing any object
under the vehicle. Never place your hand between the extended
running board and the vehicle. A moving running board may cause
injury.

Working with the engine off

1. Set the parking brake and ensure the gearshift is securely latched in P
(Park).
2. Turn off the engine and remove the key.
3. Block the wheels to prevent the vehicle from moving unexpectedly.
Working with the engine on
WARNING: To reduce the risk of vehicle damage and/or
personal burn injuries, do not start your engine with the air
cleaner removed and do not remove it while the engine is running.

1. Set the parking brake and shift to P (Park).

2. Block the wheels.
373

2011 F-150 (f12)

Owners Guide, 3rd Printing
USA (fus)
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
 Maintenance and Specifications
OPENING THE HOOD
1. Inside the vehicle, pull the hood
release handle located under the
bottom of the instrument panel.

2. Go to the front of the vehicle and release the auxiliary latch that is
located on the front bumper under the grill.
3. Lift the hood until the lift cylinders hold it open.

374

2011 F-150 (f12)

Owners Guide, 3rd Printing
USA (fus)
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
 Maintenance and Specifications
IDENTIFYING COMPONENTS IN THE ENGINE COMPARTMENT

3.7L V6 engine

1 2 3 4 5

8 7 6

1. Windshield washer fluid reservoir

2. Battery
3. Engine oil dipstick (out of view)
4. Brake fluid reservoir
5. Engine coolant reservoir
6. Air filter assembly
7. Engine oil filler cap (out of view)
8. Power distribution box

375

2011 F-150 (f12)

Owners Guide, 3rd Printing
USA (fus)
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
 Maintenance and Specifications
5.0L V8 engine

1 2 3 4 5 6

8 7

1. Windshield washer fluid reservoir

2. Battery
3. Engine oil filler cap
4. Engine oil dipstick
5. Brake fluid reservoir
6. Engine coolant reservoir
7. Air filter assembly
8. Power distribution box

376

2011 F-150 (f12)

Owners Guide, 3rd Printing
USA (fus)
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
 Maintenance and Specifications
6.2L V8 engine

1 2 3 4

9 8 7 6 5

1. Windshield washer fluid reservoir

2. Engine oil dipstick
3. Brake fluid reservoir
4. Engine coolant reservoir
5. Air filter assembly
6. Power steering fluid reservoir
7. Power distribution box
8. Engine oil filler cap
9. Battery

377

2011 F-150 (f12)

Owners Guide, 3rd Printing
USA (fus)
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
 Maintenance and Specifications
3.5L V6 EcoBoost™ engine

1 2 3 4 5 6

8 7

1. Windshield washer fluid reservoir

2. Battery
3. Engine oil filler cap
4. Engine oil dipstick
5. Brake fluid reservoir
6. Engine coolant reservoir
7. Air filter assembly
8. Power distribution box

378

2011 F-150 (f12)

Owners Guide, 3rd Printing
USA (fus)
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
 Maintenance and Specifications
WINDSHIELD WASHER FLUID
Add fluid to fill the reservoir if the
level is low. In very cold weather, do
not fill the reservoir completely.
Only use a washer fluid that meets
Ford specifications. Do not use any
special washer fluid such as
windshield water repellent type fluid
or bug wash. They may cause
squeaking, chatter noise, streaking
and smearing. Refer to
Maintenance product
specifications and capacities in this chapter.
State or local regulations on volatile organic compounds may restrict the
use of methanol, a common windshield washer antifreeze additive.
Washer fluids containing non-methanol antifreeze agents should be used
only if they provide cold weather protection without damaging the
vehicle’s paint finish, wiper blades or washer system.
WARNING: If you operate your vehicle in temperatures below
40°F (5°C), use washer fluid with antifreeze protection. Failure
to use washer fluid with antifreeze protection in cold weather could
result in impaired windshield vision and increase the risk of injury or
accident.

CHANGING THE WIPER BLADES

1. Pull the wiper arm away from the
vehicle. Turn the blade at an angle
from the wiper arm. Press the lock
tab to release the blade and pull the
wiper blade down toward the
windshield to remove it from the
arm.
2. Attach the new wiper to the
wiper arm and press it into place
until a click is heard.
Replace wiper blades at least once per year for optimum performance.
Poor wiper quality can be improved by cleaning the wiper blades and the
windshield. Refer to Windows and wiper blades in the Cleaning
chapter.
379

2011 F-150 (f12)

Owners Guide, 3rd Printing
USA (fus)
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
 Maintenance and Specifications
To prolong the life of the wiper blades, it is highly recommended to
scrape off the ice on the windshield before turning on the wipers. The
layer of ice has many sharp edges and can damage the micro edge of the
wiper rubber element.
ENGINE OIL
Checking the engine oil
Refer to the scheduled maintenance information for the appropriate
intervals for checking the engine oil.
1. Make sure the vehicle is on level ground.
2. Turn the engine off and wait 15 minutes for the oil to drain into the
oil pan.
3. Set the parking brake and ensure the gearshift is securely latched in P
(Park).
4. Open the hood. Protect yourself from engine heat.
5. Locate and carefully remove the
engine oil level dipstick. See
Identifying components in the
engine compartment in this
chapter for location of dipstick.

6. Wipe the dipstick clean. Insert the dipstick fully, then remove it again.
• If the oil level is between the lower and upper holes or between
the MIN and MAX marks (depending on application), the oil
level is acceptable. DO NOT ADD OIL.
• If the oil level is below the lower hole or the MIN mark, add enough
oil to raise the level within the lower and upper holes or within the
MIN-MAX range.
• Oil levels above the upper hole or the MAX mark may cause engine
damage. Some oil must be removed from the engine by an authorized
dealer.
7. Put the dipstick back in and ensure it is fully seated.
Adding engine oil
1. Check the engine oil. For instructions, refer to Checking the engine
oil in this chapter.
380

2011 F-150 (f12)

Owners Guide, 3rd Printing
USA (fus)
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
 Maintenance and Specifications
2. If the engine oil level is not within the normal range, add only certified
engine oil of the recommended viscosity. Remove the engine oil filler cap
and use a funnel to pour the engine oil into the opening.
3. Recheck the engine oil level. Make sure the oil level is not above the
normal operating range on the engine oil level dipstick.
4. Install the dipstick and ensure it is fully seated.
5. Fully install the engine oil filler cap by turning the filler cap clockwise
1/4 of a turn until three clicks are heard or until the cap is fully seated.
To avoid possible oil loss, DO NOT operate the vehicle with the
engine oil level dipstick and/or the engine oil filler cap removed.
Engine oil and filter recommendations
3.7L V6, 5.0L V8, and 6.2L V8 engines
Look for this certification
trademark.

Use SAE 5W-20 engine oil

Only use oils certified for gasoline engines by the American Petroleum
Institute (API). An oil with this trademark symbol conforms to the
current engine and emission system protection standards and fuel
economy requirements of the International Lubricant Standardization and
Approval Committee (ILSAC), comprised of U.S. and Japanese
automobile manufacturers.
To protect your engine and engine’s warranty, use Motorcraft威 SAE
5W-20 or an equivalent SAE 5W-20 oil meeting Ford specification
WSS-M2C930-A. SAE 5W-20 oil provides optimum fuel economy and
durability performance meeting all requirements for your
vehicle’s engine. Refer to Maintenance product specifications and
capacities later in this section for more information.
Do not use supplemental engine oil additives, cleaners or other engine
treatments. They are unnecessary and could lead to engine damage that
is not covered by Ford warranty.
381

2011 F-150 (f12)

Owners Guide, 3rd Printing
USA (fus)
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
 Maintenance and Specifications
Change your engine oil according to the appropriate schedule listed in
the scheduled maintenance information.
Ford production and Motorcraft威 replacement oil filters are designed for
added engine protection and long life. If a replacement oil filter is used
that does not meet Ford material and design specifications, start-up
engine noises or knock may be experienced.
It is recommended you use the appropriate Motorcraft威 oil filter or
another with equivalent performance for your engine application.
3.5L V6 EcoBoost™ engine
Look for this certification
trademark.

Use SAE 5W-30 engine oil

Only use oils “Certified For Gasoline Engines” by the American
Petroleum Institute (API). An oil with this trademark symbol conforms
to the current engine and emission system protection standards and fuel
economy requirements of the International Lubricant Standardization and
Approval Committee (ILSAC), comprised of U.S. and Japanese
automobile manufacturers.
To protect your engine and engine’s warranty, use Motorcraft威 SAE
5W-30 or an equivalent SAE 5W-30 oil meeting Ford specification
WSS-M2C929-A. Refer to Maintenance product specifications and
capacities later in this section for more information.
Do not use supplemental engine oil additives, cleaners or other engine
treatments. They are unnecessary and could lead to engine damage that
is not covered by Ford warranty.
Change your engine oil according to the appropriate schedule listed in
the scheduled maintenance information.
Ford production and Motorcraft威 replacement oil filters are designed for
added engine protection and long life. If a replacement oil filter is used
that does not meet Ford material and design specifications, start-up
engine noises or knock may be experienced.
382

2011 F-150 (f12)

Owners Guide, 3rd Printing
USA (fus)
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
 Maintenance and Specifications
It is recommended you use the appropriate Motorcraft威 oil filter or
another with equivalent performance for your engine application.
BATTERY
Your vehicle is equipped with a
Motorcraft威 maintenance-free
battery which normally does not
require additional water during its
life of service.

If your battery has a cover/shield, make sure it is reinstalled

after the battery has been cleaned or replaced.
For longer, trouble-free operation, keep the top of the battery clean and
dry. Also, make certain the battery cables are always tightly fastened to
the battery terminals.
If you see any corrosion on the battery or terminals, remove the cables
from the terminals and clean with a wire brush. You can neutralize the
acid with a solution of baking soda and water.
It is recommended that the negative battery cable terminal be
disconnected from the battery if you plan to store your vehicle for an
extended period of time. This will minimize the discharge of your battery
during storage.
Note: Electrical or electronic accessories or components added to the
vehicle by the dealer or the owner may adversely affect battery
performance and durability.
WARNING: Batteries normally produce explosive gases which
can cause personal injury. Therefore, do not allow flames, sparks
or lighted substances to come near the battery. When working near the
battery, always shield your face and protect your eyes. Always provide
proper ventilation.

WARNING: When lifting a plastic-cased battery, excessive

pressure on the end walls could cause acid to flow through the
vent caps, resulting in personal injury and/or damage to the vehicle or
battery. Lift the battery with a battery carrier or with your hands on
opposite corners.

383

2011 F-150 (f12)

Owners Guide, 3rd Printing
USA (fus)
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
 Maintenance and Specifications

WARNING: Keep batteries out of reach of children. Batteries

contain sulfuric acid. Avoid contact with skin, eyes or clothing.
Shield your eyes when working near the battery to protect against
possible splashing of acid solution. In case of acid contact with skin or
eyes, flush immediately with water for a minimum of 15 minutes and
get prompt medical attention. If acid is swallowed, call a physician
immediately.

WARNING: Battery posts, terminals and related accessories

contain lead and lead compounds. Wash hands after handling.

Because your vehicle’s engine is electronically controlled by a computer,

some control conditions are maintained by power from the battery. When
the battery is disconnected or a new battery is installed, the engine must
relearn its idle and fuel trim strategy for optimum driveability and
performance. Flexible fuel vehicles (FFV) must also relearn the ethanol
content of the fuel for optimum driveability and performance. To begin
this process:
1. With the vehicle at a complete stop, set the parking brake.
2. Put the gearshift in P (Park), turn off all accessories and start the
engine.
3. Run the engine until it reaches normal operating temperature.
4. Allow the engine to idle for at least one minute.
5. Turn the A/C on and allow the engine to idle for at least one minute.
6. Release the parking brake. With your foot on the brake pedal and with
the A/C on, put the vehicle in D (Drive) and allow the engine to idle for
at least one minute.
7. Drive the vehicle to complete the relearning process.
• The vehicle may need to be driven 10 miles (16 km) or more to
relearn the idle and fuel trim strategy along with the ethanol content
for flexible fuel vehicles.
• If you do not allow the engine to relearn its idle trim, the idle
quality of your vehicle may be adversely affected until the idle
trim is eventually relearned.
• For flexible fuel vehicles, if you are operating on E85, you may
experience poor starts or an inability to start the engine and
driveability problems until the fuel trim and ethanol content have been
relearned.
384

2011 F-150 (f12)

Owners Guide, 3rd Printing
USA (fus)
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
 Maintenance and Specifications
If the battery has been disconnected or a new battery has been installed,
the clock and radio settings must be reset once the battery is
reconnected.
• Always dispose of automotive

RE
D
batteries in a responsible manner.

TU
A
Follow your local authorized

LE

R
standards for disposal. Call your

N
local authorized recycling center
to find out more about recycling
automotive batteries.

RECYCLE

Battery management system (if equipped)

The battery management system (BMS) monitors battery conditions and
takes actions to extend battery life. If excessive battery drain is
detected, the system may temporarily disable certain electrical features
to protect the battery. Those electrical accessories affected include the
rear defrost, heated/cooled seats, climate control fan, heated steering
wheel, audio and navigation system. A message may be displayed on the
instrument cluster or center stack display to alert the driver that battery
protection actions are active. See the Message center in the Instrument
Cluster chapter and Entertainment Systems chapter for more
information. These messages are only for notification that an action is
taking place, and not intended to indicate an electrical problem or that
the battery requires replacement.
Electrical accessory installation
To ensure proper operation of the BMS, any electrical devices that are
added to the vehicle should not have their ground connection made
directly at the negative battery post. A connection at the negative
battery post can cause inaccurate measurements of the battery condition
and potential incorrect system operation.
Note: Electrical or electronic accessories added to the vehicle by the
dealer or the owner may adversely affect battery performance and
durability, and may also affect the performance of other electrical
systems in the vehicle.
When a battery replacement is required, the battery should only be
replaced with a Ford recommended replacement battery which matches
the electrical requirements of the vehicle. After battery replacement, or
385

2011 F-150 (f12)

Owners Guide, 3rd Printing
USA (fus)
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
 Maintenance and Specifications
in some cases after charging the battery with the external charger, the
BMS requires eight hours of vehicle sleep time (key off with doors
closed) to relearn the new battery state of charge. Prior to relearning the
state of charge, the BMS may disable electrical features (to protect the
battery) earlier than normal.
ENGINE COOLANT
Checking engine coolant
The concentration and level of engine coolant should be checked at the
intervals listed in scheduled maintenance information. The coolant
concentration should be maintained at 50/50 coolant and distilled water.
For best results, coolant concentration should be tested with a
refractometer such as Rotunda tool 300-ROB75240E available from your
dealer. Ford does not recommend the use of hydrometers or coolant test
strips for measuring coolant concentration. The level of coolant should
be maintained at the FULL COLD level or within the COLD FILL RANGE
in the coolant reservoir. If the level falls below, add coolant per the
instructions in the Adding engine coolant section.
Your vehicle was factory-filled with a 50/50 engine coolant and water
concentration. If the concentration of coolant falls below 40% or above
60%, the engine parts could become damaged or not work properly. A
50/50 mixture of coolant and water provides the following:
• Improved freeze protection.
• Improved boiling protection.
• Protection against rust and other forms of corrosion.
• Proper function of calibrated gauges.
When the engine is cold, check the
level of the engine coolant in the
reservoir.

• The engine coolant should be at the FULL COLD level, or within the
COLD FILL or MIN / MAX range as listed on the engine coolant
reservoir (depending upon application).
386

2011 F-150 (f12)

Owners Guide, 3rd Printing
USA (fus)
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
 Maintenance and Specifications
• Refer to scheduled maintenance information for service interval
schedules.
If the engine coolant has not been checked at the recommended interval,
the engine coolant reservoir may become low or empty. If the reservoir is
low or empty, add engine coolant to the reservoir. Refer to Adding
engine coolant in this chapter.
Note: Automotive fluids are not interchangeable; do not use engine
coolant/antifreeze or windshield washer fluid outside of its specified
function and vehicle location.
Adding engine coolant
When adding coolant, make sure it is a 50/50 mixture of engine coolant
and distilled water. Add the mixture to the coolant reservoir, when the
engine is cool, until the appropriate fill level is obtained. If coolant is
filled to the COLD FILL RANGE or FULL COLD level when the engine is
not cool, the system will remain underfilled.
WARNING: Do not add engine coolant when the engine is hot.
Steam and scalding liquids released from a hot cooling system
can burn you badly. Also, you can be burned if you spill coolant on hot
engine parts.

WARNING: Do not put engine coolant in the windshield washer

fluid container. If sprayed on the windshield, engine coolant
could make it difficult to see through the windshield.

• DO NOT MIX different colors or types of coolant in your vehicle.

Make sure the correct coolant is used. Mixing of engine coolants may
harm your engine’s cooling system. The use of an improper coolant
may harm engine and cooling system components and may void the
warranty. Refer to Maintenance product specifications and
capacities in this chapter.
• A large amount of water without engine coolant may be added, in case
of emergency, to reach a vehicle service location. In this instance, the
cooling system must be drained and refilled with a 50/50 mixture of
engine coolant and distilled water as soon as possible. Water alone
(without engine coolant) can cause engine damage from corrosion,
overheating or freezing.
• Do not use alcohol, methanol, brine or any engine coolants
mixed with alcohol or methanol antifreeze (coolant). Alcohol
and other liquids can cause engine damage from overheating or
freezing.
387

2011 F-150 (f12)

Owners Guide, 3rd Printing
USA (fus)
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
 Maintenance and Specifications
• Do not add extra inhibitors or additives to the coolant. These
can be harmful and compromise the corrosion protection of the engine
coolant.
For vehicles with overflow coolant systems with a non-pressurized cap
on the coolant recovery system, add coolant to the coolant recovery
reservoir when the engine is cool. Add the proper mixture of coolant and
distilled water to the FULL COLD level. For all other vehicles which have
a coolant degas system with a pressurized cap, or if it is necessary to
remove the coolant pressure relief cap on the radiator of a vehicle with
an overflow system, follow these steps to add engine coolant.
WARNING: To reduce the risk of personal injury, make sure the
engine is cool before unscrewing the coolant pressure relief cap.
The cooling system is under pressure; steam and hot liquid can come
out forcefully when the cap is loosened slightly.

Add the proper mixture of coolant and water to the cooling system by
following these steps:
1. Before you begin, turn the engine off and let it cool.
2. When the engine is cool, wrap a thick cloth around the coolant
pressure relief cap on the coolant reservoir (a translucent plastic bottle).
Slowly turn cap counterclockwise (left) until pressure begins to release.
3. Step back while the pressure releases.
4. When you are sure that all the pressure has been released, use the
cloth to turn it counterclockwise and remove the cap.
5. Fill the coolant reservoir slowly with the proper coolant mixture, to
within the COLD FILL RANGE or the FULL COLD level on the reservoir.
If you removed the radiator cap in an overflow system, fill the radiator
until the coolant is visible and radiator is almost full.
6. Replace the cap. Turn until tightly installed. Cap must be tightly
installed to prevent coolant loss.
After any coolant has been added, check the coolant concentration (refer
to Checking engine coolant). If the concentration is not 50/50, drain
some coolant and adjust the concentration. It may take several drains
and additions to obtain a 50/50 coolant concentration.
Whenever coolant has been added, the coolant level in the coolant
reservoir should be checked the next few times you drive the vehicle. If
necessary, add enough 50/50 concentration of engine coolant and
distilled water to bring the liquid level to the proper level.
388

2011 F-150 (f12)

Owners Guide, 3rd Printing
USA (fus)
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
 Maintenance and Specifications
If you have to add more than 1.0 quart (1.0 liter) of engine coolant per
month, have your authorized dealer check the engine cooling system.
Your cooling system may have a leak. Operating an engine with a low
level of coolant can result in engine overheating and possible engine
damage.
Recycled engine coolant
Ford Motor Company does NOT recommend the use of recycled engine
coolant since a Ford-approved recycling process is not yet available.

Used engine coolant should be disposed of in an appropriate

manner. Follow your community’s regulations and standards for recycling
and disposing of automotive fluids.
Coolant refill capacity
To find out how much fluid your vehicle’s cooling system can hold, refer
to Maintenance product specifications and capacities in this chapter.
Fill your engine coolant reservoir as outlined previously in the Adding
engine coolant section.
Severe climates
If you drive in extremely cold climates:
• It may be necessary to increase the coolant concentration
above 50%.
• NEVER increase the coolant concentration above 60%.
• A coolant concentration of 60% will provide improved freeze
point protection. Increased engine coolant concentrations
above 60% will decrease the overheat protection
characteristics of the engine coolant and may cause engine
damage.
• If available, refer to the chart on the coolant container to
ensure the coolant concentration in your vehicle will provide
adequate freeze protection at the temperatures in which you
drive in the winter months.
If you drive in extremely hot climates:
• It is still necessary to maintain the coolant concentration
above 40%.
• NEVER decrease the coolant concentration below 40%.
• Decreased engine coolant concentrations below 40% will
decrease the corrosion/freeze protection characteristics of the
engine coolant and may cause engine damage.
389

2011 F-150 (f12)

Owners Guide, 3rd Printing
USA (fus)
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
 Maintenance and Specifications
• If available, refer to the chart on the coolant container to
ensure the coolant concentration in your vehicle will provide
adequate protection at the temperatures in which you drive.
Vehicles driven year-round in non-extreme climates should use a 50/50
mixture of engine coolant and distilled water for optimum cooling system
and engine protection.
What you should know about fail-safe cooling (if equipped)
If the engine coolant supply is depleted, this feature allows the vehicle to
be driven temporarily before incremental component damage is incurred.
The “fail-safe” distance depends on ambient temperatures, vehicle load
and terrain.
How fail-safe cooling works
If the engine begins to overheat:
• The engine coolant temperature gauge will move to the red (hot)
area.
• The mini message center (if equipped) will indicate “Check Gauges”,
refer to Warning lights and chimes in the Instrument Cluster
chapter.
• The light will illuminate.
If the engine reaches a preset over-temperature condition, the engine
will automatically switch to alternating cylinder operation. Each disabled
cylinder acts as an air pump and cools the engine.
When this occurs the vehicle will still operate. However:
• The engine power will be limited.
• The air conditioning system will be disabled.
Continued operation will increase the engine temperature:
• The engine will completely shut down.
• Steering and braking effort will increase.
Once the engine temperature cools, the engine can be re-started. Take
your vehicle to an authorized dealer as soon as possible to minimize
engine damage.

390

2011 F-150 (f12)

Owners Guide, 3rd Printing
USA (fus)
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
 Maintenance and Specifications
When fail-safe mode is activated
You have limited engine power when in the fail-safe mode, so drive the
vehicle with caution. The vehicle will not be able to maintain high speed
operation and the engine will run rough. Remember that the engine is
capable of completely shutting down automatically to prevent engine
damage, therefore:
1. Pull off the road as soon as safely possible and turn off the engine.
2. Arrange for the vehicle to be taken to an authorized dealer.
3. If this is not possible, wait a short period for the engine to cool.
4. Check the coolant level and replenish if low.
WARNING: Fail-safe mode is for use during emergencies only.
Operate the vehicle in fail-safe mode only as long as necessary to
bring the vehicle to rest in a safe location and seek immediate repairs.
When in fail-safe mode, the vehicle will have limited power, will not be
able to maintain high-speed operation, and may completely shut down
without warning, potentially losing engine power, power steering assist,
and power brake assist, which may increase the possibility of a crash
resulting in serious injury.

WARNING: Never remove the coolant reservoir cap while the

engine is running or hot.

5. Restart the engine and take your vehicle to an authorized dealer.

Driving the vehicle without repairing the engine problem
increases the chance of engine damage. Take your vehicle to an
authorized dealer as soon as possible.
Engine fluid temperature management (if equipped)
Your vehicle has been designed to pull a trailer, but because of the added
load, the vehicle’s engine may temporarily reach higher temperatures
during severe operating conditions such as ascending a long or steep
grade while pulling a trailer in hot ambient temperatures.
At this time, you may notice your engine coolant temperature gauge
needle move toward the H and the POWER REDUCED TO LOWER
TEMP message may appear on the message center.

391

2011 F-150 (f12)

Owners Guide, 3rd Printing
USA (fus)
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
 Maintenance and Specifications
You may notice a reduction in the vehicle’s speed caused by reduced
engine power. Your vehicle has been designed to enter this mode if
certain high temperature/high load conditions take place in order to
manage the engine’s fluid temperatures. The amount of speed reduction
will depend on the vehicle loading, towing, grade, ambient temperature,
and other factors. If this occurs, there is no need to pull off the road.
The vehicle can continue to be driven while this message is active.
WARNING: To reduce the risk of collision and injury, be
prepared that the vehicle speed may reduce and the vehicle may
not be able to accelerate with full power until the fluid temperatures
reduce.

The air conditioning may also cycle on and off during severe operating
conditions to protect overheating of the engine. When the engine coolant
temperature decreases to a more normal operating temperature, the air
conditioning will turn on once again.
If you notice any of the following:
• the engine coolant temperature gauge moves fully into the red (hot)
area
• the coolant temperature warning light illuminates
• the service engine soon indicator illuminates
1. Pull off the road as soon as safely possible and place the vehicle in P
(Park).
2. Leave the engine running until the coolant temperature gauge needle
moves away from the H range. After several minutes, if this does not
happen, follow the remaining steps.
3. Turn the engine off and wait for it to cool before checking the coolant
level.
WARNING: Never remove the coolant reservoir cap while the
engine is running or hot.

4. If the coolant level is normal, you may restart your engine and
continue on.
5. If the coolant is low, add coolant, restart the engine and take your
vehicle to an authorized dealer. See Adding engine coolant in this
chapter for more information.
Refer to fail-safe cooling for additional information.
392

2011 F-150 (f12)

Owners Guide, 3rd Printing
USA (fus)
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
 Maintenance and Specifications
FUEL FILTER
Your vehicle is equipped with a lifetime fuel filter that is integrated with
the fuel tank. Regular maintenance or replacement is not needed.

WHAT YOU SHOULD KNOW ABOUT AUTOMOTIVE FUELS

Important safety precautions

WARNING: Do not overfill the fuel tank. The pressure in an
overfilled tank may cause leakage and lead to fuel spray and fire.

WARNING: The fuel system may be under pressure. If you hear

a hissing sound near the fuel filler door (Easy Fuel威 “no cap”
fuel system), do not refuel until the sound stops. Otherwise, fuel may
spray out, which could cause serious personal injury.

WARNING: Automotive fuels can cause serious injury or death

if misused or mishandled.

WARNING: Fuel ethanol and gasoline may contain benzene,

which is a cancer-causing agent.

Observe the following guidelines when handling automotive fuel:

• Extinguish all smoking materials
and any open flames before
fueling your vehicle.
• Always turn off the vehicle before
fueling.
• Automotive fuels can be harmful
or fatal if swallowed. Fuels such as gasoline and ethanol are highly
toxic and if swallowed can cause death or permanent injury. If fuel is
swallowed, call a physician immediately, even if no symptoms are
immediately apparent. The toxic effects of fuel may not be visible for
hours.
• Avoid inhaling fuel vapors. Inhaling too much fuel vapor of any kind
can lead to eye and respiratory tract irritation. In severe cases,
excessive or prolonged breathing of fuel vapor can cause serious
illness and permanent injury.
393

2011 F-150 (f12)

Owners Guide, 3rd Printing
USA (fus)
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
 Maintenance and Specifications
• Avoid getting fuel liquid in your eyes. If fuel is splashed in the eyes,
remove contact lenses (if worn), flush with water for 15 minutes and
seek medical attention. Failure to seek proper medical attention could
lead to permanent injury.
• Fuels can also be harmful if absorbed through the skin. If fuel is
splashed on the skin and/or clothing, promptly remove contaminated
clothing and wash skin thoroughly with soap and water. Repeated or
prolonged skin contact with fuel liquid or vapor causes skin irritation.
• Be particularly careful if you are taking “Antabuse” or other forms of
disulfiram for the treatment of alcoholism. Breathing gasoline and/or
ethanol vapors, or skin contact could cause an adverse reaction. In
sensitive individuals, serious personal injury or sickness may result. If
fuel is splashed on the skin, promptly wash skin thoroughly with soap
and water. Consult a physician immediately if you experience an
adverse reaction.
• FFV fuel tanks may contain zero to 85% ethanol. Any fuel blends
containing gasoline and ethanol should be treated the same as “Fuel
Ethanol.” Flex fuel vehicles have a yellow bezel placed over the fuel
fill inlet.
Pure ethanol is the alcohol which is the intoxicating agent in liquor, beer
and wine. It is distilled from the fermentation of plants such as field corn
and sugar cane. When ethanol is produced for use in motor fuels, a small
amount of gasoline is added to make it unfit for beverage use. The
resulting ethanol blend is called denatured fuel ethanol meaning that it is
denatured with 2% to 5% gasoline and is suitable for automotive use.
During the summer season, fuel ethanol may contain a maximum of 85%
denatured ethanol (Ed85) and 15% unleaded gasoline. The fuel ethanol
has a higher octane rating than unleaded regular or premium gasoline
and this allows the design of engines with greater efficiency and power.
Winter blends may contain up to 75% denatured ethanol (Ed75) and up
to 25% unleaded gasoline to enhance cold engine starts. Severely cold
weather may require additional measures for reliable starting.
Ethanol is more chemically active than gasoline. It corrodes some metals
and causes some plastic and rubber components to swell, break down or
become brittle and crack, especially when mixed with gasoline. Special
materials and procedures have been developed for flexible fuel vehicles
and the dispensers used by ethanol fuel providers.
394

2011 F-150 (f12)

Owners Guide, 3rd Printing
USA (fus)
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
 Maintenance and Specifications

WARNING: Flexible fuel components and standard unleaded

gasoline fuel components are not interchangeable. If your vehicle
is not serviced in accordance with flexible fuel vehicles procedures,
damage may occur and your warranty may be invalidated.

WARNING: When refueling always shut the engine off and

never allow sparks or open flames near the filler neck. Never
smoke while refueling. Fuel vapor is extremely hazardous under certain
conditions. Care should be taken to avoid inhaling excess fumes.

WARNING: The flow of fuel through a fuel pump nozzle can

produce static electricity, which can cause a fire if fuel is
pumped into an ungrounded fuel container.

Refueling
WARNING: Fuel vapor burns violently and a fuel fire can cause
severe injuries. To help avoid injuries to you and others:
• Read and follow all the instructions on the pump island;
• Turn off your engine when you are refueling;
• Do not smoke if you are near fuel or refueling your vehicle;
• Keep sparks, flames and smoking materials away from fuel;
• Stay outside your vehicle and do not leave the fuel pump unattended
when refueling your vehicle — this is against the law in some places;
• Keep children away from the fuel pump; never let children pump
fuel.
• Do not use personal electronic devices while refueling.

Use the following guidelines to avoid electrostatic charge build-up when

filling an ungrounded fuel container:
• Place approved fuel container on the ground.
• DO NOT fill a fuel container while it is in the vehicle (including the
cargo area).
• Keep the fuel pump nozzle in contact with the fuel container while
filling.
395

2011 F-150 (f12)

Owners Guide, 3rd Printing
USA (fus)
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
 Maintenance and Specifications
• DO NOT use a device that would hold the fuel pump handle in the fill
position.

Easy Fuel姞 “no cap” fuel system

Your fuel tank is equipped with an Easy Fuel威 “no cap” fuel filler system.
This allows you to simply open the fuel filler door and insert the fuel
filler nozzle into the fuel system. The Easy Fuel威 system is self-sealing
and protected against dust, dirt, water and snow/ice.
When fueling your vehicle:
1. Turn the engine off.
2. Open the fuel filler door.
3. Slowly insert the fuel filler nozzle fully into the fuel system, and leave
the nozzle fully inserted until you are done pumping. Pump fuel as
normal.
4. After you are done pumping fuel, slowly remove the fuel filler
nozzle—allow about five seconds after pumping fuel before removing the
fuel filler nozzle. This allows residual fuel to drain back into the fuel tank
and not spill onto the vehicle.
Note: A fuel spillage concern may occur if overfilling the fuel tank. Do
not overfill the tank to the point that the fuel is able to bypass the fuel
filler nozzle. The overfilled fuel may run down the drain located below
and in front of the fuel filler door.
If the check fuel fill inlet lamp or CHECK FUEL FILL INLET message
comes on, the fuel fill inlet may not have properly closed. The inlet may
have stuck open or debris may be preventing the inlet from fully closing.
At the next opportunity, safely pull off the road, turn off the engine,
open the fuel filler door and remove any visible debris from the fuel fill
opening. Insert either the fuel fill nozzle or the fuel fill funnel (see
Refilling with a portable fuel container for funnel location) provided
with the vehicle several times to dislodge any debris and/or allow the
inlet to close properly. If this action corrects the problem, the check fuel
fill inlet lamp or CHECK FUEL FILL INLET message may not reset
immediately. It may take several driving cycles for the check fuel fill inlet
lamp or CHECK FUEL FILL INLET message to turn off. A driving cycle
consists of an engine start-up (after four or more hours with the engine
off) followed by city/highway driving. Continuing to drive with the check
fuel fill inlet lamp or CHECK FUEL FILL INLET message on may cause
the service engine soon lamp to turn on as well.
396

2011 F-150 (f12)

Owners Guide, 3rd Printing
USA (fus)
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
 Maintenance and Specifications

WARNING: The fuel system may be under pressure. If you hear

a hissing sound near the fuel filler door (Easy Fuel威 “no cap”
fuel system), do not refuel until the sound stops. Otherwise, fuel may
spray out, which could cause serious personal injury.

Flex fuel vehicle (FFV) fuel fill inlet

If your vehicle is flex fuel capable, it will have a yellow bezel placed over
the fuel fill inlet.

Choosing the right fuel

If your vehicle is a flexible fuel vehicle (FFV), use only UNLEADED
FUEL and FUEL ETHANOL (Ed75–Ed85).
If your vehicle is not a flexible fuel vehicle (FFV), then only use
UNLEADED fuel or UNLEADED fuel blended with a maximum of 10%
ethanol. Do not use fuel ethanol (E85), diesel, methanol, leaded fuel or
any other fuel.
The use of leaded fuel is prohibited by law and could damage your
vehicle.
Your vehicle was not designed to use fuel or fuel additives with metallic
compounds, including manganese-based additives.
Note: Use of any fuel other than those recommended may cause
powertrain damage, a loss of vehicle performance, and repairs may not
be covered under warranty.

Octane recommendations
3.7L V6/5.0L V8/6.2L V8 engines
Your vehicle will run normally on 87 octane regular fuel. Premium fuel
will provide improved performance.
3.5L V6 EcoBoost™ engine
Your vehicle is designed to run on regular fuel with an octane rating of
87 or higher. For best overall performance, premium fuel with an octane
rating of 91 or higher is recommended. The performance gained by using
premium fuel will be most noticeable in hot weather or in severe duty
applications such as towing a trailer.
397

2011 F-150 (f12)

Owners Guide, 3rd Printing
USA (fus)
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
 Maintenance and Specifications
Some stations offer fuels posted as
⬙Regular⬙ with an octane rating
below 87, particularly in high
altitude areas. Fuels with octane
levels below 87 are not
87
(R+M)/2 METHOD

recommended for either engine. Do not be concerned if your engine

sometimes knocks lightly. However, if it knocks heavily while you are
using fuel with the recommended octane rating, see your authorized
dealer to prevent any engine damage.
FFV engine (if equipped)
If your vehicle is flex fuel capable, it is designed to use Fuel Ethanol
(Ed75–Ed85), “Regular” unleaded gasoline or any mixture of the two
fuels.
Use of other fuels such as Fuel Methanol may cause powertrain
damage, a loss of vehicle performance, and your warranty may be
invalidated.
It is best not to alternate repeatedly between gasoline and E85. If you do
switch fuels, it is recommended that you add as much fuel as
possible—at least half a tank. Do not add less than five gallons (18.9L)
when refueling. You should drive the vehicle immediately after refueling
for at least 5 miles (8 km) to allow the vehicle to adapt to the change in
ethanol concentration.
If you exclusively use E85 fuel, it is recommended to fill the fuel tank
with regular unleaded gasoline at each scheduled oil change.
Fuel quality
Unleaded gasoline engines
If you experience starting, rough idle or hesitation driveability problems
during a cold start, try a different brand of “Regular” unleaded gasoline.
“Premium” unleaded gasoline is not recommended for vehicles designed
to use “Regular” unleaded gasoline because it may cause these problems
to become more pronounced. If the problems persist, see your
authorized dealer.
FFV engines
If you experience starting, rough idle or hesitation driveability problems
during a cold start, try a different brand of E85 fuel. If the driveability
problems continue, fill the vehicle with regular unleaded gasoline and
drive vehicle normally until gasoline is used. See your authorized dealer
if the problem persists.
398

2011 F-150 (f12)

Owners Guide, 3rd Printing
USA (fus)
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
 Maintenance and Specifications
Do not add aftermarket fuel additive products to your fuel tank. It
should not be necessary to add any aftermarket products to your fuel
tank if you continue to use high quality fuel of the recommended octane
rating. These products have not been approved for your engine and
could cause damage to the fuel system. Repairs to correct the effects of
using an aftermarket product in your fuel may not be covered by your
warranty.
Many of the world’s automakers approved the World-Wide Fuel Charter
that recommends gasoline specifications to provide improved
performance and emission control system protection for your vehicle.
Gasolines that meet the World-Wide Fuel Charter should be used when
available. Ask your fuel supplier about gasolines that meet the
World-Wide Fuel Charter.
Cleaner air
Ford endorses the use of reformulated “cleaner-burning” gasolines to
improve air quality, per the recommendations in the Choosing the right
fuel section.
Running out of fuel
Avoid running out of fuel because this situation may have an adverse
effect on powertrain components.
If you have run out of fuel:
• You may need to cycle the ignition from off to on several times after
refueling to allow the fuel system to pump the fuel from the tank to
the engine. On restarting, cranking time will take a few seconds longer
than normal.
• Normally, adding 1 gallon (3.8L) of fuel is enough to restart the
engine. If the vehicle is out of fuel and on a steep grade, more than
1 gallon (3.8L) may be required.
• The service engine soon indicator may come on. For more
information on the service engine soon indicator, refer to Warning
lights and chimes in the Instrument Cluster chapter.

399

2011 F-150 (f12)

Owners Guide, 3rd Printing
USA (fus)
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
 Maintenance and Specifications
Refilling with a portable fuel container
With the Easy Fuel威 “no cap” fuel system, use the following directions
when filling from a portable fuel container:
WARNING: Do not insert the nozzle of portable fuel containers
or aftermarket funnels into the Easy Fuel威 system. This could
damage the fuel system and its seal, and may cause fuel to run onto
the ground instead of filling the tank, which could result in serious
personal injury.

WARNING: Do not try to pry open or push open the Easy Fuel威
system with foreign objects. This could damage the fuel system
and its seal and cause injury to you or others.

When filling the vehicle’s fuel tank from a portable fuel container, use the
funnel included with the vehicle.
1. Locate the white plastic funnel. In
SuperCab and Super Crew vehicles,
it is located under the second row
driver side seat near the spare tire
tool box. On regular cab vehicles,
the funnel is located behind the
driver seat.

2. Slowly insert the funnel into the Easy Fuel威 system.

3. Fill the vehicle with fuel from the portable fuel container.
4. When done, clean the funnel or properly dispose of it. Extra funnels
can be purchased from your authorized dealer if you choose to dispose
of the funnel. Do not use aftermarket funnels; they will not work with
the Easy Fuel威 system and can damage it. The included funnel has been
specially designed to work safely with your vehicle.

400

2011 F-150 (f12)

Owners Guide, 3rd Printing
USA (fus)
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
 Maintenance and Specifications
ESSENTIALS OF GOOD FUEL ECONOMY
Measuring techniques
Your best source of information about actual fuel economy is you, the
driver. You must gather information as accurately and consistently as
possible. Fuel expense, frequency of fill-ups or fuel gauge readings are
NOT accurate as a measure of fuel economy. We do not recommend
taking fuel economy measurements during the first 1,000 miles
(1,600 km) of driving (engine break-in period). You will get a more
accurate measurement after 2,000 miles–3,000 miles (3,000 km–5,000
km).
Filling the tank
The advertised fuel capacity of the fuel tank on your vehicle is equal to
the rated refill capacity of the fuel tank as listed in the Maintenance
product specifications and capacities section of this chapter.
The advertised capacity is the amount of the indicated capacity and the
empty reserve combined. Indicated capacity is the difference in the
amount of fuel in a full tank and a tank when the fuel gauge indicates
empty. Empty reserve is the small amount of fuel remaining in the fuel
tank after the fuel gauge indicates empty.
The amount of usable fuel in the empty reserve varies and should
not be relied upon to increase driving range. When refueling your
vehicle after the fuel gauge indicates empty, you might not be
able to refuel the full amount of the advertised capacity of the
fuel tank due to the empty reserve still present in the tank.
For consistent results when filling the fuel tank:
• Turn the engine/ignition switch to the off position prior to refueling,
an error in the reading may result if the engine is left running.
• Use the same filling rate setting (low — medium — high) each time
the tank is filled.
• Allow no more than three automatic click-offs when filling.
• Always use fuel with the recommended octane rating.
• Use a known quality gasoline, preferably a national brand.
• Have the vehicle loading and distribution the same every time.
Your results will be most accurate if your filling method is consistent.

401

2011 F-150 (f12)

Owners Guide, 3rd Printing
USA (fus)
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
 Maintenance and Specifications
Calculating fuel economy
1. Fill the fuel tank completely and record the initial odometer reading
(in miles or kilometers).
2. Each time you fill the tank, record the amount of fuel added (in
gallons or liters).
3. After at least three to five tank fill-ups, fill the fuel tank and record
the current odometer reading.
4. Subtract your initial odometer reading from the current odometer
reading.
5. Follow one of the simple calculations in order to determine fuel
economy:
Calculation 1: Divide total miles traveled by total gallons used.
Calculation 2: Multiply liters used by 100, then divide by total
kilometers traveled.
Keep a record for at least one month and record the type of driving (city
or highway). This will provide an accurate estimate of the vehicle’s fuel
economy under current driving conditions. Additionally, keeping records
during summer and winter will show how temperature impacts fuel
economy. In general, lower temperatures give lower fuel economy.
Driving style — good driving and fuel economy habits
Give consideration to the lists that follow and you may be able to change
a number of variables and improve your fuel economy.
Habits
• Smooth, moderate operation can yield up to 10% savings in fuel.
• Steady speeds without stopping will usually give the best fuel
economy.
• Idling for long periods of time (greater than one minute) may waste
fuel.
• Anticipate stopping; slowing down may eliminate the need to stop.
• Sudden or hard accelerations may reduce fuel economy.
• Slow down gradually.
• Driving at reasonable speeds (traveling at 55 mph [88 km/h] uses 15%
less fuel than traveling at 65 mph [105 km/h]).
• Revving the engine before turning it off may reduce fuel economy.
• Using the air conditioner or defroster may reduce fuel economy.
402

2011 F-150 (f12)

Owners Guide, 3rd Printing
USA (fus)
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
 Maintenance and Specifications
• You may want to turn off the speed control in hilly terrain if
unnecessary shifting between the top gears occurs. Unnecessary
shifting of this type could result in reduced fuel economy.
• Warming up a vehicle on cold mornings is not required and may
reduce fuel economy.
• Resting your foot on the brake pedal while driving may reduce fuel
economy.
• Combine errands and minimize stop-and-go driving.
Maintenance
• Keep tires properly inflated and use only recommended size.
• Operating a vehicle with the wheels out of alignment will reduce fuel
economy.
• Use recommended engine oil. Refer to Maintenance product
specifications and capacities in this chapter.
• Perform all regularly scheduled maintenance items. Follow the
recommended maintenance schedule and owner maintenance checks
found in scheduled maintenance information.
Conditions
• Heavily loading a vehicle or towing a trailer may reduce fuel economy
at any speed.
• Carrying unnecessary weight may reduce fuel economy (approximately
1 mpg [0.4 km/L] is lost for every 400 lb [180 kg] of weight carried).
• Adding certain accessories to your vehicle (for example bug
deflectors, rollbars/light bars, running boards, ski/luggage racks) may
reduce fuel economy.
• To maximize the fuel economy, drive with the tonneau cover installed
(if equipped).
• Using fuel blended with alcohol may lower fuel economy.
• Fuel economy may decrease with lower temperatures during the first
8–10 miles (12–16 km) of driving.
• Driving on flat terrain offers improved fuel economy as compared to
driving on hilly terrain.
• Transmissions give their best fuel economy when operated in the top
cruise gear and with steady pressure on the gas pedal.
• Four-wheel-drive operation (if equipped) is less fuel efficient than
two-wheel-drive operation.
• Close windows for high speed driving.
403

2011 F-150 (f12)

Owners Guide, 3rd Printing
USA (fus)
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
 Maintenance and Specifications
EMISSION CONTROL SYSTEM
Your vehicle is equipped with various emission control components and a
catalytic converter which will enable your vehicle to comply with
applicable exhaust emission standards. To make sure that the catalytic
converter and other emission control components continue to work
properly:
• Use only the specified fuel listed.
• Avoid running out of fuel.
• Do not turn off the ignition while your vehicle is moving, especially at
high speeds.
• Have the items listed in scheduled maintenance information
performed according to the specified schedule.
The scheduled maintenance items listed in scheduled maintenance
information are essential to the life and performance of your vehicle
and to its emissions system.
If other than Ford, Motorcraft威 or Ford-authorized parts are used for
maintenance replacements or for service of components affecting
emission control, such non-Ford parts should be equivalent to genuine
Ford Motor Company parts in performance and durability.
WARNING: Do not park, idle, or drive your vehicle in dry grass
or other dry ground cover. The emission system heats up the
engine compartment and exhaust system, which can start a fire.

Illumination of the service engine soon indicator, charging system

warning light or the temperature warning light, fluid leaks, strange odors,
smoke or loss of engine power could indicate that the emission control
system is not working properly.
An improperly operating or damaged exhaust system may allow exhaust
to enter the vehicle. Have a damaged or improperly operating exhaust
system inspected and repaired immediately.
WARNING: Exhaust leaks may result in entry of harmful and
potentially lethal fumes into the passenger compartment.

404

2011 F-150 (f12)

Owners Guide, 3rd Printing
USA (fus)
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
 Maintenance and Specifications
Do not make any unauthorized changes to your vehicle or engine. By
law, vehicle owners and anyone who manufactures, repairs, services,
sells, leases, trades vehicles, or supervises a fleet of vehicles are not
permitted to intentionally remove an emission control device or prevent
it from working. Information about your vehicle’s emission system is on
the Vehicle Emission Control Information Decal located on or near the
engine. This decal also lists engine displacement.
Please consult your Warranty Guide for complete emission warranty
information.
On-board diagnostics (OBD-II)
Your vehicle is equipped with a computer that monitors the engine’s
emission control system. This system is commonly known as the
on-board diagnostics system (OBD-II). The OBD-II system protects the
environment by ensuring that your vehicle continues to meet
government emission standards. The OBD-II system also assists your
authorized dealer in properly servicing your vehicle. When the service
engine soon indicator illuminates, the OBD-II system has detected
a malfunction. Temporary malfunctions may cause the service engine
soon indicator to illuminate. Examples are:
1. The vehicle has run out of fuel—the engine may misfire or run poorly.
2. Poor fuel quality or water in the fuel—the engine may misfire or run
poorly.
3. The fuel fill inlet may not have been properly closed. See Easy Fuel威
“no cap” fuel system in this chapter.
4. Driving through deep water—the electrical system may be wet.
These temporary malfunctions can be corrected by filling the fuel tank
with good quality fuel, properly closing the fuel fill inlet or letting the
electrical system dry out. After three driving cycles without these or any
other temporary malfunctions present, the service engine soon
indicator should stay off the next time the engine is started. A driving
cycle consists of a cold engine startup followed by mixed city/highway
driving. No additional vehicle service is required.
If the service engine soon indicator remains on, have your vehicle
serviced at the first available opportunity. Although some malfunctions
detected by the OBD-II may not have symptoms that are apparent,
continued driving with the service engine soon indicator on can
result in increased emissions, lower fuel economy, reduced engine and
transmission smoothness, and lead to more costly repairs.
405

2011 F-150 (f12)

Owners Guide, 3rd Printing
USA (fus)
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
 Maintenance and Specifications
Readiness for Inspection/Maintenance (I/M) testing
Some state/provincial and local governments may have
Inspection/Maintenance (I/M) programs to inspect the emission control
equipment on your vehicle. Failure to pass this inspection could prevent
you from getting a vehicle registration. Your vehicle may not pass the I/M
test if the service engine soon indicator is on or not working
properly (bulb is burned out), or if the OBD-II system has determined
that some of the emission control systems have not been properly
checked. In this case, the vehicle is considered not ready for I/M testing.
If the service engine soon indicator is on or the bulb does not
work, the vehicle may need to be serviced. Refer to On-board
diagnostics (OBD-II) in this chapter.
If the vehicle’s engine or transmission has just been serviced, or the
battery has recently run down or been replaced, the OBD-II system may
indicate that the vehicle is not ready for I/M testing. To determine if the
vehicle is ready for I/M testing, turn the ignition key to the on position
for 15 seconds without cranking the engine. If the service engine
soon indicator blinks eight times, it means that the vehicle is not
ready for I/M testing; if the service engine soon indicator stays on
solid, it means that the vehicle is ready for I/M testing.
The OBD-II system is designed to check the emission control system
during normal driving. A complete check may take several days. If the
vehicle is not ready for I/M testing, the following driving cycle consisting
of mixed city and highway driving may be performed:
15 minutes of steady driving on an expressway/highway followed by
20 minutes of stop-and-go driving with at least four 30-second idle
periods.
Allow the vehicle to sit for at least eight hours without starting the
engine. Then, start the engine and complete the above driving cycle. The
engine must warm up to its normal operating temperature. Once started,
do not turn off the engine until the above driving cycle is complete. If
the vehicle is still not ready for I/M testing, the above driving cycle will
have to be repeated.
POWER STEERING FLUID (6.2L V8 ENGINE ONLY)
Check the power steering fluid. Refer to scheduled maintenance
information.
406

2011 F-150 (f12)

Owners Guide, 3rd Printing
USA (fus)
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
 Maintenance and Specifications
1. Start the engine and let it run
until it reaches normal operating
temperature (the engine coolant
temperature gauge indicator will be
near the center of the normal area
between H and C).
2. While the engine idles, turn the
steering wheel left and right several
times.
3. Turn the engine off.
4. Check the fluid level in the reservoir. It should be between the MIN
and MAX lines. Do not add fluid if the level is in this range.
5. If the fluid is low, add fluid in small amounts, continuously checking
the level until it reaches the range between the MIN and MAX lines. Be
sure to put the cap back on the reservoir. Refer to Maintenance
product specifications and capacities in this chapter for the proper
fluid type.
BRAKE FLUID
The fluid level will drop slowly as
the brakes wear, and will rise when
the brake components are replaced.
Fluid levels between the MIN and
MAX lines are within the normal
operating range; there is no need to
add fluid. If the fluid levels are
outside of the normal operating
range, the performance of the
system could be compromised; seek
service from your authorized dealer
immediately.
TRANSMISSION FLUID
Checking 6-speed automatic transmission fluid
The automatic transmission does not have a transmission fluid dipstick.
Refer to your scheduled maintenance information for scheduled
intervals for fluid checks and changes. Your transmission does not
consume fluid. However, the fluid level should be checked if the
transmission is not working properly, (i.e., if the transmission slips or
shifts slowly) or if you notice some sign of fluid leakage.
407

2011 F-150 (f12)

Owners Guide, 3rd Printing
USA (fus)
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
 Maintenance and Specifications
Transmission fluid should be checked by an authorized dealer. If
required, fluid should be added by an authorized dealer.
Do not use supplemental transmission fluid additives, treatments or
cleaning agents. The use of these materials may affect transmission
operation and result in damage to internal transmission components.
TRANSFER CASE FLUID (IF EQUIPPED)
1. Clean the filler plug.
2. Remove the filler plug and
inspect the fluid level.

LL
FI
N
AI
DR

3. Add only enough fluid through

the filler opening so that the fluid
level is at the bottom of the
opening.

Use only fluid that meets Ford specifications. Refer to the Maintenance
product specifications and capacities section in this chapter.
AIR FILTER
Refer to scheduled maintenance information for the appropriate
intervals for changing the air filter element.
When changing the air filter element, use only the air filter element
listed. Refer to Motorcraft威 part numbers in this chapter.
WARNING: To reduce the risk of vehicle damage and/or
personal burn injuries do not start your engine with the air
cleaner removed and do not remove it while the engine is running.

408

2011 F-150 (f12)

Owners Guide, 3rd Printing
USA (fus)
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
 Maintenance and Specifications
Changing the air filter element
1. Locate the mass air flow sensor
electrical connector on the air outlet
tube. This connector will need to be
unplugged.

2. Reposition the locking clip on the

connector (connector shown from
below for clarity), squeeze the
connector and pull it off of the air
outlet tube.

3. Clean the area around the air

tube to air cover connection to
prevent debris from entering the
system and then loosen the bolt on
the air tube clamp so the clamp is
no longer snug to the air tube. It is
not necessary to completely remove
the clamp.
4. Pull the air tube off from the air
cleaner housing.

409

2011 F-150 (f12)

Owners Guide, 3rd Printing
USA (fus)
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
 Maintenance and Specifications
5. Release the three clamps that
secure the cover to the air filter
housing. Push the air filter cover
toward the center of the vehicle and
up slightly to release it.

6. Remove the air filter element

from the air filter housing.
7. Install a new air filter element.

8. Replace the air filter housing

cover and secure the clamps. Be
careful not to crimp the filter
element edges between the air filter
housing and cover and ensure that
the tabs on the edge are properly
aligned into the slots.
9. Slip the air tube onto the air filter
housing and tighten the air-tube
clamp bolt snugly, but do not
overtighten it.

410

2011 F-150 (f12)

Owners Guide, 3rd Printing
USA (fus)
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
 Maintenance and Specifications
10. Reconnect the mass air flow
sensor electrical connector to the
outlet tube. Make sure the locking
tab on the connector is in the
“locked” position (connector shown
from below for clarity).

Note: Failure to use the correct air filter element may result in severe
engine damage. The customer warranty may be void for any damage to
the engine if the correct air filter element is not used.
VEHICLE STORAGE
If you plan on storing your vehicle for an extended period of time
(30 days or more), refer to the following maintenance recommendations
to ensure your vehicle stays in good operating condition.
All motor vehicles and their components were engineered and tested for
reliable, regular driving. Long term storage under various conditions may
lead to component degradation or failure unless specific precautions are
taken to preserve the components.
General
• Store all vehicles in a dry, ventilated place.
• Protect from sunlight, if possible.
• If vehicles are stored outside, they require regular maintenance to
protect against rust and damage.
Body
• Wash vehicle thoroughly to remove dirt, grease, oil, tar or mud from
exterior surfaces, rear-wheel housing and underside of front fenders.
See the Cleaning chapter for more information.
• Periodically wash vehicles stored in exposed locations.
• Touch-up raw or primed metal to prevent rust.
• Cover chrome and stainless steel parts with a thick coat of auto wax
to prevent discoloration. Re-wax as necessary when the vehicle is
washed. See the Cleaning chapter for more information.
• Lubricate all hood, door and trunk lid hinges, and latches with a light
grade oil. See the Cleaning chapter for more information.
411

2011 F-150 (f12)

Owners Guide, 3rd Printing
USA (fus)
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
 Maintenance and Specifications
• Cover interior trim to prevent fading.
• Keep all rubber parts free from oil and solvents.
Engine
• The engine oil and filter should be changed prior to storage, as used
engine oil contain contaminates that may cause engine damage.
• Start the engine every 15 days. Run at fast idle until it reaches normal
operating temperature.
• With your foot on the brake, shift through all the gears while the
engine is running.
Fuel system
• Fill the fuel tank with high-quality fuel until the first automatic shutoff
of the fuel pump nozzle.
Note: During extended periods of vehicle storage (30 days or more),
fuel may deteriorate due to oxidation. Add a quality gas stabilizer
product to the vehicle fuel system whenever actual or expected storage
periods exceed 30 days. Follow the instructions on the additive label.
The vehicle should then be operated at idle speed to circulate the
additive throughout the fuel system.
Cooling system
• Protect against freezing temperatures.
• When removing vehicle from storage, check coolant fluid level.
Confirm there are no cooling system leaks, and fluid is at the
recommended level.
Battery
• Check and recharge as necessary. Keep connections clean.
• If storing your vehicle for more than 30 days without recharging the
battery, it may be advisable to disconnect the battery cables to ensure
battery charge is maintained for quick starting.
Note: If battery cables are disconnected, it will be necessary to reset
memory features.
Brakes
• Make sure brakes and parking brake are fully released.
Tires
• Maintain recommended air pressure.

412

2011 F-150 (f12)

Owners Guide, 3rd Printing
USA (fus)
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
 Maintenance and Specifications
Miscellaneous
• Make sure all linkages, cables, levers and pins under vehicle are
covered with grease to prevent rust.
• Move vehicles at least 25 feet (8 m) every 15 days to lubricate
working parts and prevent corrosion.
Removing vehicle from storage
When your vehicle is ready to come out of storage, do the following:
• Wash your vehicle to remove any dirt or grease film build-up on
window surfaces.
• Check windshield wipers for any deterioration.
• Check under the hood for any foreign material that may have collected
during storage (mice/squirrel nests).
• Check the exhaust for any foreign material that may have collected
during storage.
• Check tire pressures and set tire inflation per the Tire Label.
• Check brake pedal operation. Drive the vehicle 15 ft (4.5 meters) back
and forth to remove rust build-up.
• Check fluid levels (including coolant, oil and gas) to make sure there
are no leaks, and fluids are at recommended levels.
• If the battery was removed, clean the battery cable ends and inspect.
If you have any concerns or issues, contact your authorized dealer.

413

2011 F-150 (f12)

Owners Guide, 3rd Printing
USA (fus)
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
 Maintenance and Specifications
MOTORCRAFT PART NUMBERS
3.5L V6
3.7L V6 5.0L V8 6.2L V8
Component EcoBoost™
engine engine engine
engine
Air filter
FA-1883 FA-1883 FA-1883 FA-1883
element
Battery BXT-65-750 BXT-65-750 BXT-65-750 BXT-65-750
Oil Filter FL-500-S FL-500-S FL-820-S FL-500-S
1 1 1 1
Spark plugs
1
For spark plug replacement, see your authorized dealer. Refer to
scheduled maintenance information for the appropriate intervals for
changing the spark plugs.
Replace the spark plugs with ones that meet Ford material and
design specifications for your vehicle, such as Motorcraft威 or
equivalent replacement parts. The customer warranty may be
void for any damage to the engine if such spark plugs are not
used.

414

2011 F-150 (f12)

Owners Guide, 3rd Printing
USA (fus)
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
 MAINTENANCE PRODUCT SPECIFICATIONS AND CAPACITIES
Ford part name or Ford part number /
Item Capacity
equivalent Ford specification

USA (fus)
Between Motorcraft威 High Performance PM-1-C /
Brake fluid MIN/MAX on brake DOT 3 Motor Vehicle Brake WSS-M6C62-A or
fluid reservoir Fluid WSS-M6C65-A1

2011 F-150 (f12)

•Motorcraft威 SAE 5W-20
3.7L engine oil 6.0 quarts (5.7L) Premium Synthetic Blend •XO-5W20–QSP (US)
Motor Oil (US) •XO-5W-20 QFS (US)
•Motorcraft威 SAE 5W-20 Full •CXO-5W20–LSP12

I
nf
Synthetic Motor Oil (US) (Canada)

or
5.0L engine oil 7.7 quarts (7.3L) •Motorcraft威 SAE 5W-20 •CXO-5W-20-LFS12

mat
i
Super Premium Motor Oil (Canada) /

Owners Guide, 3rd Printing

onPr
(Canada) WSS-M2C930–A and

ovi
6.2L engine oil 7.0 quarts (6.6L) •Motorcraft威 SAE 5W-20 API Certification Mark
Synthetic Motor Oil (Canada)1

dedby:
•Motorcraft威 SAE 5W-30
Premium Synthetic Blend •XO-5W30-QSP (US)
Motor Oil (US) •XO-5W30-QFS (US)
•Motorcraft威 SAE 5W-30 Full •CXO-5W30-LSP12
3.5L EcoBoost™ 6.0 quarts Synthetic Motor Oil (US) (Canada)
engine (5.7 L) •Motorcraft威 SAE 5W-30 •CXO-5W30-LFS12
Super Premium Motor Oil (Canada) /
(Canada) WSS-M2C929-A with
•Motorcraft威 SAE 5W-30 API Certification Mark
Synthetic Motor Oil (Canada)2
Maintenance and Specifications

415
 Ford part name or Ford part number /

416
Item Capacity
equivalent Ford specification

USA (fus)
3.7L engine coolant 16.0 quarts (15.1L) •Motorcraft威 Specialty
5.0L engine coolant 17.0 quarts (16.1L) Orange Engine Coolant with •VC-3-B (US)
Bittering Agent (US) •CVC-3-B (Canada) /
6.2L engine coolant 19.5 quarts (18.5L)

2011 F-150 (f12)

•Motorcraft威 Specialty WSS-M97B44-D
3.5L EcoBoost™ Orange Engine Coolant
16.5 quarts (15.6L) (Canada)3
engine coolant

I
Motorcraft威 SAE 80W-90 XY-80W-90-QL /

nf
Front axle (4X4) 3.5 pints (1.8L)

or
Premium Rear Axle Lubricant WSP-M2C197-A

mat
i
Motorcraft威 SAE 75W-140

Owners Guide, 3rd Printing

XY-75W140-QL /

onPr
Rear axle fluid 5.5 pints (2.6L)4 Rear Synthetic Axle WSL-M2C192-A

ovi
Lubricant5
Transmission

dedby:
/steering/parking
XG-1-C /
brake linkages and — Premium Long-Life Grease
ESA-M1C75-B
pivots, brake pedal
shaft
Hinges, latches,
Maintenance and Specifications

striker plates, seat XG-4 or XL-5 or

Multi-Purpose Grease
tracks, fuel filler door — equivalent /
hinge and door check (Lithium grease) ESB-M1C93-B
arm
Fill to between MIN Motorcraft威
Power steering fluid XT-5-QM /
and MAX lines on MERCON威 V
(6.2L engine only) reservoir ATF MERCON威 V
Transfer case fluid Motorcraft威 Transfer Case XL-12 /
1.6 quarts (1.5L)6
(4X4 / AWD) Fluid —
 Ford part name or Ford part number /
Item Capacity
equivalent Ford specification
12.1 quarts (11.7L)7
(3.7L engine)

USA (fus)
13.1 quarts (12.4L)
(5.0L engine)
Automatic 13.1 quarts Motorcraft威

2011 F-150 (f12)

XT-10-QLV /
transmission fluid (12.4L) MERCON威 LV MERCON威 LV
(6R80) (6.2L engine) ATF8
13.1 quarts

I
nf
(12.4L)

or
(3.5L EcoBoost™

mat
i
engine)

Owners Guide, 3rd Printing

onPr
ovi
Motorcraft威 Premium
ZC-32-A (US)
Windshield Washer
Windshield washer CXC-37-(A, B, D, and

dedby:
Fill as required Concentrate (US)
fluid Premium Quality Windshield F) (Canada) /
WSB-M8B16-A2/- -
Washer Fluid (Canada)
Fuel tank
Reg. Cab 6.5’ box / 26.0 gallons (98.4L) — —
SuperCab 5.5’ box
26.0 gallons (98.4L)
Fuel tank SuperCrew Standard
— —
5.5’ box 36.0 gallons (136.2L)
Optional
26.0 gallons (98.4L)
Fuel tank SuperCrew Standard
6.5’ box 36.0 gallons (136.2L) — —
Optional
Maintenance and Specifications

417
 Ford part name or Ford part number /

418
Item Capacity
equivalent Ford specification

USA (fus)
Fuel tank 26.0 gallons (98.4L)
Reg. Cab 8’ box / Standard
SuperCab 6.5’ box / 36.0 gallons (136.2L) — —

2011 F-150 (f12)

SuperCab 8’ box Optional
1
Use of synthetic or synthetic blend motor oil is not mandatory. Engine oil need only meet the
requirements of Ford specification WSS-M2C930-A and the API Certification mark.

I
2

nf
Use of synthetic or synthetic blend motor oil is not mandatory. Engine oil need only meet the

or
requirements of Ford specification WSS-M2C946-A and the API Certification mark.

mat
i
3

Owners Guide, 3rd Printing

Add the coolant type originally equipped in your vehicle.

onPr
4

ovi
Service refill capacity is determined by filling the axle to 1/4-9/16 inch (6-14 mm) below the
bottom of the filler hole with the vehicle on a level surface.

dedby:
Add 4 oz. (118 ml) of Additive Friction Modifier XL-3 or equivalent meeting Ford specification
EST-M2C118-A, for complete fill of 8.8 inch and 9.75 inch Traction-Lok axles.
5
Your vehicle’s rear axle is filled with a synthetic rear axle lubricant and is considered lubricated
for life. These lubricants do not need to be checked or changed unless a leak is suspected, service
Maintenance and Specifications

is required or the axle assembly has been submerged in water. The axle lubricant should be
changed any time the rear axle has been submerged in water.
6
Service refill capacity is determined by filling the transfer case to the bottom of the filler hole
with the vehicle on a level surface.
7
Approximate dry fill capacity including transmission fluid cooling system, actual refill capacities
will vary based on vehicle application and transmission fluid cooling system (i.e. coolers size,
cooling lines, auxiliary cooler capacities). The amount of transmission fluid and fluid level should
be set by the indication on the dipstick’s normal operating range.
8
Automatic transmissions that require MERCON威 LV should only use MERCON威 LV fluid. Refer to
scheduled maintenance information to determine the correct service interval. Use of any fluid
other than the recommended fluid may cause transmission damage.
 Maintenance and Specifications
ENGINE DATA
3.5L V6
3.7L V6 5.0L V8 6.2L V8
Engine EcoBoost™
Engine Engine Engine
Engine
Cubic
226 302 378 214
inches
Minimum Minimum
Minimum Minimum
Fuel 87 octane 87 octane
87 octane 87 octane
or E85 or E85
Firing order 1-4-2-5-3-6 1-5-4-8-6-3-7-2 1-3-7-2-6-5-4-8 1-4-2-5-3-6
Ignition
Coil on plug Coil on plug Coil on plug Coil on plug
system
Spark plug .052–.056 in .041 – .047 in .039–.043 in . 033-.037 in
gap 1.32–1.42mm 1.04–1.20mm 1.0–1.1mm .84-.94mm
Compression
10.3:1 10.5:1 9.8:1 10.0:1
ratio

419

2011 F-150 (f12)

Owners Guide, 3rd Printing
USA (fus)
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
 Maintenance and Specifications
Engine drivebelt routing
3.7L engine

5.0L engine

6.2L engine

420

2011 F-150 (f12)

Owners Guide, 3rd Printing
USA (fus)
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
 Maintenance and Specifications
3.5L EcoBoost™ engine

IDENTIFYING YOUR VEHICLE

Safety Compliance Certification Label

The National Highway Traffic Safety
Administration Regulations require
that a Safety Compliance
Certification Label be affixed to a
vehicle and prescribe where the
Safety Compliance Certification
Label may be located. The Safety
Compliance Certification Label is
located on the structure (B-Pillar)
by the trailing edge of the driver’s
door or the edge of the driver’s
door.

421

2011 F-150 (f12)

Owners Guide, 3rd Printing
USA (fus)
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
 Maintenance and Specifications
Vehicle identification number (VIN)
The vehicle identification number is
located on the driver side
instrument panel. XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX
Please note that in the graphic,
XXXX is representative of your
vehicle identification number.

The Vehicle Identification Number (VIN) contains the following

information:
1. World manufacturer identifier
2. Brake system / Gross Vehicle
Weight Rating (GVWR) / Restraint
Devices and their location
3. Make, vehicle line, series, body
type
4. Engine type
5. Check digit
6. Model year
7. Assembly plant
8. Production sequence number

422

2011 F-150 (f12)

Owners Guide, 3rd Printing
USA (fus)
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
 Maintenance and Specifications
TRANSMISSION CODE DESIGNATIONS
You can find a transmission code on
the Safety Compliance Certification
Label. The following table tells you
which transmission each code
represents.

Description Code
Six-speed automatic (6R80) 6

423

2011 F-150 (f12)

Owners Guide, 3rd Printing
USA (fus)
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
 Accessories
FORD CUSTOM ACCESSORIES FOR YOUR VEHICLE
A wide selection of Ford Custom Accessories are available for your
vehicle through your local Ford or Ford of Canada dealer. These quality
accessories have been specifically engineered to fulfill your automotive
needs; they are custom designed to complement the style and
aerodynamic appearance of your vehicle. In addition, each accessory is
made from high quality materials and meets or exceeds Ford’s rigorous
engineering and safety specifications. Ford Motor Company will repair or
replace any properly dealer-installed Ford Custom Accessories found to
be defective in factory-supplied materials or workmanship during the
warranty period, as well as any component damaged by the defective
accessories. The accessories will be warranted for whichever provides
you the greatest benefit:
• 12 months or 12,000 miles (20,000 km) (whichever occurs first), or
• the remainder of your new vehicle limited warranty.
Contact your dealer for details and a copy of the warranty.
The following is a list of several Ford Custom Accessories. Not all
accessories are available for all models. For a complete listing of the
accessories that are available for your vehicle, please contact your dealer
or visit our online store at: www.fordaccessories.com (U.S. only).
Exterior style
•Bug shields •Running boards
•Chrome exhaust tips •Step bars
•Deflectors •Wheels
•Front grilles •Splash guards
•Custom graphics*
Interior style
•Ambient lighting •Power sliding rear window
•Floor mats •Leather-trimmed interior seating*
•Electrochromatic compass/temperature interior mirrors

424

2011 F-150 (f12)

Owners Guide, 3rd Printing
USA (fus)
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
 Accessories
Lifestyle
•Ash cup / smoker’s package •Racks and carriers*
•Bedliners and bedmats •Truck bed camping tent*
•Bed side step •Sportliner cargo liner*
•Towing mirrors •Rear seat entertainment*
•Portable navigation* •Trailer brake controller
•Bed extender •Hitch ball and towbars
•Tonneau covers*
•Interior cargo organization and management
•Truck bed cargo organization and management
•Trailer hitches, wiring harnesses and accessories
Peace of mind
•Keyless entry keypad •Remote start
•Vehicle security systems •Wheel locks
•Bed step* •Bed hooks*
•Protective seat covers* •Back up alarm*
•Cable lock* •Tool/cargo boxes*
•Locking gas plug for capless fuel system
•Vehicle tracking and recovery*
•Bumper and hitch mounted parking sensors*
•Bed mounted oversize spare tire carrier*
*Ford Licensed Accessories (FLA) are warranted by the accessory
manufacturer’s warranty. Ford Licensed Accessories are fully designed
and developed by the accessory manufacturer and have not been
designed or tested to Ford Motor Company engineering requirements.
Contact your Ford dealer for details regarding the manufacturer’s limited
warranty and/or a copy of the FLA product limited warranty offered by
the accessory manufacturer.
For maximum vehicle performance, keep the following information in
mind when adding accessories or equipment to your vehicle:
• When adding accessories, equipment, passengers and luggage to your
vehicle, do not exceed the total weight capacity of the vehicle or of
the front or rear axle (GVWR or GAWR as indicated on the Safety
Compliance Certification label). Consult your authorized dealer for
specific weight information.
425

2011 F-150 (f12)

Owners Guide, 3rd Printing
USA (fus)
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
 Accessories
• The Federal Communications Commission (FCC) and Canadian Radio
Telecommunications Commission (CRTC) regulate the use of mobile
communications systems — such as two-way radios, telephones and
theft alarms - that are equipped with radio transmitters. Any such
equipment installed in your vehicle should comply with FCC or CRTC
regulations and should be installed only by a qualified service
technician.
• Mobile communications systems may harm the operation of your
vehicle, particularly if they are not properly designed for automotive
use.
• To avoid interference with other vehicle functions, such as anti-lock
braking systems, amateur radio users who install radios and antennas
onto their vehicle should not locate the Amateur Radio Antennas in
the area of the driver’s side hood.
To ensure proper operation of the battery management system (BMS),
any electrical devices that are added to the vehicle should not have their
ground connection made directly at the negative battery post. A
connection at the negative battery post can cause inaccurate
measurements of the battery condition and potential incorrect system
operation.
• Any non-Ford electrical or electronic accessories or components that
are added to the vehicle by the authorized dealer or the owner may
adversely affect battery performance and durability, and may also
adversely affect the performance of other electrical systems in the
vehicle.

426

2011 F-150 (f12)

Owners Guide, 3rd Printing
USA (fus)
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
 Ford Extended Service Plan
FORD ESP EXTENDED SERVICE PLANS (U.S. ONLY)
More than 30 million Ford and Lincoln owners have discovered the
powerful protection of Ford ESP. It is the only extended service plan
backed by Ford Motor Company, and provides “peace of mind”
protection beyond the New Vehicle Limited Warranty coverage.
Up to 500+ Covered Vehicle Components
There are four, new-vehicle Extended Service Plans with different levels
of coverage. Ask your dealer for details.
PremiumCare – Our most comprehensive coverage. With over 500
covered components, this plan is so complete that we generally only
discuss what’s not covered!
ExtraCare – Covers 113 components, and includes many high-tech
items.
BaseCare – Covers 84 components.
PowertrainCare – Covers 29 critical components.
Ford ESP is honored by all Ford and Lincoln Dealers in the U.S.
and Canada It’s the only extended service plan authorized and backed
by Ford Motor Company. That means you get:
• Reliable, quality service anywhere you go.
• Factory-trained technicians.
• Genuine Ford and Motorcraft威 Parts.
Rental car reimbursement
If your vehicle is kept overnight for covered repairs, you are
eligible for rental car coverage, including Bumper-to-Bumper warranty
repairs, or manufacturer’s recalls.
Transferable coverage
If you sell your vehicle before your Ford ESP coverage expires, you can
transfer any remaining coverage to the new owner. Whenever you’re
ready to sell your car, prospective buyers may feel better about taking a
risk on your used vehicle. Ford ESP may add resale value!
Plus, exclusive 24/7 roadside assistance, including:
• Towing, flat-tire change and battery jump starts.
• Out-of-fuel and lock-out assistance.
• Travel expense reimbursement for lodging, meals and rental car.
• Destination assistance for taxi, shuttle, rental car coverage and
emergency transportation.
427

2011 F-150 (f12)

Owners Guide, 3rd Printing
USA (fus)
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
 Ford Extended Service Plan
Ford ESP Can Quickly Pay for Itself
One service bill – the cost of parts and labor – can easily exceed the
price of your Ford ESP Service Contract. With Ford ESP, you minimize
your risk for unexpected repair bills and rising repair costs.
Avoid the rising cost of properly maintaining your vehicle!
Ford ESP also offers a Premium Maintenance Plan that covers items that
routinely wear out.
The coverage is prepaid, so you never have to worry about affording
your vehicle maintenance. It covers regular checkups, routine
inspections, preventive care and replacement of items that require
periodic attention for normal “wear”:
• Wiper blades • Brake pads and linings
• Spark plugs (except
• Shock absorbers
California)
• Clutch disc • Belts and hoses
Contact your selling Ford or Lincoln dealership today so they can
customize a Ford Extended Service Plan that fits your driving lifestyle
and budget.
Interest free finance options available
Take advantage of our installment payment plan, just a 10% down
payment will provide you with an affordable no interest, no-fee payment
opportunity.

428

2011 F-150 (f12)

Owners Guide, 3rd Printing
USA (fus)
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
 Ford Extended Service Plan

429

2011 F-150 (f12)

Owners Guide, 3rd Printing
USA (fus)
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
 Ford Extended Service Plan
FORD ESP EXTENDED SERVICE PLANS (CANADA ONLY)
You can get more protection for your vehicle by purchasing a Ford
Extended Service Plan (ESP). Ford ESP is the only service contract
backed by Ford Motor Company of Canada, Limited. Depending on the
plan you purchase, Ford ESP provides benefits such as:
• Rental reimbursement
• Coverage for certain maintenance and wear items
• Protection against repair costs after your New Vehicle Limited
Warranty Coverage expires
• Roadside Assistance benefits
There are several Ford ESP plans available in various time, distance and
deductible combinations. Each plan is tailored to fit your own driving
needs, including reimbursement for towing and rental.
When you purchase Ford ESP, you receive added peace-of-mind
protection throughout Canada and the United States, provided by a
network of participating Ford Motor Company dealers.
For more information, visit your local Ford of Canada dealer or
www.ford.ca to find the Ford Extended Service Plan that is right for you.
Note: Repairs performed outside of Canada and the United States are
not eligible for Ford ESP coverage. This information is subject to change.

430

2011 F-150 (f12)

Owners Guide, 3rd Printing
USA (fus)
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
 Scheduled Maintenance
GENERAL MAINTENANCE INFORMATION
Why maintain your vehicle?
This guide describes the scheduled maintenance required for your
vehicle. Carefully following this schedule helps protect against major
repair expenses resulting from neglect or inadequate maintenance and
may also help to increase the value of your vehicle when you sell or
trade it.
It is your responsibility to see that all scheduled maintenance is
performed and that the materials used meet Ford engineering
specifications as identified in the Maintenance and Specifications
chapter. Failure to perform scheduled maintenance specific in this guide
will invalidate warranty coverage on parts affected by the lack of
maintenance. Be sure receipts for completed maintenance are kept with
the vehicle and confirmation of the work performed is always recorded in
this guide.
Your dealer has factory-trained technicians who can perform the required
maintenance using genuine Ford parts. They are committed to meeting
your service needs and to assuring your continuing satisfaction.
Protecting your investment
Maintenance is an investment that will pay dividends in the form of
improved reliability, durability and resale value. To ensure the proper
performance of your vehicle and its emission control systems, it is
imperative that scheduled maintenance be completed at the designated
intervals.
For your convenience, your vehicle is equipped with a message center
which determines the proper oil change service interval. You should
perform the engine oil change as indicated by the message center. The
message center will display ENGINE OIL CHANGE SOON or OIL
CHANGE REQUIRED to indicate when an oil change is needed. The
engine oil change service needs to be completed within two weeks or
500 miles (800 km) after the OIL CHANGE REQUIRED message is
displayed. Your oil change service interval can be up to one year or
10,000 miles (16,000 km). Reset your Intelligent Oil Life Monitor™ after
each engine oil and filter change; refer to the Instrument Cluster
chapter.
If your message center is prematurely reset or becomes inoperative, you
should perform the oil change interval at six months or 5,000 miles
(8,000 km) from your last oil change.
Note: Vehicles equipped with a 6.2L engine do not have a message
center with this feature; refer to the 7,500 mile (12,000 km)
maintenance schedule for oil change service intervals.
431

2011 F-150 (f12)

Owners Guide, 3rd Printing
USA (fus)
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
 Scheduled Maintenance
Your vehicle is very sophisticated and built with multiple complex
performance systems. Every manufacturer develops these systems using
different specifications and performance features. That’s why it’s
important to rely upon your dealership to properly diagnose and repair
your vehicle.
Ford Motor Company has recommended maintenance intervals for
various parts and component systems based upon engineering testing.
Ford Motor Company relies upon this testing to determine the most
appropriate mileage for replacement of oils and fluids to protect your
vehicle at the lowest overall cost to you and recommends against
maintenance schedules that deviate from the scheduled maintenance
information.
Ford strongly recommends the use of genuine Ford replacement parts.
Parts other than Ford, Motorcraft威 or Ford-authorized remanufactured
parts that are used for maintenance replacement or for the service of
components affecting emission control must be equivalent to genuine
Ford Motor Company parts in performance and durability. It is the
owner’s responsibility to determine the equivalency of such parts. Please
consult your Warranty Guide for complete warranty information.
Chemicals or additives not approved by Ford are not required for factory
recommended maintenance. In fact, Ford Motor Company recommends
against the use of such additive products unless specifically
recommended by Ford for a particular application.
Oils, fluids and flushing
In many cases, fluid discoloration is a normal operating characteristic
and, by itself, does not necessarily indicate a concern or that the fluid
needs to be changed. However, discolored fluids that also show signs of
overheating and/or foreign material contamination should be inspected
immediately by a qualified expert such as the factory-trained technicians
at your dealership. Your vehicle’s oils and fluids should be changed at the
specified intervals or in conjunction with a repair. Flushing is a viable
way to change fluid for many vehicle sub-systems during scheduled
maintenance. It is critical that systems are flushed only with new fluid
that is the same as that required to fill and operate the system, or using
a Ford-approved flushing chemical.
Genuine Ford parts and service
When planning your maintenance services, consider your dealership for
all your vehicle’s needs.
There are a lot of reasons why visiting your dealership for all your
service needs is a great way to help keep your vehicle running great.
432

2011 F-150 (f12)

Owners Guide, 3rd Printing
USA (fus)
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
 Scheduled Maintenance
Convenience
Many dealerships have extended evening and Saturday hours to make
your service visit more convenient. How’s that for quality service?
Factory-trained technicians
Service technicians participate in extensive factory-sponsored
certification training to help them become experts on the operation of
your vehicle. Ask your dealership about the training and certification
their technicians have received.
Genuine Ford and Motorcraft姞 replacement parts
Dealerships stock Ford and Motorcraft威 branded replacement parts.
These parts meet or exceed Ford Motor Company’s specifications, and
we stand behind them. Parts installed at your dealership carry a
nationwide, 12 month/12,000 mile (20,000 km) parts and labor limited
warranty. Your dealer can give you details.
Value shopping for your vehicle’s maintenance needs
Your dealership recognizes the competitive landscape of maintenance and
light repair automotive services. With factory-trained technicians, and
one-stop service from routine maintenance like oil changes and tire
rotations to repairs like brake service, check out the value your dealers
can offer.
Owner checks and services
Certain basic maintenance checks and inspections should be performed
by the owner or a service technician at the intervals indicated. Service
information and supporting specifications are provided in this owner’s
guide.
Any adverse condition should be brought to the attention of your dealer
or qualified service technician as soon as possible for the proper service
advice. The owner maintenance service checks are generally not covered
by warranties so you may be charged for labor, parts or fluids used.

433

2011 F-150 (f12)

Owners Guide, 3rd Printing
USA (fus)
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
 Scheduled Maintenance

Engine oil/coolant change intervals – 3.5L, 3.7L and 5.0L engines

Engine oil As indicated by the message center: do not
exceed one year or 10,000 miles (16,000 km)
Engine coolant, 6 years or 100,000 miles (160,000 km)
initial change (whichever comes first)
Engine coolant, after Every 3 years or 50,000 miles (80,000 km)
initial change
Engine oil/coolant change intervals – 6.2L engine
Engine oil 6 months or 7,500 miles (12,000 km)
(whichever comes first)
Engine coolant, 6 years or 105,000 miles (168,000 km)
initial change (whichever comes first)
Engine coolant, after Every 3 years or 45,000 miles (72,000 km)
initial change
Check every month
Engine oil level
Function of all interior and exterior lights
Tires for wear and proper pressure, including spare
Windshield washer fluid level
Check every six months
Battery connections; clean if necessary
Body and door drain holes for obstructions; clean if necessary
Cooling system fluid level and coolant strength
Door weatherstrips for wear; lubricate if necessary
Hinges/latches/outside locks for proper operation; lubricate if necessary
Parking brake for proper operation
Safety belts and seat latches for wear and function
Safety warning lamps (brake, ABS, airbag, safety belt) for operation
Washer spray/wiper operation; clean or replace blades as necessary

434

2011 F-150 (f12)

Owners Guide, 3rd Printing
USA (fus)
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
 Scheduled Maintenance
Multi-point inspection
In order to keep your vehicle running right, it is important to have the
systems on your vehicle checked regularly. This can help identify
potential issues and prevent major problems. Ford Motor Company
recommends the following multi-point inspection be performed at every
scheduled maintenance interval to help ensure your vehicle keeps
running great.
Multi-point inspection – Recommended each visit
Accessory drive belt(s) Half-shaft dust boots (if equipped)
Battery performance Horn operation
Clutch operation (if equipped) Radiator, cooler, heater and A/C hoses
Engine air filter Suspension component for leaks or
damage
Exhaust system Steering and linkage
Exterior lamps and hazard Tires for wear and proper pressure,
warning system operation including spare
Fluid levels*; fill if necessary Windshield for cracks, chips or pits
For oil and fluid leaks Washer spray and wiper operation
*Brake, coolant recovery reservoir, manual and automatic transmission
(with an underhood dipstick), power steering (if equipped) and
window washer
Be sure to ask your dealership service advisor or technician about the
multi-point vehicle inspection. It’s a comprehensive way to perform a
thorough inspection of your vehicle. It’s your checklist that gives you
immediate feedback on the overall condition of your vehicle. You’ll know
what’s been checked, what’s okay, as well as those things that may
require future or immediate attention. The multi-point vehicle inspection
is one more way to keep your vehicle running great!

435

2011 F-150 (f12)

Owners Guide, 3rd Printing
USA (fus)
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
 Scheduled Maintenance

436

2011 F-150 (f12)

Owners Guide, 3rd Printing
USA (fus)
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
 Scheduled Maintenance
NORMAL SCHEDULED MAINTENANCE AND LOG
3.5L, 3.7L and 5.0L engines
For your convenience, your vehicle is equipped with a message center
which determines the proper oil change service interval. You should
perform the engine oil change as indicated by the message center. The
message center will display ENGINE OIL CHANGE SOON or OIL
CHANGE REQUIRED to indicate when an oil change is needed. The
engine oil change service needs to be completed within two weeks or
500 miles (800 km) after the OIL CHANGE REQUIRED message is
displayed. Your oil change service interval can be up to one year or
10,000 miles (16,000 km). Reset your Intelligent Oil Life Monitor™ after
each engine oil and filter change; refer to the Instrument Cluster
chapter.
If your message center is prematurely reset or becomes inoperative, you
should perform the oil change interval at six months or 5,000 miles
(8,000 km) from your last oil change.

437

2011 F-150 (f12)

Owners Guide, 3rd Printing
USA (fus)
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
 3.5L, 3.7L and 5.0L engines

438
Oil Change Service Interval* 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15

USA (fus)
Change engine oil and filter • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
Rotate tires, inspect tire wear and measure
• • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
tread depth

2011 F-150 (f12)

Inspect wheels and related components for
• • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
abnormal noise, wear, looseness or drag

I
Inspect front axle and U-joints; lubricate if

nfor
• • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
equipped with grease fittings (4WD vehicles)

mat
i
Owners Guide, 3rd Printing
Perform multi-point inspection (recommended) • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •

onPr
ovi
Inspect automatic transmission fluid level (if
equipped with dipstick); consult dealer for • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •

dedby:
Scheduled Maintenance

requirements
Inspect brake pads, shoes, rotors, drums, brake
• • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
linings, hoses and parking brake
Inspect engine cooling system concentration
• • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
and hoses
Inspect exhaust system and heat shields • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
Inspect half-shaft boots (if equipped) • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
Inspect steering linkage, ball joints, suspension,
tie-rod ends, driveshaft and U-joints; lubricate • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
if equipped with grease fittings
Inspect cabin air filter (if equipped) • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
*Oil change service intervals should be completed as indicated by the message center
Reset your Intelligent Oil Life Monitor™ after each engine oil and filter change; refer to the Instrument Cluster chapter
 Scheduled Maintenance
Perform the services noted in the following table at the specified
time/mileage (km) period either within 3,000 miles (4,800 km) of the
OIL CHANGE REQUIRED message appearing in the message center or
when the time/mileage (km) reading indicates service is due.
Example #1: The OIL CHANGE REQUIRED message comes on at
28,751 miles (46,270 km); perform the 30,000 mile (48,000 km)
automatic transmission fluid replacement.
Example #2: The OIL CHANGE REQUIRED message has not come on
but the odometer reads 30,000 miles (48,000 km); perform the engine air
filter replacement. (i.e., Intelligent Oil Life Monitor™ was reset at
25,000 miles [40,000 km].)
Every 20,000 miles Replace cabin air filter (if equipped)
(32,000 km)
Every 30,000 miles Replace climate-controlled seat filter (if
(48,000 km) equipped)
Replace engine air filter
Every 60,000 miles Change automatic transmission fluid and filter on
(96,000 km) 5–speed TorqShift威 transmission; consult dealer
for requirements
Replace front wheel bearing grease/grease seal if
non-sealed bearings are used (2WD vehicles)
Every 100,000 miles Change engine coolant1
(160,000 km) Change manual transmission fluid (except
Escape)
Change rear axle fluid (Dana axles only)
Replace spark plugs
Inspect accessory drive belt(s)2

439

2011 F-150 (f12)

Owners Guide, 3rd Printing
USA (fus)
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
 Scheduled Maintenance

Every 150,000 miles Change automatic transmission fluid and filter

(240,000 km) (except 5–speed TorqShift威 transmission) (filter
not required on 6F35, 6F50, DPS6 and AWF-21
transmissions); consult dealer for requirements
Change front axle fluid (4WD vehicles)
Change manual transmission fluid (Escape)
Change rear axle fluid (RWD vehicles)
Replace accessory drive belt(s) if not replaced
within the last 100,000 miles (160,000 km)
Replace front wheel bearings and seals if
non-sealed bearings are used (2WD vehicles)
1
Initial replacement at 100,000 miles (160,000 km) or 72 months; every
50,000 miles (80,000 km) or 36 months thereafter
2
Perform a follow-up inspection at 120,000 miles (192,000 km)

6.2L engine
The following section contains the “Normal Schedule”. This schedule is
presented at specific mileage (kilometer) intervals with exceptions
noted.

440

2011 F-150 (f12)

Owners Guide, 3rd Printing
USA (fus)
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
 6.2L engine
Miles (x 1,000)* 7.5 15 22.5 30 37.5 45 52.5 60 67.5 75
Kilometers (x 1,000)* 12 24 36 48 60 72 84 96 108 120

USA (fus)
Months* 6 12 18 24 30 36 42 48 54 60
Change engine oil and filter • • • • • • • • • •
Rotate tires, inspect tire wear and measure tread depth** • • • • • • • • • •

2011 F-150 (f12)

Inspect wheels and related components for abnormal noise, wear,
• • • • • • • • • •
looseness or drag

I
Perform multi-point inspection (recommended) • • • • • • • • • •

nfor
Inspect automatic transmission fluid level (if equipped with

mat
i
• • • • •
dipstick); consult dealer for requirements

Owners Guide, 3rd Printing

onPr
Inspect brake pads, shoes, rotors, drums, brake linings, hoses and

ovi
• • • • •
parking brake

dedby:
Inspect engine cooling system for strength and hoses • • • • •
Inspect exhaust system and heat shields • • • • •
Inspect front axle and U-joints; lubricate if equipped with grease
• • • • •
fittings (4WD vehicles)
Inspect half-shaft boots (if equipped) • • • • •
Inspect steering linkage, ball joints, suspension, tie-rod ends,
• • • • •
driveshaft and U-joints; lubricate if equipped with grease fittings
Inspect cabin air filter (if equipped) • • • • •
* Whichever comes first
** SVT Raptor vehicles have specific tire rotation intervals; refer to the Maintenance chapter of the supplement
Reset your oil life monitoring system after each engine oil and filter change; refer to the Instrument Cluster chapter
Scheduled Maintenance

441
 6.2L engine

442
Miles (x 1,000)* 82.5 90 97.5 105 112.5 120 127.5 135 142.5 150

USA (fus)
Kilometers (x 1,000)* 132 144 156 168 180 192 204 216 228 240
Months* 66 72 78 84 90 96 102 108 114 120

2011 F-150 (f12)

Change engine oil and filter • • • • • • • • • •
Rotate tires, inspect tire wear and measure tread depth** • • • • • • • • • •
Inspect wheels and related components for abnormal noise,

I
• • • • • • • • • •

nf
wear, looseness or drag

or
mat
Perform multi-point inspection (recommended)

i
• • • • • • • • • •

Owners Guide, 3rd Printing

Inspect automatic transmission fluid level (if equipped with

onPr
• • • • •

ovi
dipstick); consult dealer for requirements
Inspect brake pads, shoes, rotors, drums, brake linings, hoses

dedby:
Scheduled Maintenance

• • • • •
and parking brake
Inspect engine cooling system for strength and hoses • • • • •
Inspect exhaust system and heat shields • • • • •
Inspect front axle and U-joints; lubricate if equipped with
• • • • •
grease fittings (4WD vehicles)
Inspect half-shaft boots (if equipped) • • • • •
Inspect steering linkage, ball joints, suspension, tie-rod ends,
driveshaft and U-joints; lubricate if equipped with grease • • • • •
fittings
Inspect cabin air filter (if equipped) • • • • •
* Whichever comes first
** SVT Raptor vehicles have specific tire rotation intervals; refer to the Maintenance chapter of the supplement
Reset your oil life monitoring system after each engine oil and filter change; refer to the Instrument Cluster chapter
 Scheduled Maintenance

Every 15,000 miles Replace cabin air filter (if equipped)

(24,000 km)
Every 30,000 miles Replace climate-controlled seat filter (if
(48,000 km) equipped)
Replace engine air filter
Replace fuel filter (Ranger)
Every 60,000 miles Change automatic transmission fluid and filter on
(96,000 km) 5–speed TorqShift威 transmission; consult dealer
for requirements
Replace front wheel bearing grease/grease seal if
non-sealed bearings are used (2WD vehicles)
Every 105,000 miles Change engine coolant1
(168,000 km) Change manual transmission fluid (except
Escape)
Change rear axle fluid (Dana axles)
Replace spark plugs
Inspect accessory drive belt(s)2
Every 150,000 miles Change automatic transmission fluid and filter
(240,000 km) (except 5–speed TorqShift威 transmission) (filter
not required on 6F35, 6F50, DPS6 and AWF-21
transmissions); consult dealer for requirements
Change front axle fluid (4WD vehicles)
Change manual transmission fluid (Escape)
Change rear axle fluid (RWD vehicles)
Change transfer case fluid (4WD vehicles)
Replace accessory drive belt(s) if not replaced
within the last 100,000 miles (160,000 km)
Replace front wheel bearings and seals if
non-sealed bearings are used (2WD vehicles)
1
Initial replacement at 105,000 miles (168,000 km) or 72 months; every
45,000 miles (72,000 km) or 36 months thereafter
2
Perform a follow-up inspection at 120,000 miles (192,000 km)

443

2011 F-150 (f12)

Owners Guide, 3rd Printing
USA (fus)
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
 Scheduled Maintenance
Maintenance schedule log
DEALER VALIDATION: DEALER VALIDATION:

P&A CODE: P&A CODE:

RO#: HOURS: RO#: HOURS:
DATE: MILEAGE: DATE: MILEAGE:
DEALER VALIDATION: DEALER VALIDATION:

P&A CODE: P&A CODE:

RO#: HOURS: RO#: HOURS:
DATE: MILEAGE: DATE: MILEAGE:
DEALER VALIDATION: DEALER VALIDATION:

P&A CODE: P&A CODE:

RO#: HOURS: RO#: HOURS:
DATE: MILEAGE: DATE: MILEAGE:
DEALER VALIDATION: DEALER VALIDATION:

P&A CODE: P&A CODE:

RO#: HOURS: RO#: HOURS:
DATE: MILEAGE: DATE: MILEAGE:
DEALER VALIDATION: DEALER VALIDATION:

P&A CODE: P&A CODE:

RO#: HOURS: RO#: HOURS:
DATE: MILEAGE: DATE: MILEAGE:

444

2011 F-150 (f12)

Owners Guide, 3rd Printing
USA (fus)
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
 Scheduled Maintenance
DEALER VALIDATION: DEALER VALIDATION:

P&A CODE: P&A CODE:

RO#: HOURS: RO#: HOURS:
DATE: MILEAGE: DATE: MILEAGE:
DEALER VALIDATION: DEALER VALIDATION:

P&A CODE: P&A CODE:

RO#: HOURS: RO#: HOURS:
DATE: MILEAGE: DATE: MILEAGE:
DEALER VALIDATION: DEALER VALIDATION:

P&A CODE: P&A CODE:

RO#: HOURS: RO#: HOURS:
DATE: MILEAGE: DATE: MILEAGE:
DEALER VALIDATION: DEALER VALIDATION:

P&A CODE: P&A CODE:

RO#: HOURS: RO#: HOURS:
DATE: MILEAGE: DATE: MILEAGE:
DEALER VALIDATION: DEALER VALIDATION:

P&A CODE: P&A CODE:

RO#: HOURS: RO#: HOURS:
DATE: MILEAGE: DATE: MILEAGE:

445

2011 F-150 (f12)

Owners Guide, 3rd Printing
USA (fus)
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
 Scheduled Maintenance
DEALER VALIDATION: DEALER VALIDATION:

P&A CODE: P&A CODE:

RO#: HOURS: RO#: HOURS:
DATE: MILEAGE: DATE: MILEAGE:
DEALER VALIDATION: DEALER VALIDATION:

P&A CODE: P&A CODE:

RO#: HOURS: RO#: HOURS:
DATE: MILEAGE: DATE: MILEAGE:
DEALER VALIDATION: DEALER VALIDATION:

P&A CODE: P&A CODE:

RO#: HOURS: RO#: HOURS:
DATE: MILEAGE: DATE: MILEAGE:
DEALER VALIDATION: DEALER VALIDATION:

P&A CODE: P&A CODE:

RO#: HOURS: RO#: HOURS:
DATE: MILEAGE: DATE: MILEAGE:
DEALER VALIDATION: DEALER VALIDATION:

P&A CODE: P&A CODE:

RO#: HOURS: RO#: HOURS:
DATE: MILEAGE: DATE: MILEAGE:

446

2011 F-150 (f12)

Owners Guide, 3rd Printing
USA (fus)
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
 Scheduled Maintenance
SPECIAL OPERATING CONDITIONS - 3.5L, 3.7L AND 5.0L ENGINES
If you operate your vehicle primarily in one of the more demanding
conditions listed below, you will need to have some items maintained
more frequently. If you only occasionally operate your vehicle under
these conditions, it is not necessary to perform the additional
maintenance. For specific recommendations, see your dealership service
advisor or technician.
Towing a trailer or using a camper or car-top carrier
As required Change engine oil and filter as indicated by
message center and perform services listed in
Normal Scheduled Maintenance chart
Inspect frequently, Inspect and lubricate U-joints
service as required See axle maintenance items under Exceptions
Every 30,000 miles Change automatic transmission fluid (except
(48,000 km) 6R80 and TorqShift威 transmissions)
Replace front wheel bearing grease/grease seals if
non-sealed bearings are used (2WD vehicles)
Every 60,000 miles Change transfer case fluid (4WD vehicles)
(96,000 km)
Perform the services noted in the preceding table at the specified
time/mileage (km) period either within 3,000 miles (4,800 km) of the
OIL CHANGE REQUIRED message appearing in the message center or
when the time/mileage (km) reading indicates service is due.
Example #1: The OIL CHANGE REQUIRED message comes on at
28,751 miles (46,270 km); perform the 30,000 mile (48,000 km)
automatic transmission fluid replacement.
Example #2: The OIL CHANGE REQUIRED message has not come on
but the odometer reads 30,000 miles (48,000 km); perform the engine air
filter replacement. (i.e., Intelligent Oil Life Monitor™ was reset at
25,000 miles [40,000 km].)

447

2011 F-150 (f12)

Owners Guide, 3rd Printing
USA (fus)
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
 Scheduled Maintenance

Extensive idling and/or low-speed driving for long distances as

in heavy commercial use such as delivery, taxi, patrol car or
livery
As required Change engine oil and filter as indicated by
message center and perform services listed in
Normal Scheduled Maintenance chart
Inspect frequently, Replace cabin air filter (if equipped)
service as required Replace engine air filter
Every 30,000 miles Change automatic transmission fluid (except
(48,000 km) 6R80 and TorqShift威 transmissions)
Replace front wheel bearing grease/grease seals if
non-sealed bearings are used (2WD vehicles)
Every 60,000 miles Change transfer case fluid (4WD vehicles)
(96,000 km) Replace spark plugs
Perform the services noted in the preceding table at the specified
time/mileage (km) period either within 3,000 miles (4,800 km) of the
OIL CHANGE REQUIRED message appearing in the message center or
when the time/mileage (km) reading indicates service is due.
Example #1: The OIL CHANGE REQUIRED message comes on at
28,751 miles (46,270 km); perform the 30,000 mile (48,000 km)
automatic transmission fluid replacement.
Example #2: The OIL CHANGE REQUIRED message has not come on
but the odometer reads 30,000 miles (48,000 km); perform the engine air
filter replacement. (i.e., Intelligent Oil Life Monitor™ was reset at
25,000 miles [40,000 km].)
Operating in dusty conditions such as unpaved or dusty roads
Inspect frequently, Replace cabin air filter (if equipped)
service as required Replace engine air filter
Every 5,000 miles Change engine oil and filter
(8,000 km) or Inspect wheels and related components for
6 months abnormal noise, wear, looseness or drag
Rotate tires, inspect tires for wear and measure
tread depth

448

2011 F-150 (f12)

Owners Guide, 3rd Printing
USA (fus)
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
 Scheduled Maintenance

Operating in dusty conditions such as unpaved or dusty roads

Every 30,000 miles Change automatic transmission fluid (except
(48,000 km) 6R80 and TorqShift威 transmissions)
Replace front wheel bearing grease/grease seals if
non-sealed bearings are used (2WD vehicles)
Every 60,000 miles Change transfer case fluid (4WD vehicles)
(96,000 km)
Reset your Intelligent Oil Life Monitor™ after each engine oil and filter
change; refer to the Instrument Cluster chapter.
Off-road operation
Inspect frequently, Inspect steering linkage, ball joints and U-joints;
service as required lubricate if equipped with grease fittings
Replace cabin air filter (if equipped)
Replace engine air filter
Every 5,000 miles Change engine oil and filter
(8,000 km) or Inspect wheels and related components for
6 months abnormal noise, wear, looseness or drag
Rotate tires, inspect tires for wear and measure
tread depth
Every 30,000 miles Change automatic transmission fluid (except
(48,000 km) 6R80 and TorqShift威 transmissions)
Replace front wheel bearing grease/grease seals if
non-sealed bearings are used (2WD vehicles)
Every 60,000 miles Change transfer case fluid (4WD vehicles)
(96,000 km)
Reset your Intelligent Oil Life Monitor™ after each engine oil and filter
change; refer to the Instrument Cluster chapter.
Exclusive use of E85 (Flex Fuel Vehicles only)
Every oil change If ran exclusively on E85, fill the fuel tank full
interval with regular unleaded fuel

449

2011 F-150 (f12)

Owners Guide, 3rd Printing
USA (fus)
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
 Scheduled Maintenance
SPECIAL OPERATING CONDITIONS - 6.2L ENGINE
If you operate your vehicle primarily in one of the more demanding
conditions listed below, you will need to have some items maintained
more frequently. If you only occasionally operate your vehicle under
these conditions, it is not necessary to perform the additional
maintenance. For specific recommendations, see your dealership service
advisor or technician.
Towing a trailer or using a camper or car-top carrier
Inspect frequently, Inspect and lubricate U-joints
service as required See axle maintenance items under Exceptions
Every 5,000 miles Inspect wheels and related components for
(8,000 km) abnormal noise, wear, looseness or drag
Rotate tires, inspect tires for wear and measure
tread depth
Every 5,000 miles Change engine oil and filter
(8,000 km) or Inspect and lubricate U-joints
6 months
Every 30,000 miles Change automatic transmission fluid (except
(48,000 km) 6R80 and TorqShift威 transmissions)
Replace front wheel bearing grease/grease seals if
non-sealed bearings are used (2WD vehicles)
Every 60,000 miles Change transfer case fluid (4WD vehicles)
(96,000 km)
Extensive idling and/or low-speed driving for long distances as
in heavy commercial use such as delivery, taxi, patrol car or
livery
Inspect frequently, Replace cabin air filter (if equipped)
service as required Replace engine air filter
Every 5,000 miles Inspect brake system
(8,000 km) Inspect wheels and related components for
abnormal noise, wear, looseness or drag
Lubricate control arm and steering ball joints if
equipped with grease fittings
Rotate tires, inspect tires for wear and measure
tread depth
450

2011 F-150 (f12)

Owners Guide, 3rd Printing
USA (fus)
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
 Scheduled Maintenance

Extensive idling and/or low-speed driving for long distances as

in heavy commercial use such as delivery, taxi, patrol car or
livery
Every 5,000 miles Change engine oil and filter
(8,000 km) or
6 months
Every 5,000 miles Change automatic transmission fluid (except
(8,000 km), 6R80 and TorqShift威 transmissions)
6 months or Replace front wheel bearing grease/grease seals if
200 hours of engine non-sealed bearings are used (2WD vehicles)
operation
Every 30,000 miles Change automatic transmission fluid (except
(48,000 km) 6R80 and TorqShift威 transmissions)
Replace front wheel bearing grease/grease seals if
non-sealed bearings are used (2WD vehicles)
Every 60,000 miles Change transfer case fluid (4WD vehicles)
(96,000 km) Replace spark plugs
Operating in dusty conditions such as unpaved or dusty roads
Inspect frequently, Replace cabin air filter (if equipped)
service as required Replace engine air filter
Every 5,000 miles Inspect the wheels and related components for
(8,000 km) abnormal noise, wear, looseness or drag
Rotate tires, inspect tires for wear and measure
tread depth
Every 5,000 miles Change engine oil and filter
(8,000 km) or Inspect and lubricate U-joints
6 months
Every 30,000 miles Change automatic transmission fluid (except
(48,000 km) 6R80 and TorqShift威 transmissions)
Replace front wheel bearing grease/grease seals if
non-sealed bearings are used (2WD vehicles)
Every 60,000 miles Change transfer case fluid (4WD vehicles)
(96,000 km)

451

2011 F-150 (f12)

Owners Guide, 3rd Printing
USA (fus)
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
 Scheduled Maintenance

Off-road operation
Inspect frequently, Inspect steering linkage, ball joints and U-joints;
service as required lubricate if equipped with grease fittings
Replace cabin air filter (if equipped)
Replace engine air filter
Every 5,000 miles Change engine oil and filter
(8,000 km) or Inspect wheels and related components for
6 months abnormal noise, wear, looseness or drag
Rotate tires, inspect tires for wear and measure
tread depth
Every 30,000 miles Change automatic transmission fluid (except
(48,000 km) 6R80 and TorqShift威 transmissions)
Replace front wheel bearing grease/grease seals if
non-sealed bearings are used (2WD vehicles)
Every 60,000 miles Change transfer case fluid (4WD vehicles)
(96,000 km)
Exclusive use of E85 (Flex Fuel Vehicles only)
Every oil change If ran exclusively on E85, fill the fuel tank full
interval with regular unleaded fuel

452

2011 F-150 (f12)

Owners Guide, 3rd Printing
USA (fus)
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
 Scheduled Maintenance
Special operating condition log
DEALER VALIDATION: DEALER VALIDATION:

P&A CODE: P&A CODE:

RO#: HOURS: RO#: HOURS:
DATE: MILEAGE: DATE: MILEAGE:
DEALER VALIDATION: DEALER VALIDATION:

P&A CODE: P&A CODE:

RO#: HOURS: RO#: HOURS:
DATE: MILEAGE: DATE: MILEAGE:
DEALER VALIDATION: DEALER VALIDATION:

P&A CODE: P&A CODE:

RO#: HOURS: RO#: HOURS:
DATE: MILEAGE: DATE: MILEAGE:
DEALER VALIDATION: DEALER VALIDATION:

P&A CODE: P&A CODE:

RO#: HOURS: RO#: HOURS:
DATE: MILEAGE: DATE: MILEAGE:
DEALER VALIDATION: DEALER VALIDATION:

P&A CODE: P&A CODE:

RO#: HOURS: RO#: HOURS:
DATE: MILEAGE: DATE: MILEAGE:

453

2011 F-150 (f12)

Owners Guide, 3rd Printing
USA (fus)
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
 Scheduled Maintenance
DEALER VALIDATION: DEALER VALIDATION:

P&A CODE: P&A CODE:

RO#: HOURS: RO#: HOURS:
DATE: MILEAGE: DATE: MILEAGE:
DEALER VALIDATION: DEALER VALIDATION:

P&A CODE: P&A CODE:

RO#: HOURS: RO#: HOURS:
DATE: MILEAGE: DATE: MILEAGE:
DEALER VALIDATION: DEALER VALIDATION:

P&A CODE: P&A CODE:

RO#: HOURS: RO#: HOURS:
DATE: MILEAGE: DATE: MILEAGE:
DEALER VALIDATION: DEALER VALIDATION:

P&A CODE: P&A CODE:

RO#: HOURS: RO#: HOURS:
DATE: MILEAGE: DATE: MILEAGE:
DEALER VALIDATION: DEALER VALIDATION:

P&A CODE: P&A CODE:

RO#: HOURS: RO#: HOURS:
DATE: MILEAGE: DATE: MILEAGE:

454

2011 F-150 (f12)

Owners Guide, 3rd Printing
USA (fus)
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
 Scheduled Maintenance
EXCEPTIONS
There are several exceptions to the Normal Schedule. They are listed
below:
Normal vehicle axle maintenance: Rear axles and power take-off
(PTO) units with synthetic fluid and light-duty trucks equipped with
Ford-design axles are lubricated for life; do not check or change fluid
unless a leak is suspected, service is required or the assembly has been
submerged in water. During long periods of trailer towing with outside
temperatures above 70°F (21°C) and at wide-open throttle for long
periods above 45 mph (72 km/h), non-synthetic rear axle fluids should
be changed every 3,000 miles (4,800 km) or three months, whichever
comes first. This interval can be waived if the axle is filled with 75W140
synthetic gear fluid meeting Ford specification WSL-M2C192-A, part
number F1TZ-19580-B or equivalent. Add friction modifier XL-3
(EST-M2C118-A) or equivalent for complete refill of Traction-Lok rear
axles (refer to Maintenance product specifications and capacities in
the Maintenance and Specifications chapter for details).
Police/Taxi/Livery vehicle axle maintenance: Change rear axle fluid
every 100,000 miles (160,000 km). Rear axle fluid change may be waived
if the axle was filled with 75W140 synthetic gear fluid meeting Ford
specification WSL-M2C192-A, part number FITZ-19580-B or equivalent.
Add four ounces (118 mL) of additive friction modifier XL-3
(EST-M2C118-A) or equivalent for complete refill of Traction-Lok rear
axles. The axle fluid should be changed anytime the axle has been
submerged in water.
E–450 and F–450/550 axle maintenance: Change rear axle fluid every
100,000 miles (160,000 km) under normal driving conditions. For
vehicles operated at or near maximum Gross Vehicle Weights, the rear
axle fluid should be changed every 50,000 miles (80,000 km). In
addition, this 50,000 mile (80,000 km) schedule should be observed
when the vehicles are operated under the Special Operating Conditions.
California fuel filter replacement: If the vehicle is registered in
California, the California Air Resources Board has determined that the
failure to perform this maintenance item will not nullify the emission
warranty or limit recall liability prior to the completion of the vehicle’s
useful life. Ford Motor Company, however, urges you to have all
recommended maintenance services performed at the specified intervals
and to record all vehicle service.

455

2011 F-150 (f12)

Owners Guide, 3rd Printing
USA (fus)
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
 Scheduled Maintenance
Class A Motorhome: Change brake fluid every two years.
Hot climate oil change intervals: If operating conditions are normal
and you drive your vehicle under typical, everyday conditions and you
are using an API performance category oil of SL or later (for example
SM, etc.) then you can follow the 7,500 mile (12,000 km) normal service
oil change intervals schedule. Vehicles operating in the Middle East,
North Africa, Sub-Saharan Africa or locations with similar climates must
follow the oil change interval of 3,000 mile (4,800 km) if the owner is
using oils defined by the American Petroleum Institute (API)
performance category of API SK or earlier (for example SJ, etc).
Edge/MKX AWD only – vehicles operating off-road in sand during high
ambient temperatures must replace the AWD PTU (All-wheel drive
Power Transfer Unit) lube every 20,000 miles (32,000 km).
Engine air filter & cabin air filter replacement: Engine air filter and
cabin air filter life is dependent on exposure to dusty and dirty
conditions. Vehicles operated in these conditions will require frequent
inspection and replacement of the engine air filter and cabin air filter.

ENGINE COOLANT CHANGE RECORD

3.5L, 3.7L and 5.0L engines
Initial change 6 years or 100,000 miles (160,000 km)
(whichever comes first)
After initial change Every 3 years or 50,000 miles (80,000 km)
6.2L engine
Initial change 6 years or 105,000 miles (168,000 km)
(whichever comes first)
After initial change Every 3 years or 45,000 miles (72,000 km)

456

2011 F-150 (f12)

Owners Guide, 3rd Printing
USA (fus)
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
 Scheduled Maintenance
Engine coolant change log
DEALER VALIDATION: DEALER VALIDATION:

P&A CODE: P&A CODE:

RO#: HOURS: RO#: HOURS:
DATE: MILEAGE: DATE: MILEAGE:
DEALER VALIDATION: DEALER VALIDATION:

P&A CODE: P&A CODE:

RO#: HOURS: RO#: HOURS:
DATE: MILEAGE: DATE: MILEAGE:
DEALER VALIDATION: DEALER VALIDATION:

P&A CODE: P&A CODE:

RO#: HOURS: RO#: HOURS:
DATE: MILEAGE: DATE: MILEAGE:

457

2011 F-150 (f12)

Owners Guide, 3rd Printing
USA (fus)
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
 Index
A fluid, refill capacities ..............415
fluid, specification ..................415
Accessory delay ........................106 Selectshift (SST) ....................302
AdvanceTrac ..............................286 Auxiliary input jack (Line in) ....60
Airbag supplemental restraint
system ................194–195, 203, 206 Axle
and child safety seats ............197 lubricant specifications ..........415
description ..............195, 203, 206 refill capacities ........................415
disposal ....................................209
driver airbag ....195, 198, 204, 207 B
indicator light .........202, 205, 208
operation .........195, 198, 204, 207 Battery .......................................383
passenger
airbag ...............195, 198, 204, 207 acid, treating emergencies .....383
side airbag ...............................203 jumping a disabled battery ....348
maintenance-free ....................383
Air cleaner filter .......408–409, 414 replacement, specifications ...414
Air conditioning ........69, 72, 74, 77 servicing ..................................383
manual heating and air Bed extender ............................128
conditioning system .................69
Belt-Minder威 .............................190
Ambient mood/lighting ...............88 deactivating/activating the
Ambulance packages ....................6 Belt-Minder威 ...........................192
AM/FM .........................................51 Blind spot mirror ......................311
Antifreeze Booster seats .............................228
(see Engine coolant) ................386 Brakes ........................................284
Anti-lock brake system anti-lock ...........................284–285
(see Brakes) ......................284–285 anti-lock brake system (ABS)
Anti-theft system ..............158, 160 warning light ...........................285
arming the system ..........158, 160 fluid, checking and adding ....407
disarming a triggered fluid, refill capacities ..............415
system .....................................161 fluid, specifications .................415
triggering .................................161 lubricant specifications ..........415
parking ....................................285
Armrests ....................................166 shift interlock ..................295, 298
Audio system (see Radio) ...49, 51 trailer .......................................270
Automatic transmission Bulbs ............................................89
driving an automatic
overdrive .................................299 C
fluid, adding ............................407
fluid, checking ........................407 Capacities for refilling fluids ....415
458

2011 F-150 (f12)

Owners Guide, 3rd Printing
USA (fus)
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
 Index
Car2U威 Home Automation Coolant
System .......................................117 checking and adding ..............386
refill capacities ................389, 415
Cargo management system ......130 specifications ..........................415
CD ................................................51 Cruise control
Cell phone use ............................10 (see Speed control) ..................111
Changing a tire .........................339 Customer Assistance ................327
Ford Extended Service
Child safety seats ......................214 Plan ..................................427, 430
attaching with tether straps ..223 Getting assistance outside the
in front seat ....................215, 221 U.S. and Canada .....................358
in rear seat ......................215, 221 Getting roadside assistance ...327
LATCH .....................................221 Getting the service you
recommendations ...................212 need .........................................354
Child safety seats - booster Ordering additional owner’s
seats ...........................................228 literature .................................360
Utilizing the
Cleaning your vehicle Mediation/Arbitration
engine compartment ..............364 Program ...................................358
instrument panel ............367–368
interior .....................................369 D
plastic parts ............................366
safety belts ..............................369 Daytime running lamps
washing ....................................362 (see Lamps) ................................84
waxing .....................................363
wheels ......................................363 Defrost
wiper blades ............................366 rear window and rearview
mirrors ...........................72, 74, 77
Climate control windshield .....................72, 74, 77
(see Air conditioning or
Heating) .....................69, 72, 74, 77 Dipstick
automatic transmission
Clock ......................................51–52 fluid ..........................................407
Clock adjust engine oil .................................380
AM/FM Stereo ...........................51 Driving under special
Compass, electronic ....................99 conditions ..................303, 320, 323
calibration ...............................100 sand .........................................322
set zone adjustment ...............100 snow and ice ...........................324
through water .................322, 326
Console ........................................99
Controls E
power seat ...............................168
steering column ......................114 Electronic message center ...21, 32
459

2011 F-150 (f12)

Owners Guide, 3rd Printing
USA (fus)
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
 Index
Emergencies, roadside calculating fuel
jump-starting ..........................348 economy ............................24, 401
running out of fuel .........348, 399 cap ...........................................396
Emission control system ..........404 capacity ...................................415
choosing the right fuel ...........397
Engine ................................419–420 detergent in fuel .....................399
cleaning ...................................364
coolant .....................................386 filler funnel .............................399
fail-safe cooling .......................390 filling your vehicle with
idle speed control ...................383 fuel ...........................393, 396, 401
lubrication specifications .......415 filter, specifications ........393, 414
refill capacities ........................415 fuel pump shut-off ..................328
service points ..................375–378 improving fuel economy ........401
octane rating ...397–398, 419–420
Engine block heater .................282 quality ......................................398
Engine oil ..................................380 running out of fuel .........348, 399
checking and adding ..............380 safety information relating to
dipstick ....................................380 automotive fuels .....................393
filter, specifications ................414 Fuel - flex fuel vehicle
refill capacities ........................415 (FFV) .........................393, 397–398
specifications ..........................415
Fuses ..................................329–330
Event data recording ....................8
Exhaust fumes ..........................282 G

F Garage door opener ..................116

Gas cap (see Fuel cap) ............396
Fail safe cooling ........................390
Gas mileage
Fleet MyKey programming ......137 (see Fuel economy) .................401
Flexible Fuel Vehicle (FFV) ....393 Gauges .........................................20
Floor mats .................................123
Fluid capacities .........................415 H
Fog lamps ....................................83 Hazard flashers .........................328
Four-Wheel Drive vehicles .......312 Headlamps ...................................83
driving off road .......................318 aiming ........................................85
electronic shift ........................314 autolamp system .......................83
indicator light .........................312 bulb specifications ....................89
lever operated shift ................313 daytime running lights .............84
preparing to drive your flash to pass ..............................84
vehicle .....................................295 high beam .................................84
Fuel ............................................393 replacing bulbs .........................90
460

2011 F-150 (f12)

Owners Guide, 3rd Printing
USA (fus)
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
 Index
turning on and off ....................83 bulb replacement
Heating specifications chart ..................89
daytime running light ...............84
heating and air conditioning fog lamps ...................................83
system .....................69, 72, 74, 77 headlamps .................................83
Hood ..........................................374 headlamps, flash to pass ..........84
interior lamps ...........................87
I replacing bulbs ...................90, 94
LATCH anchors .........................221
Ignition .......................278, 419–420
Lights, warning and indicator ....14
Illuminated visor mirror .............98 anti-lock brakes (ABS) ..........285
Infant seats Limited-slip axle .......................294
(see Safety seats) .....................214
Loading instructions .................263
Inspection/maintenance (I/M)
testing ........................................406 Load limits .................................256
Instrument panel Locks
cleaning ...........................367–368 autolock ...................................146
cluster ........................................14 childproof ................................149
doors ........................................145
J Lubricant specifications ...........415
Lug nuts ....................................347
Jack ............................................339
positioning ...............................339 Lumbar support, seats .....167–168
storage .....................................339
M
Jump-starting your vehicle ......348
Message center ...............21–22, 32
K english/metric button ...............26
system check button ................26
Keyless entry system warning messages ...............26, 41
autolock ...................................146
keypad .....................................156 Mirrors ...............................106–107
locking and unlocking doors ..157 automatic dimming rearview
programming entry code .......156 mirror ......................................106
fold away .................................108
Keys ...........................137, 158–159 heated ....................72, 74, 77, 108
positions of the ignition .........278 programmable memory ..........152
side view mirrors (power) .....107
L signal .......................................109
Lamps Moon roof ..................................115
autolamp system .......................83 Motorcraft威 parts ..............372, 414
461

2011 F-150 (f12)

Owners Guide, 3rd Printing
USA (fus)
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
 Index
MyKey ........................................137 R

N Radio ......................................49, 51
6-CD in dash .............................51
Navigation system .......................68
Rear heated seats .....................177
O Rear-view camera system .........306
Octane rating ....................397–398 Recommendations for
attaching safety restraints for
Oil (see Engine oil) ..................380 children ......................................212
P Relays ........................................329
Remote entry system .......150–151
Parental MyKey illuminated entry ....................154
programming .............................137 locking/unlocking doors .........151
Parking brake ............................285 Remote start ...........................154
replacement/additional
Parts transmitters .............................153
(see Motorcraft威 parts) ...........414 replacing the batteries ...........152
Passenger Occupant Remote start .............................154
Classification Sensor .................180
Remote start climate
Pedals (see Power adjustable operation .....................................81
foot pedals) ...............................109
Reverse sensing system ...........304
Power adjustable foot pedals ...109
Roadside assistance ..................327
Power deployable running
boards ........................................110 S
Power distribution box
(see Fuses) .......................330, 333 Safety belts (see Safety
Power door locks ......................145 restraints) ..........178, 183–186, 189
Power mirrors ...........................107 Safety Canopy ...................204, 206
Power point ...............................101 Safety defects, reporting ..........361
Power steering ..........................292 Safety
fluid, checking and adding ....406 restraints ...........178, 183–187, 189
fluid, refill capacity ................415 Belt-Minder威 ...........................190
fluid, specifications .................415 Belt-Minder威,
deactivating/activating ...........192
Power Windows .........................103 extension assembly ................194
Preparing to drive your for adults .........................183–186
vehicle ........................................295 for children .............................209
462

2011 F-150 (f12)

Owners Guide, 3rd Printing
USA (fus)
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
 Index
Occupant Classification Starting a flex fuel vehicle .......281
Sensor ......................................180 Starting your
warning light and chime ........189 vehicle ........................278–279, 281
Safety restraints - LATCH jump starting ..........................348
anchors ......................................221 Steering wheel
Safety seats for children ..........214 controls ....................................114
Safety Compliance tilting ...................................96–97
Certification Label ....................421 Stereo
Satellite Radio .............................51 6-CD in dash .............................51
CD-MP3 .....................................51
Satellite Radio Information ........65
SYNC威 ..........................................68
Scheduled Maintenance Guide
Normal Scheduled T
Maintenance and Log .............437
Seats ..........................................162 Tailgate ......................................124
child safety seats ....................214
cleaning ...................................370 Tilt steering wheel ................96–97
climate control ............74, 77, 173 Tire Pressure Monitoring
easy access/easyout feature ..170 System (TPMS)
heated ........................72, 171, 177 Tires, Wheels and Loading ....249
memory seat ...................152, 170 Tires ...........................234–236, 339
SecuriCode keyless entry alignment ................................243
system ........................................156 care ..........................................239
SecuriLock passive anti-theft changing ..........................339, 343
system ................................158–159 checking the pressure ............239
inflating ...................................237
Servicing your vehicle ..............373 label .........................................248
Setting the clock ...................51–52 replacing ..................................240
AM/FM stereo ...........................51 rotating ....................................243
Snowplowing .................................6 safety practices .......................242
sidewall information ...............244
SOS Post Crash Alert ...............209 snow tires and chains ............255
Spark plugs, spare tire .................................339
specifications .............414, 419–420 terminology .............................236
tire grades ...............................235
Special notice treadwear ........................235, 239
ambulance conversions ..............6
utility-type vehicles ....................7 Towing .......................................264
recreational towing .................276
Specification chart, Trailer Brake
lubricants ...................................415 Controller-Integrated ..............270
Speed control ............................111 trailer towing ..........................264
463

2011 F-150 (f12)

Owners Guide, 3rd Printing
USA (fus)
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
 Index
Trailer Brake V
Controller-Integrated ................270
Transfer case Vehicle Identification Number
(VIN) ..........................................422
fluid checking .........................408
Vehicle loading ..........................256
Transmission .............................299
brake-shift interlock Ventilating your vehicle ...........282
(BSI) ................................295, 298
W
fluid, checking and adding
(automatic) .............................407 Warning lights (see Lights) .......14
fluid, refill capacities ..............415
Washer fluid ..............................379
lubricant specifications ..........415
Water, Driving through .............326
Turn signal ..................................86
Windows
power .......................................103
U
Windshield washer fluid and
Universal garage door opener ..116 wipers ..........................................95
checking and adding fluid .....379
USB port ......................................61 replacing wiper blades ...........379

464

2011 F-150 (f12)

Owners Guide, 3rd Printing
USA (fus)
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby: